Diving & ROV

specialists

Saturation diving handbook

Book 3 of 4
Bell procedures

Diving & ROV specialists is a branch of CCO ltd

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 1 of 318
 Page left blank intentionally

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 2 of 318
Diving & ROV Specialists
Tel: +66 857 277 123
52/2 moo 3 tambon Tarpo 65000 Phitsanulock - Thailand E mail: [email protected]

This document is the book number three of the ensemble of four books
constituting the “Saturation diving handbook” described underneath.

Books Description

The document describes the scope of saturation procedures, the

NORMAM 15 PLC saturation procedures, and some elements to
Book #1: Definition and elements consider when organising a saturation diving project such as the
for preparation necessary personnel, weather conditions, surface supports, systems of
communications, work procedures with ROV, supply chain to be in
place, etc.

Book #2: Gas supplies & This document describes safe practices and emergency procedures to
chamber management manage chambers and gas supplies for successful operations.

This document describes the main rules for the organization of safe bell
Book #3: Bell procedures
diving operations

This document indicates and explains accidents linked to saturation

Book #4: Diving accidents
diving operations and how to solve and avoid them.

February 2021 First publication

Modified points:
- 1.1.6 - Bailout systems
August 2021
- 1.2.7 - Maximum divers’ umbilical length and
selection of bailouts systems

Added:
September 2021 - 3.3.3 - surface standby diver
- 3.3.6 - Bell tapping code

This document has been generated by CCO ltd - 52/2 moo 3 tambon Tarpo 65000 Phitsanulok - THAILAND
The contents of this document are protected by a copyright and remains the property of CCO Ltd.
This handbook exists for the sole and explicit purpose to present guidelines which have been published by
competent bodies and which we consider as being relevant to commercial diving.
CCO Ltd is responsible for the administration and publication of this document. Please note that whilst every
effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of its contents, neither the authors, nor CCO Ltd will assume liability
for any use thereof.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 3 of 318
Diving & ROV Specialists
Tel: +66 857 277 123
52/2 moo 3 tambon Tarpo 65000 Phitsanulock - Thailand E mail: [email protected]

Important Note
This book is written with the only aim of informing people interested in diving activities
of elements to take into account to prepare successful diving saturation operations.
I express my sincere thanks to the people and companies listed below who have
supported this project and provided me with useful documents and advice.
Christian CADIEUX - manual author

- Sheldon Hutton - CEO/Chairman Ultra Deep Solutions & Flash Tekk Engineering,
and the personnel Ultra deep solution and Flash Tekk Engineering
- Dr Jean Yves Massimelli
- Jean Pierre Imbert - Divetech
- JFD group, particularly Marieke Barker (Managing director - JFD Singapore), Gary
Rivett - Specialist (systems technical advisor - JFD Singapore), Michael Genove
(Project manager - JFD Singapore), Patrick Goossens (Head of Commercial sales -
JFD Singapore)
- Comanex - Patrick Laboure (Managing Director)
- Parkburn systems, particularly Mr Shon Laird (Business Development Asia Pacific)
- Gareth Kerr - Director Fathom systems (Fathom system is a part of JFD group)
- Jord Lucas - Head of the diving department Total E&P
- Franck Muller - Diving specialist diving department Total E&P

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 4 of 318
 About this book
This book gives an overview of the elements and procedures for bell management that should be in
place to organize saturation diving operations. It is based on the saturation manual published by CCO
Ltd, elements indicated in the documents Diving & ROV specialists “Description of a saturation
diving system”, and the diving study CCO Ltd “Implement NORMAM-15 saturation diving
procedures”.
The reason for using the NORMAM-15 is that it has proved its efficiency for the organization of
numerous deep dives in Brazil and other countries. So it is one of the safest saturation procedures
currently available. It is confirmed in the “DMAC statement on deep saturation diving conducted
using appropriate procedures”, published in March 2019.
However, people using a decompression process, and thus divers excursions limits, other than those
indicated by Normam 15 can adapt the elements described in this document to the decompression
procedures they use.
Note that we only suggest what we consider the best practices and favour the diffusion of every
procedure we think relevant for people involved in diving and ROV operations, whatever the emitter.
Also, we are not influenced by any third-party organization, as we are not a member of any.
The policy of Diving & ROV specialists policy is to publish only official and scientifically proved
documents and never change the original structure of these publications. For these reasons, there is
no change of the procedure published by the Brazilian Navy Directorate of Ports and Coasts and
those of other competent bodies.
However, there have been some improvements in some diving procedures since the publication of
the NORMAM-15/DPC. It is the same for the other guidelines taken as references. For this reason,
some complementary procedures from other competent bodies or implemented by various teams
working in the offshore industry have been added as reinforcements.

Note that in this document, the name “NORMAM-15/DPC” is reduced to “NORMAM-15” for
convenience.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 5 of 318
 Page left blank intentionally

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 6 of 318
Diving & ROV Specialists
Tel: +66 857 277 123
52/2 moo 3 tambon Tarpo 65000 Phitsanulock - Thailand E mail: [email protected]

Tables of contents
1) Prepare the dive
1.1 - Description of the bell and of the elements to control it. (page 14)
1.1.1 - Overview (page 14)
1.1.2 - Diving bells (page 15)
1.1.2.1 - Deployment cable attachment point (page 15)
1.1.2.2 - Anti gyration systems (page 16)
1.1.2.3 - Transfer to and from the living chambers (page 16)
1.1.2.4 - Bell ballast release option (page 17)
1.1.2.5 - Bells with standoff frames (page 18)
1.1.2.6 - External equipment (page 19)
1.1.2.7 - Internal equipment (page 23)
1.1.2.8 - Optional cutters or release mechanisms of the umbili-
cal and lift wires operated from inside the bell (p. 36)
1.1.2.9 - Maintenance (page 37)
1.1.2 - Divers’ excursion umbilicals (page 39)
1.1.2.1 - Function (page 39)
1.1.2.2 - Fabrication requirement (page 39)
1.1.2.3 - Installation in the bell (page 40)
1.1.2.4 - Backup excursion umbilical and their storage (p. 41)
1.1.2.5 - Maintenance (page 41)
1.1.3 - Diving suits (page 42)
1.1.3.1 - Neoprene hot water suits (page 42)
1.1.3.2 - Hot water suits made of linen cloth or similar (p. 43)
1.1.3.3 - Hot water undersuits (page 43)
1.1.4 - Diving harness (page 44)
1.1.4.1 - Description (page 44)
1.1.4.2 - Pre-dive check and preventive withdrawn (page 45)
1.1.5 - Helmets and Standby diver mask (page 46)
1.1.5.1 - Working divers helmets (page 46)
1.1.5.2 - Standby diver’s mask (page 49)
1.1.5.3 - Recommended supply pressure for mixed gas diving
applications (page 50)
1.1.5.4 - Non-return valves fitted to the supply gas hose (p. 50)
1.1.5.5 - Systems for cold waters (page 50)
1.1.5.6 - National & international approval and marking (p. 51)
1.1.6 - Bailout systems (page 52)
1.1.6.1 - Purpose (page 52)
1.1.6.2 - Scuba diving cylinders and 1st stage regulator (p. 52)
1.1.6.3 - DIVEX Secondary Life Support Mk 4” (SLS Mk4)
system (page 52)
1.1.6.4 - COBRA (Compact Bailout Rebreathing Apparatus)
1.1.7 - Buoyancy Control Devices (BCDs) (page 68)
1.1.7.1 - Description (page 68)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 7 of 318
Diving & ROV Specialists 52/2 moo 3 tambon Tarpo - 65000 Phitsanulok - Thailand

1.1.7.2 - Precautions to be in place for the implementation of

BCDs (page 68)
1.1.8 - Knifes, fins, weight belt, and small equipment (page 71)
1.1.8.1 - Knife (page 71)
1.1.8.2 - Fins (page 71)
1.1.8.3 - Buoyancy control weights (page 71)
1.1.8.3 - Rescue Lanyard (page 72)
1.1.8.4 - Compass (page 72)
1.1.9 - Main bell umbilical (page 73)
1.1.9.1 - Description (page 73)
1.1.9.2 - Installation and protection (page 74)
1.1.9.3 - Bell recovery using the umbilical (page 75)
1.1.9.4 - Emergency umbilical (page 76)
1.1.9.5 - Maintenance (page 76)
1.1.10 - Bell launch and recovery and connecting systems (page 77)
1.1.10.1 - Kinematics of launch and recovery systems (page 77)
1.1.10.2 - Winches and wires (page 77)
1.1.10.3 - Heave compensation (page 82)
1.1.10.4 - Connection to transfer lock (page 84)
1.1.10.5 - Anti-swinging systems (page 85)
1.1.10.6 - Retaining legs in moonpool (page 86)
1.1.10.7 - Load limiters (page 86)
1.1.10.8 - Moonpool aerator system (page 87)
1.1.10.9 - Protections to prevent a man overboard (page 88)
1.1.10.10 - Control consoles (page 89)
1.1.10.11 - Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU) (page 96)
1.1.10.12 - Maintenance (page 98)
1.1.11 - Gas reclaim system of the bell (page 100)
1.1.11.1 - Purpose (page 100)
1.1.11.2 - Bell Unit (page 100)
1.1.11.3 - Topside unit (page 106)
1.1.11.4 - Control console unit (page 110)
1.1.11.5 - System start-up and operational procedures (p. 118)
1.1.11.6 - General view of the reclaim system (page 123)
1.1.11.7 - Reclaim tables (page 125)
1.1.11.8 - Routine maintenance and inspection (page 128)
1.1.11.9 - Trouble shooting (page 129)
1.1.11.10 - Divex bell reclaim system (page 131)
1.1.12 - Bell hot water machine (page 140)
1.1.12.1 - Recommendation IMCA (page 140)
1.1.12.2 - Description of a hot water machine (page 140)
1.1.12.3 - Settings (page 148)
1.1.12.4 - Oil-fired heaters (page 149)
2.3.12.5 - Routine maintenance and inspection (page 150)
1.1.12.6 - Overview of the heating system (page 151)
1.1.13 - Dive control (page 153)
1.1.13.1 - General design (page 153)
1.1.13.2 - Gas management panels (page 155)
1.1.13.3 - Communications, surveillance, recording, alarms,
and electrical supplies (page 159)
1.1.13.4 - Communications with divers breathing heliox (p 167)
1.1.13.5 - Particularities of emergency communications to the
bell (page 177)
1.1.13.6 - Diver monitoring system (page 179)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 8 of 318
Diving & ROV Specialists 52/2 moo 3 tambon Tarpo - 65000 Phitsanulok - Thailand

1.1.13.7 - Fire fighting (page 190)

1.1.13.8 - Emergency breathing apparatus (page 191)
1.1.13.9 - Documents to be provided in the dive control
1.1.13.10 - Summary of the maintenance of the elements in the
dive control room (page 192)
1.1.13.11 - To conclude with the latest generation dive controls

1.2 - Checklists (page 195)

1.2.1 - Dive control panel checks (page 195)
1.2.1.1 - Electrical supplies, recording, and communications
1.2.1.2 - Bell monitoring panels (page 196)
1.2.1.3 - Survey system (page 196)
1.2.2 - Bell reclaim system setting up (page 198)
1.2.3 - Bell hot water machine setting up (page 203)
1.2.3.1 - Machine starting (page 203)
1.2.3.2 - Regulation setting (page 203)
1.2.3.3 - Temperature setting (page 204)
1.2.3.4 - Pre-heating (page 204)
1.2.3.5 - High pressure feed (page 204)
1.2.4 - Onboard gas (page 205)
1.2.5 - Bell checks (page 207)
1.3.5.1 - External checks (page 207)
1.2.5.2 - Internal checks (page 208)
1.2.6 - External bottom doors (page 214)
1.2.7 - Maximum divers’ umbilical length and selection of bailouts
systems (page 215)
1.2.7.1 - AODC 20 guidelines (today IMCA D 022)(page 215)
1.2.7.2 - Bailout (page 215)
1.2.8 - Remembering the guidance “diver attachment by means of
weak link” (page 217)
1.2.8.1 - Design requirements indicated in IMCA D 058 (p 217)
1.2.8.2 - Unsuitable options indicated by the guidance (p 217)
1.2.8.3 - Solution proposed by the guidance (page 217)
1.2.8.4 - Rules to apply (page 218)

1.3 - Check the working documents (page 219)

1.3.1 - Task plan (page 219)
1.3.2 - Check the emergency response plan (page 223)
1.3.2.1 - Check the document (page 223)
1.3.2.2 - Check some elements of the document (page 223)
1.3.3 - Check the permits to work and the isolation certificates (p. 224)
1.3.4 - Falling object prevention (page 225)
1.3.5 - Ensure of the dive system checks and of suitable weather
conditions (page 229)
1.3.6 - Toolbox talk (page 230)
1.3.6.1 - Health / temporary unfitness to dive (page 230)
1.3.6.2 - Task & dive plan (page 230)
1.3.6.3 - Site rules (page 230)
1.3.6.4 - Safety and onboard life (page 230)

1.4 - Last pre-dive checks (page 231)

1.4.1 - Work site inspection and element to install (page 231)
1.4.1.1 - Above the surface (page 231)
1.4.1.2 - Underwater (page 231)
1.4.1.3 - Pieces to install (page 231)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 9 of 318
Diving & ROV Specialists 52/2 moo 3 tambon Tarpo - 65000 Phitsanulok - Thailand

1.4.2 - Communications to deck and to clients (page 232)

1.4.2.1 - Communications to surface team (page 232)
1.4.2.2 - Communications to the client representatives (p. 232)
1.4.2.3 - Communications with ROV (page 232)
1.4.2.4 - Dive planned with crane operations (page 232)
1.4.2.5 - Dive planned with specific machines (page 232)
1.4.3 - Surface support and rescue boat pre-dive checks (page 233)
1.4.3.1 - Anchored vessels (page 233)
1.4.3.2 - Dynamic positioning vessels (page 233)
1.4.3.3 - Static surface supports (facilities) (page 234)
1.4.3.4 - Rescue boat pre-dive checks (page 234)
1.4.4 - Bell pre-launch checks (page 235)
1.4.4.1 - Check the clamp and check the trunk for leaks (p 235)
1.4.4.2 - Check the tenders (page 235)
1.4.4.3 - Ensure that the checks of the rescue team have been
completed (page 235)
1.4.4.4 - Ensure that the divers know what they have to do and
how the work site is organised (page 235)
1.4.4.5 - Ensure that all personnel are ready (page 235)

2) Diving operations
2.1 - Summary of the compression procedures to the 1st storage depth
discussed in Book #2 (page 237)
2.2 - Launch the ROV (page 239)
2.3 - Transfer the divers under pressure and locking off the bell (p. 240)
2.4 - Oxygen partial pressure adjustment (page 241)
2.5 - Launch and recover the bell (page 242)
2.5.1 - Transfer to the work site (page 245)
2.5.2 - Recover the divers to the saturation complex (page 244)
2.6 - Excursions during the bell runs (page 246)
2.6.1 - Types of excursions (page 246)
2.6.1.1 - Ascending and descending excursions (page 246)
2.6.1.2 - Excursion depths range (page 246)
2.6.1.3 - Explanation of the excursions ranges Normam-15
2.6.2 - Stabilization periods before excursions (page 249)
2.6.2.1 - Excursions upon arrival at the storage depth (p. 249)
2.6.2.2 - Excursion after a previous excursion (page 249)
2.6.3 - Combinations allowed for excursions with no break (page 250)
2.6.3.1 - Standard downward excursion followed by exceptional
downward excursion (page 250)
2.6.3.2 - Exceptional downward excursion followed by a
standard downward excursion (page 250)
2.6.3.3 - Standard downward excursion followed by standard
upward excursion (page 251)
2.6.3.4 - Standard upward excursion followed by standard
downward excursion (page 251)
2.6.3.5 - Standard upward excursion followed by exceptional
downward excursion (page 252)
2.6.3.6 - Standard upward excursion followed by exceptional
upward excursion (page 252)
2.6.3.7 - Exceptional upward excursion followed by a standard
upward excursion (page 253)
2.6.4 - Recommendations for organizing bell runs and excursions (254)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 10 of 318
Diving & ROV Specialists 52/2 moo 3 tambon Tarpo - 65000 Phitsanulok - Thailand

2.6.5 - Duration of bell runs (page 255)

2.6.6 - Excursion tables (page 256)
2.7 - Intermediate compressions and decompression (page 264)
2.7.1 - intermediate compressions (page 264)
2.7.2 - Summary of the pressurization procedure of the chamber during a
rest period (page 265)
2.7.2.1 - Procedures for compressions starting within the
standard saturation range (page 265)
2.7.2.2 - Procedures for compressions starting within the deep
saturation range (page 265)
2.7.2.3 - Procedures for compressions starting within the
exceptional saturation range (page 265)
2.7.2.4 - Excursions upon arrival at the storage depth (p. 266)
2.7.3 - Pressurization of the chamber during a bell run (page 267)
2.7.4 - Decompression during a bell run and excursions after an
intermediate decompression (page 268)
2.7.4.1 - Decompress the chamber during a bell run (page 268)
2.7.4.2 - Excursions after an intermediate decompression (268)

2.8 - Divers at work during the bell runs (page 269)

2.9 - Bell and helmets cleaning following the bell run. (page 270)
2.9.1 - Bell cleansing (page 270)
2.9.1 - Helmet cleansing (page 271)

3) Emergency procedures
3.1 - Principles for injured or unconscious diver recovery (page 273)
3.1.1 - Diver injured but conscious (page 273)
3.1.1.1 - Potential consequences (page 273)
3.1.1.2 - Actions to control (page 273)
3.1.2 - Diver unconscious due to wrong gas, loss of supply, or other
reason (page 274)
3.1.2.1 - Potential consequences (page 274)
3.1.2.2 - Summary of the actions to control (page 274)
3.1.2.3 - Water level control before leaving the bell (page 274)
3.1.2.4 - Transfer an unconscious diver into the bell (page 275)
3.1.2.5 - Priorities (page 275)
3.1.2.6 - Assessing the state of the diver (page 276)
3.1.2.7 - Assisted ventilation (page 276)
3.1.2.8 - External cardiac massage (page 276)
3.1.2.9 - Use of defibrillators (page 278)
3.1.2.10 - When cardiac and respiratory functions are restored
3.1.2.11 - Transfer the patient to the chamber (page 278)

3.2 - Incidents during the launching & recovery, and when the bell is at
depth (page 279)
3.2.1 - Incidents during the launching & recovery of the bell (page 279)
3.2.1.1 - Uncontrollable bell movements during 1st lift (p. 279)
3.2.1.2 - Too many waves in the splash zone (page 279)
3.2.1.3 - Strong current detected when the bell arrives at depth
3.2.2.4 - Loss of bell pressure when it is at the surface (p. 280)
3.2.2 - Incidents when the bell is at depth (page 281)
3.2.2.1 - Underwater current coming up during the dive (281)
3.2.2.2 - Swell and sea motion increasing / Sudden bad weather
(squall) (Page 281)
3.2.2.3 - Poor visibility or no visibility (Page 281)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 11 of 318
Diving & ROV Specialists 52/2 moo 3 tambon Tarpo - 65000 Phitsanulok - Thailand

3.2.2.4 - Diver entangled in fishing lines, net, or other lines

3.2.2.5 - Snagged umbilical (Page 282)
3.2.2.6 - Conflicts with ROV (Page 282)
3.2.2.7 - Accident due to pressurized, in depression, or
electrical devices (Page 282)
3.2.2.8 - Bell atmosphere contaminated by hydrocarbons from
the worksite (page 283)
3.2.2.9 - Gas supply to divers contaminated (page 283)
3.2.2.10 - Loss of the gas supply of the bell (page 284)
3.2.2.11 - Loss of the gas supply of the divers (page 284)
3.2.2.12 - Regulator not working properly (page 284)
3.2.2.13 - Leaks on diver’s helmet supply fittings (page 285)
3.2.2.14 - Loss of communications (page 285)
3.2.2.15 - Loss of hot water supply (page 286)
3.2.2.16 - Loss electrical supply (page 286)
3.2.2.17 - Fire in proximity of the dive control / chamber
system (page 287)
3.2.1.18 - Fire in the dive control (page 287)
3.2.2.19 - Loss of bell pressure during the diving operations
3.2.1.20 - Failure of the mooring (page 289)
3.2.1.21 - Dynamic Positioning yellow alarm (page 289)
3.2.1.22 - Dynamic Positioning red alarm (page 290)

3.3 - Lost bell procedures (page 291)

3.3.1 - Reminder of bell survival equipment (page 291)
3.3.1.1 - Communication (page 291)
3.3.1.2 - Bell localization (page 291)
3.3.1.3 - Secondary Lifting (page 291)
3.3.1.4 - Onboard gas (page 291)
3.3.1.5 - Onboard power supply (page 291)
3.3.1.6 - Survival equipment (page 291)
3.3.1.7 - Emergency umbilical and connectors (page 292)
3.3.1.8 - Buoyant ascent procedure (page 292)
3.3.1.9 - Cutters or release mechanisms for the main bell
umbilical and/or the main lift wire (page 293)
3.3.1.10 - Medical kit DMAC 15 (page 293)
3.3.1.11 - Overview of bell emergency equipment (page 294)
3.3.2 - Use of ROV (page 295)
3.3.3 - Surface standby diver (page 296)
3.3.4 - Loss bell scenarios (page 298)
3.3.4.1 - Scope of the lost bell procedures scenarios presented
3.3.4.2 - Loss of main bell wire with umbilical intact (P 299)
3.3.4.3 - Loss of main bell wire and umbilical (page 301)
3.3.4.4 - Loss of main bell wire, umbilical and clump weight
3.3.4.5 - Clump weight lost or damaged (page 308)
3.3.4.6 - Entrapment of the bell and/or clump weight (P. 309)
3.3.5 - Wet transfer (page 311)
3.3.5.1 - Considerations for wet transfer to the 2nd bell of a
twin bell vessel (page 311)
3.3.5.2 - Considerations for wet transfer to another vessel
3.3.5.3 - Considerations during the transfer (page 311)
3.3.6 - Bell tapping code (page 312)

4) Bibliography & addresses

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 12 of 318
 Page left blank intentionally

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 13 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

1) Prepare the dive

1.1 - Description of the bell and of the elements to control it.

1.1.1 - Overview

The scheme below is the same as the one discussed in Book #2. As said in this document, it is essential to have an
overview of a saturation system's general design and how the elements that compose it are linked together to have a
comprehension of their functions and conception. It is the purpose of the chart below, where the links between the
modules are extremely simplified. We can see in it that the bell works separately from the living parts of the system to
which a disconnectable trunk links it.
Bell
- Transfer of the divers from the living
system to the underwater work site.
- Refuge of the divers in the case of an
Umbilical Hot water divers incident happens.
- Bell supplies - Hot water supply to
- Communications Wires deployment bell
the bell and the divers.

Dive control Trunk Transfer lock - Bell

- Control the bell supplies. - Transfer under pressure of the
- Monitor and help the divers at work divers to and from the bell

Bell reclaim LARS

- Collection & recovery of the - Launch And Recovery
gasses from the divers. System.

Gas storage
Hyperbaric Rescue Unit
- Heliox < 25% O2 & Air.
- Emergency evacuation
- Heliox > 25% O2 & pure O2
from the system

Reclaim system Transfer lock

- Collection & recovery of all - Transfer lock to and from the bell
the used gasses. - Chamber for the medical interventions

Chillers & Heaters

- Heat or cool the atmosphere
of the chambers
Saturation control
- Control the chambers.
Fresh water supply - Care of the divers at rest
- Hot & cold water to
chambers

HERS Chambers (with entry lock)

- Hyperbaric Environment - Accommodations divers
Regeneration System - Food & clothes to divers

Waste removal
- Collection and elimination
of wastes from chambers Wastes removal

Legend
Gas inlet/outlet, electrical, communications Hot & cold fresh water supply
Clean gas supply lines Heating/cooling supply
Remote control Hot water (one way)
Permanent connecting trunks between chambers / Supply lines that can be disconnected
Trunks that can be disconnected Used gasses recovery

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 14 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.2 - Diving bells

If the saturated divers are exposed to the atmospheric pressure explosive decompression occurs and they are immediately
killed. For this reason, a sealed diving bell is necessary to transfer them from the system where they are kept at the
pressure planned at depth to the underwater work site. When the bell arrives at the selected depth, the bottom door is
opened, and the dive can start. The bell is also the refuge of the divers in case an incident happens.
Note that doors are fitted with two hatches: The internal hatch protects the divers from decompression accident (which
could be explosive decompression) when the external pressure is inferior to the internal pressure in the bell, and the outer
door that protects the divers from over pressurization if the bell drops below the planned storage depth.
Bells are pressure vessels that must be built according to recognized international standards. These norms and the
certification body must be indicated on the identification plate that summarizes the characteristics of the bell and its
manufacturer and must be clearly visible on the outside of the shell.
As a result of technical choices of the manufacturers and their clients, a lot of models of bells are in service in the
industry. However, despite some changes in configuration, the functions provided remain the same.
Bells are generally designed and built for two, three or four divers. IMCA says that depending on their configuration,
they should have the following minimum volume:
▪ 2 divers bell – 3.0 m 3 (105 cu ft)
▪ 3 divers bell – 4.5 m 3 (160 cu ft)
▪ 4 divers bell – 6.0 m 3 (210 cu ft)
Note that NORSOK standard U-100 says:
Diving bells intended for two divers shall have an inside volume of at least 4,5 m³. Diving bells intended for more than
two divers shall have an extra inner volume of 1,5 m³ per diver in excess of two. The specified volume should be usable,
i.e. apportioned around what is normally within the height required for a diver to stand up

Closed bell

Protection frame
ID Plate
Standard CCO Ltd
11/2/19
Built by LEXMAR

Identification plate
Gas reserve

External hatch bottom door

R1
04
3

Bottom door

Standoff frame

1.1.2.1 - Deployment cable attachment point

The bell is deployed to the bottom using the main wire that is coiled in a winch that is part of the Launch and Recovery
System (LARS). This cable is connected to the top of the bell.
IMCA D 024 says in section 4 that the main lift attachment point to the bell should be by means of a properly designed
pad eye or similar.
Also, there should be a secondary attachment point on the diving bell if the main one is damaged. This secondary point
should also be a properly designed pad eye or similar (it may be a second hole in the same pad eye). A soft sling should
be installed on a secondary lifting point, ready to be deployed by a diver or a ROV.
Secondary attachment point

Secondary attachment point

Main attachment point

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 15 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.2.2 - Anti gyration systems
To avoid the bell gyration around its main cable, two parallel cables are installed at each side of the bell. Two
configurations are possible:
● Two weights that are deployed by two separated winches. This solution that was used with some systems in the
past is not found with the last generation systems.
● A beam shaped clump weight which is deployed by a single cable passing through it. The deployment cable that
is adjusted by a single winch pass through the clump weight by the means of pulleys and is connected to the
other side of the deployment frame. This clump weight is generally adjusted to create a platform under the bell
that allows the divers to enter and leave it easily. Also, some clump weights are fitted with closed boxes where
the divers can store tools.

beam shaped
Independent weight clump weight

1.1.2.3 - Transfer to and from the living chambers

The transfer from the living chambers to the bell can be performed through a lateral door or the bottom door:
● Bells with lateral doors were common with systems made by COMEX and it is still the case with some last
generation systems. As an example, the system displayed in point 2.2.1. The advantage of this system is that the
transfer lock and the chambers are at the same level of the bell which reduces the risks of falling during the
transfer to and from the bell and that the transfer trunks are generally short.
Also, the bells of some systems which are connected to the chambers by the bottom door have a lateral door
which allows entering into them without disconnecting them from the system. However, this configuration
seems no more used with the latest products proposed by the manufacturers.

Lateral door (transfer to

& from the chambers)

Bottom door (transfer

to & from the worksite)
Bell connected laterally

● Bells with only a bottom door are often adopted with the last generation systems. This configuration has the
advantage to simplify the design of the bell and avoids the problems of water intrusion between the internal and
external hatches of lateral doors that may happen if the external hatch is not correctly sealed. Also, some
engineers say that the connection to the system is easier with a bell that is hung and lowered to the connecting
flange than with a bell that is approached laterally. However, the transfer of the divers to and from the bell is
more dangerous as a fall from more than 2 m height is possible (see in next page).

Bottom door only

(Transfer to & from the
chambers and the worksite)
Connecting the bottom hatch

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 16 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

1.98 m
3.98 m
Internal view of the bottom trunk of the bell

2m
Note that due to the configuration of some systems, there is a risk
that a diver falls from a height that can be up to 4 metres.
For this reason, precautions should be implemented to avoid
such an incident during the transfers and the checklist of the bell.

The bottom internal diameter of the hatch in the previous page is 90 cm which is sufficient to enter and leave the
bell with a bailout. Note that NORSOK U 100 says: “The bottom trunk for entry into and exit from the diving
bell shall have an inner diameter of minimum 80 cm”.
IMCA does not give precise dimensions of the hatches and only says that the diver must be able to exit and re-
enter the bell and that there should be the possibility to open the doors from either side. It is also said that the
doors must be in perfect condition and their seals protected by a slight film of silicone grease.

1.1.2.4 - Bell ballast release option

Bell ballast release systems and buoyant ascent in offshore diving operations are explained in AODC 061 and discussed
in the document “Bell diving operations”. Two options are currently available:
● Bell equipped with a ballast release system.
This option that was common with old systems is still used with last generation systems. Its function is that if
the bell has fallen to the bottom, it allows dropping the ballast that is still attached to the bell by chains to the
bottom. As a result, the buoyancy of the bell becomes positive allowing it to take off from the seabed to which it
is maintained by the chains attached to the ballast, which allows the divers to leave and enter in it.
Also, the system allows a complete release of the ballast to let the bell ascend to the surface as a result of its
positive buoyancy.

Bell Ascending
to the surface

Chain holding
the bell
Dropped chains & ballast

Dropped ballast

Chain

Locking system

Releasable bell ballast

Ballast release system

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 17 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
IMCA says that such a system must meet the following criteria:
○ It must be designed to be operated from inside of the bell and the release mechanism must be protected
against accidental release. For this reason, two independent actions must be necessary to release the
weights.
○ Also, the weights must be secured so as not to be shed accidentally. For this reason, if the system utilizes
only one weight then there must be no single component whose failure could cause the weight to
become detached. This requirement does not apply if there are two or more weights operating
independently.
○ In addition, IMCA says that if the release mechanism is operated by means of pressurisation (gas or
hydraulic), then isolations need to be in place such that they cannot be activated accidentally by external
water pressure or internal gas pressure.
● Bell without ballast release system.
Some companies consider dangerous the use of bells that can float as the ascent to the surface is uncontrolled
and the bell may hit a structure or a vessel during its ascent. For this reason, they prefer recovering it using a
crane and another bell and remove this option to avoid the divers having the temptation using this system.
IMCA says that this decision must be clearly recorded in the appropriate documents and made known to all on
the work site. Also, the ballast weights must be secured not to accidentally come off. In addition, the alternative
recovery method must be identified
Note that the equipment used to permanently secure bell ballast weights and neutralize the components forming
part of the buoyant ascent system not intended to be used must be inspected every 6 months.
IMCA D 024 also says in section 5 that the diver must be able to exit and re-enter the bell if it is resting on the
bottom using a standoff frame or a ballast release system. It means that if the ballast release system is fully
neutralized, a standoff frame must be physically fitted to the bell.

1.1.2.5 - Bells with standoff frames

Standoff frames can be found with some models of bells.
The function of the standoff frame is to allow the divers to easily enter and leave the bell and provide them a place under
the bell where they can standby in the case of an alert or if a small change of working area has to be performed without
recovering the bell. Also, it is designed to protect the bottom door of the bell.
As explained in the previous point, IMCA says that standoff frames are mandatory with bells that have no ballast release
system to allow the divers to leave and return to the bell if it has dropped to the seabed.
Two types of standoff frames can be found currently:
● A standoff frame that is connected to the bell which does not act as a clump weight. So the clump weight is
deployed and adjusted below it.

Standoff frame
connected to the bell

Clump weight

Hole connecting pin

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 18 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● A standoff frame that is also used as a clump weight on which the bell slightly rests when arrived at depth. Note
that because this model of standoff frame is not physically fitted to the bell, it can be used only with bells that
are equipped with a ballast release system.

Bell slightly resting

on the clump weight

Standoff frame &

clump weight

Bell adjusted on Lifting wire

2 Bell lowered 3 Lowering of the bell slowered 4 the clump weight in tension

Clump weight
1 adjusted at depth 5 Bottom door opened

1.1.2.6 - External equipment

Equipment and gas reserves are installed all around the bell to provide a minimum autonomy in the case that the bell is
lost on the bottom:
● IMCA D 024 says that There must be an emergency supply of breathing gas carried on board sufficient to
support each working diver plus the bellman outside the bell for a minimum of 30 minutes at a breathing rate of
40 litres/minute at the maximum depth of the diving operation.
Also, sufficient oxygen must be available for metabolic consumption by the maximum number of divers at 0.5
litres per minute per diver for at least 24 hours at the end of a bell run.
As an example, the bells of UDS Lichtenstein are fitted with the following gas reserves that can be filled using a
panel installed on the side of each bell:

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 19 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
○ Two oxygen banks 2 x 10 litres x 200 bar.
○ Three heliox banks 3 X 67 litres x 300 bar filled with bottom mix.
As with any gas stored on the worksite, the cylinders must be colour-coded and marked with the name and
chemical symbol of their contents. The stamp of the last test date should be on the shoulder of each cylinder and
painted over with a small patch of distinctive colored paint to help for its localization. If this is inaccessible then
the cylinder serial number should be visible or else stenciled in a visible location.
Note that the valves of the cylinders and the bell must not be corroded and easy to close or open. In addition, the
onboard gas (oxygen and heliox) must be regulated not to be above 30 bar over the ambient pressure in the bell.
IMCA D 024 also says that valves carrying oxygen (or mixes containing more than 25% oxygen) at a pressure
higher than 15 bar must not be quarter turn (Due to the depths involved in saturation diving, the pressure of such
gases will often require to be above 15 bar). The reason is that extreme heat can happen if the compression
occurs quickly enough to create a pneumatic impact and adiabatic compression. These phenomenon result from
the conversion of the mechanical energy when the gas is rapidly compressed from low to a high pressure. The
following values from the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) demonstrate that, depending on
the pressure ratios, materials submitted to an immediate rise of pressure can be destroyed:
Initial Initial Final Pressure ratio Final
Comments
pressure temperature pressure Pf/Pi temperature
Final temperature above auto-ignition
1.013 bar 20 Cº 34.47 bar 34 530 Cº
temperatures of non-metallic materials
Final temperature above the melting
1.013 bar 20 Cº 137.9 bar 136.1 920 Cº
temperature of brass (900 Cº)
Final temperature above the melting
1.013 bar 20 Cº 275.79 bar 272.1 1181 Cº
temperature of bronze (1020 Cº)

To continue with oxygen and mixes above 25% oxygen, particles may aggregate inside the pipes and be ignited
later on. For this reason, the valves and pipework must be cleaned for oxygen service when used for gas mixes
containing more than 25% oxygen.

Bell charging panel heliox Onboard gas colour coded

The bell must be designed to be visible so that the diver can see it during the operations. Also, it must be discoverable if
it is lost. For this reason, the following equipment should be installed.
● Lights should be arranged such as the bell is visible from any direction (360º), and that the failure of one does
not affect the others. They should be supplied by the electricity coming from the surface and, in the case of an
emergency, from the onboard batteries that are installed at the external of the bell.
● The onboard batteries that are designed to supply the lights and other functions in the bell should be isolated and
protected against short circuits and polarity reversal (a shunt diode should be installed). The housing of the
batteries should be designed for the pressure the bell is rated for, and fitted with appropriate mechanisms such as
relief and equalization valves. Batteries and their housing should be inspected at least every six months.
● A strobe light that is designed to work independently for at least 24 hours must be installed at the top of the bell.

● A transponder is fitted to the bell to allow for it’s detection electronically. Its specifications must be in line with
those described in AODC 019 and can be summarized as follows:
▪ A pressure housing capable of operating to at least the depth the bell is designed for.
▪ Common emergency reply frequency 37.5 KHZ
▪ Individual interrogation frequencies:
Channel A 38.5 KHZ ± 50 HZ
Channel B 39.5 KHZ ± 50 HZ
▪ Receive sensitivity + 15 DB RE 1 Microbar
▪ Minimum interrogation pulse width 4 MS
▪ Turnaround delay 125.7 ± 0.2 MS
▪ Reply pulse width 4 MS ± 0.5 MS

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 20 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
▪ Reply frequency 37.5 KHZ ± 50 HZ
▪ Maximum interrogation rate:
More than 20% of battery life remaining once per second.
▪ Less than 20% of battery life remaining once per 2 seconds.
▪ Minimum transponder output power 85 DB RE 1 Microbar at 1 metre
▪ Minimum transducer polar diagram -6 DB at ± 135°
solid angle centred on xponder
vertical axis
▪ Minimum listening life in water 10 weeks
▪ Minimum battery life replying at 85 DB 5 days
▪ A means of testing and interrogating this transponder must be available on the surface at the dive site.

Transponder

Waterproof lighthouse equipped

with the last generation Light
Emitting Diodes (LED).

The bell must be designed to be supplied in an emergency if the main umbilical has been severed. For this reason,
emergency connectors are provided in a very accessible part of the bell that should be highlighted with a bright colour to
connect a 2nd umbilical.
● IMO says that at least the two following connectors should be in place:
▪ ¾” NPT (female) for hot water.
▪ ½” NPT (female) for breathing gas
However, a depth gauge, and power supply and comms connections are desirable and are in place on most bells.
Power + comms

Gas supply

Depth
Hot water

Control valves

● NORSOK recommends more connectors than IMO and says that they should be designed to be operated by
divers and ROV. They are described as follows:

Item Diver operable Diver and ROV operable

Breathing gas 1/2" NPT Female 1/2" Male Snaptite SVHN-8

Hot water/heating 3/4" NPT Female 3/4" Male Snaptite SVHN-12

Depth 1/4" NPT Female 1/4" Male Snaptite SVHN-4

8-contact-4-pins-EO connector 8-contact-4-pins-EO connector

Communication
(Contacts 1 and 2 used, others n.c.) (Contacts 1 and 2 used, others n.c.)
4-contact-4-pins-EO-connector 4-contact-4-pins-EO-connector
Emergency power
(Pin 1: 24V, pin 2: 0V, pin 3: ground, pin 4: n.c.) (Pin 1: 24V, pin 2: 0V, pin 3: ground, pin 4: n.c.)

Gas analysis 1/4" NPT Female 1/4" Male Snaptite SVHN-4

Key:
● EO: "Electro Oceanics"- trade mark - underwater electrical connector
● n.c.: not connected
● NPT: National (standard) Pipe Tapered (threads)
● Snaptite SVHN: trade mark and type designation

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 21 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
As communications to the bell could be lost, a copy of the IMO/AODC/IMCA bell tapping code must be mounted on the
outside of the bell in a clearly visible position (Generally, at the top of the bell).

Tapping code Situation

3.3 Communication opening procedure (inside and outside)

1 Yes or affirmative or agreed

3 No or negative or disagreed

2.2 Repeat please

2 Stop

5 Have you got a seal?

6 Stand by to be pulled up

1.2 Get ready for through water transfer (open your hatch)

2.3.2.3 You will NOT release your ballasts

4.4 Do release your ballast in 30 minutes from now

1.2.3 Do increase your pressure

3.3 Communication closing procedure (inside and outside)

Electrical, communication, and video connections should be made in junction boxes filled with oil and pressure
compensated to avoid water intrusion. Also, penetrators that are designed to seal the electrical cables coming from the
external of the bell to its inside should be in place and be certified as fit for purpose by a competent person (IMCA D 018
category 3 or 4). They should be installed in strategic points and be appropriately marked.
Penetrators are also in place to seal the hoses coming into the bell. They must be fitted with protection valves or other
devices to stop catastrophic pressure loss and be appropriately marked.

Oil filled junction box

Gas penetrators

Pressure compensator

Electrical connectors

Hydraulic penetrators

Bells are fitted with a food/medical lock and viewports:

● The medical lock must be equipped with a safety interlock that prevents the opening of the door if the lock is
still under pressure. Also, the system should make it impossible to obtain a gas-tight seal on the lock if the
clamp is not properly closed.
● Viewports are designed to see what happens around the bell. Those that are in the lower half should have both
internal and external protective covers. Those that are in the upper half require external protective covers only.
The serial number or other identifying mark for each viewport should be visible and be prominently marked on
the outside of the bell adjacent to each viewport. Also, the date of installation should be indicated.
During the inspection, the person in charge must ensure that they are free of cracks or scratches that could affect
their integrity. Note that they must be changed every 10 years.
A protector frame is fitted to the bell to protect the pressure vessel and the elements described above from shocks during
the launching and the recovery. Note that the pressure vessel must always be in perfect condition.
● The protective paint must be in good condition and there not be serious corrosion visible with anodes that are
reasonably depleted. Note that anodes should never be painted.
● Some bells are fitted with external isolation. If it is the case, it must be clean and in good condition. During the
inspection, the auditor should ensure that there is no crack or disjointing that could lead to water intrusion and
then internal corrosion.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 22 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● Note that the identification plate must be clearly visible on the outside of the bell. It should indicate the name of
the manufacturer, the reference number of the pressure vessel, its date of fabrication and characteristics
(dimensions, test pressure, max working pressure, etc), and the name of the certification body. Note that the bell
cannot be used if the plate is missing or suspicious.
● As every pressure vessel, the bell must be fitted with a relief valve. Note that IMCA D 024 says that the relief
valve can be replaced by an overpressure alarm.
Viewport
Main lifting point
Protector frame

Penetrators

Electrical oil filled junction box Oxygen bank:

2 x 10 L x 200 bar
Connector guide wire Total banks:2

Oxygen bank:
2 x 10 L x 200 bar
Total banks:2 Medical lock

Emergency batteries Heliox bank:

3 x 67.5 L x 300 bar
Total banks:3

Connector standoff frame

Stand off frame

Connector guide wire

Removable access step

Tools box

Anode

It often happens that the umbilical of the bellman is stored on the outside of the bell. That gives the advantage to recover
some space for the divers and equipment inside the bell. IMCA D 024 says that this umbilical must be secured on an
adequate storage point that allows to protect it from damage during the launching and the recovery of the bell. Also, the
storage system must be designed such that the bellman is able to quickly release his umbilical once he is out of the bell in
an emergency.
IMCA also says that if it is planned to undertake two man bell runs using a bellman’s umbilical stowed outside the bell,
then the end of the umbilical must be arranged in such a way as to allow the bellman to attach his mask or helmet and test
it before the working diver exits the bell.

Storage umbilical bellman

1.1.2.7 - Internal equipment

The following gas supplies and exhaust systems, but not limited to, that are also described in the documents #2 “Gas
supplies and environmental control” and #4 “Bell diving operations” should be in place:
● Depth Diver 2 ( #1 in the drawing next page)

● Depth Diver 1 (#2 in the drawing next page)

● Safety pressure relief valve bell (#3 in the drawing next page)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 23 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● Standby diver supply (#4 in the drawing)
● Bell blow down and exhaust (#5 & #24 in the drawing)
● Analysis from dive control (#6 in the drawing)
● Bell internal depth monitoring from dive control (#7 in the drawing)
● Divers’ gas supply from surface (# 8 & 27)
● Emergency blow-down and exhaust (#9 in the drawing), designed to be connected to the replacement umbilical.
● Emergency internal depth monitoring (#10 in the drawing)
● Dedicated supply to diver 3 from onboard bank 3 (#11, #25 & #41 in the drawing )
● Emergency supply from onboard bank 2 (#12 & #28 in the drawing)
● Emergency supply from onboard bank 1 (#13 & #26 in the drawing)
● Tracking regulators banks 1, 2, & 3 (#14, #15, & #16 in the scheme)
● Tracking regulators O2 banks #1 (#17 in the scheme) & #2 (#18 in the scheme)
● O2 banks #1 & #2 (#19 & &20 in the drawing)
● External depth bell (#21 & #44)
● Manifold O2 add (#22) and Buffer tank (#23 in the drawing)
● Shuttle block (#29 in the drawing below), which is designed to protect the divers from loss of gas supply.
● Emergency blow-down bell (#30 in the drawing)
● Gas supply to diver 1 (#31) and gas supply to diver 2 (#32 in the drawing)
● Bibs bellman (#33) & bibs divers 1 & 2 (#34 in the drawing)
● SEACO (supply actuated exhaust cut-off) valves (#35 & #36) protect the diver(s) from too elevated suction.
● Tracking pneumo & back pressure regulator loader (#37) that reduce the depression of the exhaust.
● Internal & external water traps (#38 & #40 in the drawing)
● Main and emergency hot water supplies (#42 & #43 in the drawing)

4 6 8
3 5 7 10 12
To gas reclaim 9 11
system
13
15
2 14
1 16
23 17
18
43
19
42
24
22
37
20
25 26 27 28
44
34 21
36 35

40 29
39
38 31 32

33
30
Umbilical
To
Diver 3
scrubbers

41
Umbilical D1 Umbilical D2
To heaters
Direction of flux Flow control valve
Depth gauge One way valve Filter
Low pressure gauge Relief valve Pressurization silencer
High pressure gauge ¼ turn valve Anti-suction device
Regulator Needle valve Manifold + quick-connectors
Back pressure regulator Flow meter Back Pressure Regulator loader

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 24 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
IMCA D 024 says that gas supplies must be arranged so that blowing down or flushing the bell does not interfere with the
gas supply of any diver outside the bell (item 6.31).
IMCA also says that there must be a primary gas supply for the bellman, which can be from on board bottles or from the
surface, sufficient to allow him to exit the bell and recover an injured diver. This supply must be independent of the
primary gas supply to the diver(s) in the water. The bellman must also have a secondary supply but this supply may be
common with the working divers primary supply, provided it is protected if the working diver’s line fails.
It is achieved by the means a gas management panel similar to the model below from DIVEX that allows opening and
isolating the supply lines indicated in the scheme on the previous page according to the requirements from IMCA.

11 8

4 13 12

25 26 27 28

33
29

41 34
31 30 32

The isolation of the supply lines described above is performed by means of the shuttle valves opening or closing
according to the scenarios that are described below:
- Scenario A - Normal diving conditions
1 - The breathing gas is supplied from the surface to the inlet Port A at a pressure slightly above the gas from the
emergency onboard gas banks (2 bar).
2 - The lower part of shuttles closes ports B and C due to the differential pressure (2 bar) between the set up of the
emergency onboard gas and the surface supplied gas that pushes them against their seal.
3 - As a result, surface gas is available to all outlet ports #1, #2, and #3. Also, the emergency indicators on the
panel are green.
4 - If the divers do not breathe, the upper parts of the shuttles that slide on the tails of the lower parts are sealed
against their respective housings by the pressure of the springs.
5 - When a diver inhales, the depression created in the outlet port is sufficient to open the upper part of the shuttle.
As a result, surface gas from port A enters in the outlet port until the pressure is equal to the pressure from inlet
port A.
Inlet port A
(Surface supply set 2 bar above the pressure from inboard banks)
Green 1 Green 3
3
4
5
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
according to the
according to the
respiration of the diver
respiration of the diver

To diver 1 To diver 2

Outlet port #1 Outlet port #2

Closed Closed
2 2

Emergency supply Emergency supply

Inlet port B Bellman, BIBS, Inlet port C
Emergency blow down
Outlet port #3

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 25 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Scenario B - Surface Supply umbilical severed
1 - As a consequence of the main umbilical ruptured, no gas is delivered to port A and the pressure in the outlet
ports #1 & #2 falls below the supply pressure of inlet ports B and C from the onboard banks. As a result, the
bottom part of the shuttles open and the upper parts of the shuttles that slide on the tails of the lower part of the
shuttle close as they are pushed by the pressure of the gas from inlet ports B & C.
2 - The onboard supply “Inlet Port B” supplies the outlet Ports #1 and #3 and the onboard supply “Inlet Port C”
supplies outlet Ports #2 and #3. The indicator rods rise, and the emergency indicators are red.
3 - When the pressure has been reestablished and if the divers do not breathe, the springs maintain the lower parts
of the shuttles against the opening of inlet ports B & C.
4 - As a diver inhales, the reduction in pressure created in the outlet port causes a differential of pressure sufficient
to open the lower part of the shuttle.
5 - As the diver exhales the pressure in the outlet port plus the force of the spring are above the one from the
emergency supply and the lower part of the shuttle closes again. The opening and closing of the shuttle valves
continue according to the respiratory cycles. Note that both emergency indicators on the panel are red.
Inlet port A
No gas supply (umbilical severed)
1

Closed
Closed

Outlet port #2 Outlet port #2

To diver 1 To diver 2
2
2
3
Opening and closing 3 Opening and closing
according to the 4 according to the
4
respiratory cycles 5 5 respiratory cycles
Emergency supply Emergency supply
Bellman, BIBS,
Inlet port B Emergency blow down Inlet port C
Outlet port #3

- Scenario C - Diver 1 umbilical severed

1- In the case of an umbilical being ruptured during the dive, as an example diver 1 umbilical, the continuous free
flow in outlet port 1 results in the pressure in Port A falling below the preset differential (2 bar) and the surface
supply is unable to maintain a correct flow to supply the divers.
2 - As a result, the auxiliary shuttle closes the side affected (outer port #1) to protect the other half of the block.
3 - The onboard supply No.1, Port B supplies outlet Port #1.
4 - The onboard supply No.2, Port C supplies outlet Ports #2 and #3 that are isolated from port B by the auxiliary
shuttle.
5 - Due to the ruptured umbilical, the continuous free flow in Outlet Port #1 causes both the upper and the lower
halves of the shuttle to provide gas. Note that Diver 1 indicator on panel remains red until the emergency
supply 1 bank has been depleted and the shuttle spring resets the lower half of the shuttle. At this point, diver 1
indicator will revert to green. the indicator rods lift to give a red indication.
6 - In the outer port #2, the lower half of the shuttle opens to compensate the loss of pressure and the upper half
closes as the result of the pressure of the gas from inlet port C and the force of the spring.
7 - The lower half of the shuttle diver 2 opens and closes to replace the inhaled gas in Outlet Port #2 according to
the respiratory cycles. Diver 2 panel indicator remains red.
Inlet port A
(Surface supply set 2 bar above the pressure from inboard banks)
Opening and closing
according to the flowing 2 1
from the ruptured umbilical Closed

5 6
Umbilical ruptured Closed
Opened (Isolated from
with gas flowing out
outer port #1)
To diver 1 To diver 2

6
Opening and closing 5
according to the flowing Opening and closing
from the ruptured umbilical 7 according to the
respiratory cycles
Onboard supply Onboard supply
Inlet port B 3 Bellman, BIBS, 4 Inlet port C
Emergency blow down
Outlet port #3
(Isolated from outer port #1)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 26 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Scenario D - Loss of surface supply
1 - In the case of a loss of surface supply the pressure differential of 2 bar, initially set up between the surface and
the onboard supplies, diminishes and eventually equalises with or becomes lower than the onboard supply
pressure.
2 - As a result, the upper parts of the shuttles close and the lower parts open. At this point the indicator rods lift to
give a red indication.
3 - The onboard supply No. 1, Port B, supplies the outlet ports #1 and #3. When diver #1 inhales, he creates a
depression that opens the lower shuttle, allowing the gas from the onboard banks to flow in the outlet port #1.
When diver #1 exhales, he creates an overpressure which, with the help of the spring, closes the lower shuttle.
The process is renewed at each respiration cycle. Due to the differential pressure, the upper part of the shuttle
remains closed.
4 - The onboard supply No. 2, Port C, supplies the outlet ports #2 and #3. The lower shuttle is opened and closed
according to the respiration cycles described above.
5 - Under static conditions the spring loaded auxiliary shuttle valve seals against each half of the block. They open
and close when the port #3 is solicited to supply Diver #3, Bibs, or the emergency blow down.
6 - When the surface supply is restored and the 2 bar differential pressure reinstated, the lower shuttles close and
the upper shuttles return to their original status. Note that the indicator returns to the green status.
Inlet port A
(Loss of surface supply)
1

Closed
Closed

Outlet port #1 2 2 Outlet port #2

To diver 1 To diver 2

Opening and closing Opening and closing

according to the 5 according to the
respiratory cycles respiratory cycles

Onboard supply Onboard supply

3 Bellman, BIBS, 4
Inlet port B Inlet port C
Emergency blow down
Outlet port #3
- Scenario E - Divers 1 and 2 umbilicals are severed
1 - In the case that divers 1 and 2 umbilicals are ruptured during the dive, the surface supply is unable to maintain
the flow and the pressure in Port A falls below the preset differential pressure (2 bar).
2 - As a result, the on board emergency banks 1 and 2 will be brought on line to both Ports B and C.
3 - Due to the ruptured umbilicals causing excessive free flow in the outlet ports #1 & #2 both the upper and
lower halves of Diver’s 1 and 2 shuttle provide gas until the contents of the surface and onboard banks are
depleted or the inlet valves are closed. Note that both indicators will remain at red until the two on board banks
are depleted or the valves closed, at which point they will revert to green.
4 - The bellman is supplied from emergency bank #3 (supply line #25 in the photo) and remains unaffected by the
loss of gas to divers 1 and 2.
Inlet port A
(Surface gas supplied normally)
1
Opening and closing Opening and closing
according to the flowing according to the flowing
from the ruptured umbilical from the ruptured umbilical

Outlet port #1 3 3 Outlet port #2

To diver 1 To diver 2

Opening and closing Opening and closing

according to the flowing according to the
from the ruptured umbilical flowing from the
ruptured umbilical
Onboard supply Onboard supply
2 Bellman, BIBS, 2
Inlet port B Inlet port C
Emergency blow down
Outlet port #3

Modern bells are connected to gas reclaim systems that recover the gas mixture breathed by divers, re-process it, and
deliver it into the supply system. The breathed gas is removed from the helmet, pass via the bell (see #35, to #40 in the
general scheme) from which it is sent to the reprocessing unit at the surface where the carbon dioxide, moisture, and

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 27 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
particulate or biological contaminant, are removed and oxygen is added. It is then compressed and stored for further use.
The gas is recovered to the surface by the suction resulting from the differential pressure between the surface and the
depth the bell is stored. However, a too lofty aspiration may injure or kill the divers. For this reason, a back pressure
regulator (#36 in the general scheme) is used to reduce the differential pressure to only 1 or 2 bar. Also, SAECO (supply
actuated exhaust cut-off) valves (#35 & #36 in the general scheme) are in place to isolate the divers from the exhaust line
in the case that the surface supply drops below the predetermined value. The principle of the SAECO valves is as
follows:
In a normal condition, the If the diver gas supply pressure
Indicator
supply pressure exerts a greater falls below a predetermined
force on the plunger body than value, the springs force the
the springs, so the valve is held piston to close.
open. Note that an indicator is
provided to show the status of
the valve.

Supply pressure No supply

Exhaust closed
Exhaust

Water traps are installed to remove the excess moisture from the gas sent to the reclaim system (see #38 in the general
scheme) They are made of robust transparent materials such as polycarbonates or similar. IMCA says that that the water
trap inside the bell must be readily accessible to the bellman. Also, NORSOK U100 also says that they must be designed
for simplicity of cleaning, disinfecting and drying, to prevent microbiological contamination.

Exhaust internal bell

SAECO valves
Back pressure regulator

Connections exhaust umbilicals

diver #1 & diver #2

Exhaust to surface

Water trap

Purge water trap

The metabolic consumption of oxygen of one diver during 1 hour is thirty litres. This oxygen must be renewed during the
bell run and in the case that the bell is lost. This is the function of the oxygen add system.
IMCA says that the oxygen supplied to the inside of the bell must be reduced to low pressure (normally < 40 bar). Also,
there must be a system which limits either the rate of flow or the volume which can enter in the bell to minimize the risk
of O2 building up. This is done through the oxygen add manifold and the buffer (#22 & #23 in the scheme) which is
explained below.
The O2 add manifold controls the O2 injection in the bell (or the HRC) by means of a buffer tank. The interlock between
the two valves prevent the O2 storage gas bottle to be in direct communication with the hyperbaric vessel when the buffer
tank is pressurised. The buffer tank is generally designed to contain 30 to 35 litres of oxygen.

Interlock
Valve

Inlet from oxygen bank

Outlet to scrubber

To oxygen buffer

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 28 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The principle of use is as follows: 6
1. Open the pilot valve of the O2 regulator (#1).
2. Open O2 supply valve (#2).
3. Move the interlock plate and open the

Oxygen
manifold valve No 1 (#3).
4. Adjust the pressure to 5 bar above the ambient
pressure (#4).
3 7
5. Open the valve of the buffer cylinder, and fill
the cylinder (#5). Close the valve No 1.
6. Scrubber on (#6) 5
1
7. Move the interlock plate above valve No 1 and
open the manifold valve No 2 (#7). At this
moment the dose of O2 is introduced in the 4
bell.
8. Close O2 supply valve (#2), Pilot valve (#1),
Buffer valve (#5). 2
As already said, valves carrying oxygen (or mixes with more than 25% oxygen) at a pressure higher than 15 bar must not
be quarter turn (See #1 in the picture on the next page). Note that the American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM) recommends needle valves with a non-rotating stem. IMCA says: “Due to the depths involved in saturation
diving, the pressure of such gases will often require to be above 15 bar. All valves and pipework must be cleaned for
oxygen service when used for gas mixes containing more than 25% oxygen. This may be demonstrated by means of a
suitable procedure to ensure cleanliness which is applied when any components are new, first installed, or moved.”

CO2 may quickly build up if it is not regularly removed. IMCA D 024 says: There must be a powered scrubber unit to
provide primary CO2 removal from the atmosphere.
The scrubbers in use in bells are composed of a cartridge of soda sorb into which a blower pushes the bell atmosphere.
Note that the hot water coil is sometimes fitted to the bottom of the scrubber (see below). However, it often happens that
the hot water coil is in a separated device. Besides, the blower is used to mix the O2 added through the O2 add system to
the chamber atmosphere. The scrubbers are designed to be energized by the onboard batteries of the bell.
Canister cover
Carbon dioxide Carbon dioxide
contaminated gas contaminated gas

Canister body
Soda sorb

Canister

Fan unit Fan assembly

Hot water coil Hot water inlet

Heater assembly
Hot water outlet
Fan unit Hot water inlet
Hot water outlet
O2 add
Fan assembly
O2 add
Re-conditioned gas Re-conditioned gas

Note that the following elements should be taken into account:

● IMCA D 024 says: The bell diving supervisor should have control of the bell blow-down at all times

● As with the external of the bell, Hollow penetrators must be fitted with protection valves or other devices to stop
catastrophic pressure loss. They must be clearly marked to show their function (see #2 in the photo on the next
page). Also, IMCA D 024 says that any open-ended exhaust pipework must be fitted with guards for finger
protection (see #3 on the next page). Any gas inlet pipework should be fitted with some form of a diffuser.
● Valves must be free of corrosion and should move freely through their full range of operation.

● Lighting must be provided to allow reading gauges or documents, operating the gas control panel and any other
instruments, and dressing and undressing the divers (see in the photo above and #4 on the next page). These
lights are often composed of 24 volts bulbs powered by the main electrical supply from the surface. Also,
battery-powered backup lighting must be provided. Note that there must be sufficient energy in the onboard
batteries to supply the backup lighting system for at least 24 hours. A lot of modern bells are designed with
lights that are automatically switched to the onboard batteries in the case of loss of electrical supply from the
surface. These systems must be tested during the checklist.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 29 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● Depth gauges must be provided to let the divers know both the internal and external depth of the bell (see #5 in
the picture below and #21 & #44 in the general scheme). Also, there must be gauges or an alternative system to
monitor the pressure of the onboard gas cylinders from both inside and outside the bell. The frequency of
calibration of the gauges must not be less than six months.
● O2 and CO2 analysers must be available in the bell so the divers can monitor the atmosphere independent of the
surface (see #6 in the picture below). Also, hydrocarbon and H2S analysers are mandatory and must be in place.

2 4

3 1

6
5

Bottom flooding system:

The lifting of a helpless body fully inside the bell from a point below floor level requires strenuous physical effort.
Raising the level of the water inside the bell can help in this matter as a higher water level will help the bellman or the
divers to climb back inside. Nevertheless, care must be taken not to fully flood the bell.
For this reason, a partial flooding system is designed to avoid the bell being totally flooded if the valve is left open while
the bellman is leaving the bell to rescue the diver (see #1 in the pictures below).
IMCA D 024 says point 6.12:“There should be a valve fitted to allow partial flooding of the bell by the bellman. This
should be in an easily accessible position and clearly visible. This valve should be in addition to the internal hull stop
valve. This valve should be protected from accidental opening”.
Important: The operating valve must be reachable from the trunking. Note that, with some bells, if the bellman does
forget to raise the level before leaving the bell, he may have great difficulty in getting back inside.

Internal hatch

Gooseneck height fixed

1
Goosenecks have the same for level of bell flooding
level inlet and outlet
1 Maximum water level

Operating valve
“Hull stop” valve

Spring loaded valve with a flexible

hose for bilge draining (see #2)

Trunk

External hatch
2

Heating system:
As the water is very cold at depth, the bell must be fitted with a means for warming the divers in the water and inside the
bell. Conventional systems in use are based on hot water flowing from the surface through a heater in the bell and the
suits of the divers. The heater in the bell is generally integrated into the scrubber. That gives the advantage that the
exchanges with the chamber atmosphere are speed up by the fan of the scrubber. IMCA says that this requirement only
applies to areas of the world where the ambient water temperature at the diving depth requires the diver to be heated.
However, even though the water is hot at shallow depths in tropical and equatorial seas, it generally becomes too cold for
long interventions at depths deeper than 40 metres. For this reason, hot water supply to the bell should be ready for use
anytime and everywhere in the world. IMCA also says that there should be:
● A means of monitoring the hot water supply temperature inside the bell.

● A means of isolating the bell heater from the divers’ hot water supply.

● Note that new bells are equipped with sensors allowing to monitor the temperature of the bell and the divers.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 30 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● A means of heating the divers inspired gas if Side block shroud
diving at depths below 150 msw:
The system consists of a rubber shroud inside Regulator shroud
which hot water flows. This shroud completely
encases the side block, bent tube, and the
regulator of the helmet to isolate the hot water
flow from the surrounding cold water and so
provide efficient gas heating. It is connected to
the hot water supply of the diver by a splitter
block assembly.

Hot Water inlet Hot water pressure

Scrubber / Heater #1
(Valve #43) Hot Water Diver #1
(Valve 49)

Hot Water return from Wire temperature sensor

Scrubber / Heater #1
(Valve #46)
Hot Water Diver #2
Hot Water supply (Valve 50)

Hot Water inlet Hot Water Diver #3

Scrubber / Heater #2 (Valve 51)
(Valve #45)

Hot Water return from Hot Water dump

Scrubber / Heater #2 (Valve 48)
(Valve #47)

IMCA says that there must be a

means of isolating the bell heater
from the divers’ hot water supply.
In this example, this requirement is Scrubber #1
achieved through ¼ turn valves that
are suitably arranged to isolate each Temperature gauge
function. (0 to 100ºC)

Isolation valve
Main hot water supply 46
43
Emergency supply 49 Hot Water Diver #1

44 50 Hot Water Diver #2

51
45
47
48

Pressure gauge
(0 to 40 bar)

External wall of the bell

Scrubber #2

Hot Water dump

Hot Water Diver #3

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 31 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Bottom doors opening and closure (source: LEXMAR & UDS):
As the bottom doors are weighty, moving them manually requires extreme efforts. For this reason, they are opened and
closed by hydraulic actuators that are operated from the inside of the bell using manual hydraulic pumps. They can also
be operated from externally. In addition to the comfort they provide, the hydraulic actuators prevent the divers from
being injured and the seals and the hatches from being damaged. The system is generally designed as follows:
● The hydraulic oil that is stored in a hydraulic tank (see #1 in the drawing below) is pumped manually to the
hydraulic circuit (See #2). An accumulator (see #3) maintains the system at the ideal pressure.
● The Directional Control Valves (see #4 in the drawing) allows selecting whether the door is going to be closed
or opened.
● The hydraulic fluid is pushed inside the actuator that opens or closes the door, depending on the direction of the
flux (see #5 & #6 in the drawing).
● Counterbalance valves (see #7 in the picture) are installed to create a back-pressure that prevents the door from
free falling when the directional valve that controls the actuator is shifted to lower the load. This system protects
the divers from being injured by a door closing unexpectedly and prevents the doors and their seals from being
damaged as a result of shocks resulting from uncontrolled closing or opening.

Directional control valve N2

4 Accumulator
3 Oil

Manual pump

2
Oil tank
1
Oil

Counter balance valve

7
Close

Open
5

6 Connectors external pump

Direction of flux One way valve Quick-connectors Manual pump

Pressure gauge ¼ turn valve Filter Directional control valve
Pressure regulating valve Needle valve Pressurization silencer Counter -balancing valve

● Note that two types of actuators are used:

○Linear actuators are composed of a piston that moves out and retracts from and in a cylinder, which
creates motion in a straight line such as with hydraulic jacks (see scheme below). They are often used to
open and close the internal bottom door of the bell (see #5 in the drawing above).

Fluid inlet/outlet Fluid inlet/outlet

Cylinder Piston

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 32 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
○ Rotary actuators are composed of a piston moving in a cylinder that activates gears that create a
rotational motion (see the scheme below). They have the advantage of being compact and are often used
to open and close the external bottom doors (see #6 in the general drawing).
Fluid inlet/outlet Piston (linear movements) Fluid inlet/outlet

Cylinder

Gears
Rotational movement

Communications to and from the diving supervisor should be provided to each diver and the bellman:
The communications of the divers are those of the helmets. The communications of the bellman are composed of an
intercom, a sound powered-telephone, and a through water communication system. These devices should be water
resistant and be installed in the upper parts of the bell.
● The intercom that is directly connected to the dive control is generally installed on the wall of the bell (see #1 in
the picture below). It should be equipped with a "bell button" that can be used by the bellman to attract the
attention of the supervisor when a conversation is required.
● A sound-powered telephone (see #2) is a communication device powered by the sound pressure of the voice of
the user rather than batteries or an electrical power source. When the user speaks into the mouthpiece, the sound
waves of his voice cause a diaphragm to vibrate. The vibrations are transferred from the diaphragm through a
drive rod to an armature centered in a wire coil that generates an electrical current. The current then is
transmitted to the earpiece of the receiver, where the process is reversed. As a result, the person at the other end
of the circuit hears the sounds transmitted. Note that the earpiece and the mouthpiece can be used
interchangeably. As a result, the user can talk into the earpiece or hear through the mouthpiece, which allows
continuing a conversation if one of these two elements fails. Ringing is accomplished by a manually activated
magneto producing sufficient electrical power to operate a howler at the called station.
● Through water communications, also called Emergency bell communicator, are wireless communications that
must be available to allow the supervisor to talk to the divers inside the bell when it is in the water and
communications through wired systems are no more possible. The system operates by using high frequency
ultrasonic sound waves that are passed through the water between the bell and the surface vessel. The set
installed in the bell is powered by the onboard batteries of the bell or a dedicated battery pack (see #3).

3
2

Note that NORSOK U100 says that a means for processing of speech (unscrambling) should be available when using
helium mixtures and used when required. A Modified Rhyme Test (MRT) should be used to verify that the operational
communications systems are in accordance with the requirements of the table below.
Communication requirement MRT score

Exceptionally high intelligibility; separate syllables understood 0.97

Normally acceptable intelligibility; about 98 % of sentences correctly heard; single digits understood 0.91

Minimally acceptable intelligibility; limited standardized phrases understood; about 90% sentences
0.75
correctly heard (not acceptable for operational equipment).

Cameras connected to a Close Circuit Television must be installed in the bell. They should be arranged in such way that
the diving supervisor has a panoramic internal view of the bell and can observe the bellman and the divers during the
dives and when performing the checklists.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 33 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Other requirements to take into account:
● The umbilicals must be appropriately stored. It is achieved by the means of dedicated supports to which they are
secured. In the bell taken as an example below, only divers’ 1 & 2 umbilicals are stored inside the bell despite its
internal volume of 6 m³ (see the photo below from the CCTV).
● IMCA D 024 says: There must be a seat provided in the bell for the bellman.
This seat should have a restraining harness or lap belt fitted which is available
for use. There must also be a means of restraining each diver during ascent and
descent in order to minimise the risk of injury. Note: This does not signify a
separate seat for each diver.
The restraining of divers can be achieved by the use of handles adequately
positioned. Nevertheless, a lot of bells, such as the bell from UDS Lichtenstein
below, are equipped with a seat for each diver (note that these seats are provided
with lap belts instead of harnesses). These seats usually are retractable, so they
can be folded up not to disturb the divers if necessary.

● IMCA also says: Consideration should be given to providing a means to stop the bellman falling into the open
manway either as a result of a slip or of losing consciousness. Note that this requirement is optional
● A lifting device must be installed in the bell to recover and secure an unconscious diver into the bell. The system
must be arranged to lift the casualty up as high as possible inside the bell to clear the trunking. For this reason,
the topside pulley is connected to a padeye which is welded to the top of the bell and centralized above the
middle of the bottom hatch. IMCA says that consideration should be given to providing a second pulley system
in the case of bells where more than one diver may be locked out. Also, the attachment points for the pulleys
inside the bell should be designed for the purpose and approved by a competent person.
Note that during the bell run, the hook of the lifting device should be deployed and adjusted around 1 foot
below the hatch.

Pulley fastened to the ceiling

and centralized to the middle
of the bottom hatch

Lever hoist
Lever hoist

Centralized line
ready for use

Feet above the bottom

hatch which can be closed
1 foot

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 34 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Individual emergency breathing system:
IMCA D 024 says: An oral/nasal or full face BIBS mask must be supplied for each occupant of the bell. This should be
capable of providing breathing gas either from the surface or from the on board cylinders.
Built-In Breathing System (BIBS) masks are also used in chambers to provide breathing gas in an emergency. These
masks must be always ready for use. In the LEXMAR bells taken as an example, they are connected to the sides of the
gas management panel using quick connectors. Note that there must be one mask for each diver plus one that is kept as a
backup.
Depending on the model, the supply pressure for the mask generally ranges from 5 bar to 12 bar over the ambient bell
pressure. Most masks can be adjusted to the optimum breathing resistance using a flow control knob.
The system consists of one membrane connected by two levers to an inlet valve and an outlet valve. When the diver
inspires, the movement of the membrane opens the inlet valve and closes the outlet valve. When the diver expires, the
movement of the diaphragm closes the inlet valve and opens the outlet valve.
Quick connector inlet
Quick connector outlet
Lever outlet valve
Lever inlet valve
Outlet valve
Inlet valve

Control knob

Membrane
Inlet Outlet
Membrane protector

Individual emergency CO2 removal and heating systems:

IMCA says: There should be a means provided, independent of surface supplies, to maintain the diver’s body temperature
and reduce CO2 for a minimum period of 24 hours in an emergency. This will normally be by means of survival bags and
emergency scrubbers. Note: The heating requirement only applies to areas of the world where the ambient water
temperature at the diving depth (or the depth the bell may descend to) requires the divers to be heated. The CO2
reduction requirement will apply in all circumstances.
Lung Powered Scrubbers are used in hyperbaric environments to ensure
the scrubbing of carbon dioxide contained in breathing gases in the
event of a breakdown of gas supplies and ventilation.
The system consists of a mask connected by a ringed flexible hose to a
cylinder that contains a cartridge of soda sorb. This cartridge that is
designed to be used for 4 hours can be easily and quickly changed.
Sufficient refills must be provided to ensure at least 24 hrs breathing in
case of a lost bell. They must be stored in sealed containers that fully
isolate them from the atmosphere.
Lung powered scrubbers must be included in the survival kit of the bell
and be regularly checked for integrity.
The survival bags should be specifically designed to be used in diving bells and may have active heating systems.
Regarding this point, NORSOK U100 says: Shallower than 180 msw it may or may not include active heating (from e.g.
electric energy). However, deeper than 180 msw it shall include active heating (from e.g. electric energy). The survival
system shall ensure the occupants' ability to participate in the rescue operation.
They should be stored in dry and fully sealed bags to protect them from the moist atmosphere found in bells.

Other emergency devices:

A copy of the AODC/IMCA emergency tapping code must be easily accessible to the bell occupants. Remember that this
code must also be displayed on the outside of the bell. Also, IMCA says that a plasticized copy of the relevant emergency
procedures must be available inside the bell with the list of valve positions to be adopted in an emergency. These
procedures and list should duplicate those kept in dive control.
A medical kit that conforms with DMAC 15 list must be available and stored in a dedicated waterproof container that is
marked with a white cross on a green background. This kit should be checked at least every 6 months
Also, the following tools that are not listed in IMCA D 024 should be available in the bell. Note that they must be
adequately stored.
● Pliers and spanners that can be used to disconnect the wires and the umbilical or perform a quick repair.

● A cable cutter and a saw to cut the ruptured umbilical.

● A blank for closing a damaged porthole.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 35 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.2.8 - Optional cutters or release mechanisms of the umbilical and lift wires operated from inside the bell
In the case of a lost bell that has to be recovered to the surface, the remaining parts of umbilical and wires should usually
be cut or released.
Several systems exist to cut or release the umbilical and wires from inside the bell, avoiding the need to send a diver or
the supporting ROV to perform this task. Nevertheless, note that these systems are only optional and that the majority of
bells currently in service are not fitted with them.
IMCA says that:
● The system must be capable of operation from inside the bell, and the operating mechanism must be protected
against accidental operation.
● Two independent actions are needed to operate the cutters or release mechanisms.

● If the cutters or release mechanisms are operated by means of pressurisation (gas or hydraulic), then isolations
need to be in place such that it cannot be activated accidentally by external water pressure, internal gas pressure,
or leakage of the hydraulic circuit.
● Visual examination and function test should be performed at least every 6 months and a full examination and
function test every year

Example #1: Lifting wire release system

The socket eye is held directly by the ramrod.

Removing the rod releases the socket

The hydraulic ram is actuated by a

manual pump located inside the bell.

Example #2: Guide wire release system

As for the lifting wire release system,the hydraulic ram

is actuated by a manual pump located inside the bell.

Example #3: Umbilical cutter

The hydraulically operated device presented allows
cutting an umbilical of a diameter up to 120 mm.

The system consists of a guillotine of which Hydraulic piston

the blade is actuated by a hydraulic piston

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 36 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.2.9 - Maintenance
During the operations, all the components of the bell must be visually checked and function tested before every dive.
Also, the manufacturer provides the following guidelines regarding daily, weekly and monthly maintenance:
- Daily maintenance:
● Visual inspection of the inside and the outside of the bell for damage.

● Washing of the exterior of the bell if prone to oil / mud etc.

● Battery diaphragm checks and removal of the gas in excess.

● Tests of the Through Water Communication System.

- Weekly maintenance:
● Close visual inspection of the sealing faces and O‐rings

● Close visual inspection of the batteries and their containers.

● Checks of the quality and clarity of the mineral oil of the external bell enclosures. (Note that a degraded quality
may indicate water intrusion).
- Monthly maintenance:
● Visual check of viewports, pipework, electrical wiring, and hull penetrators.

● Lighting, heating, and scrubber checks.

● Inspection of the hull beneath the floor plates (possible accumulated water or corrosion).

● Valve function tests.

● Verification of the Labels of the penetrators.

● Visual inspection of webbing straps and stitching on bags.

The six-monthly and longer frequencies inspections recommended by the manufacturer conform with those of IMCA
Diving Equipment Systems Inspection Guidance Note (DESIGN) D 024. They are used for the regular audits and
certification of the bell:

Visual external + Visual internal + Internal + external+

Items function test , external + leak test at leak test 1,5 max. Other
calibration max. Working pressure working pressure

Design and According to the

manufacturer certification body

Pressure vessel 6 months 2 ½ years 5 years

Viewports 6 months 2 ½ years 5 years 10 years old max.

Buoyant ascent:
6 months
Secure mechanism.
Buoyant ascent:
6 months Test buoyancy: 1 year
Other components
Dry function test: 1 year (Overload NDE of critical
Ballast release system
1 year static test) items: 1 year
Visual: 6 months
Cutter/ release system Dry function test :
1 year

Transponder 6 months

External cylinders 6 months 2 years 4 years

Interlock pipework 6 months 2 years

Overpressure relief valve 6 months 2 ½ years

External battery pack : Renewal bursting

6 months 2 ½ years
overpressure relief testing discs: 10 years
Valves, Pipework, fittings
6 months 2 years 1st installation
(external)

Electrical 6 months

Gauges 6 months

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 37 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Visual external + Visual internal + Internal + external+

Items function test , external + leak test at leak test 1,5 max. Other
calibration max. Working pressure working pressure

Emergency survival packs and 6 months: (Water ingress Fully checked and
passive scrubbers and integrity packaging) repacked: 12 months

Gas monitoring (O2 and CO2) 6 months

Bell contamination control 6 months

Gas cylinder pressure gauges 6 months

Communication (all systems) 6 months

Approval pulley attachment

Permanent
point inside the bell

Medical equipment (DMAC 15) 6 months

Valves, Pipework, fittings

6 months 2 years 1st installation
(internal)

Electrical (internal) 6 months

Alarm (internal) 6 months

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 38 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.2 - Divers’ excursion umbilicals

1.1.2.1 - Function
Divers’ excursion umbilicals are life lines that link the divers to the bell and provide the following functions:
● Gas supplies and exhausts:
○ Gas supply hose
○ Divers’ #1 & #2 gas reclaim exhaust. Note that this function is not available for the standby diver as his
mask is not equipped with reclaim.
● Temperature & depth control
○ Hot water supply
○ Depth control through pneumo hose which can also be used as a backup gas supply in the case of an
emergency.
○ Telemetry. Note that this function is optional and performed through an electronic sensor installed at the
end of the umbilical and sending information such as the depth and dive profile of the diver to a computer
in the dive control.
● Communications & video recording
○ Communications to the dive control
○ Helmet camera wiring
○ Helmet light wiring
The excursion umbilical is also used to recover an injured or unconscious diver into the bell. For this reason, it must be
extremely robust and resist the traction exerted by the diver and the tender during a critical recovery.

1.1.2.2 - Fabrication requirement

A good umbilical must be in one piece and able to slide easily to allow a recovery of the diver in any circumstance.
Umbilical assemblies in use in the diving industry are of two basic constructions; spiral-wound and parallel.
● Spiral-wound umbilicals are manufactured industrially as only machines allow producing this type of equipment
with perfect twisting. Their strength comes from their spiral construction where hoses and cables are supporting
each other. They resist kinking and abrasion and provide good flexibility, which allows them to slide along
obstacles without being caught and damaged. As a result, they are recommended and imposed by most clients.
● Parallel (taped) assemblies are generally homemade umbilicals where hoses and cables are bought separately
and taped together around a rope that is designed not to extend while under traction. These umbilicals are no
more used in the majority of the saturation diving sites as most clients request manufactured spiral-wound
umbilicals with a guarantee from the manufacturer.
Also, even though some isolated clients do not impose these requirements, home umbilicals are far from the
level of safety of industrial umbilicals because it often happens that the cables and hoses are not perfectly
grouped, which results in an umbilical with asperities and buckles that can be caught in debris or parts of the
structures and can preclude the recovery of the diver. Besides, they do not offer the degree of flexibility of
spiral-wound umbilicals, and the grey tape commonly used to keep the hoses and cables together has to be
replaced often. For these reasons, such umbilicals should not be used.
The previous generation of umbilical breathing hoses was made of rubber or PVC compounds. New generation hoses are
made predominantly from polyurethane, which is a polymer without potentially harmful additives. Also, US Navy says
that the maximum life of a rubber breathing hose should be limited to twelve years, and that synthetic umbilical
assemblies do not deteriorate significantly with age, and may remain in service as long as it is deemed to be satisfactory.
The size and working pressure of the hoses and cables that compose the umbilicals are commonly as follows (Note that
the telemetry cable, which is optional, is not indicated in this table)

Internal External Working Weight in

Item Common colour Burst pressure
diameter diameter pressure seawater

9.5 mm (3/8”) 17.5 mm (0.69”) 35 bar 140 bar 52 g/m

Gas supply hose Yellow or blue
12.7 mm (1/2”) 21 mm (0.83”) 35 bar 140 bar 128 g/m

Pneumo hose Blue or yellow 6.5 mm (1/4”) 11.5 mm (0.45”) 35 bar 140 bar 16 g/m

Hot water hose Black 12.7 mm (1/2”) 21 mm (0.83”) 25 bar 100 bar 105 g/m

Reclaim hose Black 16 mm (5/8”) 27 mm (1.6”) 69 bar 276 bar 95 g/m

Comms cable Red N/A 10.8 mm (0.43”) N/A N/A 21 g/m

Light cable Not specified N/A 8 mm (0.31”) N/A N/A 20 g/m

Video cable Orange N/A 11 mm (0.43”) N/A N/A 70 g/m

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 39 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Also, note the following:
● Hoses and cables that compose the umbilical must be in one piece.

● There must be four wires into the communication cable to allow the installation of duplex communications. A
duplex communication system enables all parties connected to the system to talk and listen at the same time.
● Safety and manufacturer organizations say that only swaged/crimped fittings should be used with hoses.
Precautions must be implemented to be sure that these fittings conform with those of the helmet and the bell.
● The communication, light, and video fittings that are installed onto the cables at the diver’s end must be
waterproof. US Navy says that the preferred method of construction is to have the fitting molded onto the cable
as with “marsh marine” connectors. However, there are several commercial self-curing rubbers, or epoxy kits
can be used for sealing these types of connectors. Also, electrical and communication fittings which body is
made of copper or brass and are waterproofed by the use of O rings and mechanical sealing systems can be used.
However, these fittings which are often employed on bells and ROVs are expensive.
● Hoses must be tested at 1.5 times the working pressure when new or repaired.

● IMCA recommends that the diver's end of the umbilical is fitted with a means which allows it to be securely
fastened to the diver’s safety harness without putting any strain on the individual whip ends. This is generally
done by the use of a D ring that is seized by nylon ropes onto the umbilical. US Navy says that the D ring must
be welded and be able to hold a weight of 227 kg (500 pounds). US Navy also says that when seizing the D-ring
to the umbilical assembly, wraps must be tight, but care must be taken to ensure that the hoses and cables are not
crushed or pinched.
A device with a locking mechanism should be used to link the D ring of the umbilical to the D ring of the
harness. A 3¾”/100 mm carabiner is often used for this purpose.

Nylon rope

D ring Karabiner with screw lock mechanism

Also, the lengths of the hoses and cables after the D ring must be adjusted to allow comfortable movements to
the diver. However, these lengths must not be in excess. Thus, they must be calculated in function of the
position of the attachment of the umbilical on the harness.

1.1.2.3 - Installation in the bell

IMCA D 024 says that the umbilical must be marked for length at least every 10 m using a recognized system which
allows easy visual identification of the length paid out. However, NORSOK and a lot of organizations say that the
umbilicals must be marked for length at least every 5 metres using a system similar to the one displayed below which is
the system recommended in this manual:

Umbilical length Black tape Red tape

5m 1 turn

10 m 1 turn

15 m 1 turn + 1 turn

20 m 2 turns

25 m 2 turns + 1 turn

30 m 3 turns

35 m 3 turns + 1 turn

40 m 4 turns

45 m 4 turns + 1 turn

50 m 1 broad turn

55 m 1 turn

60 m 1 turn

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 40 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
NORSOK U 100 says that when determining the maximum umbilical length, the following safety factors should be taken
into consideration:
▪ The distance from the diver to the nearest hazard point (thrusters, seawater intake, etc.) should be a minimum of
5 metres;
▪ duration of bail-out equipment;
▪ breathing resistance;
▪ thermal conditions;
▪ umbilical storage, deployment, handling and recovery;
▪ wet tendering;
▪ ROV survey with mapping of debris/ obstructions;
▪ positioning and stability of the work-site
Also IMCA & NORSOK say that the bellman’s umbilical should be 2 metres (6½ feet) longer than the working diver(s)
umbilical.
As a result, the maximum allowable distances of the divers must be clearly identified for each diving operation and the
umbilicals restricted in the bell to these maximum lengths. The means of restriction must be sufficiently solid not to be
removed unexpectedly, and smooth enough not to damage the umbilical. Dedicated ropes securing the umbilicals to their
supports are commonly used for this purpose. Also, the fittings of the umbilicals in the bell must be protected from direct
tractions. For this reason, the fastening of the umbilical must be designed in the same manner as for the diver's end.
Note that NORSOK standard U100 says: “The length of the diver's umbilical shall be limited to the length considered
necessary at any given time, and shall not exceed 45 m from point of tending in the bell/wet bell/basket.”

1.1.2.4 - Backup excursion umbilical and their storage

Note that backup excursion umbilicals are not mandatory with IMCA or NORSOK. However, they should be available
on site in case one of those in service has to be repaired.
It must be understood that repairing a damaged umbilical may take time and require specific equipment. As a result, the
diving operations may be delayed which is not conceivable in the scope of expensive operations such as saturation
diving. For this reason, replacement excursion umbilicals are often required by the clients. They should be ready for
immediate use and stored in such condition that they will not be damaged by the surrounding activities and the external
weather conditions.
Also, regarding the umbilical of the surface standby diver, IMCA says that an adequate stowage allowing it to be coiled
up away from risks of damage and such that a minimum bend radius of components is not compromised should be
provided. These recommendations should be applied to stored umbilicals.

1.1.2.5 - Maintenance
Umbilicals must be checked and function tested before every dive. Also, IMCA D 024 says the following:
● The continuity and resistance of all cables must be checked every six months. Also, the other electrical
components of the umbilical should be examined and function tested at the same time.
● Hose components should be carefully monitored, and function tested every six months. Also, they must be tested
to their maximum working pressure every two years. Besides, they must be hydro tested to 1.5 times their
maximum working pressure when they are new or as recommended by the manufacturer or the certification
body.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 41 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.3 - Diving suits

Diving suits are of primary importance to protect the diver from wounds, marine growths, venomous animals, and of
course, isolate him from the effect of cold waters that are often encountered at depth. Note that water has a thermal
conductivity of 0.606 Watt per metre Kelvin (W/mK) at 25 ºC when air is only 0.0262 W/mK.
Two means of protection are proposed by the manufacturers: Passive and active protection.
● Passive protection suits are based on materials, such as foamed neoprene, that isolate the diver from the
surrounding medium. Thus, they slow down the loss of heat during a limited time that depends on the
temperature of the water, the convection due to the underwater current, and the pressure at depth, which crushes
the isolation materials. As a result, depending on the surrounding conditions, the divers may become
hypothermic if these suits are used for too long exposures.
● Active protections suits are designed to supply heat that is monitored to provide a comfortable temperature
allowing the diver to work a long time. Modern systems are all based on suits heated by hot water. However,
electrically-heated diving suits have been studied and tested in the past.
As diving operations in saturation imply long dive times, active protections suits are the most appropriate..

1.1.3.1 - Neoprene hot water suits

These suits that are made of pre-compressed 4 mm neoprene or thicker standard neoprene are reinforced by an anti-
abrasion lining and are designed with a zip to allow easy dressing. Besides, rubber protections are glued to the knee and
elbow areas, which are the most exposed to shocks and wear.
They are the continuation, and in fact, the termination of the hot water circuit installed in the bell: Thus, the hot water is
delivered from the surface to the bell, and then to the divers through the water hose of the umbilical. This hose is
connected to a manifold situated on the right-hand side at a hip level using a quick connector that must be designed to be
secured. This manifold, that must allow for easy adjusting of the flow of water, must be designed with a water dump
option to divert the water flow outside the suit if necessary.
The hot water is distributed by small flexible tubes carrying it from the manifold to the wrists and ankles, in addition to
those in place to heat the bulb and the spinal cord. This hot water distribution system should capable of supplying a flow
of up to 30 litres per minute. Note that the flow and the temperature of the hot water are monitored and adjusted by the
diving supervisor according to the indications of the diver. The manifold of the suit is only used to refine the adjustments
made at the surface or shut off the water supply if it becomes scalding.
The suit is closed by appropriate boots and gloves that are selected according to the operation to perform. These items are
generally fitted with long sleeves to slow down the flow moving out of the suit by these openings.
In the case that the hot water supply is lost the neoprene allows sufficient passive protection to return to the bell safely.
Note that when performing the pre-dive checks, the following points should be closely monitored:
● There must not be tears or excessive wear of the neoprene cloth, and the teeth of the zip must be in perfect
conditions with the slider moving smoothly.
● The manifold must be easy to open and close, and the small tubes must be all in place and connected.

● The quick connection of the hot water hose of the umbilical must be able to be secured and not to be
disconnected unexpectedly; The male coupler must not have any visible shock, and the ring of the female
coupler should move and lock easily with all the locking balls in place.

Hot water
connector

Hot water manifold

Hot water tube

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 42 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.3.2 - Hot water suits made of linen cloth or similar
The neoprene hot water suits described above are often too hot in shallow tropical waters
and outfits that are made of heavy linen cloth are usually preferred. They can be suits that
are specifically manufactured for this purpose or modified and reinforced robust coveralls.
They are supplied with hot water with the same components as a neoprene hot water suit.
However, they do not offer any extra buoyancy and passive thermal protection, which
limits their usage to depths less than 100 m.
Rubber gloves and reinforced boots generally close them. However, neoprene socks are
worn when fins are used. As with neoprene suits and standard working coveralls, a sturdy
zip allows easy dressing.
Suits made of linen are sufficiently robust to protect against corals, shells and small
shocks. However, they should not be used if there is the risk of cold underwater currents.
Thus, when the conditions at the location are doubtful, a neoprene hot water suit should be
preferred.
Also, linen clothes are often aggressive to wet skin, and it is recommended to use soft
under-suits to protect it. It is also recommended that these under suits are designed to
follow the shapes of the body as the openings of the linen suits are often imperfectly
sealed and wide enough to allow small venomous animals such as jellyfish and others to
enter into them. As these suits do not offer any thermal protection, wet suits made of
foamed neoprene 3 mm or thicker are often used.
The points to closely monitor during pre-dive checks are those already described for the
neoprene hot water suits.

1.1.3.3 - Hot water undersuits

They are liners which stops suit chafe and direct contact of the hot water to the skin.
As with wetsuits used for swimming, they are made of foamed neoprene 3 mm thickness
that is protected from wear and other damages by an external sheet of lycra or a similar
textile. They are generally one-piece suits. Nevertheless, suits composed of two pieces can
be used.
Due to their elasticity, such suits follow perfectly the shapes of the body and the flow of
water entering into them is reduced to a very minimum that is then trapped underneath the
neoprene layer. Thus, the body is isolated from direct contact with the hot water. Also,
they offer additional isolation if the hot water supply fails.
The performances of a wetsuit depends on the number and the size of the bubbles that are
in the neoprene foam. The high-density neoprenes are more compressed and have more
small bubbles. As a result, they are less subject to crushing and buoyancy change than low-
density neoprene. Thus, they are offering better thermal protection and are often used to
manufacture diving suits such as neoprene hot water suits. However, their inconvenience is
that they are not as soft as low-density neoprenes that, despite more reduced isolation, are
preferred for undersuits that must allow maximum movements.
It must be noted that these undersuits are designed to be worn underneath hot water suits
that are made of 4 mm high-density neoprene or thick non-compressed neoprene.
However, when hot water suits made of linen cloth are used their thickness, and isolating
materials can be selected to compensate for the absence of isolation offered by these suits.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 43 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.4 - Diving harness

1.1.4.1 - Description
Each diver (including the standby) should be provided with a safety harness. This harness should be manufactured to an
appropriate and recognized standard and be fit for the purpose it is to be used.
Note that the standards published according to which these items are manufactured such as EN 361, ISO 10333-1, ANSI
Z359.11, are those for the design of “full body harnesses” which are personal protective equipment against falls from a
height. However even though their conception and process of manufacturing are very similar, there are differences
between harnesses that are designed to stop a fall and the diving harnesses which aim is the recovery of an injured diver
from the water and the securing of his umbilical.
For this reason, diving harnesses should never be used for working at height, and a harness which purpose is to stop a fall
should not be used underwater as it is not designed for that.
Among the common elements found on each type of harness we can note the following:
● Webbing and sewing threads should be made from virgin filament or multi-filament synthetic fibres suitable for
their intended use. According to EN 361, the breaking tenacity (Tensile Strength) should be at least 0,6 N/tex
(one N/Tex is the same as one GPa per gram per cm³).
● The threads used for sewing must be physically compatible with the webbing, and the quality must be
compatible with that of the webbing. They must be of a contrasting shade or colour to facilitate visual
inspections.
● A harness must comprise straps or similar elements which are placed near the pelvic area and on the shoulders.
It must fit the wearer and means of adjustment should be provided.
● The harness should be designed in such a way that straps cannot migrate from their position and be loosen by
themselves. Also, the width of the straps that support the body must be at least 40 mm and the other straps at
least 20 mm. Note that the straps which support the torso or exert pressure on it must be the primary straps.
● The securing buckles must be designed in such a way that they can only be assembled in a correct manner. If
they are capable of being assembled in more than one way, each method of assembly must conform to the
strength and performance requirements.
● Metallic fittings must be treated against corrosion. As a result, evidence of corrosion of the metal is not
acceptable. However, the presence of tarnishing and white scaling is acceptable.
● Marking on the harness must be in the language of the country of destination or in a common language. The
marking must include the following:
○ A pictogram to indicate that users must read the information supplied by the manufacturer.
○ The model/type identification mark of the harness, the standard the harness conforms to, the name of the
manufacturer, the reference number, and the date of manufacture.
○ The 1st date of service should be written on it in such a way that it is clearly visible and cannot be erased.
Regarding the particularities of diving harnesses note the following:
● The D link dedicated to connecting the lifting gear is a the top of the harness to be easily accessible despite the
bailout and not in between the shoulders as with the stop fall harnesses. This D link must be sufficiently wide
and robust enough to connect a sling or a small hook and recover an injured diver to the bell when necessary. As
a result, it must be capable of withstanding the weight of the diver and a dynamic shock that may result from
bad handling. Note that the tests performed for "full body harnesses" by manufacturers consist of a falling
dummy of 100 kg on a vertical distance of 4 m.
● There must be an attachment for the umbilical of the diver that is commonly situated at a hip level for the
saturation divers. However, connectors at chest level are often used for surface orientated diving. Remember that
US navy says that this D link must be welded and be able to hold a weight of 227 kg (500 pounds).
● A backpack may or may not be fitted to the harness.

Marking (inside the harness) D link for lifting device

Additional D link

Adjustable straps

Adjustable belt
D link umbilical
Main straps
(> 40 mm width)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 44 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
They are numerous models of harnesses. However, they can be classified into two main categories:
● Standard recovery harnesses are similar to the one drawn on the previous page and the blue one below. They
may be fitted with a backpack. However, they are often worn underneath stabilizing jackets or backpacks that
are not provided with a recovery attachment point designed to recover an injured diver.
● Vest harnesses are composed of straps similar to those used for standard harnesses that are sewed to a robust
vest. These harnesses are generally designed to be fitted with a backpack. Also, numerous pockets where the
diver can distribute additional weights (to control his buoyancy) and tools, are available. They are comfortable
to wear, are very robust, and allow quick dressing.

Vest harness Standard harness

Also, a lot of models that can be considered as hybrids between these two categories exist. In addition, note that recovery
harness may be part of equipment such as rebreathers and Buoyancy Control Devices (BCD).

1.1.4.2 - Pre-dive check and preventive withdrawn

Harnesses must be controlled before each dive. This control consists of the inspection of the elements described above.
As an example:
● There must not be any excessive wear of the straps, and the sewing threads must be in perfect condition.

● The D links must be without deformation and not be corroded

● The securing buckles must not be corroded, and the straps must not slide when they are secured

● The backpack, if fitted with, must be correctly secured so the bailout cannot be lost.

It is essential to be aware that diving harnesses have a limited life time. As a reference, IMCA D 024 says:
● Harnesses should be discarded 5 years from the time first put into service, or sooner if recommended by the
manufacturer or deemed appropriate by the divers or the technician in charge of the maintenance of the diving
system due to conditions of use.
● Harnesses should be discarded 10 years from the date of manufacture or sooner if recommended by the
manufacturer or deemed appropriate by the divers or the technician in charge of the maintenance of the diving
system due to conditions of use. Note that they must be discarded even though they are in service for less than 5
years.
As a result of what is said above, it is prudent to control the dates of service and the condition of these items before
starting the project

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 45 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.5 - Helmets and Standby diver mask

1.1.5.1 - Working divers helmets

As already said, new bells are fitted with a gas reclaim system. For this reason, helmets used by the working divers must
be equipped for this purpose. Also, these helmets must be designed to protect the head of the divers from shocks and
dropping objects and they should be fitted with a means to stop them becoming detached from their clamp while in use.
The Divex “Ultrajewel 601” is the model fitted with a gas reclaim
valve that is the most used in the industry.
It is composed of the fibreglass shell of the Kirby Morgan 17 C to 5
which the Divex “Ultra-flow 601” balanced demand regulator (see
#1) and the “Divex Jewel 601” two stages reclaim valve (see #2)
have been installed.
When used with an efficient heliox reclaim system, this helmet
allows a reduction of 90% of gas consumption or better. 5
The closed-circuit reclaim system is activated by the opening of the
1/4 turn exhaust valve situated on the left-hand side of the helmet
(see #3) and the closing the "open circuit valve" (See #4) that is
installed on the right-hand side of the Divex Jewel 601 two stages
reclaim valve (See #2). In the case of a problem with the reclaim
circuit, the helmet can be operated in open-circuit mode. In this
case, the "open circuit valve" is opened and the exhaust ¼ turn 3
valve is closed to isolate the hose that returns the exhaled gas to the
reclaim system. 1
Note that the model in the picture is also designed for the use of a
4
Compact Bailout Rebreathing Apparatus (see #5). 2
The “Ultraflow 601” is a balanced demand regulator designed to depths up to 500 m. The components of the inlet valve
consist of a 316 stainless steel housing a brass seat retainer with a valve seat material and the brass inlet valve which
connects to the lever.

25 26
24
23
22 27
10
28
21

20
9

8 18
6 19 11

1
4 13
2 16
3 17
5 14 15
7

12

1 - Valve stem 7 - O-ring 13 - Cover assembly 19 - Nut 25 - Packing nut

2 - Inlet cap 8 - Ultraflow body 14 - spring diaphragm 20 - Piston 26 - Retaining pin
3 - adapter 9 - Nut 15 - Clamp 21 - Spring set 27 - Adjustment knob
4 - Valve seat retainer 10 - O-ring 16 - washer 22 - Spacer 28 - O-ring
5 - O-ring 11 - Diaphragm 17 - Roller lever 23 - Shaft
6 - O-ring 12 - Decal 18 - Spacer 24 - Washer

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 46 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

3
2 8 27
20 21 22 23 25
1

4
15
16 - 19 11

14
13
12
In the closed position, the supply pressure acts on both the valve and an ‘O’ ring on the balance piston part of the stem
(see below). The balance piston is inside the seat retainer and the pressure on the other side of the piston is equalized to
the body of the regulator via a small hole in the stem connected to a point sensing the pressure in the regulator body (see
below). Note that this equalization that allows easiest breathing does not exist with a standard regulator.
The balance piston is slightly smaller in diameter than the inlet valve and this tends to keep the valve firmly closed using
the supply pressure itself.
Small equalization hole Dial-a-breath springs

Valve closed Adjustment knob

Pressure equalized

Supplied gas

diaphragm at rest Gas at diver side pressure

As the diver inhales, this reduces the pressure in the regulator body, which reduces the closing balance force enabling the
diaphragm acting on the roller lever to lift the valve off of its seat easily.

Pressure equalized both sides Dial-a-breath springs

Adjustment knob
Valve opened

Supplied gas

lever lifting the valve off of its seat

diaphragm acting on the roller

At the end of the inhalation, the “dial-a-breath” springs reseal the valve and restore the rest configuration with the supply
valve closed.
Note that Divex says that the adjustment of the springs is crucial to easy breathing.
If it is over-tightened, a large force will be required to lift the inlet valve, requiring a considerable effort on the part of the
diver during inhalation.
Similarly, if there are large gas supply pressure changes, the pre-load set by the knob must be altered.
Thus, changes in gas supply pressure produced by either a change in the actual gas supply pressure or a change in the
divers' depth, will require “dial-a-breath” adjustment. As the regulator inlet valve assembly is balanced, the “dial-a-
breath” movement is minimal for small pressure changes compared to a standard regulator.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 47 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The “Jewel 601” exhaust regulator that is situated just below the “Ultraflow 601” demand regulator, in the place of the
classical exhaust whiskers of an air helmet, is also manufactured from 316 stainless steel.
It has two stages to make it insensitive to variations in return line suction. The second stage also acts as a safety shut off
valve in the event of a first stage failure. Note that the “open circuit valve” which has been already described in this
presentation is also preventing excess pressure in the helmet. This is achieved by means of the spring (see #13) that exerts
a force onto the insert which holds the mushroom valve (see #11) closed until the pressure in the valve exceeds the
pressure of 18-23 cm of sea water above diver ambient. When in the open circuit mode, the spring is unloaded, and the
mushroom valve can open freely. The “open circuit valve” must be pushed and turned clockwise to operate the helmet in
closed circuit. As a result, turning this valve anticlockwise allows using the helmet in open circuit mode.

1 - Body
17 18
2 - 1st stage valve seat
20
3 - Filter screen

4 - 1st stage diaphragm 5 19

5 - Topside over

6 - Spring 2nd stage 4

7- 2nd stage diaphragm

8 - Bottom side cover

9 - O/C Mushroom support

3
10 - O/C Spacer 9 2
Open circuit valve 10
11 - O/C Mushroom 11 1
12 - O/C Open/close insert 13
6
13 - O/C Spring
14
14 - O/C Body
16 7
15 - O/C Spring up rated 12
16 - Cover
15 8
17 - Elbow tube

18 - Shutoff valve

19 - tube

20 - Brand & model sticker

The first stage diaphragm controls the opening pressure of the regulator.
It is situated as close as possible to the “Ultraflow 601” diaphragm to minimize the hydrostatic imbalance when the diver
changes orientation.
When the diver exhales, the helmet pressure increases slightly, and this lifts the first stage diaphragm off its seat and
allows the exhaled gas flowing into the second stage of the regulator. The large diameter (19 mm) of the valve seat
favorize very high flows into the second stage.
1st stage valve seat 1st stage diaphragm

Filter screen

To 2nd stage

When the diver stops exhaling, the helmet pressure drops slightly below ambient water pressure and the diaphragm is
drawn back onto its seat.

The gas flowing into the inter-stage chamber increases the pressure in it.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 48 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1st stage diaphragm Water pressure equalization hole

Top cover

Body
Inter-stage chamber

Tilted inlet/outlet separator

Inlet Outlet
2nd stage spring
Bottom cover

Slot
2nd stage diaphragm

This increase in pressure, together with the second stage spring, lift the second stage diaphragm off twelve tapered radial
slots and allows the exhaled gas flowing into the return line.
The second stage spring regulates the inter-stage pressure to between 30 and 60 cm of seawater below the ambient
pressure.
Valve body

2nd stage spring Outlet

Gas from 1st stage

2nd stage valve seat

2nd stage diaphragm Slot

This low suction means that there is only a small force holding the first stage diaphragm on its seat and provides no
hazard to the diver in the unlikely event that the first stage fails to open and the Ultraflow demand regulator fails to shut.
The slots in the second stage are tapered so that only a small force is required to lift the diaphragm from their tips when
there is a high suction in the return line.
As the flow increases and the suction in the return line reduces, the diaphragm lifts further to expose more of the slots.
This allows the Jewel regulator to operate satisfactorily at suctions varying from 0.5 to 5 BAR below the diver’s ambient
pressure.

1.1.5.2 - Standby diver’s mask

Because they are compact and can be quickly and easily set up without
2
outside help, a face mask is commonly supplied to the tender who is also
the standby diver and must always be ready to intervene.
These masks are composed of a rigid frame made of composite fibers or
injected plastic with a viewport and a regulator that are similar to those 3
used with rigid helmets (see #1).
A shaped metal band secures a hood and face seal (see #2) fabricated
from foam neoprene and open cell foam to this frame. The open cell
foam forms a cushion that pushes the sealing surface of the foam
1
neoprene against the diver’s face. Pockets are fitted inside the hood to
accommodate the earphones. A rubber spider is used to secure the mask
to the face of the diver (see #3).
Note that these masks are not equipped with a reclaim system as they are
operated only in the case of an emergency. However, their regulator
must be capable of supplying sufficient quantities of gas to allow the
rescue of the working divers at their maximum operating depth.
An example of a mask designed for deep diving that is commonly operated in diving bells is the Divex “Ultraflow 501-18
B”. This model uses the same elements like the well known Kirby Morgan KMB 18 B. However, the regulator
“SuperFlow 350” from Kirby Morgan is replaced by the “Ultraflow 501” regulator, which is a balanced demand regulator
similar to the “Ultraflow 601” previously described. Similarly to the “Ultraflow 601”, this regulator is designed to depths
up to 500 m.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 49 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.5.3 - Recommended supply pressure for mixed gas diving applications
The helmet manufacturer should provide tables and recommendation regarding the adjustment of the supply pressure. As
an example, Divex recommends to provide the following minimum supply pressures in the diving bell to set up the
Ultraflow regulators. Also, note that it is highly recommended not exceeding 20 bar.

Bell depth in MSW Diver supply pressure Bell depth in MSW Diver supply pressure

30 - 150 10 bar 316 - 350 16 bar

151 - 180 11 bar 351 - 400 17 bar

181 - 215 12 bar 401 - 430 18 bar

216 - 250 13 bar 431 - 460 19 bar

251 - 280 14 bar 461 - 480 20 bar

281 - 315 15 bar 481 - 500 20 bar

1.1.5.4 - Non-return valves fitted to the supply gas hose

A supply hose severed or suddenly depressurized may expose the diver to a depression that can be fatal. For this reason, a
non-return valve must be fitted between the side block and the gas supply hose of the umbilical. Note that this valve must
be function tested before each dive.
Note that as previously described, the “Ultrajewel 601” and the SEACO valves in the bell are designed to isolate exhaust
hose that returns the exhaled gas to the reclaim system in the case of a malfunction or a rupture.

7
13 5

9
8
6
4
2
1

1 - Connector umbilical 6 - Poppet valve

Non- return valves are composed of a poppet valve (see #6),
which is pressed to its seat (see #2) by a spring (see #7). This 2 - Seat 7 - Spring
valve is lifted from its seating by the axial force resulting from
the pressure of the breathing gas supplied through the 3 - Wiper 8 - Valve body
umbilical. As a result, when the umbilical is under pressure, the
4 - O ring 9 - O ring
poppet valve is maintained open. If the gas supply is lost, the
valve is pushed against its seat by the spring and the gas circuit 5 - O ring
is closed.

1.1.5.5 - Systems for cold waters

Note that this point has been partially discussed in “Bell internal equipment.”
Depending on the area, the water temperature at depth quickly falls below four degrees and may become close to zero
degrees. Note that salt water freezes a -2 Cº. Regulators are affected by low temperatures, which may result in an affected
flowing of gas or a frozen mechanism that stop working. To solve this problem, the manufacturers propose a heating
system for the regulator. Professional organizations also recommend this procedure. As an example, IMCA says that a

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 50 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
means of heating the divers inspired gas is necessary if diving at depths below 150 msw. However, depending on the
latitude where the dive is carried on, the regulator may have to be heated at a depth close to the surface.
The system consists of a rubber shroud inside which hot water flows. This shroud completely encases the side block, bent
tube, and the regulator of the helmet to isolate the hot water flow from the surrounding cold water and so provide
efficient gas heating. It is connected to the hot water supply of the diver by a splitter block assembly.
Side block shroud

Regulator shroud

Regulator
shroud
Tube
Tube shroud shroud

1.1.5.6 - National & international approval and marking

Every device used in a diving system must be certified according to recognized standards.
As an example, the helmets describe in this presentation are certified as PPE devices according to the European Directive
89/686/EEC, which give guidelines and procedures for the certification process of this type of equipment. Note that for
this directive, PPE means any device or appliance designed to be worn or held by an individual for protection against one
or more health and safety hazards. When the process of certification is successful, a “CE marking” that must be indicated
on each device produced is given. As an example, the marking of the Divex Ultrajewel 601 is CE 0088.
Note that the certificate of approval that summarize the process applied and the competent bodies involved must be
available and its reference number should be indicated in the brochures supplied with the device.
In addition, Each helmet (or mask) should be indelibly marked with a unique serial number.
All these elements allow establishing whether the helmet conforms to the international and national legislation and also
trace its process of certification and fabrication.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 51 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.6 - Bailout systems

1.1.6.1 - Purpose
IMCA says that every diver (other than the bellman) must be provided with a reserve supply of breathing gas carried
in a bailout system.
NORSOK U100 says that this bailout system should be designed to ensure an easy entrance into the bell and be
ergonomically adapted to the primary system. Also, it must be possible to activate it with no more than two operations.
Regarding the bailout endurance, IMCA D 022 says that a calculation should be available showing that the capacity of
the cylinder(s) at the depth of diving will allow breathing gas for 1 minute for every 10 metres of umbilical deployed
from the diving bell.

1 m in u te/1 0 m

Note that NORMAM- 15 limits the umbilical length to 33 metres and the bailout duration to at least 15 minutes during
exceptional saturation.
Also, NORSOK standard U 100, which limits the umbilical length to 45 m, says in point 7.8.3 that the bail-out system
should provide the diver with gas for 10 min based on an average consumption of 62,5 1/min (at the surface). This
consumption value, that should be considered as a minimum, is confirmed by the UK HSE study “The provision of
breathing gas to divers in emergency situations” which recommends a rate between 50 & 75 litres.
The bailout systems used for saturation operations can be scuba diving cylinders or rebreather apparatus. They should be
selected depending on the depth and the distance from the bell to fulfill the requirements indicated above,
Diving cylinders are commonly used as bailout systems for “surface orientated” diving operations. They are often used
for shallow saturations.
Rebreather apparatus are used by militaries and experienced recreational divers for diving operations that cannot be
organized with standard scuba sets. Note that the systems they used are not adapted to the requirements of commercial
diving. Nevertheless, two models of rebreather apparatus have been designed for this purpose by Divex (JFD group): The
“Secondary Life Support Mk 4” (SLS Mk4), which is now discontinued and the “Compact Bailout Rebreathing
Apparatus” (COBRA) which replaces the SLS Mk4. They are described in the next points with the diving cylinders.

1.1.6.2 - Scuba diving cylinders and 1st stage regulator

The fabrication and the maintenance of scuba diving cylinders are explained in the diving study #2 “Organize the
maintenance of diving cylinders”. For this reason, these technical aspects are not explained here as they can be found in
this study of 98 pages.
Diving from a closed bell imposes the use of cylinders that are not too voluminous to be able to pass through the bottom
door. As a result, the bottles used should offer a maximum of gas in a container that has a reduced volume. For this
reason, and depending on the size of the bottom door, twin sets composed of bottles of 7, 10 or 12 litres of floodable
volume that can be topped up at a pressure up to 300 bar are preferred to mono cylinders of 15, 18 or 20 litres that have a
wider diameter, or cylinders limited to 200 or 232 bar.
Note that aluminium cylinders found on the market are generally limited to 200 bar. As a result, composite and steel
cylinders which can withstand 300 bar are preferable. The advantage of composite cylinders is their reduced weight and
their capacity to withstand extremely high pressures. It is the reason they are used in the space industry. However, the
models sold for diving are limited to 300 bar maximum. Their major inconvenience is their limited lifetime and that they
are more sensitive to shocks than steel cylinders that can be considered more robust and are cheaper. For these reasons,
most contractors often prefer using steel cylinders.

Approximate dimensions and weights of steel cylinders commonly used to compose twin sets

Volume cylinder Ø in mm Length in mm Weight in Kg

7 litres 140 625 9.8

8 litres 140 700 10.5

10 litres 178 600 15.1

12 litres 178 625 18.2

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 52 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Identification and marking of the cylinders:
Diving cylinders must be colour-coded according to the recommendations of IMCA D 043 that
are based on the European standard EN 1089-3. This colour coding is also indicated point 269 of
the “code of safety for diving systems 1995” published by the International Maritime
Organization (IMO). It is achieved through the use of colour paints.
Also, the information regarding the gas used, the construction and the condition of the cylinder
10 litres
must be always visible.
For these reasons, IMCA says that cylinders used with heliox should be organized as follows: Diving quality
● The shoulder must be colour coded with white and brown quarters or bands and the body
HeO2 (heliox)
must be brown. 20/80
● The words “HeO2” + “ heliox” and “diving quality” must be written with the gas
percentage by volume, quoting percentage of oxygen first. Also, the floodable volume
should be indicated.
● The cylinder serial number should be visible or else stenciled in a visible location on
each cylinder. Also, the last test date stamp should be painted over with a small patch
distinctive colored paint to aid location. These identification marks must not be hidden
by accumulated layers of paint.

The high-pressure heliox contained in the cylinder must be regulated to a pressure and a flow that are compatible with
those of the 2nd stage regulator of the helmet. This is achieved by the 1st stage of a scuba diving regulator that is installed
on the bottle and connected to the 2nd stage of the helmet with a dedicated whip. Note that the mechanism used can be
based on a piston or a diaphragm. However, it must be suitable for diving in cold water. Also, a balanced type mechanism
is highly preferable. The differences between the several mechanisms can be explained as follows:
● A non-balanced first stage piston regulator uses a piston that moves up and down to open or close an injector
from which the high-pressure heliox stored in the cylinder flows into a depression chamber. When the planned
low-pressure is reached the piston closes the high-pressure injector and the gas is distributed to the 2nd stage
regulator. It opens again when the pressure in this chamber drops. Note that this piston is composed of a thick
plate that is continued by a hollow shaft through which the gas flows from the depression chamber to the top
chamber where the pressure pushes the piston to the bottom. With this system, the opening of the valve partially
depends on the high pressure. As a result, if the high-pressure decreases, the pressure opening the valve
diminishes as well and breathing becomes more and more difficult as the pressure in the cylinder decreases.

Forces operating the system: 1

- Low pressure x Surface piston (S 1) 6 S1
Closing
- Low pressure x Surface valve around the tail ( S 2)

- Hydrostatic pressure at depth x surface piston (S 3) S3

Opening - Spring in wet chamber
5
- High pressure x surface valve (S 4) 7
4

1 - Piston 5 - Hydrostatic pressure chamber S2

8 3
2 - High Pressure inlet 6 - Top-side LP chamber
S4
3 - Low Pressure outlet 7 - Spring
4 - Depression chamber HP - LP 8 - Valve + seat
2
● A balanced piston regulator uses the same basic mechanism as above. However, the forces are organized in such
a manner that there is no intervention of the high pressure in the opening of the regulator. As a result, the
opening and closure depend only on the low pressure and the effort to inspire is always the same.

Forces operating the system:

6 3
Closing - Low pressure x Surface piston (S 1)
S1

Opening
- Hydrostatic pressure at depth x surface piston (S 2) 1
- Spring in wet chamber
S2
7 5
1 - Piston 5 - Hydrostatic pressure chamber 4
2 - High Pressure inlet 6 - Top-side LP chamber 8
3 - Low Pressure outlet 7 - Spring
2
4 - Depression chamber HP - LP 8 - Valve + seat

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 53 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● Non-balanced diaphragm first stages use a thick rubber or composite membrane to which the force from the
hydrostatic pressure is added to the strength of the spring situated in the wet chamber to open the valve between
the high-pressure and low-pressure chambers. The valve is closed by the combined action of a return spring and
the high-pressure that pushes on the bottom surface of the valve. With this design, the high-pressure acts on the
closure of the valve. As a result, when the pressure from the bottle decreases, more gas can pass into the
depression chamber. Thus the opening of the valve becomes more comfortable, and the regulator delivers more
gas. Also, note that this design is slightly more complicated as with piston systems, as there are more parts
involved.

Forces operating the system:

5
- Low-pressure x surface membrane (S 1)
Closing - Return spring
7
- Surface bottom valve (S 2) x high-pressure 1 S3
- Hydrostatic pressure at depth x surface diaphragm (S 3) S1
Opening - Spring in wet chamber S4
- Surface bottom of the valve (S 4) x low-pressure 4 3

1 - Membrane 5 - Hydrostatic pressure chamber

6 8
2 - High Pressure inlet 6 - Tail + valve assembly
S2
3 - Low Pressure outlet 7 - Spring in wet chamber
4 - Depression chamber HP - LP 8 - Return spring
2

● Balanced diaphragm regulators are designed with the same basic principle to work as described above.
However, the forces are organized in such a manner that there is no intervention of the high pressure in the
closing of the regulator. As a result, the opening and closure depend only on the low pressure and the efforts of
the diver to inspire are always the same. Note that in this case the tail of the valve is hollow.

Forces operating the system: 5

7
- Low-pressure x surface membrane (S 1)
Closing - Return spring 1 S3
- Surface S 2 in the equilibration chamber
S1 3
- Hydrostatic pressure at depth x surface diaphragm (S 3)
Opening 4
- Spring in wet chamber

6
1 - Membrane 5 - Hydrostatic pressure chamber
2 - High Pressure inlet 6 - Tail + valve assembly 8 2
3 - Low Pressure outlet 7 - Spring in wet chamber S2
4 - Depression chamber HP - LP 8 - Return spring
● Regarding the advantages and disadvantages of the mechanical systems described,
piston regulators are reputed robust and simple. However, they are often considered
less efficient than those designed with a diaphragm in cold waters as they may
become more rapidly frozen, which may result in an uncontrolled free-flowing. For
this reason, diaphragm systems are often preferred for these conditions. As an
example, experimentations in icy conditions conducted by the US Navy in 2008
were performed with only balanced diaphragm design regulators. Note that US
Navy recommends using cold water kits consisting of silicone oil and an
environmental diaphragm in water temperatures below 38 ºF (3.3 ºC).
Another point to consider when selecting the 1st stage regulator is its ability to work with heliox as some models that are
originally designed for air may leak if used with heliox. Also, note that only threaded type bottle connections (commonly
called DIN connections by divers) can withstand a pressure of 300 bar. For more information regarding this point, refer to
the study CCO Ltd “Organize the maintenance of diving cylinders”.

As a conclusion, scuba diving cylinders are reliable systems of bailouts. However, they limit the operations to shallow
depths only. As an example, a set 2 x 7 litres / 300 bar allows less than 6 minutes breathing time at 100 m. Also, the gas
they provide is at the temperature of the surrounding that may be cold. Because hypothermia is six times faster with
heliox than air, that leaves a limited time for the diver to return to the bell before being affected in such conditions.
Note that the procedure to calculate the diving duration offered by bottles is as follows:
1) Find the pressure available = Pressure bottle - absolute pressure bottom - working pressure regulator
2) Find the volume of gas available = Floodable volume x Available pressure
3) Find the breath duration offered by the cylinders = Available volume / (62.5 x absolute pressure)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 54 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.6.3 - DIVEX Secondary Life Support Mk 4” (SLS Mk4) system
The Secondary Life Support (SLS) is a semi-closed circuit breathing apparatus designed during the eighties and nineties
which allows sufficient time to return to the bell at depths deeper than 350 msw in the case that the diver's breathing and
hot water supplies are severed. Note that this model is discontinued. As a result, it will be removed from service
gradually. However, it will be in use as long as spare parts will be available, which is the reason it cannot be ignored.
Also, the description of this rebreather of the previous generation highlights the advantages of the new COBRA system.
The system is composed of a backpack that is connected to a specific helmet.
The operational principle of the system is basically that of a conventional semi-
closed circuit breathing apparatus, in which the exhaled gas is captured in
counterlungs and is then re-breathed by the diver, after removal of the carbon
dioxide (CO2 ), and the replacement of the oxygen consumed.
The “backpack” consists of:
1 - The main housing containing a gas injection system, a CO2 scrubber
canister and a thermal regenerator. Also, the SLS Backpack harness has
the counterlungs fitted to its shoulder straps.
2 - The gas injection system is composed of three (3) heliox cylinders with
a charging point, burst disc, two stage regulator, injection orifice, single
stage regulator, demand regulator and a overpressure indicator. Note
that the percentage of oxygen of the breathing gas stored in these
cylinders depends on the diving depth planned.
3 - The CO2 scrubber canister provides a chemical absorbent bed for the
removal of the carbon dioxide. A thermal regenerator temporarily stores
the heat within the breathing gas in order to avoid losing it to the water
as the breathing gas passes into the flexible bags (the counterlungs).

20

2
10 17

16
1 11
3
15
7
13
6

19
18
5
14
4
12

1 - Gas supply from helmet 6 - Pressure gauge 11 - Gas system housing 16 - Sodalime canister

2 - Demand valve 7 - Lid screw assembly 12 - Hot water inlet hose 17 - Thermal regenerator

3 - HP & LP regulators 8 - Inhale / exhale hose 13 - Hot water relief valve 18 - moisture absorbent pad

4 - Gas storage bottle 9 - Counterlung hose 14 - Gas supply penetrator 19 - Charging point

5 - Overpressure indicator 10 - Hot water housing 15 - Canister loading system 20 - Hot water to helmet shroud

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 55 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

1 - Harness
1
2 - Counterlung in its enclosure (see the photos above)
5
3 - Actuation sleeve & cable assembly
4
3 4 - Weight pocket

5 - Handle retaining band

6 - Rescue lifting point

7 - Cable wiper sleeve

The helmet is based on the Divex “Ultrajewel 601” to which the inlet and exhaust hoses from the backpack assembly are
connected. The interface assembly contains a mouthpiece that is stowed retracted out of the divers way during the normal
operations. In this case, the diver breathes normally in the oral-nasal mask. When activating the bailout system this
mouthpiece is rotated into the helmet oral-nasal mask, and the diver bites it to breathe with his mouth as with a scuba
regulator or a snorkel.
1

3
20

5 4
6
19

7
8
9
10
18
11
13

12

14 15

16
17

1 - Helmet hose assembly 6 - Flap valve + circlip 11 - Sleeve centre 16 - Side block

2 - Support hose assembly 7 - Main body 12 - Mushroom 17 - bend tube to regulator

3 - Exhale flap valve assembly 8 - Mouth piece 13 - SLS gas supply hose 18 - Oral nasal mask assembly

4 - O ring 9 - Outer sleeve 14 - Non return valve 19 - Nose block device

5 - Y piece assembly 10 - Retaining ring 15 - Free flow valve 20 - Handle

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 56 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Note that the following supplies from the bell are necessary to allow the system to be ready for use:
● A gas supply hose is connected to the side block of the helmet (see #10 below) from which heliox is supplied to
a single stage regulator in the backpack. The function of this regulator is to maintain a slight positive pressure
inside the SLS system while it is in its standby mode to protect it from water flooding.
● Also, the hot water flowing from the surface to the diver’s suit is diverted to the hot water housing of the
backpack through a splitter block (see #14 below). The function of this connection is to fill the hot water
housing of the backpack and warm the soda lime enough to enable the required chemical reaction that is
necessary to absorb the CO2 when the system is activated. The hot water continues to flow from the hot water
housing to the shroud of the regulator through a hose connected to it (see #17 below).
7
10
2 1 2

12 3

11 4

6
16

15
15
14
14

13 13

10 7
1
9
11

17

12 8

1 - Exhale hose 10 - SLS supply (quick connect) 18

2 - Inhale hose 11 - Reclaim hose

3 - Counterlung 12 - Gas supply 3

4 - Lacing counterlung 13 - Hot water supply

5 - Hoses counterlungs 14 - Splitter block

15
6 - Handle actuation system 15 - Hot water supply suit 16
7 - Helmet hose 16 - Hot water supply SLS 14

8 - Mouthpiece handle 17 - Hot water supply shroud

13
9 - Shroud side block 18 - Communications

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 57 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The activation of the system requires two actions:
1. The interface valve on the right hand side of the helmet (#8 in the drawing previous page) has to be rotated
through 180º, to push the mouthpiece into the oral-nasal mask where the diver can bite onto it to breath.
2. The actuation handle situated near the buckle of the belt of the harness (see # 6) has to be pulled as for a
parachute to deploy the counterlungs, that are packed in their enclosures that protect them from damage, and
pull a spool valve which switches on the gas bleed for make-up gas. This handle is protected by a flap.
When the system is activated:
1. The exhaled gas passes via the diver's mouthpiece through the helmet interface assembly and is directed by the
check valves through an insulated hose to the backpack. It then passes through the CO2 scrubber canister and up
through the thermal regenerator into the counterlungs. The thermal regenerator removes and stores the heat from
the warm gas.
2. Because the counterlungs are tightly packed, there is very little gas available for the diver to inhale after
activation. For this reason, a demand valve (see “A” below) situated on top of the backpack supplies the gas for
the first breath. Then, when the counterlungs are filled, the system functions in its semi-closed circuit mode.
As the diver inhales, the new cold gas passes back through the thermal regenerator and picks up the stored heat.
The gas then passes up through a second insulated hose assembly and back into the diver’s mouthpiece via the
helmet interface assembly.
3. The oxygen make-up is provided by means of a constant bleed of oxygen-rich gas from the three cylinders
located at the base of the Backpack. This gas bleed mixes with the exhaled gas at the inlet to the CO2 scrubber to
maintain a safe oxygen partial pressure at all times. This rich gas is supplied from the gas cylinders through a
two-stage regulator to the injection orifice which regulates the flow rate.
4. As already indicated, the water ingress into the SLS system in standby mode is prevented by pressurising the
breathing circuit using a single stage regulator that is set up at 138 mb above ambient pressure and is connected
to the side block of the helmet. An indicator of Rotowink type which changes from green to red if a significant
loss of pressure occurs is fitted to the system to alert the diver in the case of loss of pressure.
Helmet Oral Nasal mask
Surface gas supply
Mouth piece
Jewel 601 exhaust valve

Helmet actuation valve

Actuation cord

Shoulder counterlung

D
Rotowink
C

Hot water jacket Pressure gauge

B
Hot water supply

R 2 1
2 stages regulator
E
Lp regulator 138 mb
A Demand valve

Charging point B Injection orifice

Filtering dip tube C CO2 scrubber canister

D Thermal regenerator
Gas storage bottle
1.18 litres / 300 bar E Blow-out plug

Relief valve

Filter

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 58 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Note that the Secondary Life Support (SLS) uses only mechanical systems and that there is no electronic module for the
control of the partial pressure of the gas and the dosage of the oxygen in the breathing circuit as it is the case with a lot of
new generation rebreathers where the diluent gas and pure oxygen are stored in separate cylinders from which they are
dosed according to the needs.
Thus, as already indicated in the previous description of the system, an "appropriate mix" that must be calculated for the
planned diving depth using the table displayed below is stored in the three 1.18 litres / 300 bar gas bottles, from which it
is dosed into the breathing circuit through a two-stage regulator and an injector. For this reason, Divex says that it is of
ultimate importance to fully empty the bottles before charging the new planned mix to avoid creating an unsuitable gas.

Diver excursion Minimum oxygen Maximum oxygen Diver excursion Minimum oxygen Maximum oxygen
depth percentage percentage depth percentage percentage

10 39 99 190 8.2 11.4

20 28.5 69 200 8 11

30 23.5 52 210 7.8 10.4

40 20 42 220 7.6 10

50 17.8 35.5 230 7.3 9.7

60 15.7 31 240 7.1 9.3

70 14.4 27 250 6.9 8.9

80 13.4 24 260 6.8 8.7

90 12.4 21.9 270 6.65 8.4

100 11.6 20 280 6.5 8.15

110 11 18.4 290 6.4 8

120 10.5 17 300 6.2 7.7

130 10.2 15.9 310 6.1 7.5

140 9.8 15 320 6 7.3

150 9.5 14 330 5.8 7.1

160 9.1 13.2 340 5.75 6.9

170 8.8 12.5 350 5.6 6.8

180 8.4 11.9 360 5.55 6.6

Example of a mix selection using this table:

Divers are stored at a depth of 190 m and an excursion is planned between 195 - 205 msw. The bell is planned to be
stored at 190 msw:
● At 190 msw a heliox mix containing between 8.2 and 11.4% oxygen should be used.

● Find a mix that allows excursions within the planned depth range and includes a safety factor to allow
excursions outside the basic depth range:
○ Note that the middle value between 11.4% & 8.2 % is 9.8%. Thus, a richer mix should favor upward
excursions and a poorer mix downward excursions.
○ If a mix 9.7% is available onboard the vessel, we can see that this mix allows a maximum downward
excursion to 230 msw and a maximum upward excursion above 150 msw (in fact it can be used up to
143 msw). As these depths are beyond the planned working depth range, the mix selected is suitable.

Diver excursion Minimum oxygen Maximum oxygen Diver excursion Minimum oxygen Maximum oxygen
depth percentage percentage depth percentage percentage

140 (143 m) 9.8 15 190 8.2 9.7% 11.4

150 9.5 14 200 8 11

160 9.1 13.2 210 7.8 10.4

170 8.8 12.5 220 7.6 10

180 8.4 11.9 230 7.3 9.7

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 59 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Note that these gas cylinders (see #7 in the scheme below) are equipped with dip tubes (see #18) that protect the pipework
from corrosion and thus avoids blocking the gas flow. Also, burst disks (see #9) are fitted to protect the system from
over-pressurization. These cylinders are linked together though a manifold (see #3) and a retainer assembly (see # 28)
they are filled through a charging point which is installed in the left-hand cylinder fitting (see #19). It has a built-in check
valve to allow easy filling and a sintered filter element to protect the check valve seat from damage during charging.
21
22 23
17

1
2 16
2
30

29 25 24
4

13
14
12
13
15
32
27 6
31

26

11 8
10
19
9

20 18
2 3 5

28

1 - Content gauge (+ O ring) 9 - Bursting disk + seat 17 - Whip gauge 25 penetrator blank

2 - Demand regulator 10 - Plug + O ring 18 - Filtering dip tube 26 - Two stage regulator

3 - Bottle manifold 11 - Regulator pipework 19 - Charging fitting + cap 27 - Single stage regulator

4 - Rotowink 12 - Sintered element 20 - Manifold banjo bolt 28 - Bottle retainer assembly

5 - O ring 13 - Regulator connection bolt 21 - Blanking plug + O ring 29 - Connector relief valve

6 - Regulator pipework 14 - Non return valve 22 - Spring 30 - Connection to helmet

7 - Gas cylinder 15 - Whip regulator 23 - Valve seat regulator 31 - Filter

8 - Blanking plug 16 - Whip Rotowink 24 - Penetrator 32 - Relief valve

The gas from the storage cylinders flows to the two stages regulator (see # 32 above) through the manifold (see #3). The
regulator is protected from the impurities that may have passed into the pipework by a sintered bronze filter. It is
connected to the piping by a banjo fitting (see #3 in the drawing next page).
● The first stage piston provides regulation of the inter-stage gas pressure to approximately 15 bar. This piston is
initially raised from its seat by the spring (see #8 next page). Gas flows past the seat and then along the hole in
centre of the piston into the chamber to the left of the piston. The pressure in this chamber rises until it is
sufficient to overcome the force exerted by the spring. The piston then moves across to seal the regulator port.
● The spool valve (see #13 on the drawing next page) is fitted to the inter-stage. The function of this device is that
When the SLS System is in its stand-by mode, the spool isolates the first stage from the second stage of the

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 60 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
regulator. It is moved from the closed to the open position when the actuation cable (connected to the handle) is
pulled. A bullet on the end of the cable contacts the two ball bearings (see #14) in the centre of the spool,
drawing the valve to the open position. The ball bearings then drop out of the way allowing the bullet to pass
through and away up the cable sheath.
● The second stage of the regulator is a diaphragm type. The pin (see #19 below) is held off the seat by the
diaphragm (see #23), and the support plate (see #22) under the action of the spring (see #18). As the pressure in
the space to the right of the diaphragm increases, the diaphragm and hence the pin moves to the left, sealing off
the seat fully at the pre-set outlet pressure. The outlet pressure is adjusted by varying the tension of the spring
by slackening the locknut (see #31) and adjusting its screw (see #31) until the desired outlet pressure of 1 bar
above ambient is achieved.

1st stage
5 4
6
13 14 3
15 8
12 9 2
10
7 1

16
22
24 17
18 11 32
26
20 19
21
29 23
25
27
31

28 2nd stage
30

1 - Connector + O rings 9 - Piston + Seat 17 - Cir-clip 25 - Support plate (springs)

2 - Bronze filter 10 - O ring 18 - Compression spring 26 - Springs

3 - Inlet banjo fitting 11 - Body 19 - Valve pin 27 - Adjustment plate (springs)

4 - Cir-clip 12 - O rings 20 - Valve seat 28 - End cap

5 - O rings 13 - Valve shuttle 21 - Valve seat retainer 29 - Regulator mesh

6 - End cap 14 - Ball bearing 22 - Plate diaphragm support 30 - Cap sleeve

7 - O ring 15 - Load ring 23 - Diaphragm 31 - Screw + nut

8 - Compression spring 16 - Relief valve + gasket 24 - Slip ring 32 - Mounting plate

The gas is then supplied to the injection orifice located within the penetrator (see # 24 in the general drawing in the
previous page) from which it then passes into the breathing circuit at the bottom of the CO2 scrubber housing.
The injection orifice contains a group of orifices in
series with the flow path making many 90º changes Injection orifice
in flow direction. The combined effect is to allow
the system to contain much larger holes than there
would be for a single orifice with the same
resistance. This arrangement is designed to reduce
blockage.
Note that one penetrator is blank (see # 25 in the
general drawing in the previous page) and is used
as a locating pin for the scrubber lift mechanism. Body penetrator

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 61 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
As already indicated in the previous descriptions, the single stage regulator (see #27 in the general drawing two pages
before) which is supplied with gas from the helmet site block to which it is connected maintains a pressure of 1.38 mb
over ambient pressure inside the system at all operating depths while it is in its standby mode to prevent water ingress.
Also, it is designed to cope with the diver’s upward and downward excursions at a rate of 22 msw / minute maximum.
This regulator is of a diaphragm type which is similar to the second stage of the two-stage regulator.
The valve pin (see #6 below) is held off the valve seat (see #7) by the diaphragm (see #10) and the support plate (see
#12), under the action of the spring (see #13). As the pressure in the space to the right of the diaphragm increases the
diaphragm and hence the valve pin moves to the left sealing off the valve seat fully at the set outlet pressure.
The outlet pressure is adjusted by varying the spring (see #5) tension by slackening the locknut and adjusting its screw
(see #18) until the desired pressure of 1.38 mb is reached.
2
5
7 1
9
11
13 3
15 6 4

8
16
10
12
18
14
17

1 - Elbow swivel 6 - Valve pin 11 - Slip ring 16 - Slip ring

2 - Body 7 - Valve seat 12 - Support plate (spring) 17 - Cap sleeve

3 - Plug 8 - Retainer valve seat 13 - Spring membrane 18 - Screw + nut

4 - O ring 9 - Plate diaphragm support 14 - Adjustment plate (spring)

5 - Spring 10 - Diaphragm 15 - End cap

The demand regulator (see #2 in the general drawing) that supplies gas to the system for the 1st breath, and compensates
the system in gas volume during any descent while the system is activated, is designed to flow gas only when it is
subjected to a depression of 25,5 to 26.5 millibar to prevent the system from passing gas when it is not required.
This regulator is similar to a conventional demand regulator but differs in that it is designed to function with gas supply
pressures ranging up to 300 bar so that it does not require first stage pressure regulation.
5
7

20 6

9 1
19 10
12 3
14
18 16 8
2
17 13 11
4
15

1 - Body 6 - Set-screw 11 - O rings 16 - Cap

2 - O ring 7 - Demand valve shuttle 12 - Seat retainer 17 - Diaphragm

3 - Relief valve 8 - Valve seat 13 - Spring pad 18 - O ring

4 - Vent cap relief valve 9 - Valve pin 14 - Spring 19 - Lid sub-assembly

5 - Lever 10 - Spring 15 - Valve adjustment screw 20 - Protection cover assembly

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 62 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The high-pressure gas from the cylinders enters the demand regulator through a banjo fitting. We can observe that the gas
supply pressure acts on the pin (see #9 in the drawing on the previous page) at the O-ring (see #11) and, over the same
area, at the valve seat (see #8). As a result, we can say that the valve pin (see #9) is pressure balanced. That means that
the regulator supplies gas at the same negative pressure setting over a wide range of gas supply pressures.
The valve is normally held closed by the spring (see #14). When the pressure acting to the diaphragm (see #17) becomes
sufficiently great for the lever fork (see #17) to overcome the spring (see #14) the lever fork pushes the valve pin
allowing new gas to flow into the system.
An overpressure valve (see #3) that is factory set is fitted to ensure that during the standby mode the internal pressure of
the system does not exceed 172 bar. As a result, the internal pressure within the SLS system will vary between the single
stage regulator set pressure of 138 millibars and the overpressure valve set pressure of 172 millibars as the diver’s
ambient pressure will change during the upward or downward excursions.
As indicated previously, a pressure indicator of Rotowink type which changes from green to red if a significant loss of
pressure occurs is fitted to the system (see the drawing below). It is installed in a robust metal housing which is allowed
to flood in order to reference the ambient water pressure. A fine mesh screen is fitted to prevent the ingress of dirt to its
internal parts exposed to the water.

5 2

7 1
1 - Body 6 - O rings
4
9 2 - O ring 7 - Mesh

3 - O ring 8 - Mesh retainer sleeve

6
4 - Rotowink 9 - Top cap
8 5 - Lens

C E

B
F

A - Gas pressure D - Spring

A
Cut Rotowink B - Membrane E - Opening to ambient

D C - Connecting rod F - Rotating indicator

Another difference the SLS Mk4 has with the last generation rebreathers used by militaries and trained scuba divers is
that the counterlungs of most of these new systems are organized in such a way that one unit collects the exhaled gas and
the second unit is filled with the renewed gas to inhale. Thus, one counterlung is before the cartridge of soda lime and the
2nd after it. Opposite to this design, the counterlungs of the SLS Mk4 are working together and are situated after the CO2
absorber. Also, they are connected by separate hoses and are not along with the main respiratory hoses. As a result, four
breathing hoses are installed on the backpack instead of two with the last generation rebreathers.
Mouth piece

Counterlung Counterlung
left hand side Right hand side

Gas to & from

the counterlung

Exhaled gas
Exhaled gas
Heater element

Soda lime

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 63 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Also, as the SLS is designed to be used only in an emergency, the counterlungs
must be protected from rubbing and shocks that may damage them. It is the
reason they are packed in robust enclosures.
These enclosures are maintained closed by a series of Teflon lined loops
through which the two nylon actuation cables are passed. This design allows
the actuation cables sliding easily when they are pulled out by the handle. As a
result, the enclosures fall open, and the counterlungs deploy ready for use.
Note that it is of ultimate importance that the cables are entirely removed from
the rings to have a correct opening of the enclosures.
Note that the lengths of the actuation cables which are connected to the actuation handle must be adjusted in such a way
that the two-stages regulator and the counterlungs are actuated simultaneously (see the drawing below). This handle is
protected by a flap which is terminated by a red colour band (see item “A” on the photos below)
7 6 5 1

8 4
2 3

1 - Webbing 5 - Screw

2 - Actuation handle 6 - Cable actuation counterlung

A
3 - Handle sleeve 7- Cable actuation regulator

4 - Cable holder 8 - Cable actuation counterlung

The refillable scrubber canister assembly (See #1 below) is a rectangular box which contains 125 gramme of soda lime
that allows absorbing CO2 for 30 minutes maximum (see the endurance table on the next page). It is inserted into the
back pack through a waterproof lateral door (see #5 & #6) and is pressed against its gaskets by a lift mechanism (see #4).
Note that this opening allows accessing the thermal regenerator and the absorbent sponge (see #3) which collects
moisture resulting from condensation and breathing.

9 2
6

1
2

3 4 5
4
8 7

3 1 - Scrubber canister 6 - External door

8
2 - Thermal regenerator 7 - Injector

3 - Absorbent sponge 8 - Relief valve

7 5
4 - Lift mechanism 9 - Gasket
6
10 5 - Waterproof door 10 - Hot water inlet

The preparation of the SLS Mk4 requires some precautions. Also, Some preventive maintenance has to be performed to
ensure that the system is always ready for use.
● The procedure and safety precautions for charging the bottles are those used with quads and scuba cylinders.
Also, as previously indicated, Divex says that they must be emptied before filling them again.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 64 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● The determination of the mix to be used should be done according to the table and method explained previously.
Also, the endurance of the system depends on the pressure of heliox stored in the bottles and the duration of the
CO2 absorbent, which is 30 minutes maximum. As a result, Divex says that there is no advantage in charging
the cylinders to their maximum pressure (300 bar) for shallow dives. The table below can be used to select the
pressure necessary for the planned depth of intervention:

Depth Charging pressure Duration (minutes) Depth Charging pressure Duration (minutes)

50 msw 300 bar * 30 min * 200 msw 150 bar 10 min

50 msw 175 bar 30 min 250 msw 300 bar 19.5 min

50 msw 100 bar 17 min 250 msw 200 bar 12.5 min

100 msw 300 bar * 30 min * 300 msw 300 bar 17.5 min

100 msw 250 bar 30 min 300 msw 200 bar 11 min

100 msw 100 bar 12 min 350 msw 300 bar 16 min

150 msw 300 bar 28 min 350 msw 200 bar 10 min

150 msw 150 bar 14 min 400 msw 300 bar 13.5 bar

200 msw 300 bar 22 min 400 msw 250 bar 11 min

Note: The values with an asterisk * are limited to 30 minutes due to the scrubber canister duration.

● The manufacturer recommends replacing the scrubber canister every 24 hours even though the system has not
been actuated. The reason is that there is possible aggregation (sticking together) of the soda-lime granules
within the moist bell environment.
● Precautions are indicated by the manufacturer for the compression and decompression of this item. It is to
prevent the external pressure damage to the o rings of the pipework, the cylinders, and other items composing
the SLS Mk4 system:
○ The SLS system backpack must be disconnected from the helmet prior to locking it in or out of a
chamber complex or prior to compression or de-compression of a diving bell or a chamber with the SLS
system inside.
○ The gas cylinders must be charged prior to the compression of the backpack
Of course, the SLS system is designed for one use only. For this reason, it must be fully reconditioned after any actuation.
This reconditioning includes the change of the soda-lime and a detailed inspection of all the components.
Note that the procedures for the maintenance and inspection of this equipment can be found on the manufacturer’s
website at the following address: https://www.jfdglobal.com/

1.1.6.4 - COBRA (Compact Bailout Rebreathing Apparatus)

The COBRA (Compact Bailout Rebreathing Apparatus) is the new system from DIVEX that replaces the SLS Mk4. It
provides better ergonomics, allows more time to return to the bell, and can be used at depths up to 450 msw in seas at
temperatures between -1 Cº and + 34 Cº.
This device, that is based on the same concept as its predecessor, is composed of a backpack that is connected to a
specific helmet with the similar operational principle of a conventional semi-closed circuit breathing apparatus, in which
the exhaled gas is captured in counterlungs and is then re-breathed by the diver, after removal of the carbon dioxide
(CO2), and injection of fresh heliox to maintain a mix adapted to the depth of the diver. Note that, as with the SLS Mk4,
the helmet is originally a conventional Divex “Ultrajewel 601” to which the necessary elements for the rebreather are
adapted (see below and in point 2.3.6.1).

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 65 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Similarly to the SLS 4, the “backpack” consists of the main housing containing the gas injection system, the CO2
scrubber canister and the thermal regenerator that temporarily stores the heat within the breathing gas to avoid losing it to
the water as the breathing gas passes into the counterlungs.
These modules have been improved, so the operations to change the soda lime of the scrubber are much simple. Also, the
feeding of the positive pressure that maintain the breathing loop integrity when the rebreather is offline to allow for the
first breath at activation is increased, which allows for a more rapid descent.
A major difference with the SLS Mk 4 is that the counterlungs are encapsulated inside the main housing instead of being
on the harness straps. This configuration protects them better against potential damages than the flexible external
protectors of the SLS Mk 4. Also, their deployment is now automatic, so the diver does not have to pull an actuation
handle to open their enclosure as with the previous model. As a result, the activation of the system is performed with only
the rotation of the dedicated handle of the helmet that deploys the mouthpiece at the same time it opens the gas circuit.
Note that this configuration also eliminates the two big shoulder counterlungs hoses, so the mobility of the diver is
improved.

The gas injection system is composed of two composite or steel gas storage cylinders that supply the 1st & 2nd stages of
the regulator, the injection orifice, and the demand valve. As with the SLS Mk 4, the system is provided with a
“Rotowink type” pressure indicator, which changes from green to red if a significant loss of pressure occurs. There is no
electronic component in place to calculate and dose the mix, such as those found in modern exploration rebreathers used
by militaries and sportive divers. Instead, the appropriate percentage of oxygen of the breathing gas is calculated by the
technician in charge according to the planned depth of excursions and stored in the cylinders before the dive. So, this
system, which is designed to be available at all times within the excursions limits planned for the dive, is similar to the
one used with the SLS Mk4. However, the cylinders are installed on each side of the gas injection and reclaim modules
instead of underneath them with the SLS Mk4.

Another improvement is that this new system can be activated and deactivated as required. That allows the diver to
perform pre-dive function tests as with the gas cylinder of an open circuit bailout. Also, the weight of the system, which
is calculated to be neutral in the water, is 26 kg in air. So, it is lighter than the twin-set bottles 10 litres commonly used,
and sufficiently compact to be appropriately stored in the bell.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 66 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
According to the data from DIVEX, the comparison of the possible breathing duration of the COBRA with those of the
SLS Mk4 demonstrates improvements at all depths at the following approximate percentages:

50 m + 43 %

100 m + 13 %

150 m +2%

200 m +4%

250 m +3%

300 m +1%

In conclusion, this new system of bailout erases the majority of the inconveniences of the SLS Mk 4 without losing its
advantages. It provides an increased safety level to the diver and should be adopted for all dives below 50 m and in cold
waters.

Note:
Courses regarding the use and the maintenance of this system are organized in the several subsidiaries JFD and can be
booked at this address: https://www.jfdglobal.com/services/training-services/course-booking/

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 67 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.7 - Buoyancy Control Devices (BCDs)

Recreational scuba divers and militaries commonly use buoyancy control devices. However, they are still not always
adopted for saturation, and surface orientated commercial diving operations, despite some noticeable progress.
It is important to note that these tools give the possibility to set a neutral buoyancy allowing the diver not to drop and
easily control his depth when performing excursions that are not on the seabed. Also, they can be helpful in the case of
the recovery of an unconscious or injured diver. It must be remembered that in the case of a team of three divers, recover
a casualty who is not in a condition to move by himself with only the help of the umbilical that is pulled from the bell is a
difficult task, even though the rescue diver and the bellman are active and experienced. Also, in the case that the team in
the bell is limited to two persons, the rescuer intervening in the water is the bellman, and there is nobody in the bell to
pull the umbilicals. For these reasons, we can say that these devices are beneficial and should be part of the tools
available to the diver when it is possible to implement them.

1.1.7.1 - Description
They are composed of a bladder or a sealed bag where the gas is injected through an inflator which is connected to a low-
pressure gas supply of a 1st stage regulator connected to a cylinder or situated on the side block of the helmet. The gas
trapped in the bladder is released using quick release valves (dump valves) and slow release valves that are used to
control the buoyancy. They can be classified into two main families:
● “Stabilizing jackets”, also called “vest BCDs,” are buoyancy control devices that are shaped as a vest. With this
design, the trapped gas is distributed around the belly, the torso, the back, and the shoulders. They are generally
fitted with adjustable straps. This repartition of the gas makes them very safe when they are fully inflated at the
surface as the body of the diver is kept vertical. However, note that these devices will never be used at the
surface during saturation diving operations.
● “Back inflation buoyancy control devices”, which are also called "Wings," are installed around the backpack,
thus are inflated in back of the diver and may be fitted with rubber bands that retract them when they are not in
use. These models are often used by sportive scuba divers practicing deep incursions with extra cylinders as
some models can provide lift capacities above 40 kg. However, large volume bladders are unnecessary for
saturation divers as, due to the supply from the umbilical and the proximity of the bell, they do not need to carry
these cumbersome extra gas bottles.

Dump valve Dorsal bladder

Shoulder strap

Dump valve command

Rubber piece Backpack spot
Lateral bladder
Backpack spot

Bladder

Inflator & slow

release valve block
Belt

Back inflation BCD Stabilizing jacket

1.1.7.2 - Precautions to be in place for the implementation of BCDs

- Formation of the divers:
Buoyancy Control Devices are dangerous tools when the divers have not been trained to use them, which may be the
case with some commercial divers. Note that there is no IMCA module for the use of BCDs, and even though the
procedures for the implementation of such items or inflated dry suits is taught in a lot of diving schools, several
experiences show that it is not the case of all schools. For this reason, the diving superintendent must ensure that the
divers have had such training. That can be done through the control of certificates or a test. Note that the following
documents, but not limited to, can be considered a proof of competence:
● The logbook of the diver should normally record the formations the diver has received. Also, the suits and
buoyancy control devices used during the projects should be indicated.
● Military or sportive diving certificates or licenses may prove that the diver is familiar with buoyancy control
devices. Note that regarding this point the description of the formation undertaken should be provided.
If there is no evidence that the diver is familiar with buoyancy control devices, he cannot be authorized to dive with
such equipment.
Of course, the company can implement a test or a formation. However, that should not be organized without the support
of a recognized diving school and diving instructors.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 68 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Selection of the model:
There are a lot of models of Buoyancy Control Device. However, most of them are initially designed for sportive or
military divers, and may not be suitable for commercial saturation diving. For this reason, a lot of precautions should be
in place when selecting the model. Also, the selection of the BCD should be made by experienced divers and diving
supervisors. The people in charge of choosing such devices should focus on the following elements, but not limited to:
● The BCD must not disturb the use of other safety devices such as bailout systems (bottles or rebreathers).

● There must not be conflicts with the hoses and wires of the helmet, the
attachment of the umbilical, and the hot water connection and manifold.
● The device should be fitted with dump valves and a slow release valve
which are situated in the upper parts of the bladder. Their commands
must be readily accessible. Note that the inflator is often fitted at the end
of a ringed hose with the slow release valve (see the drawing on the
previous page). This hose should be arranged in such a way that it does
not conflict with another equipment and is readily accessible at all times.
If it is not the case, it should be replaced by an inflator similar to those 1
used with dry suits (see # 1 on the photo to the side). Also, if the BCD is
fitted with an optional bottom dump valve, it should be situated in a
convenient place and the person selecting the equipment must ensure
that it cannot be opened unexpectedly. Thus, if this extra valve can be
the source of a safety problem, it should be removed.
● BCDs used for commercial diving must be made of materials that are
strong enough not to be damaged during working operations in an
aggressive surrounding.
● The buoyancy control device should not deprive the diver of breathing gas if his bailout system is activated. For
this reason, it is preferable to supply it from one or two separate dedicated small bottle(s) as it is the case with a
lot of military models.

BCDs mounted on twin bottles sets used for shallow saturation diving in one of the bells of UDS Lichtenstein
- Pre-dive checks and maintenance:
BCDs are safety equipment that must be checked before each dive. For convenience, these checks may have to be
performed by the technicians outside the bell:
● Webbing, cloth, and sewing threads should be in perfect condition without noticeable wear or scratch.

● The bladder and valves should be tested for leaks, and defective spares should be replaced. Note that most
manufacturers say the lifetime of a bladder is approximately 10 years from the date of manufacturing.
● The inflator should be easy to trigger and should immediately return to the closed position when released.

● Note that the small bottles and their regulators may have been flooded. For this reason, they must be frequently
visually inspected. They should be removed from service and adequately tested and refurbished if corrosion is
detected. Note that these bottles must not be filled inside the saturation system.
Preventive maintenance should be performed:
● The BCD should be rinsed with fresh water internally and externally after every dive.
Regarding the internal parts of the BCD, the seawater that is inside the bladder should be removed and replaced
by approximately two litres of fresh water and the BCD should then be inflated and shaken to rinse it
appropriately. This fresh water is then removed. Note that this operation can be repeated several times.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 69 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● Note that a Buoyancy Control Device (BCD) transferred from the saturation system through the tool transfer
lock should be emptied; otherwise, it will be fully inflated when it arrives at the surface. A precaution to avoid
this is to remove one dump valve.
● Pre-project training may be organized in a swimming pool that is filled with chlorinated water. For such a case,
manufacturers recommend to thoroughly rinse the BCD, as repeated exposure in such water can damage the
construction materials used.
● A buoyancy control device that must be stored should be dried externally and internally. A natural process of
drying is recommended not to damage it. Also, manufacturers recommend to store it partially inflated.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 70 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.8 - Knifes, fins, weight belt, and small equipment
Only devices from recognized manufacturers are considered suitable.

1.1.8.1 - Knife
The diver must have a knife that is designed to cut ropes, fishing lines, and textile slings.
● The blade that is suitable for this purpose has a specific profile and is
sufficiently long (16 to 20 cm) to cut big ropes.
● This blade must be strong enough to not break during normal use. It should
be made of specific stainless steel that does not corrode.
● The knife is secured in its sheath that is designed to secure it and easily
release it.
● The diver must ensure that it is easily accessible. A small coiled lanyard
should be installed to avoid losing it.
● The knife must be tested for efficiency before starting the bell run.

● Note that despite precautions, knives are often lost during diving operations.
For this reason, a spare unit should be in the bell and several replacements
must be available in the onboard store.

1.1.8.2 - Fins
Fins must be worn for all jobs that are not on the seabed. They should always be available in the bell even though the task
is planned to be performed on the seabed and that the diver logically prefers using boots, as they can be useful in the case
of an emergency or if the diver needs them due to the conditions encountered. The following elements should be taken
into account when selecting them:
● Fins designed for diving operations from closed bells should be made of durable
materials and not be too long to allow easy deployment of the diver, not take too much
space in the bell, and not to disturb him during the work.
● Open heel fins are generally preferred as they can be worn on booties and are
adjustable. However, the shoe size must not be too large and fit the feet of the diver. If
it is not the case, the diver does not swim comfortably and may lose them.
● Note that despite numerous new models that are proposed for the market, fins used for
commercial diving have not really evolved for more than fifty years. As an example,
the model in the photo at the side is still one of the most used and was first
commercialized under the name “Jetfin” in 1964. This model is made of rubber and
appreciated for its durability despite its heavy weight and its reduced output compared
to more modern models.
Fins should be inspected before each bell run:
● Note that rubber straps are fragile and often need to be changed. For this reason, spare straps must be available
in the bell.
● Also, buckles may be damaged and should be carefully checked:

Metal buckles are robust. However, they may distort with time, or the rubber parts in which they are
○

inserted may tear when they become too old.

Plastic fasteners are often mounted on pivots that are molded in the mass of the fin and that may become
○

quickly worn to retain them in position. When such a problem happens, the fins cannot be repaired and
should be scrapped. That explains the reason old models such as the one in the photo are still successful.
● Note that rubber loses its capabilities over time. As a result, items made of rubber stored for too long a time
become sticky and lose their elasticity and thus may tear easily. Of course, the effects of the sun and the salt
speed up this process. Nevertheless, it will happen to items ideally maintained and stored. Products such as talc
powder slightly slow down such the process.
● Fins may be lost by divers even though they are in good condition. For this reason, there must be a replacement
pair in the bell and several spare units onboard the vessel.

1.1.8.3 - Buoyancy control weights

Depending on whether the diver works on the seabed or not and is equipped with a buoyancy control device, weights
should be used to adjust his buoyancy. A balanced buoyancy is ideal when the diver is working above the floor and needs
to swim. However, remember that a saturation diver who becomes positively buoyant is exposed to an uncontrolled
ascent, and so is in danger.
These weights of one or two kilograms and sometimes one pound can be molded lead blocks or granules in sealed bags.
They can be put on a specific belt made of textile or rubber, or clipped to the harness of the diver, or inserted into
dedicated pockets of the harness or the buoyancy control device. Note that in the old time weights could be trapezoidal
medals installed at chest level. However, this system seems to no longer be used for saturation diving.
Belts are still used for scuba and commercial surface oriented diving as, depending on the job undertaken, they may have
some advantages.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 71 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
However, they are not the best option for saturation diving and teams still using them are very rare.
If this option is selected, the belt must be robust enough not to be torn during a dive, designed not to be opened (lost)
unexpectedly, and be adjusted in such a way that it cannot slide. Specific buckles that can be quickly closed and opened
are proposed by manufacturers. Nevertheless, classical pin buckles are still the most selected and the preferable option.
The weights that are installed on the belt must be measurable and secured on it in such a way that they cannot be lost.
Belts are not complex items. However, when preparing the dive, the diver should focus on the sewing or the rivets that
secure the buckle and the holes in which the pin of the buckle is inserted. Also, as explained previously, rubber does not
keep its capabilities over time and may become stiff and fragile.
As a result of this discussion, weights secured in dedicated secured pockets of the harness seems the most comfortable
and safest solution. Thus, the preferable option for saturation diving.

1.1.8.3 - Rescue Lanyard

A lanyard that is designed to secure an injured or an unconscious diver to the rescue diver should be provided to each
diver. The rescue lanyard should be a strong polyester rope (approximately 1 cm diameter) with a spliced eye at each end
or a similar small soft sling of approximately 1 m long with a carabineer is ready for use in each eye.
Climbing type carabineers similar to the model below, which is designed to be quickly inserted and remain always closed
as a result of its particular shape, are the best option for this essential safety tool.

1.1.8.4 - Compass
With the progress of survey systems, divers are guided to the target using beacons. However a compass is a good help to
follow or report a direction. These instruments should be able to withstand the pressures attained in saturation. For this
reason, liquid filled compasses are recommended.
Note that a lot of diving compasses designed for recreational scuba divers are originally designed for depths above 100
metres.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 72 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.9 - Main bell umbilical

1.1.9.1 - Description
The main bell umbilical is an essential part through which the following functions are transferred to and from the bell:
● Gas supplies and exhausts:
○ Bell pressurization and exhaust
○ Diver #1 & #2 gas supply
○ Bellman/Standby diver (diver #3) gas supply
○ Divers’ gas reclaim exhaust
● Depth, atmosphere control, & temperature control
○ Depth external bell & diver #3
○ Depth internal bell
○ Depth diver #1
○ Depth diver #2
○ Analysis bell
○ Hot water supply
● Electrical supplies
○ External lights
○ Internal lights
○ Scrubber
○ Diver #1 hat light
○ Diver #2 hat light
○ Diver #1 camera
○ Diver #2 camera
○ Bell internal camera
○ Bell external cameras
○ Sensors divers’ monitoring system
○ Hypergas analyser (hydrocarbons analyser)
○ Onboard batteries & through water comms battery
● Video, sensors, & communication signals
○ Diver #1 video signal
○ Diver #2 video signal
○ Signals sensors divers monitoring systems
○ External bottom camera signal
○ External topside camera signal
○ Internal camera signal
○ Sound powered phone communications
○ Microphone diver #1 signal
○ Earphone diver #1 signal
○ Microphone diver #2 signal
○ Earphone diver #2 signal
○ Microphone standby diver (diver #3) signal
○ Earphone standby diver (diver #3) signal
○ Microphone bell intercom signal
○ Earphone bell intercom signal
○ Hypergas analyser signal
Wires and hoses are maintained together by a polyethylene braided sock that protect them from shocks and abrasion. The
hoses are made of rubber and high-performance thermoplastic polymers. Similar materials are used to isolate the
electrical and communication wires.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 73 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.9.2 - Installation and protection
IMCA D 024 says that The umbilical must be securely attached to the bell by means of a strength member or strain relief
fitting so that neither the individual components or any bell penetrations are subject to load. The leads of the hoses and
cables at the bell end should be arranged to avoid chafing or kinking.
To fulfill this requirement, most umbilicals of modern systems are secured to the protection frame of the bell by double
eye flexible cable grips. Note that in the examples below each umbilical is attached to the bottom frame and also secured
along with the bell by dedicated metallic collars. As a result, the hoses and wires moving out the polyethylene braided
sock are protected from tractions that may damage them. Also, the connecting wires and hoses are secured along with the
wall of the bell and have sufficient ample curves to protect them from kinking. Note that contacts with obstacles should
be absorbed by the protection frame of the bell that is arranged at a sufficient distance to ensure that wires and hoses
should not be affected by shocks, chafing, and other damages resulting from such undesirable events.

Securing collar

Double eye flexible

cable grip

The external braided sheath of the umbilical can be damaged by frequent rubbing with the lifting and guide cables. Also,
it can become very dirty as these cables are coated with a layer of grease that protects them from corrosion. To protect the
umbilical and avoid conflicts with the lifting cables during the deployment and the recovery of the bell, the manufacturers
of the last generation systems secure them to the side of the bell and as far away as possible from any cable. Also, they
provide dynamic tensioning systems that permanently recover the excess of slack of the umbilical. As a result, the
umbilical is kept in perfect condition.

Umbilical

Connection
lifting cable

Note that the umbilicals of some systems from the previous generation are sometimes connected to a pad-eye that is
welded on the top of the bell and close to the lifting point of the pressure vessel. Also, they are not equipped with
dynamic tensioning systems. That results in umbilicals with sometimes an excessive slack that are rubbing with the
cables and are made dirty by the grease that protects these cables. To avoid having too much slack in the water with such
systems a solution frequently used is to fasten the umbilical along with the lifting cable by the means of whips. The
distance between the whips depends on parameters such as the underwater currents and whether the surface support uses
a dynamic positioning system.
Old systems are designed with umbilicals that are recovered and deployed by rollers and manually stored in a rectangular
or a rounded basket. The manual storage of such an umbilical is a strenuous task that employs at least two people.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 74 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Modern systems are designed with a winch that coils the umbilical ideally and deploys it at the speed of the cable
winches. The winch is also a part of the dynamic tensioning system. Note that IMCA says that it should be fitted with a
mechanical braking system to stop the umbilical paying out under load when the winch motor is in use (over-running), in
neutral, or at rest.

Umbilical basket (old generation systems) Umbilical winch (Last generation systems)

1.1.9.3 - Bell recovery using the umbilical.

IMCA D 024 says: The umbilical should only be used as a means of secondary recovery if it is specifically designed for that purpose.
If so, it must be tested in line with the requirements in the handling system section.
The capabilities of the umbilical to withstand a load must be documented by the manufacturer and never be exceeded.
Note that umbilicals designed to lift the bell in the air are very rare. Nevertheless, the majority of the umbilicals in service
are sufficiently strong to pull the bell to the proximity of the surface where it can be then connected to a lifting gear.
However, this option must never be used without explicit confirmation from the diving system and umbilical
manufacturers and the lifting tests indicated in IMCA D 024.

1.1.9.4 - Emergency umbilical

In the case that the main umbilical has been severed, an emergency umbilical can be connected to reinitiate the essential
functions of the bell. Of course, this umbilical is designed for emergency recovery only and cannot be used for normal
diving operations.
Note that IMCA D 024 says that it is only an option. As a result, IMCA considers that dives can be undertaken even
though this equipment is missing. Nevertheless, serious companies and clients impose an emergency umbilical ready for
use on the worksite. As already said, emergency umbilicals are designed to provide at least the functions indicated in
point 2.3.2.6. As a reminder, it must be fitted with at least a hot water hose with a connector 3/4” NPT male, and
breathing gas hose with a connector 1/2” NPT male. However, most emergency umbilicals are also fitted with a 1/4” hose
with a male connector NPT for the internal depth, a power supply line, and a comms line. Also. NORSOK requests an
additional 1/4” hose with a male connector NPT for the gas analysis.
IMCA says that this umbilical must be stored in suitable conditions, so on a specific frame from which it can be easily
deployed (see the photo below). The tests and certifications to be carried on are the same as for the main bell umbilical.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 75 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.9.5 - Maintenance
The bell umbilical and its attachments must always be in perfect condition and checked before and after the dive.
Also, IMCA D 024 provides the following guidelines regarding the certification and the audit of such a device:
● The continuity and resistance of all cables must be checked every six months. Also, the other electrical
components of the umbilical should be examined and function tested at the same time.
● Hose components and their protective devices should be carefully monitored, and function tested every six
months. Also, they must be tested to their maximum working pressure every two years. Besides, they must be
hydro tested to 1.5 times their maximum working pressure when they are new or as recommended by the
manufacturer or the certification body.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 76 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.10 - Bell launch and recovery and connecting systems

1.1.10.1 - Kinematics of launch and recovery systems

Two main design are commonly found: “A” frames or “trolley systems”.
● “A” frame systems are generally found on portable systems or systems designed with a bell deployed over the
side of the vessel. However, it may happen that they are installed over a moon pool. This configuration is also
used for the deployment of wet bells, diving baskets, ROVs, and other devices. The winches and the main
umbilical reel that can be of complex or straightforward designs are often installed above the chamber to which
the bell is connected. The advantages of these systems are their simplicity and robustness. They can be used with
bells that connect to the transfer lock by the lateral or bottom door.
The A-frame is deployed above the sea and returned to the inside of the vessel by strong hydraulic jacks.
When the bell connects laterally, a trolley mounted on rollers which are guided by two rails included in the
chassis is used for the final approach of the flanges. The procedure to connect the bell laterally to the system
consists of lowering the bell on the trolley, then approach it gradually to the flange of the transfer lock. The
trolley is generally actuated by a hydraulic jack. The cables and the umbilical are gradually slightly slacked
during the approach. Note that on some very old generation systems, there were no trolleys and the bell was
resting on skates that were guided and sliding in two slots inserted in the chassis. A winch was used to approach
the bell to the transfer lock. It seems that systems with such design are no more manufactured.

Hydraulic jack

Trolley

Transfer lock Bell approached to

Bell deployed
the transfer lock

1
3

4
2

As an example of a system designed with A-frame (see #1), the picture above shows a portable saturation system
of the previous generation with the bell deployed above the water (see #2). Note that the umbilical is paid-out or
recovered by a grooved wheel (See #3) into which the umbilical that is stored by hand in a basket (see #4) is
pressed by a roller. Note that a lot of systems similar to this one are still in service.
● A bell traversing trolley system is a self-contained unit, mounted within parallel rails built into the ship’s
structure. The trolley moves on the tracks through the action of an electric motor that rotates a gable on a rack
(see the drawing next page). These systems are more complex than A-frame ones and for this reason, they are
not often used with portable systems. They are the preferred ones with built-in saturation systems as they allow a
smooth transfer of the bell, and particularly a precise connection of the flanges. As with A frames, they can be
used with bell that connects to the system laterally or by the bottom door. The last generation systems are
equipped with a computer that controls the disconnection, descent, ascent, and reconnection of the bell.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 77 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Electric Motor
Rail

Rack
Gable

Bell above the moonpool Bell above the trunk

Trunk to transfer lock Trunk

Transfer lock
Transfer lock
Moon pool Moon pool

1 2

The photo above shows an example of a system designed with a traversing trolley. Note the rails (see #1) to
which the trolley (see #4) is hung. Also, note the rack (see#2) and the gable that moves the trolley along the rails
and is motioned by an electric motor (see #3). The Bell is at depth and for this reason the trolley (see #4) is
above the moon pool (see #5). The moon pool can be closed using doors that are folded on each side (see #6).

1.1.10.2 - Winches and wires

Most last generation launch and recovery systems are equipped with winches designed to fulfill the following functions:
● Lowering and recovery of the bell

● Anti-gyration of the bell

● Secondary recovery

● Umbilical deployment

The lowering and recovery of the bell are performed by the main winch which cable is connected to the center of the bell.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 78 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Regarding this winch and the cable used, IMCA says the following:
● The winch used must be certified suitable for man-riding and its raise & lower control must be designed to
return to the neutral position when it is released by the operator. Also, the raise, neutral, and lower positions
must be indicated so the operator knows how to operate the command. Note that regarding this point, modern
systems are driven from a separate console which controls are operated electronically.
● An automatic brake which secures the winch when the operating lever is at the neutral position or if there is a
loss of power must be in place. Also, a secondary automatic or manually operated braking system must be fitted
and ready for use in case the main brake fails.
● Some systems are equipped with a clutch mechanism. There must be a system that prevents this mechanism
from becoming disengaged during the operations.
● The winch must be fitted with two independent sources of power. The secondary source must always be
available in case of failure of the primary source of power. Also, winches used to lift diving bells, including
cursor winches, must be equipped with a main and a secondary motor (so, two motors as on the photo below).
IMCA also says that this requirement does not apply to winches used for secondary recovery.

● The winch drum must be able to accept the full length of wire being used. It means Edge of the drum
that there should be a space between the outside of the top layer of wire and the
edge of the drum flange of at least 2.5 times the wire diameter as is that case of the Wire
winch below and also explained in the drawing on the side.
Also, unless access is physically restricted, guards should be fitted to the winch and
drum to stop anything (clothing, fingers, etc.) being drawn into the machinery.
When the winches are installed at the proximity of other equipment, this
requirement is often fulfilled using grating installed all around the winch as on the
photos below. Other systems have winches installed on their top with no
protection. However, their access is only possible by a ladder or a door. Distance = Ø wire x 2.5

● Arrangements should exist to ensure that the wire being recovered on to any man-riding winch is correctly
spooled. In the case of main bell winches this is often by means of a mechanical spooling device (see below).

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 79 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Note: The principle of work of a mechanical spooling system consists of a bidirectional reciprocating screw with
two screw threads with opposite rotating directions that are crossing. A trolley equipped with rollers that direct
the cable is fitted on this rod. This trolley is guided to a side of the winch by the rotation of the screw. When the
side of the winch toward which the trolley is pushed is reached, the rotation of the rod pushes the trolley to the
reciprocating thread, and it is moved to the opposite direction. Etc.
● A notice giving the operating instructions for the winch, including the actions necessary if power is lost, must be
displayed where the winch operator can see it.
Also, to avoid paying out umbilical in excess, there must be a device allowing the winch operator to see how
much of the main bell lift wire and main bell umbilical have been paid out. It may be by line-out meters (see on
the photo below) or by marking the bell wire and umbilical at 10 metre intervals or less.

● The winches must be visually examined and function tested at their maximum Safe Working Load (SWL) at
least every 6 months. Also, an independent static load test on each brake system at 1.25 times maximum SWL
should be performed at the same period.
In addition, a static load test on each brake system at 1.5 times maximum SWL plus a dynamic test at 1.25 times
maximum SWL followed by Non Destructive Evaluation (NDE) of critical areas must be performed every year.
● The lift wire(s) must be non-rotating and the connection of the wire to the bell must be of a suitable type. It
should have two retaining means for the removable pin (as an example ,a nut locked with a split pin).

● Unless the wire is to be renewed every 2 years, it should be pressure lubricated every 6 months, at least from the
bell back to the maximum depth of immersion in the period. If it has been laid up for a substantial period then it
should have been pressure lubricated before lay up.
● There have been a number of problems in the past with high tensile bell wire ropes which appear to lose strength
even when properly stored. For this reason, a test to destruction should be carried out when any high tensile bell
wire rope is first put into service to establish the actual breaking force of the wire at that time. Provided the test
result does not fall below the manufacturer’s Maximum Breaking Force (MBF), future destructive test results
should be compared to that original figure (the base value), rather than to any claim (or test certificate provided)
by the manufacturer.
If the test to destruction when the wire is first put into service does indicate a Maximum Breaking Force (MBF)
below that of the manufacturer, then the manufacturer’s MBF should always be adopted as the base value
against which to monitor future deterioration in breaking force.
However, if the result falls 10% below the MBF, then the rope should be discarded.
The sample tested to destruction should prove an adequate safety factor exists. This usually is eight times the
safe working load.
● The inspection and maintenance of the cable should be organized as follows:
○ A static test at 1.25 times SWL plus a function test at SWL as an integral part of lifting system and a
visual examination of visible sections must be performed at least every six months.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 80 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
○ A test to destruction to prove an adequate safety factor should be applied to a length of the rope that has
been cut (usually, 2 - 3m above the connection to the bell) at least every 12 months.
○ When this test is completed (thus, every 12 months), the technician re-terminate the cable (see the photo
below), and a static load test at 1.5 times SWL is performed.

○ As it is necessary to be able to trace the testing history of a main lift wire, all certification, including
original manufacturer’s certificate, initial test certificate and any annual test certificates should be
available for inspection.
● Note from IMCA SEL 022/M 194, section 13:
There should be an annual removal of a length of wire rope from just beyond the first sheave from the bell
termination with the bell below the surface, allowing for swell, to be discarded. A length sufficient to provide
test samples for two tensile tests should be cut from the bell end adjacent to the termination. In certain
circumstances the competent person may waive the recommendation to cut all the way back to the first sheave.
In systems where there is a single vertical fall directly from the winch to the bell it will be necessary to cut right
back to the winch.
A sample should be tested to destruction to verify that the required factor of safety is maintained. Should the test
prove unsatisfactory due to problems with test procedures or where the wire rope fails within a length equal to
six wire rope diameters (6 d) from the base of the socket or cone, a second test may be carried out.
This alternative test should not be used as a way of avoiding discard where a valid test is performed which
indicates low strength.
The ultimate strength test to be carried out on a sample from the part subject to the most severe dynamic loading
will be used to verify that a factor of safety of 8:1 is still being maintained and if not the wire rope should be
discarded. Even if the factor of safety is being maintained but the result falls 10% below the base value adopted
following the test carried out when the rope was first put into service, it should be discarded.
One of the tensile test samples should be dismantled and the internals examined.
IMCA says that there must be a secondary means of recovering the diving bell to the surface, bringing it on board and
mating it to the chamber system. This means of recovery must be independent of the main recovery system. Also, IMCA
says that this requirement is intended to refer to the means of lifting (wires, lifting gear, winch, etc.). It is not intended to
say that a second A-frame, gantry or set of supporting steelwork should be provided.
To answer to this requirement, the secondary recovery of the bell is usually performed by the clump weigh winch which
technical requirements are the same as those of the main winch. The only difference is that, as indicated previously, a
second motor is not required for the secondary recovery winch. Nevertheless, some manufacturers provide their
secondary means of recovery with two motors. It is the case of Parkburn which built-in launch and recovery systems
(LARS) of UDS Lichtenstein and Picasso that are taken as references in this description (see below).

Electric motor #1

Electric motor #2

Note that IMCA takes into account the fact that the secondary means of recovery may not be the clump weight system. In
this case, it is said that if the winch(es) and the guide wires of the clump weight are not designated as man-riding then
they are required only to meet the normal standards for lifting equipment applying at the site.
Umbilical winches must be built with the same requirements as wire winches. Note that nothing is said regarding
synchronization with the main winch. However, manufacturers provide this option in addition to the system to avoid
paying out umbilical in excess or the opposite. Also, as already discussed in point 2.3.10, IMCA says that the main bell
umbilical should not be designated as a secondary means of recovery for the bell unless both it and its handling system
are specifically designed for that function.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 81 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.10.3 - Heave compensation
When there is an established swell, the vessel moves up and down, and the bell follows the motions of the ship. As a
result, when the bottom door of the bell is opened, and depending on the amplitude of the movement, The ambient
pressure changes permanently, which results that the level of the water inside the bell is unstable and that the divers
inside the bell are obliged to correct the balance of their ears constantly. Also, entering and leaving the bell is dangerous
due to its vertical movements that can be of several metres. To compensate this problem some diving LARS systems are
fitted with heave compensators which function to keep the bell motionless, so it is always at the same depth.
Heave compensation systems are usually divided into “Passive Heave Compensation” (PHC) and “Active Heave
Compensation” (AHC). However, note that a lot of mechanisms combine the two systems.
Passive Heave Compensation (PHC) systems accumulate the energy of a movement and use it to compensate for the
change of position between the vessel and the load underwater. These systems work similarly to shock absorbers and
often consists of hydraulic cylinders and gas accumulators that keep the circuit under pressure. Note that their efficiency
is limited. Externally, they often consist of cylinders that are connected between the hook of the crane and the load.
As an example, the scheme below shows a hydraulic piston passive heave compensator. With this system, the gas, that is
separated from the oil by a reinforced diaphragm, is pressurized to hold the desired load.

Accumulator Cylinder

Pressurized gas
Piston
Diaphragm (or sometimes a piston)
that separates the gas from the fluid

Oil

Connection to load

Active Heave Compensation (AHC) systems utilize a Motion Reference Unit (MRU), which is an inertial measurement
unit with multi-axis motion sensors that actively measures all the movements of the vessel. Based on the data collected, A
computer calculates the necessary counter motion of the system and controls it in real time. As a result, the length of the
cable is permanently adjusted to counteract the vertical movements of the vessel, and there is no variation of the distance
of the bell from the bottom; thus, its depth is kept constant.
The systems that adjust the length of the cable can be based on hydraulic cylinders, and also rotary hydraulic motors or
electric motors that directly move the winch.
Hydraulic cylinder systems are based on pistons that extend and retract according to the direction of the fluid coming
from the Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU) through a series of electronically piloted control valves that direct this fluid
according to the orders from the MRU (See scheme #1 below). The cylinders are working independently from the winch,
which is usually inactive. They can be installed vertically or horizontally. The function of the accumulator is to maintain
a constant pressure in the system.

Safety block

Cylinder with piston Accumulator

Hydraulic
Active
Power Unit Active
valves
(HPU) valves
Motion Reference
Unit (MRU)

Winch

Heave compensation
Scheme #1: Hydraulic cylinders system
Load (diving bell)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 82 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Rotary hydraulic systems are based on the same principle as hydraulic cylinders. The difference is that the cylinders are
replaced by the motor of the winch that acts in one direction or its opposite in function of the direction of the fluid sent
from the HPU through the electronically piloted control valves.
Electrically driven heave compensation systems are often selected due to their high efficiency as well as the fact that they
can be easily fed by the generators of the last generation diesel-electric vessels. Also, it is said that they are more silent
than other hydraulic systems. In addition, they do not need an oil reservoir and Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU), which may
save some space and attract contractors who do not want to deal with oil replacement and potential leaks.
The advantage of electricity is also that it can act directly to the motor and allows the same torque at a slow speed as that
at rapid speed. However, the electricity produced by the generators must be adjusted to the needs of the electric motor of
the winch. The scheme below shows an example of a chain of conversion of the electrical current produced by the
generator and where the motion reference unit (MRU) intervenes to allow heave compensation.

Rotation in one direction or its opposite

Main Supply Frequency Direction

Generator signal
switchboard transformer converter

Electrical Alternating
Current (AC) motors
& gearbox of the winch
Motion Reference
Controller
Unit (MRU)
Load

Definitions:
● An electric switchboard is a device that directs electricity from one or more sources of supply to several smaller
regions of usage. It is an assembly of one or more panels, each of which contains switches that allow electricity
to be redirected.
● A transformer is a device used to change the voltage of an alternating current in one circuit to a different
voltage in a second circuit. Transformers consist of a frame-like iron core that has a wire wound around each
end. As a current enters the transformer through one of the coils, the magnetic field it produces causes the other
coil to pick up the current. If there are more turns on the second coil than on the first coil, the outgoing current
will have a higher voltage than the incoming current. This is called a step-up transformer. If there are fewer
turns on the second coil than on the first, the outgoing current will have a lower voltage. This is called a step-
down transformer.
● A frequency converter is a device that converts alternating current (AC) of one frequency to alternating currents
of other frequencies. As the speed of an AC motor is dependent on the frequency of the AC power supply
changing this frequency allows changing the motor speed. As a result, the rotational speed of the motor can be
adjusted using this means instead of using a gearbox, which allows saving energy
Note that heave compensation systems are designed to be activated only when the bell is at depth and should be
deactivated when the bell is recovered to the surface. Also, before starting the system, the operator, must pay out
sufficient length of umbilical and lower the clump weight to allow a sufficient distance for the system to work and avoid
damaging these elements when they are moving up and down (remember that the bell does not move). New systems
perform this operation automatically. Note that some models of clump weights that are designed to allow the divers
entering into the bell cannot be used for this purpose with heave compensation systems.

Bell at arrival: System not activated Bell at work: System activated

Umbilical slacked
(moving up and down)
Umbilical not slacked

Bell moving Bell not moving

up and down

Clump weight Distance from

not lowered the seabed stable
Clump weight lowered
(moving up and down)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 83 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.10.4 - Connection to transfer lock
As already indicated, the transfer to or from the transfer lock can be performed through a trunk that is lateral or connected
to the bottom opening of the bell.
This connection is of primary importance as if it fails during the transfer under pressure, the divers will be killed as a
result of an explosive decompression. Such accident has already happened on Byford Dolphin in 1983 (see “Explosive
decompression accident” in the document “Saturation diving accident”).
For this reason the connection and disconnection of the bell to the saturation system must be performed with a lot of
precaution, and the system must be designed to never open during the transfer under pressure. IMCA D 024 says: A
safety interlock system must be fitted to the clamping mechanism securing the bell to the chamber. This interlock must
make it impossible to open the clamp if there is still pressure inside the trunk and impossible to obtain a gas tight seal on
the trunk if the clamp is not properly closed.
The connecting clamp consists of two half-clamps with internal profiles in bevel (see #1 below) that are approached
around the flanges by two thread bars (see #2 below) secured on their middle at the central axis of the flanges (see #3)
and designed with threads of opposite direction. As a result, the half-clamps close simultaneously when the bars are
rotated in one direction and open when they are rotated in the opposite direction. Note that these bars are actuated by a
motor, which can be hydraulic or pneumatic (see #4), and through a series of gears (see #5). Also, a wheel (see #6)
allows to open or close the clamp manually in the case of a breakdown of the motor.
1
3 6
2 1 5
2
3

2
5 5
4

Note that in addition to the profile in bevel (see #7 in the drawing below) of the faces that are in contact with the clamp,
the flange of the chamber may have a specific profile to guide the flange of the bell exactly to the ideal position (see #8).

8 7
Clamp Bell flange
Clamp
8
Guide

Gasket

Trunk flange

When the transfer trunk is under pressure, the clamp is locked by pins that are pushed out of their cylinders (see #9)
through two overlapping holes (see #10) by the pressure established in the trunk. This locking mechanism is connected to
the trunk through small pipes (see #11). Springs in the cylinders retract the pins when the pressure in the trunk is
released. Sensors are in place when additional electronic safety systems are fitted (see #12). Note that other locking
systems exist.

9
10

10 12
9
11
11

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 84 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.10.5 - Anti-swinging systems
Depending on the kinematics of the LARS, this part of the mechanism can be more or less complex.
Old systems were not provided with blocking mechanisms and the bell was merely hung to the main hook. As a result,
the bell was swinging in any direction and was difficult to control during the launching and the recovery phases.
To correct this problem blocking mechanisms have been fitted at the top of the launch and recovery systems.
With some systems, these mechanisms can be quite simple and may consist of a
circular tubular structure which is kept at the top of the frame (see #1 on the photo)
and is in contact with the top of the guards of the bell. 1
Two latching hooks (see #2) that are locked underneath the topside horizontal tubes
of its protector frame secure the bell to the structure during the transfer, which
limits its swinging movements and allows slacking the main cable if necessary
during the adjustment of the bell above its final lowering point. 2
To lower the bell, the main cable is recovered in tension to slack the latches that are
then opened. When the latches are confirmed opened, the bell is slowly lowered.
Last generation systems used with built-in trolley are generally much more complex as they are designed to limit any
movement of the bell during the transfer to and through the moon pool. An example of such mechanisms are those in
place on the LARS system from Parkburn already described previously.
This system is composed of 2 main parts:
● The parts that remain on the trolley: They are the pulleys of the main lifting cable (see #3 below) and the
umbilical (see#4), the latching system (see #5), and two cylinders (see #6) that allow lowering and lifting the
bell to and from the flange of the entry lock while the latching system secures the bell to the trolley through a
blocker with a specific shape installed on the connection to the bell (see #7). Sensors (see #8) are fitted to inform
the operator when the bell is fully lifted and hung by the main winch.

6
8
4

● The cursor, a circular piece which purpose is centralizing the the bell during its descent through the moonpool It
is fitted with rollers (see #9 & #10 below) that perfectly maintain it in the middle of the moon pool during the
descent. The cursor stops at the end of the moonpool (see the photos on the next page).

9
10

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 85 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Bell and its cursor in the moonpool Cursor at the end of the moonpool

1.1.10.6 - Retaining legs in moonpool

Depending on the design of the system, retractable legs may be installed in the moonpool to
secure parts of the system such as clump weight and standoff frame that may be stored there to
save some space and have them ready to go as fast as possible.
These legs are articulated structures that are deployed and retracted by hydraulics jacks (see the
drawing aside) Sensors are normally provided to inform the operator of their position and prevent
any lowering operation if they are not fully retracted. They are visible on the photos above where
they are in the closed position because the bell is moving down or is at work. They will be
deployed only when the bell will be back on deck.
Note that this mechanism is optional and not found on all systems using moonpools.

1.1.10.7 - Load limiters

Load limiters use a similar principle as passive load compensators. However, their function is to act as shock absorbers to
protect winches and the deployed cables from the shocks resulting from a suddenly stopped motion. Such a situation may
happen in the case of a descent suddenly stopped and more often as a result of vertical movements from the vessel
heaving in the swell (See the scheme below).

Vessel on the top of the waves

ell
Sw Sw
ell

Winch

Bell
Shock that may damage the winch
Suddenly stopped descent and
vessel starting to raise up Shock that may damage the cable

On UDS Lichtenstein and Picasso, load limiters are installed above the winches they protect and are at the same level that
the top of the trolley. They are designed to work horizontally with a displacement of 30 cm.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 86 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The principle of work of these devices is based on oil-filled cylinders that are maintained under pressure by hydro-
pneumatic accumulators similar to those used for passive heave compensation, as previously described in point 2.3.11.3.

Low pressure accumulator

(18.5 to 34 bar)

High pressure accumulator

(191 to 233 bar)

Load limiter cylinder

Pipe pressurized oil

Safety block isolation valve

One way throttle valve

Accumulator drain valve Connection to hydraulic

power unit (HPU)
Mobile trolley
Displacement= 30 cm
Retention plate

Load limiter cylinder

Rod of the cylinder (transmits the

To the winch movements of the trolley to the cylinder)

Wheel
Lateral guide bar on which the trolley
and its wheel slides (2 pieces)

1.1.10.8 - Moonpool aerator system

Aeration of the moonpool is a mechanism that is designed to send air into the moonpool to make the water surface inside
it calm when the sea conditions become severe and that waves and vortexes form in it due to the vessel movements,
which may result in difficult and dangerous launching and recovery of the bell. The principle of the system is based on
the fact that when air is blown into the water, the density of the water change which makes the waves break. This
mechanism consists of several pipes arranged around the moonpool that blow compressed air into it.
Note that this system is optional. Thus, it is not available on a lot of vessels.

Agitated waters Calm waters

Air pipe

Air bubbles

Moonpool without aerator Moonpool with aerator

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 87 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.10.9 - Protections to prevent a man overboard
Barriers should be installed to prevent a man from falling into the sea during the launching operations and when the bell
is at depth. These items can be permanently installed or mobile when the opening must be used to transfer the bell to the
sea (see #1 below). Note that side protections should at least conform with the requirement from standards similar to EN
ISO 14122-3. “Safety of machinery. Permanent means of access to machinery. Stairs, stepladders and guard-rails” that
requires the following:
● The handrail should have a diameter between 25 and 50 mm.

● The minimum height of the handrail should 1.10 m.

● The distance between the centres of two posts should be 1.50 m or less.

● The distance between each of the horizontal element should not exceed 500 mm.

● Toe boards should have a minimum height of 100 mm and their distance from the walking surface should not
exceed 10 mm.

1
Handrail
< 1.50 m
Horizontal

>1.10 m
element

< 0.50 m
Toe board
10 cm min

Floor
Mobile barriers of the moonpool of UDS Lichtenstein

Barriers are sufficient protections when the dive station is sufficiently high above the sea level. As an example, it is the
case of UDS Lichtenstein and Picasso which moonpools openings are at more than 6.5 metres above the sea level.
However, in the case of a launching deck that is at 3 metres or less above the sea level, the launching station can be
flooded during rough weather conditions and people may be caught by waves when passing at the direct vicinity. For this
reason, launching stations situated on the side of the vessel are usually isolated by additional barriers restricting access to
them to avoid such an accident.
However, this is difficult to do in the case of a moon pool which opening is on a deck used to transit and perform some
maintenance activities. Also, waves coming inside the vessel may damage some equipment. As a response to this
problem, manufacturers provide doors that can be closed to isolate the moonpool. It is the case of the system onboard
HOSQ Shaddad which is also designed and built by Lexmar (JFD Group).
This closing system consists of four doors that are folded each side of the moon pool when the diving operation is in
progress (see #2 below) and that are deployed and secured above the opening, using dedicated jacks (see #3), when the
vessel is sailing and during rough weather conditions. That protects the personnel and equipment and gives the possibility
to prepare future work and perform maintenance activities during unfavourable weather conditions.

2
Launching of the bell: Doors folded each side Doors folded: Note the actuating jack

Doors closing (sliding on the sides of the moonpool) Doors closed

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 88 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.10.10 - Control consoles
In this document, a “control console” is a panel accommodating a set of commands for mechanical or electronic
equipment that is designed to control the deployment and recovery of the bell from only one location. Its design depends
on the complexity of the system it is supposed to manage. As a result, it can be very basic or extremely complex as with
some last generation systems such as those designed by Parkburn for UDS Lichtenstein & Picasso.
With old generation systems, the control console consists of a series of bi-directional joystick valves and switches that are
grouped on a panel at the direct proximity of the winches. That allows reducing the lengths of pipes and wires and the
technician can have a direct view of all elements involved in the launching and recovery of the bell, such as the winches,
Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU), bell umbilical, etc.
This panel is fitted with manometers such as oil pressure and temperature and some alarms such as lack of oil in the HPU
or too elevated temperature. However, with the majority of such systems, the information provided is at a very minimum,
and the operator has reduced tools to diagnose the condition of the system. Also, the distance of wire and umbilical paid
out are often calculated using marks on the umbilical and the cables as described by IMCA in point 2.3.11.2.
This panel is generally installed in a small cabin situated in the direct proximity of the bell and above it (see “A” on the
photo below), so the operator can manage it at the same time as the other parts of the system involved. Communication to
the dive control should be performed through wired hand free connections and radio as a backup.
Such systems are still in use with a lot of saturation systems, which are mainly portable systems. Also, they are
sometimes fitted to new fabrications. Their advantage is their robustness and easy maintenance.

The consoles described above are mostly purely mechanical and electrical. Thus, there is no intervention of the electricity
to operate a mechanical device and vice versa.
Another type of consoles are those that are based on electro-mechanical systems. Electro-mechanical refers to devices
which involve an electrical signal to create mechanical movement or vice versa. As an example, electromagnetic relays,
which using a small voltage current allow controlling a more powerful electrical circuit by mechanically switching sets of
contacts, and solenoids, by which it can actuate a moving linkage such as an electrically operated valve.
As all their commands are wired, such consoles do not need to be at the vicinity of the elements they control and can be
installed in the dive control from which the operator may communicate with the diving supervisor without the need of an
intercom. Also, it often installed in a directly adjacent room. Note that when the operator is not in the same room and the
direct vicinity of the diving supervisor, hand-free wired communications and a backup radio should be provided.
The room in which the console is usually installed is at bell level or above it. Thus, the operator has a clear view of the
bell when he is transferring it. Also, screens showing the strategic points of the LARS, such as the winches and the
connecting flange, should be provided in the room.
The panel aside is composed of electrical
commands such as:
▪ Winch controls
▪ Trolley control
▪ Rams and bell clamp controls
▪ HPU controls
▪ Lock pin controls
Essential information is provided:
▪ Cable and umbilical distance
paid out
▪ Bell winch load
▪ Ram pressure
▪ System pressures
▪ Temperatures
▪ Whether the trunk is
pressurized
▪ Warnings HPU #1 & #2

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 89 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The last generation consoles are still based on electro-mechanical devices. However, they are fitted with a computer
terminal where the operator inputs orders which are controlled by the software system prior to be implemented. Also, the
computer provides status messages from the essential parts of the system. The communication with the computer is
performed through a Human Machine Interface (HMI), which is a touch screen. More traditional electromechanical
commands are installed throughout the command panel.
We can imagine that with the progress of the electronics industry, such types of consoles are going to replace those of the
previous generations. For this reason, a study of how the software intervenes in the management of the deployment and
the recovery of the bell is interesting. The console used for this study is designed by Parkburn and installed on UDS
Lichtenstein. Note that other models may be different, but they use similar principles.
- Step 1 - Powering and general description
Powering the Diving Bell Handling Equipment is made through the Motor Control Centres that also feed the Bell
Master console. Note that these elements are separated from the console
The Bell master console is started by pressing the pushbutton “desk control” that is situated in the section “Control” of
the console, which is at the top of the right-hand side aside from the emergency stop pushbutton (See #1 on the picture
below). Note that this master console is composed of several sections that allow controlling automatically or manually
all the elements that compose the Launch and Recovery System (LARS). These sections are identified as follows:
▪ Control (see #1)
▪ Emergency stop (see #2)
▪ Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU) (see #3)
▪ Clamp (see #4)
▪ Transfer Under Pressure (TUP) trunk (see #5)
▪ Transfer trolley (see #6)
▪ Controls guide wire winch (see #7)
▪ Controls umbilical winch (see #8)
▪ Controls Bell lift winch (with the Active Heave Compensation command) (see #9)
▪ Aerator (see #10)
▪ Human Machine Interface (HMI) (see #11)
▪ Main intercom (see #12)
▪ Second intercom (see #13)

4 1 2
11

6 5 3 13

10

7 8 9

12

The Master console is designed to centralize all information regarding the status of the Launch and Recovery System.
The Human Machine Interface (HMI) (see #11 above) provides the following details:
● Whether the system is active

● Status of the heave compensation system

● Condition of the Local Area Network (LAN). Note that a LAN is a computer network that interconnects
computers within a closed area such as a boat, a series of offices, or the elements of a dive system.
● Condition of the Electrical supply of the Motor Control Center (MCC) which is an assembly of electric and
electronic elements that controls some or all the electrical motors of a system from a central location.
● Condition of the Active Front End (AFE) distribution. An AFE is a rectifier that allows bi-directional power
exchange between AC and DC sides. It is also used to minimize the amount of harmonic distortion of the
electrical supply.
● Winch status
Whether the control is activated and the mode selected (manual or auto.)
○

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 90 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
○ Tension mode applied (low or normal)
○ Paying out or picking up wire
○ Details of the emergency stop warnings that are halting the winch
○ Winch’s encoder or/and load cells bypassed or not
● Tension applied to the cable of the winch

● Distance of cable out (Line out)

● Speed of cable delivery or recovery

● Position of the bell during the operations

○ At home
○ On the deck
○ In the moonpool
○ In the splash zone
○ At the direct proximity of the cursor
○ Near the ship (within 5 m below the ship)
○ Clear of ship
○ Near the final depth selected
○ At depth
When the master control starts, the computer analyses the status of all the elements that compose the system, and in the
case of a problem a message of alert is displayed on the HMI screen.
To continue to activate the LARS system, the operator must start the Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU). This pushbutton is
situated in section "HPU," which is just below the section “Control” (see #1 below).

Usually, a message should be displayed on the HMI that reminds the operator that the sea fastenings that secure the
LARS must be removed. This removal should have been done manually as with the previous generation LARS.
The status of the HPU can be then displayed on the screen by pressing the menu “HPU” on the right-hand side of the
screen. Then the operator can change the display to monitor the transfer trolley. It can be performed by pressing the
dedicated touch that is displayed on the right-hand side of the screen (See #2 below).

- Step 2 - Transfer Under Pressure (TUP)

When the bell is clamped to the saturation system, and the Transfer Under Pressure (TUP) trunk is pressurized, the light
“Pressured & clamped” at the TUP Trunk Control section (see #3), which is at the top of the left-hand side of the panel
is illuminated. Also, the light “Bell at TUP” and the pushbutton “Stop move” in the section “Transfer Trolley” beside
the section TUP Trunk are illuminated (see #4).
As a result, the bell cannot be disconnected from the system as long as the trunk is pressurized because the sensors
prevent any action as long this part of the system is under pressure. Thus the TUP can be performed safely.
Note that this section is provided with two other pushbuttons that are illuminated in green: “Move to up” and “Move to
moonpool.” A white light is also provided to indicate when the trolley arrives at the moonpool.

Bell at TUP Pressurized

& clamped

4 3 Stop move

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 91 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Step 3 - Clump weight deployment
The clump weight must be deployed at depth prior to the remaining operations. If it is not, the software does not allow
for continuing the operations.
Before implementing the clump weight and the bell, the operator must set up the required bell depth using the menu
“target SP” of the HMI display (see #5).
The clump weight can be deployed automatically or manually:
Using the pushbuttons “Auto selected” & “Deploy to depth” in the section “Guide Wire Winch” (see #6) which is on
the bottom of the right-hand side of the panel. As a result, the clump weight deploys to the required depth according to
the depth previously selected for the bell.
If the operator prefers a manual deployment, the button “Manual selected” should be pressed. In this case, the control of
the clump weight is performed using the joystick. However, the winch will automatically stop when the depth
previously selected will be reached

Manual selected Auto selected

Deploy to
5 depth

5
6

Bell connected to the system and TUP ongoing

Legs holding the "standoff

-frame" in the moonpool

Clump weight lowered

- Step 4 - Disconnection of the bell

As indicated previously, the system prevents the bell from being removed from the trunk as long as the transfer under
pressure is ongoing.
When the trunk has been vented, the amber light “vented & Clamped” in the section “TUP trunk” (see #7) is
illuminated and the red light “Pressured & clamped” is shut down. That indicates that the bell and the transfer lock are
secured and that the system allows disconnecting the bell.
That can be done pressing the button “HPU Start” & “TUP Clamp Open” in the section “Clamp” that is situated at the
very top of the right-hand side of the console, near the logo Parkburn (see #8).
The TUP clamp opens and the green light “vented & unclamped” opens while the amber light “vented & clamped”
shutdown (these lights are in the section “TUP trunk”).

8 Pressured & clamped

TUP Clamp Open

Vented & clamped
7
HPU Start

When the TUP clamp is opened, a warning light is illuminated on the HMI screen.
Then, the mating cylinders are lowered to pick up the bell using the pushbutton “lower cylinders” in the section
“transfer trolley” (see # 9) that is highlighting. Also, a warning is displayed in the trolley status on the HMI (see #10).
The Latches are then inserted using the button “Insert latches”. A confirmation message appears on the HMI screen.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 92 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

10
9

Lowered cylinder

Insert latches

Latches closed
Lower cylinders

Before raising the bell, the winches of the main cable (see #11) and the umbilical (see #12) must be implemented. Their
commands are fitted with joysticks and are in the sections near the “Guide wire winch”. Automatic or manual modes
can be selected.
If the mode “automatic” is selected for the umbilical winch, it automatically stabilizes at the preset tension. Note that to
allow the winch to establish the pre-set tension, the operator should release the brake by pressing the corresponding
green button.
The umbilical winch can also be run in manual mode for maintenance purposes and recovery in the event of an
instrumentation fault. In this case, the joystick is used to control it.
To implement the main wire winch, the operator activates the option “Low tension.” That allows the movement of the
Transfer Trolley. The Bell Winch drives run and hold zero speed at the low tension torque limit.
When this phase is completed, the bell can be raised.

Manual mode

Joystick Joystick

11 12

Automatic mode
Low tension

Release the brake

To lift the bell off the connecting flange. The operator must hold the pushbutton “raise cylinders” in the section “
transfer trolley.” Usually, the main cable winch automatically recovers the excess of slack. The push button is
illuminated by a yellow light when the cylinders are fully retracted. Also, that can be visually checked through the
window that allow to see the bell and the flanges, and using the corresponding menu on the HMI screen.
When the cylinders are fully retracted, the trolley can automatically move to its final position above the moonpool. To
implement this, the operator presses the button “Move to moonpool” in the section “Transfer trolley” and confirms the
new status on the HMI screen. Both winches are paying out adequately when the trolley is moving. The button “Move
to moonpool” is flashing during the transfer to indicate the operation is ongoing.
Winches adjusting automatically
Move to moonpool

Bell latched and raised

Raise cylinders
Transiting to
the moonpool

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 93 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
When the trolley reaches the final position, the flashing ceases and the adjacent light “bell at moonpool” flashes.
At this moment the operator locks the trolley in its final position by pressing the buttons “insert lock” and then “move to
up” that are in the same section.
During this time, the supporting team manually closes the leg latches of the trolley to ensure that it cannot move back.
Move to moonpool

Bell above the

moonpool
Raise cylinders

Leg latches secure

- Step 5 - Preparation above the moonpool and launching

The standoff frame and the cables of the clump weight must be connected before sending the bell to the work site. To
do it, the operator pushes and holds the button “Lower cylinders” In the section “Transfer trolley”.
When the bell is in contact with the standoff frame, the supporting team inserts the locking pins manually. When the
pins are secured, the operator pushes and holds the button “Raise cylinders” (in the same section) to lift the bell and its
standoff frame off their support.
During these operations, the slack of the main wire and the umbilical are automatically adjusted.
When the bottom of the standoff frame is off the supports that are deployed in the moon pool to hold the standoff frame
can be retracted. That is done by pressing the button “withdraw supports” in the section “Transfer trolley”. The button
“Lower cylinders” is pressed again to lower the bell to its launch position.

Raise cylinders

Standoff frame
Withdraw supports connected

Lower cylinders

Legs withdrawn

To launch the bell, the operator needs to withdraw the latches. To do it, he presses the button “Manual selected” in the
section “Bell lift winch” and then the button beside named “Bell weight on wire”.
As a result, the wire winch take up the tension and holds the bell (note that the pushbutton flashes when the operation is
in progress).
The joystick is then used to raise the bell until the limit sensors detect it. Note that the bell status is automatically
displayed on the HMI screen.
Then, the operator presses the button “Withdraw latches” in the section “Transfer trolley.” When the latches are cleared,
the new status is confirmed on the HMI screen.

Bell weight
on wire

Manual selected

Withdraw latches

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 94 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Before lowering the bell, to operator ensures that the umbilical deployment is on “Auto mode.” Then the bell is lowered
to the level from where the cables of the clump weight can be connected. At this moment, the wires of the clump weight
are manually connected and secured to each side of the bell by the supporting team.
When the cables are confirmed secured, the bell can be lowered manually through the moon pool. It can be achieved by
pressing the relevant “manual selected” pushbutton and using the Joystick.

Auto mode

Manual selected

Latches disconnected
Cursor on the
top of the bell

Auto mode
selected
Guide wires
connected

When the bell is in the moonpool, the “zero button” appears on the HMI screen and the operator presses it to set up the
depth of the bell when it reaches the surface of the sea. This button then disappears when the bottom of the boat is
passed.
If the weather conditions create too many waves and vortex into the moonpool, the aeration can be switched on to create
a massive bubbling that will break the waves. This function is available on the right-hand side of the panel, under
“Control” and “HPU” (see # 13)
Umbilical deployed automatically

13

“Zero button”appears on HMI: Set up the depth

Aeration moon pool

Cursor stopped
“Zero button” disappears at this level
Lowering speed increased .
Decreasing automatically
near the storage depth

Note that the cursor is stopped at the end of the moonpool. Also, if it has been activated, the aeration is stopped when
the bell is entirely outside the moonpool.
The lowering speed that was previously slow is then increased. It will decrease again at the proximity of the planned
storage depth. Note that the umbilical is deployed automatically with the ideal tension. The speed of the bell, tension of
the cable and the depth can be monitored at any time on the HMI screen.
When the bell is at depth, the winch of the deployment cable is shut down by pressing the button “Manual selected.”

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 95 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Step 6 - Heave compensation
When the bell is at the storage depth, heave compensation can be activated if necessary. To do it, a selector that is
available into the section “Bell lift winch” (see #14) must be switched to “enable” and the green button situated above
and labeled “Heave compensation active” must be pushed to raise the bell 3m above the initial depth.
Note that the umbilical winch is not activated. As a result that has for effect to create a 3 m loop in the umbilical and
add a distance of 3 m between the bell and the clump weight, allowing the movements of the boat without affecting the
bell and its umbilical.
When the correct depth has been reached the message “Line out ok for heave compensation" is displayed on the HMI
screen. The alternative method proposed by the manufacturer is to lower manually the clump weigh 4 m deeper and pay
out manually the corresponding extra umbilical.
On the HMI screen, the menu “Heave comp” provides information regarding the displacements of the bell.
Note that heave compensation cannot be activated at depths shallower than 50 metres. Of course, this function must be
deactivated prior to recovering the bell.

Active
14

Selector (to be switched to “enable”)

To recover the bell, the inverse process has to be performed.

To conclude on control consoles

The study of the launching process of the bell using a digital console that is described above shows that the operator is
obliged to follow the established procedure to launch the bell. As a result, mistakes such as disconnection of the TUP
trunk when it is under pressure or a forgotten phase are not possible as the system blocks any further operation as long as
the correct procedure is not followed. Thus, we can say that computerized control systems provide additional safety
precautions which result that the divers are better protected during the transfers under pressure and the descent and
recovery of the bell.
However, the models of consoles from the previous generations are robust and easy to maintain. For these reasons, we
can expect to cross them within the next twenty years.
Note that, despite efficient supports from the manufacturers, the major problem of the last generation control consoles is
to find technicians who are competent in electronic and computer systems, in addition to the traditional mechanical skills.

1.1.10.11 - Hydraulic Power Unit (HPU)

Hydraulic jacks and motors cannot be operated if there is no pressure in the circuit that feed tem with oil. It is the
function of the Hydraulic Power Unit, also called Hydraulic Power Pack.
The Hydraulic Power Unit is composed of a hydraulic pump that is driven by an electric motor, an oil reservoir, pipework
with pressure relief valves and a filter.
Relief valve
Electric motor Oil outlet Oil return
Air inlet (equalization)
Oil filling

Drive shaft
Oil level indicator

Oil reservoir

Pump

Filter

Oil removal screw Baffle plate

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 96 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The pumps usually used are positive displacement pumps that are sufficiently powerful to power the tools they supply.
Three types of pumps are commonly found:
● Gear pumps produce a flow of oil by using the teeth of two meshing gears to move the fluid. They are reputed
robust and can transmit high amounts of hydraulic fluid.
● Piston pumps are also used for this purpose. They contain one or more pistons that convert the rotary shaft
motion into an axial reciprocating motion. They are composed of a tilted plate that rotates, causing the pistons to
move up and down, and thus, take the fluid and expel it each shaft rotation (See the scheme below).
● Vane pumps are also found. They consist of a rotor rotating inside a circular cavity where its center of rotation is
eccentric. Several vanes are in place at the periphery of this rotor, creating chambers that vary in volume as the
rotor turns. The intake of the pump is where the chambers are the largest. The outlet is where the size of the
chambers is smaller.

Gears driven by the

electric motor
Chamber
Rotor Inlet

Cylinder block

Inlet Piston

Vane Tilted plate Drive shaft Inlet

Vane pump Piston pump Gear pump

The the oil reservoir is designed to:

● Hold enough fluid to adequately supply the hydraulic system: For this reason, it must have a sufficient volume
to supply the elements connected to it and collect the returning fluid from these elements. Note that fluids
expanse when they are hot, and this phenomenon must be taken into account when the volume of the tank is
calculated.
● Provide communication to the external atmosphere, and sufficient space above the fluid to let the air compressed
when it is hot to escape to the atmosphere and vice versa.
● Provide a surface that is large enough to transfer the heat from the fluid to the ambient environment by radiation
and convection.
● Avoid fluid turbulence at the pump inlet: It is the function of the “baffle plate” that forces the fluid from the
return line to take an indirect path to the pump inlet. The baffle plate also limits the movements of the stored
hydraulic oil linked to the sea conditions encountered by the boat.
● Provide a gauge to check the volume of oil, and means of access to top-up it if necessary, and change it when it
is too old or dirty.
The filter is usually installed at the pump inlet. Also, a relief valve is usually installed at the pump out let. Note that other
relief valves may be provided in the hydraulic circuit
Important note:
The hydraulic power unit of the Launch And Recovery System (LARS) must not be for any other purpose than the supply
of the elements of the LARS, and this according to the original design indicated by the manufacturer and agreed by the
certification body. So, a separate Hydraulic Power Units must be provided to supply the working tools of the divers.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 97 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.10.12 - Maintenance
IMCA D 024 gives the following guidelines regarding the planned audits for the maintenance of the system.
Visual examination +
Wire Load
Items function test + Load Other
destruction test test 1.5 SWL
test 1.25 SWL

Relief valve 6 months 2 ½ years

Pneumatic hoses 6 months 2 years

Electrical winch testing 6 months

Communication 6 months

Emergency breathing apparatus 6 months 2 ½ years 5 years

Bell clamp safety interlock 6 months 2 years When installed

Manufacturer
Fire fighting portable system 6 months
specification
Visual: 6 months Manufacturer
Fire fighting fixed system
Test: 12 months specifications

Fire detection 12 months

Static: 6 months 1 year: NDE

LARS overall testing 12 months
Dynamic: 1 year critical areas
Weight of the bell
12 months
(Outside and in the water)
Main winches NDT critical areas:
6 months 12 months
(function and load test ) 12 months
History of certificates
Main lift wire 6 months 12 months 12 months
must be available

Secondary winch 6 months 12 months

History of certificates
Secondary lift wire 6 months 12 months 12 months
must be available
NDT critical areas:
Lifting attachment points 6 months 12 months
12 months
6 months
Cross haul system general
(test in the water)
6 months
Heave compensation 6 months
(test at max SWL)
Hydraulic systems
Hydraulic systems (general) 6 months
(Intercooler/heater)
Hydraulic oil analysis or
12 months
replacement

The pre-operation checks must be performed at least daily during the diving operations. The manufacturer of the system
presented (Parkburn) provides the following guidelines that should be followed regardless of the commercial brand of the
system used.
- General inspections:
● Ensure that all communication links are operating correctly.

● Ensure that all personnel are aware of the intention to operate the equipment.

● Ensure that all associated equipment is operating correctly.

● Inspect all structures and proprietary items for damage.

● Inspect all fastenings to ensure that all are present and appear to be correctly tightened.

● Ensure that all protective guards are correctly fitted.

● Ensure that all safety devices are operational.

● Ensure that any maintenance authorizations have been completed.

● Ensure that there are no outstanding issues, which could affect the safe operation of the equipment.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 98 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● Ensure that equipment movement paths are clear of all obstructions, and foreign bodies.
● Ensure that the all sea fastenings have been removed.
- Mechanical system
The following checks should be carried out with the system isolated at main circuit breakers:
● Carry out a visual inspection of the Diving Bell Lift Winch. Ensure all deck mountings are secure and torque
loaded. Ensure no debris is present in gear trains. Check that the Lift Winch cable and all terminations are sound
and that the wire is secured to the bell. Check that all guards are fitted.
● Carry out a visual inspection of the Guide Wire Winch. Ensure that all deck mountings are secure and torque
loaded. Ensure no debris is present in gear trains. Check that the Guide Wire cable passes through all sheaves,
clump weight and onto the Moon Pool anchor point. Check that mountings are secure and torque loaded. Check
that all guards are fitted.
● Carry out a visual inspection of the Umbilical Winch. Ensure that all deck mountings are secure and torque
loaded. Ensure that there is no debris is present in gear trains. Check that the Umbilical cable and all
terminations are sound and that the Umbilical cable is securely attached to the Dive Bell. Check that all guards
are fitted.
● Carry out a visual inspection of the Trolley and Moon Pool Guide Rails. Check that mechanical stops, locking
mechanisms, and proximity sensors are present and sound. Note: if the LARS uses an A-frame, carry out a
similar inspection to be sure that the frame can deploy safely. So, the fixations of the structure and the jacks to
the frame, and those of the pulleys.
- Hydraulic system
● Pipework should be safely supported in order to avoid vibration or movement. Fittings are assembly elements
and should not be used to support pipework.
● Flexible hydraulic hoses should be long enough for free-movement, but short enough to avoid snagging on other
equipment.
● Inspect all hydraulic hoses and pipework for signs of damage.

● Check the integrity of all hydraulic connections.

● Ensure that the system contains hydraulic oil and has been vented.

● Ensure that all accumulators have been pre-charged to the required pressures.

- Electrical systems
● Inspect all controls and instrument panels for signs of damage.

● Use the Lamp Test facility at the Control Desk to verify that all lamps are operational.

● Check the integrity of all electrical connections.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 99 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.11 - Gas reclaim system of the bell

1.1.11.1 - Purpose
Heliox (He + O2) is used in saturation as it is the best gas to avoid narcosis and is comfortable to breathe. However,
helium is very expensive and cannot be fabricated. For this reason, it is of utmost importance to recycle it. It is the
function of the gas reclaim system of the bell which recovers the gas mixture breathed by divers, re-process it and
delivers it into the supply system. This system that has been already mentioned in the previous points is a closed circuit
that allows recovering up to approximately 90% of the gas injected in the breathing circuit. The 10% loss is the result of
helmet and bell flushing and undetectable leaks. Note that the new rules of gas purity require the removal of
contaminants.
Also, the reclaim system allows staying a long time at sea as only the oxygen and the helium lost are to be renewed.
Without such a system, the vessel is obliged to return to the shore very often as the consumption of gas is multiplied by
the depth the divers are living and working. As an example, a diver at work at 60 meter consumes 245 litres per minute,
so 14700 l per hour. Thus for a 24 hrs operation with two divers in the water, the consumption can reach 705600 litres
per day. As a conclusion, a failure of the reclaim system can affect a project and for this reason, its condition must be
monitored. The general layout of the equipment is as follows:
- In the bell
1. Exhaled gas is recovered from the divers through reclaim valves, mounted on helmets. The exhaust umbilicals
are connected via SAECO valves (supply actuated exhaust cut-off valves), also called “Pressure Operated
Safety” (POS) valves, situated in the bell and which description can be found in point 2.3.2.
2. The gas then passes via a water trap to the exhaust which is maintained at a slight differential pressure by a back
pressure regulator (see in point 2.3.2). The bell-man can monitor this pressure on a gauge situated in the bell.
3. The gas is then passed to the surface through a non-return valve and the main umbilical of the bell.
- At the surface
4. The gas enters the reprocessing unit, where it is filtered, stored in receivers, and oxygen is added to make the
correct mix.
5. The gas is then passed to an Electric Gas Booster where the pressure is increased.
6. It is then scrubbed to remove the CO2 and other impurities
7. Then, the gas is dried by cooling and filtered.
8. It is then stored. Eventually, fresh heliox is added to compensate the gas lost during the dive.
9. Then, the gas is passed via the umbilical to the bell gas supply manifold and then to the diver’s regulator.

4 5 6 7
Storage Reprocessing Cooling &
Gas booster Scrubber
oxygen unit filtration

8
3 9
Gas storage
reclaimed gas

SAECO +
1 water trap
Storage fresh
2 heliox

Some small differences may be found from one system to another. However, the basic concept remains the same. Also, as
such systems are complex, it is preferable to describe them in details using existing models as support. For this reason,
the model currently in use on UDS Lichtenstein and Picasso which has been designed and built by LEXMAR, a company
of JFD group is taken as an example.

1.1.11.2 - Bell Unit

I. As indicated above, the breathed gas of the diver is expelled through the exhaust valve of the helmet that is
described in point 2.3.6 and the exhaust hose of the umbilical. This exhaust hose, is connected to the “Supply
Actuated Exhaust Cut-Off “ (SAECO) valve, which is also called “Pressure Operated Safety” (POS) valve (see
#1 in the figures A & B on the next page). The exhaust hose can be isolated by a ball valve (see #2).
II. The SAECO/POS valves allow the exhaled gas from the diver to return to the surface. Please, remember that this
valve is designed to close in the event the supply pressure drops below a pre-set value. This pre-set value is
controlled by the back-pressure regulator (see #3 in the figures A & B on the next page)
III. The Back Pressure Regulator loader regulates the divers exhaust gas pressure in the umbilical. A valve controls
the amount of gas going to the flow meter (see #4 in the figures A & B).

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 100 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
IV. A flow meter controls the amount of gas being tapped off from the divers supply to load the Back Pressure
Regulator (BPR) at the desired flow rate (0.5 L/min) to the BPR reference port (see #5 in the figures A & B).
That sets the reference pressure for the bell BPR which in turn determines the pressure in the exhaust hose for
the diver excursion umbilical and the Bell water trap. A slight flow is required so that the BPR load can be
varied to compensate for any required setting changes.
V. The Back Pressure Regulator (BPR) that controls the negative pressure in the exhaust umbilical to the optimum
value to give a minimum breathing resistance is fitted with a bleed valve which allows regulating the pressure
from the BPR loader (See #6 in the figure A).
VI. A pressure gauge (see #7 in the figures A & B below) allows to monitor the pressure in the water trap, which is
the same as the pressure umbilical which is the same as the pressure in the exhaust umbilical if the exhaust hose
isolating valve and POS valve is open.
VII. The bell exhaust, which can be isolated by a valve (See #8 in the figures A & B) allows the gas of the bell to
enter in the water trap and being drawn through the Back Pressure Regulator (BPR) to the Reprocessing Unit
(TRU), which is situated in the vessel, where it will be recycled.
VIII. The “water trap” collects most of the water present in the gas expelled by the divers (See #9 in the figures A &
B). It consists of an acrylic housing, a compound pressure gauge, an overpressure relief valve, a negative
pressure relief valve, and drain and isolation valves. It is designed to be drained regularly without affecting the
working process of the reclaim system (see in the figure C). This item should be mounted in a prominent
position so the bellman can have an unobstructed view and is able to check its status at any time.
IX. From the back pressure regulator, gas passes through hull stop valves (see #10)which function is the isolation of
the circuit during maintenance or in the case of an emergency. As usual there is one valve inside the bell and a
2nd valve outside the bell.
X. From the hull valves, the gas passes through a check valve (see #11 in figure A below) situated at the external of
the bell which function is to prevent reverse flow of gas from the bell umbilical into the bell equipment: As an
example, when the bell is being depressurized.
XI. Then the expelled gas flows to the external water trap (see #12 below) that collects any additional free water
which has not been trapped at the main water trap or condenses when the gas passes from the internal to the
external of the bell as a result of its cooling. Water should be anticipated in this filter, so it is essential to drain it
when the bell is recovered out of the water.
Figure A
Surface
supply

BPR loader Flow-meter 5

Wall Bell

Metering valve
Return line to
reclaim system
at the surface Divers’ pneumo
(Reference depth) Bell exhaust to
reclaim system
Gauge
8
7 SAECO SAECO
12
Exhaust
External
water trap
Back Pressure 1
Regulator
3
6 Acrylic 9
Metering valve water trap
2 To bell gas
Exhaust Exhaust (Mara) Panel
Main umbilical suction Diver 1 Diver 2
Floating 11 10
check valve

Direction of flux ¼ turn valve BPR loader Floating check valve

Pipes 1/4” and smaller Flow control valve Anti suction device Flow meter

Pipes > 1/4” (3/8”; 1”) Back pressure regulator SAECO/POS valve One way valve

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 101 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Figure B

BPR loader valve Flow-meter tracking pneumo (flow 0.3 l/min)

4
Pressure gauge water trap
7
Flow-meter BPR 5
(flow 0.5 l/min) Tracking pneumo supply valve

Non return valve

BPR metering valve

6 Bell exhaust to reclaim system
To diver tracking pneumo
8 (Also called “bell scrubber exhaust”)

1 SAECO/POS valve

Back Pressure Regulator 3 Diver’s supply

To bell external water trap

2 Diver’s exhaust
Acrylic water trap 9

Isolation valve umbilical diver

Purge water trap

Figure C

Gas to BPR Gas from SAECO/POS valve Gas to BPR Gas from SAECO/POS valve

Vent

Drain valve open

Vent

Water trap during normal operation: Water trap draining:

With the plunger in the normal (in) position, the trapped The isolation valve is pulled out, the upper and lower
water passes to the lower part of the cylinder. halves of the water trap are isolated and the lower half is
vented to bell ambient pressure. The drain valve may now
be opened to remove water while the upper half continues
to collect water from the flowing gas.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 102 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Back pressure regulator:
The back pressure regulator controls the pressure in the diver’s umbilical to give a minimum breathing resistance. It is
generally composed of two slotted sealing faces enclosed by a rubber boot. This assembly is housed inside a sealed
pressure chamber into which a reference pressure may be applied. The model described below is designed by Divex.
However, the system provided by Lexmar is very similar, so it uses the same principle.

Cap (outlet side)

Reference pressure inlet

(from metering valve)

Rubber boot

Slotted sealing faces

Body pressure chamber

Cap (Inlet side)

Initially, a suction is applied to the discharge side of the regulator and a reference pressure to the chamber.
If the pressure at the inlet side is below the reference pressure, the rubber boot is held in place by the pressure and no
flow occurs.
Inlet from diver’s umbilical and water trap
Cap (inlet)

Body pressure chamber

Reference pressure
Rubber boot (From metering valve)

Cap (outlet)

Exhaust side
Suction

If the inlet pressure rises fractionally above the reference pressure, the diaphragm lifts, allowing the gas to flow. In this
way the pressure in the exhaust umbilical is held at a level equal to the reference pressure.
Regulated pressure
Inlet from diver’s umbilical and water trap

Gas flowing

Reference pressure
(Pressure = exhaust side)

Exhaust side

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 103 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
A further increase in gas flow will result in increased opening of the regulator as shown
Regulated pressure
Inlet from diver’s umbilical and water trap
Cap (inlet)

Gas flowing Body pressure chamber

Reference pressure
(From metering valve)
Rubber boot

Cap (outlet)

Exhaust side

Back pressure regulator & water trap DIVEX Back pressure regulator & water trap LEXMAR
- Diver tracking system:
The diver tracking system adjusts the Back Pressure Regulator (BPR) loading accordingly to the depth of the diver to
obtain a minimum breathing resistance from the reclaim valve. Note that the pressure in the return umbilical is adjusted
approximately between 1 and 2 bar below the diver ambient pressure.
In addition to the equipment in place in the bell, a 1/8” internal diameter pneumo line is added to the diver umbilical. A
slow gas bleed is drawn from the bell gas supply to this pneumo. As a result, gas bubbles emerge continually from this
line at a slow rate. Note that an excessive flow will adversely affect gas recovery figures: Only a very small trickle of
bubbles from the pneumo line should be evident to the diver.
BPR loader Flowmeter tracking pneumo

Metering valve 1

1/8” bore pneumo line

(Continuous bubbling)

Supply
pressure
Set pressure
Exhaust gas diver

Back Pressure Regulator (BPR)

Metering valve 2

Main umbilical suction

To surface

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 104 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Front view Top view

Handle BPR loader Flowmeter tracking pneumo
Line flowmeter 1
BPR Loader Line BPR loader
to BPR loader
(See below) to flowmeter

Gauge Line metering valve

Flowmeter to flowmeter pneumo
BPR

Flowmeter
T piece 1/4” BPR

Metering valve pneumo

Metering valve pneumo
Supply pressure Flowmeter pneumo

Connection to Handle BPR loader

pneumo lines
Connection to pneumo lines

The loader is a modified inward relieving relief valve which controls the set pressure for the BPR.
As suction is first applied to the system, gas will be drawn from the BPR loader line, reducing the pressure until it
reaches the set pressure of the loader when it will lift, allowing gas to flow to prevent further depressurisation. In this
way, a fixed reference pressure is available for the BPR.
The pressure in the diver pneumo line is applied to a piston (having the same area as the valve opening) on the bottom
of the BPR loader. As the diver changes depth, the change in pressure in the pneumo line will produce a force on this
piston which will in effect change the set pressure of the loader.

Handle

BPR Loader piston

O ring

BPR Loader button

Large spring BPR loader

Small spring BPR loader

Gas inlet connection
O ring

Tracking pneumo connection

O ring

Functions of the diver tracking system components:

Diver pneumo Monitors the diver’s depth.

Adjusts the supply gas to purge the diver pneumo. It is often adjusted at 0.3
Metering valve pneumo
litres/min; a maximum of 0.4 litre/min is recommended.

Flowmeter pneumo Indicates the flow through metering valve pneumo.

Back Pressure Regulator loader Maintains a constant pressure difference between diver ambient and BPR setting.

Back Pressure Regulator (BPR) Controls the exhaust umbilical pressure to be equal to the BPR loader setting.

Controls the gas bleed through the BPR loader to give stable operation. It should be
Metering valve BPR
set to 0.5 litre/min.

Flowmeter BPR Records the flow through metering valve BPR

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 105 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.11.3 - Topside unit
The gas from the bell is drawn to the Topside Re‐Processing Unit (TRU) through the bell umbilical.
The Topside Re‐Processing Unit (TRU), recompresses the recovered gas, scrubs it to remove the CO2 and other
contaminants, and adds oxygen to restore the correct PPO2 of the breathing gas supply.
● The inlet section consists of a water trap (see #1 below), filter 1 micron with moisture separators (see #2), flow
switch (see #3), back pressure regulator (see #4), and two receivers which smooth out fluctuations in the flow
to the compressors (see #5). Oxygen enrichment is also carried out in the inlet section (see #6).
● The gas is then sent to another 0.01 micron particle filters which is fitted with biological filters (see #7)

● The Compressor (gas booster) consists of one electric driven three piston compressor which brand is Hycomp
for the system studied . It is described more on the next page (see #8).
● The gas from the compressor is water-cooled through heat exchangers (see # 9). It is discharged to the
scrubbers where soda lime (9 litres each) and Purafil remove the carbon dioxide and other contaminants (see
#10). A further filtration 0.01 micron removes water particles or solid material (see # 11). The gas is then stored
in the “reclaim volume tank” (see #12) from which it is sent to the divers.
● Finally, the topside unit also houses electrical and computer systems necessary for the control and driving of the
Hycomp compressor motors. Note that computers are monitored through a human machine interface (HMI).

Vent

Receiver #1
Receiver #2
Vent

9
6 O2 makeup in
PI
40

FTX
T BPR pilot in
5
PT
PT
PT
4
1/2"
3
1/2"

P
T P
PT PT 2
1 micron

PT
8 7 PI Reg 1
70
0.01 micron

0.01 micron

11 PT
Scrubber 2
Scrubber 1

10
Drain

Reclaim out 1
12 Reclaim volume tank
Drain

To analysis

Reclaim in

Drain
To gas panel (diver 1 &2) From HeO2 makeup panel Reclaim in

¼ turn valve Gauge Needle valve Water trap 1 micron Filter

Flow switch Heat exchanger Back Press. Reg Pressure regulator Relief valve

FTX Flow transmitter T Tº transmitter PT Press. Transmitter 3 way valve Check valve

2
7
5 5
#1: Compressor (booster)
7
3 #2: Back Pressure Regulator
6 3
#3: Receivers (No 1 & No 2)
1 1
#4: Scrubbers
4
#5: Heat exchanger

#6: Micron filter

#7: Electrical enclosure

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 106 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

4
3
2
8

11 5
9
7

6 12
10
1

#1: Water trap #5: Receiver volume tank #9: Water trap

#2: floating valve #6: Filter 0.01 micron #10: Scrubbers

#3: Filter 1 micron #7: Compressor (gas booster) #11: Filter 0.01 micron

#4: Back Pressure Regulator #8: Heat exchanger #12: Electrical control enclosure

- Filters and moisture separators:

The filter elements coalesce the small liquid droplets into larger liquid
Gas inlet Gas outlet
droplets which drain to the bottom of the housing.
Two types of filtration are provided:
● Filter 1 – 1 micron
Cap
● Filter 2 – 0.01 micron

● Filter 3 – 0.01 micron

A filter housing is generally composed of three main parts, as shown in Body

the drawing on the side.
All water traps and filter housings should be drained every hour or so.
It is recommended that filter elements be replaced at intervals of 500
operating hours.
Water traps prevent water from flooding the topside unit. Note that in
addition to the moisture expelled by the divers, water incursion may Bottom plug
happen in the case of a loose fitting.
A drain valve allows any accumulated water to be removed. Note that Drain hole
the water trap should be checked and drained at least every hour.
- Oxygen injection:
Oxygen from storage enters the panel by passing through isolation valve and O2 gauge and is injected into the gas after
passing through the Back Pressure Regulator on the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU). The flow is controlled by
setting a regulator for desired pressure of the oxygen supply to the system which is on the “oxygen make-up panel” in
Dive control.
- Flow switch:
The flow switch senses the divers exhaled gas flow through the system. This switch controls two functions.
I. It activates the alarm in the control panel when the flow of gas through the topside unit stops.
II. It stops the addition of oxygen in the absence of flow.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 107 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Back Pressure Regulator (BPR):
The topside BPR controls the pressure in the main bell reclaim hose in the umbilical. It has a similar design as the one
used in the bell. The bias pressure to the BPR is controlled from the “Reclaim panel” in the Dive Control.
- Compressor (booster):
A compressor is a mechanical device that increases the pressure of a gas by reducing its volume. A gas booster is a
compressor that is designed to increase the pressure of a gas that is already above ambient pressure.
The compressors used in reclaim systems act as boosters as the gas received from the bell is already above the ambient
pressure at the surface. However, most systems utilize machines that are capable of compressing gas at atmospheric
pressure, or that is as low as 0.1 bar above atmospheric pressure. Note that the inlet gas pressure of each stage of the
compressor must conform with the specifications it has been calculated for and that the machine will be damaged if the
inlet gas pressure is higher than recommended.
Compressors are more described in another chapter. However, the machines commonly used in reclaim systems are
membrane and piston compressors. As a result of a more reduced cost, piston compressors are the most used with
modern reclaim systems. As an example in the diving system taken as reference for this description, the gas from the
bell is pumped by a 3 stage compressor driven by a variable speed‐controlled electrical motor and is designed with
inter, and after-coolers. It is capable of receiving input pressures from as low as 0.1 bar and supplying an output
pressure of up to 55 bar. Also, it can sustain flows of up to 135 L/min at bottom pressure for a diving depth of up to 300
MSW. The speed range of this compressor is between 400 and 800 RPM.
Note that its 1st stage can be deactivated or activated through manual 3-way valves. It must be bypassed for operations
in the range of depths deeper than 160 MSW; the determining factor is the maximum allowed input pressure of 3.4 Bar
at stage 1 inlet. Of course. a relief valve preventing the introduction of gas above 3.5 bar protects the 1st stage.
Cooling water out
PRV vent out

Cooling water in

V1 3 way valve #1

V2 3 way valve #2

S1 To stage #1

S2 To stage #2

S2 S1
V2

15.1 b
44 b. T
PT
4
PT
3
PT
Water drain

5 2
6
P 1
T P 3.5 bar V1
PT S2
PT S1

HEO2 out PT HEO2 in

Needle valve Water trap HEO2 exhaust 1 1st stage inlet

Ball valve Flow direction Pressure relief valve lines 2 1st stage outlet
Solenoid valve Pressure gauge Water drain exhaust lines 3 2nd stage inlet
3 way ball valve PT Pressure transmitter HEO2 inlet lines 4 2eme stage outlet

Relief valve T Temperature transmitter Cooling water outlet lines 5 3rd stage inlet

Intercooler P Plenum Cooling water inlet lines 6 3rd stage outlet

Additional technical information regarding the compressor taken as an example:

● Dimension of the compressor are L: 2650 mm, H: 2225 mm, W: 1750 mm and its weight is 2500 kg.

● This machine is protected by a computer that monitors its functions and shut it down in the case of incorrect
parameters. A Human Machine Interface (HMI), which is on the electrical enclosure, allows controlling it.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 108 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● Power requirements are 440 Vac/ 60 Hz/ 40 KW.
● Suction gauges, which indicate the gas pressure into the compressor are provided at the inlet of each stage. A
gauge is also provided to indicate the discharge pressure.
● Max inlet pressure: 31 bar / Max outlet pressure 55 bar. As already said, the inlet pressure must never be above
the recommended value or the compressor can be damaged. High and low pressure switches are provided to shut
down the compressor in the event of high discharge pressure or low inlet pressure.
● A Shut‐off valve that isolates the compressor’s suction gas from the inlet section is also provided.
● Gas temperature switches are provided to shut down the compressor in the event that the discharge gas
temperature rises above the normal operating temperature. This may occur if the cooling water supply to the
compressor is disrupted.
● Intercoolers fitted with water traps are installed to cool the gas and protect the compressor from damage due to
carry-over water entering the inlet stages. Cooling water supply: 20 litres/minute & 3 to 6 bar / Max cooling
water supply temperature: 32 ºC. Note that an automatic draining system is provided. However, the
manufacturer recommends to regularly check that it is functioning.
● An oil pressure switch shutdowns the electrical motor in the case of low oil pressure.
- Automatic inlet gas pressure management
In the installation taken as example, the computer mentioned above monitors the inlet pressure and automatically
adjusts the compressor rotation speed to keep this inlet pressure to a constant value.
When there is insufficient mixed gas returning from the divers and the reclaim volume tank, a heliox make‐up system
automatically keeps the volume tank pressure to a preset value, and an alarm is triggered on the reclaim panel in the
dive control.
- Scrubber assembly
Two scrubber units that consist of housings into which a canister assembly filled with soda lime (also called soda sorb)
and Purafil are provided.
Soda lime is a widely used absorbent for carbon dioxide. 1 kg of soda lime absorbs 120 litres of CO2 (1 litre of soda
lime absorbs 90 litres of CO2). A canister assembly is to be changed every 8 hours for 1 diver at work. Thus, the
duration of one canister is 4 hours for two divers at work.
Purafil is used to remove odours and a wide range of trace contaminants. They can be listed as follows:
▪ Mercaptans, amines and ketones (responsible for many common odours);
▪ Ammonia;
▪ Hydrogen sulphide;
▪ Sulphur dioxide;
▪ Carbon monoxide (trace quantities only).

Gas inlet Gas outlet

Filter 1 micron
Cap
Cap

Body (Filled with soda lime & Purafil)

Body
Housing
Canister

Cap bottom canister

Filter 1 micron
Support element
Cap Filter
O ring
Cap

- Bypass regulator
Excess gas volume which is being delivered is re‐circulated back to the suction side of the compressors at the inlet
to the gas receivers.
This re-circulation line is fitted with a pressure regulation system. The bypass regulator (see “Reg 1” in the scheme that
represents the entire topside unit at the beginning of this topic) is loaded by the gas that flows in the line from the
scrubbers to the "reclaim volume tank". This gas passes through an orifice. Downstream of this orifice is a pressure
regulator which is set to open at a value below that set on the return line BPR. If the pressure downstream of the return
line BPR falls below its set point, the bypass regulator will sense this drop in pressure and open, with this regulator
open the BPR load pressure will also fall and allow the BPR to open, bypassing into the "receivers" the gas flowing
from the scrubbers.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 109 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.11.4 - Control console unit
The control console is situated in “dive control. It is generally composed of four parts:
● Analysis panel

● Oxygen make‐up panel

● HeO2 make‐up panel

● Back pressure regulator loader panel

- Analysis panel:
The analysis panel is essential to ensure that the reclaim system works accordingly to what is expected and to monitor
the gasses that are ready to be in line. IMCA says the following:
● There must be an oxygen analyser with an audible and visible high and low alarm fitted in line on the
downstream gas supply to the divers
● If diver gas reclaim is being used, there must be a carbon dioxide analyser with audible and visible high level
alarm fitted to the down-stream side of the diver gas supply. The adjustment of gas sample flow rate must not
affect any other analyser fitted
● There must be a means by which the diving supervisor can monitor the bell atmosphere for oxygen and carbon
dioxide levels. This may be by a manual procedure carried out by the bellman or by a remote reading in dive
control
The analysers used on control panels are separate devices which are designed for a dedicated gas. They are typically
grouped together and at the direct proximity of the diving supervisor. Flexible whips with quick connect couplings are
used to connect these O2 and CO2 analysers to the various sampling sources that are regulated by flowmeters. These
sampling points are usually organized as follows:
● Span & zero gas sampling points: Analysers must be frequently calibrated, and it is recommended to use a zero
gas and a span gas to do it. For this reason, these gases must be available at all times. Note that:
○ A “zero gas” is a neutral gas, that does not contain any molecule of the gas the analyser to calibrate and
is designed to detect, which is used to set the zero of this analyser. As an example, pure nitrogen or
helium are often used to perform the zero calibration of an oxygen or carbon dioxide analyser.
○ A “span gas” is a gas in which there is a precisely known concentration of a detectable gas which is
exposed towards an analyser designed to detect it in order to calibrate it.
● Divers supply sampling point allows to control the gas delivered to the divers in the bell.

● Bell Internal sampling point allows monitoring the atmosphere of the bell.

● Standby diver sampling point provides a control of the gas ready to be delivered to the stand by diver..

● Reclaim sampling allows monitoring the reclaimed gas before its delivery to the bell.

● Mix #1, #2, and #3 sampling points allow controlling the stored gasses that are ready to be introduced and which
have been fabricated by the life support technician or specifically manufactured.
● Depending on the diving system, other sampling points may be available.

Analysers

Analysers inlets

Gasses sampling points

Valves isolating the sampling points

Whips with quick connect couplings

Calibration gasses sampling points

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 110 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Analysers should provide the operator with a clear and accurate display of the gas concentrations within the bell and the
gas supply lines being monitored. The values are displayed as follows.
● Concentration of a gas: Percentage (%) and part per million(PPM) are commonly used.

● Pressures: Bar and millibar (mbar) are today the most employed units of measure (1 bar = 100000 Pa). However,
PSI (pound per square inch) and Atmosphere (atm) are the preferred units in several areas. Note that NORSOK
uses kilopascals (KPa) to quantify small pressures (1 KPa = 10 mbar) in some documents. However, this unit is
unusual with the analysers commonly found in dive & saturation controls.
● Gas flow rate: Litres per minute (L/min) is the most used unit.

● Depth: Metres of seawater (MSW) becomes the preferred unit. However, feet of seawater (FSW), continue to be
used in a lot of countries.
● Time: Hours, minutes and seconds.

The majority of analysers in use with saturation systems are robust machines that act individually. They usually have
only one type of display and are fitted with an audio alarm which is generally reinforced by warning lights (see in the
photo below). Note that the analysis of the bell atmosphere is today remote on the wide majority of saturation systems.
However, depending on the number of sampling points and analyser available, it is not always possible to analyse the
CO2 and O2 at the same time.

Oxygen analysis may be carried out using a fuel cell analyser or a magneto-dynamic cell (also called paramagnetic).
● Fuel cell analysers are the more widely used because they are robust, lightweight and suitable for remote
readings.
Protective netting The device attached to the gauge allows either a measurement of the partial
pressure or a measurement in expanded gas (percentage).
+
Capillary barrier
○ The O2 sensor acts as a battery.
Cathode ○ The difference of potentials between anode and cathode is going to
be proportional to the quantity of oxygen which will go through a
semi-permeable membrane (capillary barrier) and will ionise at the
Electrolyte contact with the cathode and will oxidise the anode.
Thermoresistor

(Potassium hydroxide)
○ The lead anode and copper/beryllium cathode are plunged in an
electrolyte (a solution of potassium hydroxide).
○ A semi-permeable membrane allows the gas to pass through and
Anode forbids the electrolyte to follow.
Between the anode and cathode a thermo-regulator compensates the
-
membrane
○

temperature variations.
The cell may be fitted inside or outside the analyser with the gas sample flowing over it, or placed in a chamber
and connected to the analyser in the control room.
A fuel cell analyser should be calibrated with a zero gas and scale gas, but it must be noticed that a lot of new
models can be calibrated with air (for example : “Analox” O2EII). The calibration with air is based on the fact

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 111 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
that fresh air has a proportion 20.9% oxygen. To increase accuracy, the manufacturers provide a humidity
compensation chart with each instrument, to show whether to use 20.9% or some slightly lower value when
calibrating. Calibration with air can be considered reliable for surface supplied diving, nevertheless the
monitoring of saturation diving requires more accuracy, and the use of calibration gas instead of air is
recommended.
If the fuel cell is placed in a chamber, it can only be calibrated when the chamber is on the surface, or by
reference to another analyser sampling the gas on the surface.
A fuel cell in the chamber can only be used as a guide to the PPO2. Errors may be caused by condensation on
the fuel cell, changes in chamber temperature, changes in the temperature of the wires carrying the signal to the
analyser and radio transmissions and other electromagnetic fields.
Since the fuel cell is a battery, it will run out, normally in about six months, but depending on the concentration
of oxygen in the gas analysed, it will often be less. Erratic reading is an indicator that the cell needs to be
changed.
● Magneto-dynamic (Paramagnetic):
This system is based on the measures of the paramagnetic susceptibility of the sample gas by means of a proven
magneto-dynamic type measuring cell.
The paramagnetic susceptibility of oxygen is significantly greater than that of other common gases. This means
that oxygen molecules are attracted much more strongly by a magnetic field than are molecules of other gases,
most of which are slightly diamagnetic (repelled by a magnetic field).

Magneto-dynamic oxygen analysers are based upon Faraday’s

method of determining the magnetic force developed by a Force on sphere
strong non-uniform field on a diamagnetic test body suspended
in the sample gas. The test body of all measuring cells oxygen Restoring force
analysers consists of two nitrogen filled quartz spheres of suspension
arranged in the form of a dumb-bell.
Pole piece

A single turn of fine platinum wire (the feedback

coil) is secured in place around the dumb-bell. A
rugged taut band platinum ribbon suspension,
attached to the midpoint of the dumb-bell, positions Field N
Sphere
the dumb-bell in the strong non-uniform magnetic
field between the pole pieces of the permanent
magnetic structure. Pole piece Feedback coil
S

The angular rotation of the dumb-bell is sensed

by a light beam projected onto a mirror attached
to the dumb-bell from which it is reflected onto a Photocells
Cell
pair of photocells. The difference in the outputs
from these photocells is fed to an amplifier
whose output is zero when both photocells are
illuminated equally.
Mirror
Light source
Carbon dioxide analysers rely on the fact that each gas absorbs specific wavelengths of radiation.
Parabola

Equal infra-red beams of the appropriate

Shuttle Infrared emission
wavelength are shone onto two cells. One cell
contains a reference gas, and the other cell
contains the sample gas. Windows
The sample gas absorbs radiation in proportion
to its carbon dioxide content and heats up. Gas inlet
By comparing the temperature rise with the Analysis tube
temperature of the reference cell, the proportion
of carbon dioxide can be measured. Reference Gas outlet
Calibration normally requires a zero gas and chamber
scale gas. Comparison module

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 112 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Some analysers require a set up procedure which should be repeated at regular intervals according to the
manufacturer’s instructions or if it becomes impossible to calibrate the instrument.
Because measurement depends on temperature, it is essential that the analyser warms up to a stable temperature
before use. Readings are commonly given in parts per million.
Oxygen and Carbon dioxide can also be detected using thermal conductivity detectors (also called universal detectors):
The system consists of an electrically heated filament in a temperature-controlled cell. Under normal conditions
there is a stable heat flow from the filament to the detector body. When a gas is introduced and the thermal
conductivity of the column effluent is reduced, the filament heats up and changes resistance. This resistance change
is sensed by an electronic circuit which produces a measurable voltage change.
As for the infrared analysers, thermal analysers comprise two chambers, each with an identical thermal conductivity
sensor. The reference chamber is filled with a reference gas, and the other receives the gas to analyse. The difference
in thermal conductivity of the reference and gas to be analysed is measured and converted into a concentration value
by the electronic circuitry in the instrument.

e
nc

Sa
re

m
fe

pl
Re

e
Power
Output
supply Amplifier
e
nc
Sa

re
m

fe
pl

Re
e

The system can have an accuracy and display precision of around 0.1% when precise temperature compensation is
made, and is reputed stable and robust.
Thermal conductivity is used to detect various gases such as:
● Oxygen

● Carbon dioxide

● Carbon monoxide

● Nitrogen

● Hydrogen

● Methane and various hydrocarbons

● Water vapour

The last generation analysers are designed in the same manner than the previous generation. However, electronic
continues to progress and offer more functions. Also, manufacturers, such as Fathom systems, a company based in the
United Kingdom, group the analysers in modules that are designed to analyse the O2 and CO2 at the same time and can
display some measurement in different units. As an example, oxygen can be shown in percentage and partial pressure at
the same time.
Also, these analysers are connected to a computer system through Ethernet link. Note that the “master” is the oxygen
analyser displaying results in percentages and that the other analysers of the group act as “slaves” (In computer
networking, master/slave is a model for a communication protocol in which one device or process, known as the
master, controls one or more other devices or processes, which are known as slaves). In addition the systems of alarms
have been reinforced so the diving supervisor is informed more precisely of the problem occurring. As an example,
with the analysers taken as reference, the alarms generated by the system can have one of three different states:
I - No Alarm: All parameters are within the acceptable limits / set-points. In this case, the display is green, the
Alarm LED is off and there are no spoken warning messages.
II - Active Alarm: It is caused by a parameter moving outside its alarm threshold set-point (or the set-point being
changed to put the parameter into an alarm state). As a result, the display flashes between Red
and Green, the Alarm LED on the front panel flashes and warning messages are produced every
30 seconds.
III - Accepted Alarm: An alarm that has occurred has been acknowledged or accepted by the operator (by pressing
the appropriate front-panel button). In this case, and provided there are no other active alarms,
the display changes to solid red, the alarm LED remains on red (not flashing) and the audible
alarm is silenced. This state continues until the parameter returns to a healthy condition or the
set-point is modified to be outside an alarm condition.
Note that a second red warning LED that indicates the presence of a fault is on the front panel. This LED flashes and
a warning message is generated when there is a system fault present such as follows:
○ Incorrect supply voltages
○ Failure of sensor sub-systems or components
○ Sensors not correctly calibrated
○ Missing data communications with external devices / systems
○ Internal temperature too high

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 113 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Also, three additional small LED indicators are on the front panel of the O2 analyser to provide the following
information about the telemetry status:
○ Link LED indicates when the Ethernet cable is connected to the network.
○ Data LED flashes when data is being transmitted or received
○ Inet LED flashes when the %O2 master analyser is transmitting data to other modules in the same rack.

#1 Main display (no alarm)

1 #2 Calibration setup 1
#3 2nd display in Partial Pressure
2 2
3 #4 Alarm display (all clear) 3
4 4
#5 Telemetry status
5
#6 Alarm LED light 5

6 7 #7 Fault LED light 7

6
With the new systems described for example, the sample and calibration gases being sent to the CO2 slave and O2
master analysers are managed by the “sample processor”, which is a slave module.
With this module, the classical flowmeter that is usually operated manually is replaced by a sensor that measures the
mass-flow of gas through the system. The Sample processor automatically calculates the gas density (based on either
the known calibration gas oxygen concentration or from the O2 concentration measured by the O2 analyser), and this
figure is used to convert the mass-flow measured into a volumetric flow that is displayed on the sample processor
displays. The flow rate is normally set between 80 ml/min to 100 ml/min for all gases including calibration gases. Two
input versions are proposed by the manufacturer:
A - The single sample version is normally used where the sample to the analyser is not normally changed or
‘patched’ between different samples. Usually, four quick-connect couplings are available on the rear of the
device: One for the zero gas, one for the low span calibration gas, one for the high span calibration gas, and
one for the sample to be analysed. However some models have an additional calibration gas (medium).
B - The 3-inputs version allows one of three different samples to be selected by the user, and ‘switched’
internally by the Sample Processor unit. As a result, six quick-connect couplings are available on the rear of
the device: One for the zero gas, one for the low span calibration gas, one for the high span calibration gas,
and three for the samples to be analysed.
Lights corresponding to the rear inputs are displayed on the front of the device and
indicate which gas is monitored by the machine (see #1 in the photo on the side). .
A message is also displayed on the small screen to indicate which operation is
ongoing and the flow rate (see #2). 1
Also, a sample pump is available when there is insufficient pressure from the
chambers to allow a suitable sample flow rate at the end of a decompression.
However, this pump is normally unnecessary for bell monitoring.
2
3
In addition to managing the online gas selection and controlling / measuring gas
flow accurately, the sample processor is also able to raise alarms in the event of high
or low gas flow conditions, and coordinate an automated calibration process. 4 5
Alarms are displayed and processed in the same way as the O2 master analyser (see
#3 & #4 in the photo on the side).
The sample processor, and all the analysers can be calibrated using a small screw
driver through the hole labelled “CAL” (see #5). 3-inputs sample processor
The photo below shows one of the modules from an analysing panel of a dive system that was not yet fully operational.
As a result, the analysers were not calibrated and were raising alarms: We can note the following:
Alarm status is “on”: The main display is red Single sample processor with 4 calibration gasses

Problem
identified

External data transmission active Slave O2 analyser with

Transmission to slaves not active Alarm and fault LED lights active main display in PPO2

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 114 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Oxygen make-up, heliox make-up, and back pressure regulator loader are part of the “reclaim panel", which is supplied
by the “gas panel”. As indicated previously, they are situated near the analysis panel in the dive control.
The scheme below shows the connections between the two panels and the elements of the system they supply. Note that
the divers and the bell can be supplied with stored mixes (Mix 1, Mix 2, Mix 3, HeO2 supply) or with the gas from the
reclaim volume tank. As a result, the divers are not deprived of gas in the case of a problem with the reclaim system.

Gas panel

Standby Mix 1
diver
(60 bar) (220 bar)
Analysis Depth Analysis
gauges panel
Exhaust
bell

Analysis

Pressurization Mix 2
& exhaust bell
(60 bar) (220 bar)
Analysis

Divers
#1 & #2

Analysis

Mix 3
(60 bar) (220 bar)

Reclaim volume tank (55 bar)

Reclaim panel

To divers
return hose

HeO2 HeO2
Make up supply
(220 bar)

To BPR
pilot

To divers O2
Gas reclaim supply

Vent

Direction of flux Switch Needle valve Filter

Regulator Low pressure gauge Solenoid valve Relief valve

Back pressure regulator High pressure gauge ¼ turn valve One way valve

Flow restriction

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 115 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Analysis panel Reclaim panel Gas panel

Panel monitoring the divers’ return hose pressure

(inlet TRU) and the “volume tank” pressure (outlet
TRU), with a cross-over valve allowing to run the
system in a closed-loop.

Heliox make-up control & back pressure

regulator loading control panel

Oxygen make-up panel

- The “oxygen panel” controls the flow of make‐up oxygen into the system.
As already said, the system is based on high pressure stored oxygen which is injected into the circuit through an
adjustable regulator and across a fixed multi orifices injector that restricts its flow to a calculated rate. As a result, a
controlled bleed of oxygen is supplied into the system. The flux of oxygen depends on the inlet pressure to the multi
orifices injector and the heliox pressure in the circuit where the oxygen is bleed. Thus, too high or low inlet oxygen
pressure may result in too much or not enough oxygen in the system. It is the reason that "reclaim tables", where the
pressure of the inlet oxygen is indicated according to the depth planned for the operation, are provided. Note that these
tables are called "diving tables" by the manufacturer. Gauges are provided to manage the inlet and outlet pressures.
Lexmar says that if the setting of the regulator is correct, the oxygen flow does not require further adjustments during
the dive. Also, the quantity of gas stored in the system is sufficiently large that a change of oxygen uptake rate of the
diver will result in a negligible effect during the dive. However, in the case of a change in the proportion of oxygen is
noticed, the regulator may have to be slightly increased or decreased to return to the planned value.
As this system is based on a constant bleed, there must be a device to stop oxygen delivery when the gas flow through
the system has stopped unexpectedly. It is achieved by the flow switch, already described in point 2.3.12.3, that closes
the oxygen flux automatically in the case that the gas flow in machinery is stopped.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 116 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The oxygen make-up panel is designed as follows:
A - The isolation valve allows opening or closing the oxygen supply (see “Bb5”).
B - The oxygen supply gauge indicates the pressure available to the system (see “Gb1”).
C - The regulator controls the oxygen pressure to the orifice (see “Reg 3b”).
D - The solenoid stops oxygen addition when gas flow through the system has stopped (see “b1”).
E - The regulator outlet gauge, also called “regulated oxygen supply”, indicates the oxygen pressure available to
the solenoid valve (see “Gb2).
F - The oxygen orifice regulates the flow of Oxygen to the topside unit (see “b2”).
G - The oxygen make‐up supply pressure gauge shows the pressure out of the solenoid valve (see “Gb3”).
H - The supply receiver pressure gauge indicates the pressure in the supply volume tank in the machinery van
(see “Gb7”).
I - The exhaust hose (or return hose) pressure indicates the bell divers exhaust hose pressure at the inlet of the
Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU) (see “Gb8”).
J - Automatic injection valve: It is kept open during normal diving operations (see “Vb6”)
K - Manual O2 injection valve (see “Vb8”): It can be used to increase the amount of O2 in the system rapidly,
but never be used when divers are in the water. The vent valve must be closed while this valve is open.
L - The manual O2 injection orifice is mounted after the O2 injection needle valve to control the amount of
oxygen being manually injected into the system (see “b3”).
M - Manual vent valve: This valve must remain open to vent any leakage of oxygen that may pass through the
manual O2 injection valve while it is closed. Also, it must be closed for manual injections and then
reopened when the injection is completed (see “Vb7”).
N - The “No flow” LED light indicates that there is no gas flow as a result of the flow switch of the Topside
Reprocessing Unit in the “normally closed position” (see “b4”).
O - No flow audible buzzer (see “b5”) will sound to indicate that there is no gas flow as a result of the flow
switch of the Topside Reprocessing Unit in the ‘normally closed position’. This buzzer can be muted.
P - Power ON / OFF switch allows turning on or turning off the power of the Reclaim Management Panel (see
“b6”). A green light is illuminated whenever power is on to the Reclaim Management Panel.
Q - Make up flow light is illuminated when make-up gas is flowing into the volume tank.(see “b7”).

Gb8 Vb3 Gb7

To return hose From volume tank

Cross over valve

Return hose pressure Volume tank

Heliox make-up & back pressure

regulator loading control panel

O2 make-up supply Regulated O2 supply Oxygen supply

Gb3 Gb2 Gb1

To b2 b1
Reprocessing Vb6
unit
b6 Power on No flow b4 O2 injection
(Automatic) PRV PRV
b3
Vent Vb7 Vb8 Reg 3b Vb5

b7 Make-up No flow b5 O2 injection

flow buzzer Vent (Manual) Isolation
valve valve

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 117 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Remember that LEXMAR says the following:
● In operation, the Oxygen shut‐off valve (see “Vb5” in the drawing on the previous page) is opened and the
oxygen regulator (See “Reg 3b”) set to the value recommended in the divers reclaim table.
● Manual Oxygen make‐up should never be carried out while diving is in progress.

● When reclaiming oxygen manually, the supply exhaust cross-over valve (see “Vb3” in the drawings on the
previous page and below) should be open, and the compressor should be running to provide circulation and
mixing through the system.
- The HeO2 make‐up gas panel provides both gas to increase the working depth of the system and make‐up for any losses
either at the surface or at the diver.
1 - The HeO2 regulator is a high flow, self‐venting regulator which controls the make‐up gas pressure available
to the volume tank (see “Reg 1b” in the drawing below).
2 - The “HeO2 supply gauge” indicates the HeO2 pressure available to the make‐up system (see “Gb4”).
3 - The “HeO2 supply valve provides manual shut‐off control of HeO2 to the regulator (see “Vb1”).
4 - The “HeO2 make‐up pressure gauge” indicates the pressure available to the volume tank. The reading on this
gauge is the minimum volume tank pressure desired (see “Gb6”).
5 - The “HeO2 outlet valve” “Vb2” provides manual isolation of the HeO2 supply system to the volume tank.
- The “Back Pressure Regulator (BPR) loader panel” enables the BPR in the topside reprocessing unit to be remotely
loaded. This panel houses the following components:
1 - The BPR loader supply valve enables manual opening and closing of HeO2 to the BPR regulator (see “Vb4”
in the drawing below).
2 - The BPR loader regulator allows controlling the BPR load pressure (see “Reg 2b”).
3 - The BPR loader isolation valve provides manual isolation of the BPR loader shut‐off valve (see “Vb9”).
4 - BPR loader pressure gauges (analog and digital) indicates what pressure is being felt on the BPR loader.
That will vary according to the regulator setting (see “Gb5”).
5 - The cross over valve (see “Vb3”), which is already mentioned for manual oxygen reclaiming, allows the
flowing of gas directly from the supply to the exhaust side of the system and being stirred up and mixed. It
is opened or ‘cracked’ during initial pressurization of the system or when the compressors are required to be
run without the helmets or bell being affected. This valve is also identified in the previous drawing.

Gb8 Vb3 Gb7

To return hose From volume tank

Cross over valve

Return hose pressure Volume tank

PRV Gb6 Vb1

Reg 1b
Vb2

Supply PRV
Make-up pressure HeO2 MAKE-UP CONTROL pressure

Gb4
BPR loader pressure

15.02 Gb5
PRV

To BPR Vb9 Reg 2b Vb4

BPR LOADING CONTROL

1.1.11.5 - System start-up and operational procedures

Reclaim systems are sophisticated equipment. For this reason, the study of the starting procedures published by the
manufacturer is the best method to understand how they work.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 118 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Precautions prior to starting the set up procedures:
1. The operator must ensure that the appropriate gases are online. This operation is performed through the gas
panel: Three mixes from the gas storage should be online. They are suitable diving mixes for the depth planned
and should be analysed using the analysis panel. One mix is selected to supply the gas reclaim system, and the
two other mixes can be used as backup, for bell pressurization, and to supply the standby diver umbilical.
2. The selected make‐up gas is supplied to the “reclaim panel”. Note that in the event that the topside unit
operation is interrupted, it will automatically become diver gas supply.
3. Pure Oxygen is required for oxygen make‐up.
4. Pure helium should not be connected to the system under any circumstances.
5. The operator ensures that all the valves of the control panels are closed and that the hand-knobs of the regulators
have been returned to zero (fully turn the hand-knob anticlockwise and then turn it back ¼ turn)
6. The operator prepares the compressor:
○He ensures that suitable electrical power is available for the compressor drive motors. It should be 440
Vac/ 60 Hz/ 40 KW for the model taken as an example.
○He also checks the level of oil and that the cooling system of the compressor is ready for use.
○The depth of the dive should be indicated to the technician so he can prepare the compressor and switch
off the 1st stage of the compressor if the dive is planned at 160 m or below.
○When the electrical power is supplied, the compressor can be started when the “Start” push button on the
electrical panel is pressed.
○As already said the compressor taken as an example is provided with a computer management system
that optimises its performances and protects it from incorrect procedures. This computer is operated
through a Human Machine Interface (HMI) that is on the electrical enclosure (see below).
The HMI serves as a graphic interface between the operator and the controlling system
The various measured values can be read on the screen, and parameters can be entered from there.
Also displayed are the error messages as and when they occur, as well as warning messages.

Human Machine
Interface (HMI)

#1 - Selection switch
#2 - Start
#3 - stop
#4 - Emergency stop
4 #5 - Alarm lights test

5 Alarm & status

1 2 3 lights

7. The scrubbers must be prepared: The Sodalime canisters must be changed and the time required to replace them
should be indicated on the control console panel. Note that each scrubber contains 9 litres of soda lime.
One or two scrubbers are online depending on the duration of the bell run and the number of divers in the water.
If only one scrubber is used, the isolation valves of the second one are closed, so it can be online when
necessary. The procedure for the change of Sodalime (or Sodasorb) is as follows:
○ Slowly open the new canister inlet, on the bottom of the tower body.
○ Ensure that the flexible hose is connected through the quick connect then slowly open the new canister
outlet, on the top of the tower cap.
○ Slowly close the inlet to the used canister; it is on the bottom of the tower body.
○ Slowly close the outlet from the used canister; it is on the top of the tower cap.
○ Slowly open the drain valve at the base of the used canister.
○ Disconnect the quick connect from the top of the used tower when the remaining pressure has been
vented.
○ Unscrew the top cap by hand.
○ Remove the internal Sodasorb canister using the handle.
○ Remove the top gauze and empty the contents.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 119 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
○ Fill the canister to two thirds full with Sodasorb (or soda lime).
○ Add 100 ml of Purafil (half a cupful).
○ Fill to top with Sodasorb (Sodalime).
○ Replace top filter gauze.
○ Lower the inner canister slowly into the tower body. Ensure that it is seated on the lower seal.
○ Inspect the top cap O‐ring, clean or replace as required, replace top cap. It is O‐ring sealed and seals
when hard hand tight.
○ Close drain valve at base and reconnect the quick connect hose to the top of the top cap.
○ Slowly open inlet valve on the bottom, to pressurize the Scrubber Tower then close the Inlet valve.
○ Check for leaks. If no leaks, the refilled canister is ready for use.
- Top side system setup
1 - Start the compressor:
If the pressure of the reclaim volume tank is below 45 bar, the outlet valve V2 (See in the drawing below) on the
TRU must be closed prior to starting the compressor. When the compressor is started, the operator waits for the
machine to reache its normal speed, then the outlet valve V2 on the TRU is opened again.
If the volume tank is at a pressure above 45 Bar, the compressor cannot be started due to the high resistance of
this pressure. If this is the case a message will come up on the HMI saying “Press. too hi for start” and the amber
“warning” pilot light will be on.
To start the compressor the outlet valve V2 (See in the drawing below) on the TRU must be closed, then
○

the the volume tank must be vented using the dedicated valve (V13) until the pressure on gauge G8,
which is the gauge of the 3rd filter, (See in the drawing below) reads below 45 Bar.
Once the pressure is below 45 bar, the operator can start the compressor and waits for the machine to
○

reach its normal speed, then the outlet valve V2 on the TRU can be opened again.
When the compressor is started, the volume tank can be pressurized to the required value
○

V12 Cooling water out

PRV vent out

V11 Cooling water in

Receiver #2

Receiver #1

O2 make up in
G1 PI
40

FTX
T G3 BPR pilot in
PT

G4 PT S2 BPR-1
PT

1/2"

1/2"
S3 S1 V4
P
G7
T P
PT PT

G8 1 micron

V5
G5 PT G2 PI
70
Reg 1
0.01 micron

V6 V3

0.01 micron

V10 V8 PT

V2
Reclaim out
Scrub. 2
Scrub. 1

Reclaim volume tank V1

To analysis
Drain

Reclaim in

V9 V7
Drain

V13

To gas panel (diver 1 &2) From HeO2 makeup panel Reclaim in

¼ turn valve Gauge Needle valve Water trap 1 micron Filter

Flow switch Heat exchanger Back Press. Reg Pressure regulator Relief valve

FTX Flow transmitter T Tº transmitter PT Press. Transmitter 3 way valve Check valve

G1 Ref. gauges V1 Ref. Valves Element highlighted S1 Stage compressor “Y” filter coolant

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 120 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
2 - Charge the “reclaim volume tank”:
● On the “gas panel” in the dive control:

○The operator selects the mix to be used as the source in the reclaim system among mixes 1 (valve Va1),
mix 2 (valve Va2), or mix 3 (valve Va5).
○Then he opens the corresponding valves of mix 1 (valve Va1), mix 2 (valve Va2), or mix 3 (valve Va5),
and sets the regulators “Reg 1a”, “Reg 2a”, “Reg 3a” to the correct pressures (see in the drawing below).
○When the regulators are adjusted to the desired pressures, he uses the cross‐over valves Va7‐Va10 or
Va8-Va9 to supply the "makeup supply valve" Va6 with the mix selected and also have the “standby
diver” and “bell pressurization” lines ready for use.
○When the regulators are set up and the selected mix is supplied to the makeup supply valve “Va6”, and
he opens this valve. As a result the selected gas flows to “divers 1 & 2” line.

Gas panel
Ga2 Ga1
Va2
Standby Mix 1
diver
(60 bar) (220 bar) Va1
Reg 1a
Analysis Depth Analysis
gauges panel
Exhaust
bell
Va8 Va7

Analysis
Ga4 Ga3
Pressurization Mix 2
& exhaust bell
Va4 (60 bar) (220 bar) Va3
Reg 2a
Analysis

Divers
#1 & #2
Va9 Va10
Ga8
Analysis
Ga6 Ga5
Mix 3
Va6 (60 bar) (220 bar) Va5
Reg 3a

Ga7
Reclaim volume tank (55 bar)
Va11

Vb3
To divers
return hose

¼ turn valve Low pressure gauge Solenoid valve Flow switch Filter

Needle valve High pressure gauge Back Press. Reg Pressure regulator Relief valve

Flow restriction One way valve Va1 Reference valve Reg 3a Ref. Regulator Ga1 Reference gauge

● On the “reclaim panel” in the dive control:

○The operator sets the make‐up regulator (see “Reg 1b” in the drawing on the next page) to the desired
“reclaim volume tank” pressure.
○Then he opens valves “Vb1” and “Vb2”. These valves should be kept open throughout the diving
mission. Note that the pressure can be read on the pressure gauge G8 on the TRU (see in the
corresponding drawing).
● On the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU)
○The technician ensures that the “Reclaim gas out valve” V2 and “HEO2 makeup inlet valve” V1 are
open.
○He enters the “reclaim volume tank” pressure as an alarm setpoint through the human Machine Interface
(HMI). As a result, a warning light is visible if the actual pressure is 3 bar above the set point.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 121 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

From gas panel

Reclaim panel
Gb8 Gb7
To divers
return hose
Vb3

Gb6 Reg 1b Gb4

HeO2 HeO2
Make up supply
Vb2 Vb1 (220 bar)
Gb5
To BPR
pilot
Vb9 Reg 2b Vb4

Gb3
Gb2 Gb1
To divers O2
Gas reclaim supply
Vb6 Vb5
Reg 3b

Vent
Vb7 Vb8

¼ turn valve Low pressure gauge Solenoid valve Flow switch Filter

Needle valve High pressure gauge Back Press. Reg Pressure regulator Relief valve

Flow restriction One way valve Gb1 Reference gauge Reg 3a Ref. regulator Vb9 Reference valve

3 - Charge the return line and set up the BPR pilot pressure:
● On the “reclaim panel” in the dive control:

The operator opens the supply valve Vb4 and exhaust valve Vb9 (see in the drawing above).
○

Then, he slowly opens the cross‐over valve Vb3 until the entire umbilical reaches the bottom depth
○

pressure. Note that the pressure can be read on the pressure gauge G6 on the TRU. When the pressure is
reached the valve Vb3 is closed.
When the valve Vb3 is closed, the operator sets the BPR (see “Reg 2b”) to the requested pressure
○

indicated in the “reclaim table”.

4 - Set the bypass BPR pressure:
● On the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU) and using valve Vb3 on gas the reclaim panel:

○To prevent the compressor from speeding up during the set‐up stage, the operator sets the bypass
pressure to 15.5 Bar on the Human Machine Interface (HMI) on the TRU.
○Then, he starts the compressor and keeps the compressor suction pressure to at least a pressure equal to
the bypass pressure set point according to the “reclaim table” with the cross‐over valve Vb3 on the gas
reclaim panel.
○When the pressure on the G8 gauge on the TRU is at the required volume tank pressure, the operator
stops the compressor
○The inlet valve V1 on the TRU is closed
○The operator sets the bypass pressure as a set point on the HMI on the TRU according to the “reclaim
table”.
○The operator opens the Back Pressure Regulator “Reg 1” one turn
○The compressor is started and with “Reg 1” the operator regulates the compressor suction until this
pressure has stabilised at the bypass pressure set point according to the “reclaim table”.
○The operator sets the required bypass pressure according to the dive table as a set point on the HMI.
5 - Set the O2 to the required level:
● On the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU):

○ The reclaim gas inlet valve V1 is opened.

● On the “reclaim panel” in the dive control:

○The operator slowly opens the cross‐over valve “Vb3” and leaves this valve in this position.
● On the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU):

○ When the compressor suction pressure has reached a value higher than the bypass pressure set point, the
operator starts the compressor. As a result, the gas is circulating through the volume tank
● On the “reclaim panel” in the dive control:

○The Oxygen regulator (see “Reg 3b) is adjusted to the desired pressure for the planned dive.
○The valve Vb3 is then closed

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 122 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
6 - Setting up in the bell
Note: The numbers below are those of the drawing
1. Ensure that Diver has gas supply to helmet (regulator adjusted to the value indicated in the “reclaim table”).
2. Close the bell scrubber valve.
3. Check that the SAECO/POS valve is fully open (The indicator is out).
4. Close water trap drain valve.
5. Close the diver exhaust manifold valve.
6. Push in the water trap isolation valve.
7. Open the diver exhaust hull valve slowly.
8. Turn the BPR Loader needle valve anticlockwise until it stops rotating, then turn back half a turn.
9. Adjust the BPR bleed (metering) valve to read 0.5 L/min on the BPR flowmeter (once set do not re-adjust).
10. Adjust the BPR loader until the negative pressure gauge reads according to the “reclaim tables” (If using a
different brand of helmet than Divex, the manufacturer’s recommendations). The Diving Supervisor must
advise the divers of the desired negative pressure.
11. Adjust the pneumo supply valve to read 0.3 l/min on the corresponding flowmeter (0.4 l/min maximum)
12. Connect the exhaust hose to the helmet.
13. Open the “shut off valve” of the helmet.
14. Open the diver exhaust manifold valve.
15. Put on helmet and breathe on recovery.

88- Turn the BPR Loader valve 10 - Adjust the BPR loader until the
fully anticlockwise, then negative pressure gauge reads
turn it back half a turn according to the reclaim tables

Pressure gauge water trap - Read the adjustment

Read 0.5 L/min on the BPR of the BPR loader on this gauge (see #10 ). Note
bleed flowmeter (see #9 ) that the reading is normally a negative pressure.

11 - Pneumo supply valve: Adjust it to read 0.3 l/min

on the corresponding flowmeter

To diver tracking pneumo 22- Close Bell scrubbing

(exhaust) valve

1 - Ensure of gas supply to

98 - Adjust the BPR bleed Helmets (regulator panel)
valve to read 0.5 L/min on
the BPR bleed flowmeter From divers supply

Back Pressure Regulator 33 - Check SAECO/POS valve

fully open (Indicator out)

77 - Open diver exhaust hull valve Connection return

hose umbilical

To bell external water trap 12

12 - Connect the exhaust
hoses to the helmets
66 - Push-in isolation valve
55 - close diver exhaust valve
13
13 - Open the shut off valve helmet. Acrylic water trap

15- Put on the helmet and breathe.

15 44- Close drain valve 14
14 - Open diver exhaust manifold valve

- Important note from the manufacturer of the equipment taken as example regarding shallow diving procedures:
Diving at depths less than 40 MSW (130 SFW), makes further demands on the system. At shallow depths, the
compressors are exposed to the highest‐pressure ratio and, as such, shallow diving makes the greatest demands on the
compressors.
For this reason, the regulator settings advised should be rigidly adhered to. Low range gauges are also required for the
BPR loader and umbilical suction. It might even be advisable to go for a shorter main umbilical, bypassing the
umbilical winch, in order to reduce pressure losses.

1.1.11.6 - General view of the reclaim system

The drawing on the next page gives a general view of the reclaim system and highlights the connections between the
panels in the dive control and the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU). The legends are those previously used.
¼ turn valve Low pressure gauge Water trap Flow switch Filter

Needle valve High pressure gauge Back Press. Reg Regulator Relief valve

Flow restriction One way valve Back Press. Reg Heat exchanger FTX Flow transmitter

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 123 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

PT Press. Transmitter T Tº transmitter 3 way valve Small needle valve Small ¼ turn valve

Vent
Receiver #2

Receiver #1
Vent
3W-2 O2 makeup in
G1 PI
40

FTX
T BPR pilot in
PT
G3
G4 PT St-2 BPR-1
PT

1/2"

1/2"
St-3 St-1 V4
P
G7
T P 3W-1
PT PT

V5
G8 1 micron

G2 V6
G5 PT PI
70
Reg 1
0.01 micron

V3

0.01 micron

V10 V8 PT

V2

BPR pilot
Scrubber 2
Scrubber 1
Drain

Oxygen
Reclaim out
Reclaim volume tank

Drain

To analysis
V1

Reclaim in

Drain
V9 V7
V13

To gas panel (diver 1 &2) From HeO2 makeup panel Reclaim in

“Fresh” HeO2

“Dirty gas” to reclaim

Oxygen

“Reclaimed” HeO2

Gas panel
Ga2 Ga1
Va2
Bell Standby Mix 1
diver
(60 bar) (220 bar) Va1
Reg 1a
Analysis Depth Analysis

“Reclaimed” HeO2
gauges panel
Exhaust
bell
Va8 Va7

Analysis
Ga4 Ga3
Pressurization Mix 2
& exhaust bell
Va4 (60 bar) (220 bar) Va3
Reg 2a
Analysis

Divers
#1 & #2
“Dirty gas” to reclaim

Va9 Va10
Oxygen

Ga8
Analysis
“Fresh” HeO2

Ga6 Ga5
Mix 3
Va6 (60 bar) (220 bar) Va5
BPR pilot

Reg 3a

Ga7
Reclaim volume tank (55 bar)
Va11

Reclaim panel
Gb8 Gb7
To divers
return hose
Vb3

Reg 1b Gb4
Gb6
HeO2 HeO2
Make up supply
Vb2 Vb1 (220 bar)

To BPR
pilot Gb5 Vb9 Reg 2b Vb4

Gb3 Gb2 Gb1

To divers O2
Gas reclaim supply
Vb6 Vb5
Reg 3b

Vent
Vb7 Vb8

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 124 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.11.7 - Reclaim tables
Lexmar has designed “Reclaim tables” for the correct setting of the equipment (Note that the manufacturer calls them
“diving tables”). These tables that cover dives from 30 m to 300 m are displayed on the next page.
The elements which are taken into consideration in these “reclaim tables” are those listed in the table below.
They are also described in the method recommended by the manufacturer to set up the system that is explained in the
previous pages, and it is crucial not to confuse them with others. For this reason, a description of their function and their
situation in the system are provided with the reference numbers used in the drawings displayed on the previous pages.

Elements indicated in the tables Description

It is the depth of the bell at the lowest level (bottom door).

Depth It is the reference from which the other values should be selected when using the
tables.

It is the regulator “Reg 1b” which is on the “reclaim panel”.

The pressure to read is displayed on the gauge “Gb6”, which is directly
downstream.
HeO2 make‐up regulator “volume Tank” This regulator feeds the “Reclaim volume tank” of the TRU with “fresh” heliox.
(Bar) Thus when the valve “Vb2” is open, the pressure read on the gauge “Gb6” should
be the pressure of the “reclaim out” of the TRU and of the “volume tank”, except
if their pressure is above the pressure delivered by the regulator (the regulator
“Reg 1b” is isolated by a non-return valve).

The setting of the Back Pressure Regulator “BPR-1” which is on the TRU is made
through the regulator “Reg 2b” which is on the “reclaim panel”.
TRU BPR Setting (bar) The setting pressure can be read on the gauge “Gb5” which is directly
downstream the regulator “Reg 2b”. It can also be read on the gauge “G1” which
is upstream “BPR-1” on the TRU.

It can be monitored through the “Human Machine Interface” (HMI) and gauge
Compressor Suction Pressure (Bar) “G2” if 1st stage “St-1” of the compressor is activated, or gauge “G3” if the 1st
stage is deactivated.

This column indicates whether the 1st stage must be activated or not.
Activation /deactivation of the first stage “St-1” is performed through the three-
Stage 1 active way valves “3W-1” & “3W-2”.
It can be monitored through the HMI and the inlet gauges G2 (1st stage inlet
pressure) or G3 (2nd stage inlet pressure).

The bypass BPR is the regulator “Reg 1” which is situated on the TRU and allows
to bypass into the receivers the excess of gas flowing from the scrubbers to the
volume tank, which is the final storage before delivery.
It is said in the setup procedure that the pressure of setup can be monitored on
Bypass BPR Pressure (bar)
gauge “G8” on the TRU.
Also, as valve “Vb3” , which is on the “reclaim panel” has to be opened to
establish a close circuit during the setup, the pressure of setting can be monitored
on gauges “Gb7” & “Gb8” during this time.

It is the divers (1& 2) regulator that is situated on the “gas management panel” in
Bell Divers Supply Regulator bias (bar)
the bell. It is also described in point 2.3.2.7 (items 8 & 27) of this document.

The bell Back Pressure Regulator (BPR) is adjusted through the BPR loader (see
#8 in the bell setup procedure) which is situated in the bell.
The pressure is read on the pressure gauge which is connected to the water trap
and is mounted on the same panel as the BPR loader (see #8 in the setup
Bell BPR Setting bias (msw)
procedure).
Note that this gauge provides positive (overpressure) and negative (depression)
values and that the reclaim tables provide negative values as the line should be in
a slight depression.

It is the regulator ”Reg 3b” of the oxygen supply line which is on the "reclaim
panel".
Oxygen regulator setting
The reading should be performed on the gauge “Gb2”, which is immediately
adjacent downstream.

To read the tables, select the planned bell storage depth and read across the corresponding values.
Lexmar also indicates the following elements:
● Weight seawater: 1.025 kg/litre

● Bypass BPR pressure: 0.30 bar below compressor suction pressure

● Required flowrate: 135 lpm at bottom pressure

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 125 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Make‐up
Compressor Bypass Bell Divers Bell BPR Oxygen Oxygen
Regulator TRU BPR
Depth Suction Stage 1 BPR Supply Setting Reg’r Reg’r
“volume Setting
(MSW) Pressure Active Pressure Regulator bias Setting Setting
Tank” (Bar)
(bar) (bar) bias (bar) (msw) 1 Diver 2 Divers
(Bar)

30 18.6 1 0.9 Yes 12 12 -15 19 40

35 19.3 1.4 1 Yes 0.7 12 -15 19 40

40 19.9 1.9 1.1 Yes 0.8 12 -15 19 40

45 20.6 2.3 1.2 Yes 0.9 12 -15 19 40

50 21.2 2.7 1.25 Yes 0.95 12 -15 19 40

55 21.9 3.2 1.3 Yes 1 12 -15 19 40

60 22.5 3.6 1.4 Yes 1.1 12 -15 19 40

65 23.2 4 1.5 Yes 1.2 12 -15 19 40

70 23.8 4.5 1.6 Yes 1.3 12 -15 19 40

75 24.5 4.9 1.75 Yes 1.45 12 -15 19 40

80 25.2 5.4 1.9 Yes 1.6 12 -15 19 40

85 25.8 5.8 1.95 Yes 1.65 12 -20 19 40

90 26.5 6.2 2 Yes 1.7 12 -20 19 40

95 27.1 6.7 2.1 Yes 1.8 12 -20 19 40

100 27.8 7.1 2.2 Yes 1.9 12 -20 19 40

105 28.4 7.5 2.25 Yes 1.95 12 -20 19 40

110 29.1 8 2.3 Yes 2 12 -20 19 40

115 29.7 8.4 2.4 Yes 2.1 12 -20 19 40

120 3.4 8.8 2.5 Yes 2.2 12 -20 19 40

125 31.1 9.3 2.6 Yes 2.3 12 -20 19 40

130 31.7 9.7 2.7 Yes 2.4 12 -20 19 40

135 32.4 10.1 2.8 Yes 2.5 12 -20 19 40

140 33 10.6 2.9 Yes 2.6 12 -20 19 40

145 33.7 11 3.05 Yes 2.75 12 -20 19 40

150 34.3 11.4 3.2 Yes 2.9 12 -20 19 40

155 35 11.9 3.3 Yes 3 12 -20 19 40

160 35.6 12.3 8.6 NO 8.3 12 -20 19 40

165 36.3 12.8 8.85 NO 8.55 12 -20 19 40

170 37 13.2 9.1 NO 8.8 12 -20 19 40

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 126 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Make‐up
Compressor Bypass Bell Divers Bell BPR Oxygen Oxygen
Regulator TRU BPR
Depth Suction Stage 1 BPR Supply Setting Reg’r Reg’r
“volume Setting
(MSW) Pressure Active Pressure Regulator bias Setting Setting
Tank” (Bar)
(bar) (bar) bias (bar) (msw) 1 Diver 2 Divers
(Bar)

175 37.6 13.6 9.25 NO 8.95 12 -20 19 40

180 38.3 14.1 9.4 NO 9.1 12 -20 19 40

185 38.9 14.5 9.6 NO 9.3 12 -20 19 40

190 39.6 14.9 9.8 NO 9.5 12 -20 19 40

195 40.2 15.4 10 NO 9.7 12 -20 19.3 40

200 40.9 15.8 10.2 NO 9.9 12 -20 19.7 40

205 41.5 16.2 10.4 NO 10.1 12 -20 20 40

210 42.2 16.7 10.6 NO 10.3 12 -20 20.3 40

215 42.9 17.1 10.8 NO 10.5 12 -20 20.7 40

220 43.5 17.5 11 NO 10.7 12 -20 21 40

225 44.2 18 11.15 NO 10.85 12 -20 21.3 40

230 44.8 18.4 11.3 NO 11 12 -20 21.7 40

235 45.5 18.8 11.55 NO 11.25 12 -20 22 40

240 46.1 19.3 11.8 NO 11.5 12 -20 22.3 40

245 46.8 19.7 11.85 NO 11.55 12 -20 22.7 40

250 47.4 20.1 11.9 NO 11.6 12 -20 23 40

255 48.1 20.6 12.45 NO 12.15 12 -20 23.3 40

260 48.8 21 13 NO 12.7 12 -20 23.7 40

265 49.4 21.5 13.6 NO 13.3 12 -20 24 40

270 50.1 21.9 14.2 NO 13.9 12 -20 24.3 40

275 50.7 22.3 14.8 NO 14.5 12 -20 24.7 40

280 51.4 22.8 14.2 NO 13.9 12 -20 25 40

285 52 23.2 14.55 NO 14.25 12 -20 25.3 40

290 52.7 23.6 14.9 NO 14.6 12 -20 25.7 40

295 53.3 24.1 15 NO 14.7 12 -20 26 40

300 54 24.5 15.1 NO 14.8 12 -20 26.3 40

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 127 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.11.8 - Routine maintenance and inspection
Periodic maintenance and test should be carried out on a regular basis according to IMCA D 018 and D 024. They are
displayed and the end of this document. However, the following rules apply:
Visual internal +
Visual external + Internal + external+
external + gas leak test
Items function test , leak test 1,5 max. Other
at max. Working
calibration working pressure
pressure

High pressure vessels 6 months 30 months 5 years

Welded pressure vessels 6 months 30 months

Manufacturers
Relief valves 6 months 30 months
recommendations

Pipework 6 months 24 months 5 years (1st install.)

Power failure closure oxygen

6 months
makeup
Sensors, alarm & electrical Manufacturers
6 months
systems. recommendations

Analysers 6 months

Output purity of compressors 6 months

Delivery and rate of pressure

6 months
compressors
Manufacturers
Various mechanical equipment 6 months
recommendations

Maintenance should also be scheduled according to the requirements of equipment manufacturers:

- Topside Reprocessing Unit:
● Filters:

They must be drained at least every 4 hours. It is said that, depending on the environmental conditions,
○

Filter 1 (1 micron) should contain about a cup of condensate maximum and that the two others (0.01
micron) should not contain more than a spoon of condensate.
It is recommended to change the filters at intervals of 500 operating hours.
○

● Scrubbers:

Cartridges of scrubbers must be renewed after each bell run: A canister assembly is to be changed every
○

8 hours for 1 diver at work. Thus, the duration of one canister is 4 hours for two divers at work.
Filter pads on the top and bottom of the canisters should be renewed every 500 hours.
○

● Drain valves and float valves:

They should be checked every 40 hours.

○

● Compressors:

Oil level should be checked before starting the machine and oil pressure regularly during the operations.
○

Oil + filter should be replaced according to the recommendation of the manufacturer:

○

▪It is essential to use the quality of oil indicated. Note that the type of oil to be used often depends on
the environmental conditions. In addition, some compressors are lubricated with “synthetic oil” and
other models accept only “mineral oil”. It must be remembered that manufacturers recommend not
mixing a synthetic oil with a mineral one.
▪Environmental conditions and the quality of oil may also influence the frequency of the oil change: It
is said that under Normal conditions (no extreme temperatures) some synthetic oils allow being
renewed every 8,000 hours of run time or 12 months in the case of moderate use. This frequency
drops to approximately 5000 hours with mineral oils. However, this frequency can be as low as
every 1000 hours if the machine is exposed to extreme environmental conditions.
Coolant should be checked before starting the machine, and the temperature monitored during the
○

operations. It may have to be changed at seasonal periods.

The machine should be checked for leaks every day.
○

A lot of manufacturers recommend checking the tension and the alignment of the belt every 2000 hours.
○

Suction, delivery, and pressure relief valves should be controlled according to the recommendations of
○

the manufacturer. It is usually recommended every 1000 hours.

Some compressors have parts that are identified as more sensitive to wear than others. As a result, they
○

have to be changed at indicated periods as a precaution.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 128 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Bell:
Bell equipment requires only a limited amount of maintenance, which may be carried out at a convenient time when the
bell is the on surface and depressurized while carrying out the following checklists:
● Bell internal system:

○ Acrylic water trap drained as required, during the dive (without interrupting gas recovery).
○ Water trap dismantled, cleaned and inspected every 500 hours
○ Check the condition and operation of SAECO/ POS valves and relief valves every 3 months.
○ Over a period of time the acrylic housing of the Bell internal water trap and the flow meters will become
discoloured. This may be removed by washing in warm BIOX or other detergent and flushing with clean
water. Note that the Flow meter must be internally dried when reinstalled on the system.
● Bell external system

○ The Bell external water trap should be drained upon completion of each dive, or prior to the Bell being
redeployed
○ Check operation of externally mounted check valve very 6 months.
4.3.12.9 - Trouble shooting
- System fault

Fault Fault diagnosis Action

High current, high discharge

Diving at deeper depths than 160
temperature, compressor drive motor
msw with both stages of the
amperage high and gas outlet Bypass the 1st stage of the compressor.
compressor on line.
temperature high, despite adequate
cooling water flow.

BPR loader pressure set too high. Reset BPR loader pressure.
Low suction pressure
Filters #1 & #2 chocked Change the filters

- Load the regulator to 3 bar less than working depth.

- Check LP receiver pressure.
High Pressure reading on the return
Return line set too high - Check compressor supply valve is open.
hose
- Check oil pressure and high temperature.
- Switch the compressor off.

- Bell equipment fault

Fault Fault diagnosis Action

Reduce volume tank pressure and slowly open diver

Volume tank relief valve popping off Diver supply valve closed
supply valve.

Suction dropping off due to

insufficient topside unit Ensure that the compressor is operating correctly
pumping capacity.

SAECO/POS valve shut, closing Ensure that the diver has adequate supply pressure
off exhaust circuit. of 12 bar recommended in the reclaim table
The bellman should check the from the bell panel and the surface.
pin on the SEACO/POS valve: Check whether the bellman has turned the diver’s
The pin should be out. supply gas off.

Bellman may have shut diver

Open valve
exhaust manifold bell water trap
Suction pressure loss at helmet:
The diver loses suction at the valve Hull exhaust valve may have
and finds difficulty exhaling. Open hull exhaust valve.
been closed by mistake.
As a result, the diver goes on “Open
Circuit”. Reclaim should resume when diver goes below
Diver working above Bell &
the Bell.
tracking pneumo not following
Or Adjust diver tracking pneumo to give a bleed of
the diver .
approximately 0.3 to 0.4 litres per minute.

The bellman closes the diver manifold exhaust valve

BPR loader in the Bell not
and sets up again the pre-dive checks. (See points 5 &
set up properly.
14 in the bell setup procedure).

Main umbilical hose collapsed,

Replace hoses or cut back flattened area.
or/and main umbilical return shut
Open main umbilical shut off valve slowly.
off valve closed.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 129 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Fault Fault diagnosis Action

- The dive may be continued by backing off BPR

loader slightly in the dive control.
- Set up to 1 bar below the recommended value.
Suction pressure loss at helmet:
- Drain the umbilical and water traps at the end of the
The diver loses suction at the valve
bell run and check for a loose fitting on the outside
and finds difficulty exhaling. Bell umbilical and external water
of the bell and on the helmet.
As a result, the diver goes on “Open trap filled with water.
- Ensure that divers’ helmet and mask are in good
Circuit”.
condition and not leaking water and the oral-nasal
(Continuation of the previous page)
properly fitted to lower exhaust connectors.
- Most importantly, the bellman must always drain the
internal water trap when it is filled with water.

Diver using standby onboard gas

instead of umbilical supply in the Diver to be put on umbilical supply.
Volume tank pressure increase: Bell.
Pressure increase in the system volume
tank when make‐up regulator is not Standby gas supply being used
flowing. as umbilical supply and coming Regulate standby gas below make‐up regulator
back up the exhaust hose to the pressure.
volume tank.

Close the valve (see point 2 in the bell setup

Bell scrubbing valve open.
procedure).

Bell water trap drain valve open Close the water trap drain valve (see point 4 in the
with isolation valve pushed in bell setup procedure).

Check for gas being sucked into the valves.

Volume tank pressure increase: Leaks at inward relieving valves Also, check that the relief valves on top of the water
Pressure increase in the system volume on umbilical fitting below diver trap are not relieving inwards.
tank when make‐up regulator is not umbilical exhaust manifold Removing the caps may be necessary for these
flowing. checks.
Gas escaping from the Bell into the
exhaust circuit and the Bellman has to Metering valve BPR (also called
Set “BPR bleed valve” as per bell setup procedure
blow down regularly to prevent water “bleed valve BPR”) opened too
(see point 9 in the bell setup procedure).
coming up the Bell trunk. far

Hose to helmet disconnected and Close the valve of the diver’s umbilical exhaust (see
manifold valve knocked open point 5 in the bell setup procedure).

O-rings on isolation valve

damaged or water trap large O- Replace the damaged O-ring
rings leaking

Loose fittings on the outside of the

Check for leaks in the diver’s supply.
bell or the inside of the bell losing
Tighten loose fittings
Gas losses: gas.
A great deal of gas used for the dive
but the diver assures the supervisor that Set to correct flow in the bell of 0.4 litres/min.
he is on closed circuit and losing very maximum.
Diver tracking pneumo flow set
few bubbles at his helmet When the diver leaves the bell there should be one
far too high.
bubble every 10-20 seconds at the tracking pneumo
end on his umbilical

Ensure that the umbilical return line is pressurised

Umbilical return line pressure when lowering the Bell into the water.
No gas coming back from diver
too low. Ensure the proper setting on return line loader.
Visually check end of hose at Bell for flattening.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 130 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.11.10 - Divex bell reclaim system
The 1st Divex bell reclaim system has been proposed to manufacturers and owners of existing saturation systems during
the eighties, and from this 1st launch, its general architecture has remained the same over the years. As a result, it is
currently the most employed bell reclaim system in the world.
The general design of the Divex and Lexmar systems is very similar. As a conclusion, it is reasonable to say that the
diving personnel using one of these systems should be able to adapt to the other one quickly. Note that Lexmar and Divex
are two companies of the JFD group.
Apart from some minor details, the commands in the bell are the same and situated at the same places. However, there are
some differences between the topside reprocessing units. Also, the control panels that are installed in the dive control
provide similar functions, but their commands are arranged differently. For this reason, a comparison of these elements is
necessary for a smooth transfer from one system to the other.
● The main difference of the topside reprocessing unit is the gas booster which is a two piston compressor that
delivers 150 l/min with a maximum discharge pressure of 100 bar and is rated to 500 metres depth, while the
compressor of the reclaim unit Lexmar model LME‐RC‐03‐S‐HY provides 135 l/min at a pressure of 55 bar.
Note that the compressor provided by Lexmar is widely sufficient for the diving system it is installed on,
because this system is rated for 300 m maximum. Also, the saturation procedures Normam 15 promoted in this
manual are limited to 350 m, the US navy procedures to 300 m, and there are currently no published tables
allowing deeper depths. As a conclusion dives to 500 m depth are to be considered experimental dives only.
Note that the commands of the system Divex are electro-mechanical while the system Lexmar is managed
through a computer. As a result, there is not a Human Machine Interface (HMI) where menus and alerts are
displayed with the system Divex. Nevertheless, audio and visual alarms are provided on the machine and in the
dive control.
Note that similarly to the compressor used with the system Lexmar, the 1st stage of the compressor Divex is to
be disconnected for dives below 150 metres depth.
● The reclaim control panel of the system Divex includes a module for the control of the compressor, which is not
installed on the Lexmar one where a computer controls the system through the Human Machine Interface (HMI)
which in on a separate console. The Last generation of Divex reclaim panel is organised as follows:

Booster panel:
It provides essential information and alarms
regarding the booster.
Note that the line “stand by” is in the prevision
of an optional second booster.

Oxygen panel:
Opposite to the panel from Lexmar, it is
installed at the top of the reclaim panel and the
manual enrichment of oxygen is not operated
from this panel, but from the “Make-up panel”.

Control panel:
Its 1st function is to control the back-pressure
regulator of the topside reprocessing unit. On
the system Lexmar, it is performed through the
regulator reference “Reg 2b” (see in the
drawings) which controls the BPR “BPR-1”
The 2nd function is to control the pressures in the
exhaust hose from the bell and the outlet of the
reclaim system and create a closed-loop when
the cross over valve is opened. On the system
Lexmar, it is done through the gauges “Gb8” &
“Gb7”, and the valve “Vb3”.

Make-up Panel:
It groups the commands for the “heliox make-up
control”, thus on the panel Lexmar, the function
of the gauges “Gb4” & “Gb6”, the valves
“Vb1” & “Vb2” and the regulator “Reg 1b”
(see on the corresponding drawings).
Also, it allows performing manual oxygen
injection and venting. On the Lexmar panel,
these operations are performed through the
valves “Vb8” & “Vb7”.

For a better comprehension of this system, it is essential to read the explanations from the manufacturer and check the
function of the items using a general drawing of the system which are available on the next pages.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 131 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- The general scheme below allows checking the functions of the elements described in the next pages. For this reason,
the references numbers of the commands of the reclaim panel are those used in this description.
Refrigeration module
Water outlet

Scru
Scru

bbe
bbe

r #2
r #1
Cold water inlet Volume tank
0.01 micron
From gas booster

To analysis
By-pass regulator

Solenoid valve Receivers

To gas booster

To inlet divers
Drain

St 2 St 1 Filter 0.01 micron

Gas booster
BPR

Oxygen supply
O2 storage
5 Oxygen panel
1 2 3 4
O2 Make-up

Reclaimed heliox to divers

6

Analyzers
3 4
2
10 BPR loader
1
11
Fresh heliox
Control panel
Exhaust divers

1 Make-up panel
3
2

4 5
Fresh heliox 6 7 Gas make-up

Bell
ge
ra
sto

Gas Panel
O2
He

¼ turn valve Low pressure gauge Float valve Flow switch Filter

Needle valve High pressure gauge Back Press. Reg Regulator Relief valve

Flow restriction One way valve Small ¼ turn valve Heat exchanger Flow meter

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 132 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Booster panel -
The booster panel provides the following commands:
1 - Power on indicator light
2 - Running indicator light
3 - Power loss indicator light
4 - Power loss sounder
5 - Power loss sounder mute
6 - Start push button switch
7 - Stop push button switch
8 - Fault indicator light
9 - Fault sounder
10 - Fault sounder mute
As indicated, a second set of controls can be added for an optional stand-by booster.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

- Oxygen panel -
Oxygen panel provides the automatic functions and elements described with the Lexmar system. The commands are the
following:
1 - O2 supply gauge – indicates the oxygen pressure available to the system. It corresponds to the valve “Gb1” of
the Lexmar system
2 - Oxygen shut-off valve – provides manual isolation of the oxygen supply. It corresponds to the valve “Bb5” of
the Lexmar system.
3 - O2 regulator – controls the oxygen pressure to the O 2 orifice. It corresponds to the regulator “reg 3b” of the
Lexmar system.
4 - The O2 solenoid – stops oxygen addition when gas flow through the system has stopped (Not visible).
5 - O2 outlet gauge – monitors the oxygen pressure available to the O 2 orifice. It corresponds to the gauge “Gb3”
of the Lexmar system.
6 - O2 orifice – multi-orifice restrictor which regulates flow of oxygen to the Reprocessing Unit (not visible).

(Not visible) 4 (Not visible) 6

1 2 3 5

- Control panel -
The control panel allows monitoring the system operations during a dive. The front panel layout is shown below. In
addition to the functions indicated previously, a flowmeter is installed on it to monitor the flow to the analysers. This
function does not exist on the Lexmar system where the gas to analyse is directly sent to the analysing panel.
This panel is composed of the following elements:
1 - Diver supply pressure gauge – indicates supply pressure available to the main umbilical. It corresponds to the
gauge “Gb7” of the Lexmar system.
2 - Sample flow meter – monitors the sample gas flow to an external gas analyser.
3 - Bell exhaust hose pressure gauge - indicates pressure in the main umbilical exhaust hose. It corresponds to the
gauge “Gb8” of the Lexmar system.
4 - BPR loader pressure gauge – indicates the pressure set on the (surface) BPR loader. It corresponds to the gauge
“Gb5” of the Lexmar system.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 133 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
6 - No flow sounder – sounds when gas flow stops.
7 - Fuse holder – contains 3 amp fuses for protection of the 12 volt DC power system.
8 - Power switch/flow light – when depressed, the 12 volt DC system is energised. When the green light is on, gas
is flowing through the system.
9 - Mute switch/no flow light – when the alarm switch is in the OUT position the alarm will sound if the gas flow
stops. When the red light is ON, gas is not flowing through the system.
10 - Supply exhaust cross connect valve – allows gas to flow directly from the supply to the exhaust side of the
system during initial pressurisation or when changing gas mixes. It corresponds to the valve “Vb3” of the
Lexmar system.
11 - The BPR loader regulator – regulates the pressure set on the Reprocessing Unit back pressure regulator. It
corresponds to the regulator “Reg 2b” of the Lexmar system.

1 2 3 4

6 11
8
10

9
5
7

- Make-up panel -
As indicated previously this panel provides the make-up gas section which is used to increase the working depth of the
system and replace the gas lost, and the manual oxygen enriching section which is used to rapidly add oxygen to the
system. As with the Lexmar system, this function must not be used during a dive.
Please remember that this gas comes from the O2 regulator on the oxygen panel (see in the general scheme).

7
1 2

6
4
5
9

1 - O2 supply gauge – indicates oxygen pressure available to the panel.

2 - O2 supply valve – provides manual shut-off of oxygen to the O2 enriching orifice. It corresponds to the valve
“Vb8” of the Lexmar system.
3 - Vent valve – is normally open to prevent accidental addition of oxygen into the system. It corresponds to the
valve “Vb7” of the Lexmar system.
4 - The HeO2 supply gauge – indicates the HeO2 pressure available to the make-up system. It corresponds to the
gauge “Gb4” of the Lexmar system.
5 - The HeO2 supply valve – provides manual shut-off control of HeO2 to the regulator. It corresponds to the
valve “Vb1” of the Lexmar system.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 134 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
6 - The HeO2 regulator – is a high flow, self venting regulator which controls the make-up gas pressure available
to the volume tank. It corresponds to the regulator “Reg 1b” of the Lexmar system.
7 - The HeO2 outlet gauge – indicates the pressure available to the volume tank. The reading on this gauge is the
minimum volume tank pressure desired. It corresponds to the gauge “Gb6” of the Lexmar system.
8 - The make-up gas flow light – indicates yellow when make-up gas is flowing into the volume tank.
9 - The make-up gas no flow light – indicates green when there is no flow through the make-up gas section.

- Oxygen content management tables:

The make-up panel is provided to allow the oxygen content of the breathing gas to be altered rapidly to a new diving
depth. As a result of this depth change, it may happen that the partial pressure of oxygen has to be changed. For this
reason, Divex provides tables that should be used to measure the time required to decrease or increase the oxygen
content to the desired level.
Note that helium dilution may be achieved by venting the system, partially or completely and re-pressurizing with the
appropriate gas mixture.
Table #1: For use with an Air or Electric Driven Gasmizer System. Using 3/4” supply & exhaust umbilicals length of 350 metres.

Partial pressure oxygen Breathing time Oxygen enriching time

Time to breathe the Time required to enrich oxygen content

Time to drop 0.7 PPO2 to 02 PPO2
same molecule of with a 40 bar oxygen supply pressure
with NO oxygen injection (1 diver)
gas @ 40 lpm through both the O2 injection systems

Depth 0.7 PPO2 0.2 PPO2 Time System total Time 0.25% 0.50% 0.75% 1.0% 1.25%

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 135 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Table #2: Note for use with an electric Gasmizer system (Based on results obtained at NUTEC, March 85) Using 3/4” supply &
exhaust umbilicals length - 500 metres.

Partial pressure oxygen Breathing time Oxygen enriching time

Time to breathe the Time required to enrich oxygen content

Time to drop 0.7 PPO2 to 02 PPO2
same molecule of with a 40 bar oxygen supply pressure
with NO oxygen injection (1 diver
gas @ 40 lpm through both the O2 injection systems

Depth 0.7 PPO2 0.2 PPO2 Time System total Time 0.25% 0.50% 0.75% 1.0% 1.25%

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 136 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Partial pressure oxygen Breathing time Oxygen enriching time

Time to breathe the Time required to enrich oxygen content

Time to drop 0.7 PPO2 to 02 PPO2
same molecule of with a 40 bar oxygen supply pressure
with NO oxygen injection (1 diver
gas @ 40 lpm through both the O2 injection systems

Depth 0.7 PPO2 0.2 PPO2 Time System total Time 0.25% 0.50% 0.75% 1.0% 1.25%

Note: Table intentionally limited to 360 metres (Normam-15 saturation procedures limited to 350 m)

- Regulator setting guidelines:

These tables have a similar function as those published by Lexmar and explained in point 2.3.12.7.
Divex provides a set for 1 diver and another one for two divers.
The elements indicated in these tables are the following:

No Elements indicated in the tables Description

1 Bell depth It is the depth of the bell at the bottom of the trunk

It is the Back Pressure Regulator loader on the “Gasmizer control console”.

2 BPR loader
It sets the main exhaust umbilical pressure.

It is the Make-up regulator on the “Make-up panel” of the “Gasmizer control

3 Make-up reg.
Console”. It sets the minimum “Volume tank” pressure

It is the oxygen regulator on the “Oxygen panel” of the “Gasmizer control

console”.
4 O2 reg.
This setting will provide 1.2 litres per minute oxygen flow.
Occasional adjustments maybe required depending on the diver work rate.

5 Diver(s) supply (bell) It is the divers supply pressure setting on the Bell diver supply regulator.

6 Bell BPR loader It is the bell BPR loader setting required for the Ultrajewel 601 Helmet.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 137 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Table 2: Regulator setting guidelines for 2 divers

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

Diver Bell Diver Bell

Bell BPR Make-up Bell BPR Make-up
O2 reg. supply BPR O2 reg. supply BPR
Depth loader Reg. Depth loader Reg.
(bell) loader (bell) loader

msw Bar Bar Bar Bar Msw msw Bar Bar Bar Bar Msw

30 1 18.6 39 14 -15 200 15.5 42 39 16 -21.5

35 1.4 19.3 39 14 -15 205 15.9 42.3 39 16 -21.8

40 1.8 20 39 14 -15 210 16.3 43 39 16 -22.1

45 2.2 20.7 39 14 -15 215 16.8 43.8 39 16 -22.4

50 2.6 21.4 39 14 -15 220 17.2 44.6 39 16 -22.7

55 3 22.1 39 14 -15 225 17.7 45.3 39 16 -23

60 3.3 22.7 39 14 -15 230 18.1 46.1 39 16 -23.3

65 3.7 23.4 39 14 -15 235 18.6 46.8 39 17 -23.6

70 4.1 24.1 39 14 -15 240 19 47.6 39 17 -23.8

75 4.5 24.8 39 14 -15 245 19.5 48.4 39 17 24.1

80 4.9 25.5 39 14 -15 250 20 49.1 39 17 -24.4

85 5.3 26.2 39 14 -15 255 20.4 49.9 39 17 -24.7

90 5.7 26.9 39 14 -15.2 260 20.7 50.7 39 17 -25

95 6.1 27.6 39 14 15.5 265 21.3 51.4 39 18 -25.3

100 6.5 28.2 39 14 15.8 270 21.7 52.2 39 18 -25.6

105 6.9 28.9 39 14 -16.1 275 22.2 52.9 39 18 -25.9

110 7.3 29.6 39 14 -16.3 280 22.6 53.7 39 18 -26.2

115 7.8 30.3 39 14 -16.6 285 23.1 54.5 39 18 -26.4

120 8.2 31 39 14 -16.9 290 23.5 55.2 39 18 -26.7

125 8.7 31.7 39 14 -17.2 295 24 56 39 18 -27

130 9.1 32.4 39 14 -17.5 300 24.5 56.8 39 19 -27.3

135 9.6 33.1 39 14 17.8 305 24.9 57.5 39.1 19 -27.6

140 10 33.7 39 14 -18.1 310 25.3 58.3 39.3 19 -27.9

145 10.5 34.4 39 14 -18.4 315 25.7 59 39.5 19 -28.2

150 11 35.1 39 14 -18.7 320 26.2 59.8 39.7 19 -28.5

155 11.4 35.8 39 14 18.9 325 26.7 60.6 40 19 -28.8

160 11.9 36.5 39 14 19.2 330 27.1 61.3 40.2 19 -29

165 12.3 37.2 39 15 -19.5 335 27.6 62.1 40.4 20 -29.3

170 12.7 37.9 39 15 -19.8 340 28 62.9 40.6 20 -29.6

175 13.2 38.6 39 15 -20.1 345 28.5 63.6 40.8 20 -29.9

180 13.6 39.2 39 15 -20.4 350 29 64.4 41 20 -30

185 14.1 39.9 39 15 -20.7 355 29.4 65.1 41.2 20 -30.1

190 14.6 40.6 39 15 -21 360 29.8 65.9 41.4 20 -30.2

195 15 41.3 39 15 -21.3 365 30.3 66.7 41.6 20 -30.3

Note: Table intentionally limited to 365 metres (Normam-15 saturation procedures limited to 350 m)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 138 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Note:
As a proof that this system has remained the same over the years, the comparison of the latest model proposed (on the left
side below) with the one produced in 1985 under the commercial brand “Gas Services” (on the right side below) shows
that the only noticeable difference is the booster panel that have been modified and was initially at the bottom of the unit.

2
1

1 - Booster panel: 3 - Control panel:

It is the only element that has been changed. This panel has not been modified.

2 - Oxygen panel: 4 - Make-up Panel:

There is no modification of this panel As with the other gas panels its commands and gauges
remain identical to the model sold in 1985.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 139 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.12 - Bell hot water machine

This point describes the machine that supplies hot water to the bell and the divers and is situated on the surface support. It
is the continuation of the bell heating system described in point 2.3.2.7 and of the hot water suits discussed in point 2.3.4.
As already said in these previous points, the temperature of the surface of the sea varies according to the location and the
season. However, the temperature at deep depths may fall below four degrees and does not vary according to the seasons.
This permanent temperature slightly changes with the latitudes and may be close to zero degrees Celsius near the poles.
Because the loss of heat is 24 times faster in water than in air, and that umbilicals have a limited isolation, the loss of
energy is considerable and increases with the deployed lengths. As a result, powerful machines are necessary to heat the
divers during the bell run that can be up to 8 hrs. These machines can be electrically or fuel-powered. Nevertheless, it
seems that the majority of modern in-built saturation systems are based on electrical devices.

1.1.12.1 - Recommendation IMCA:

IMCA D 022 point 10.4 “heating systems” highlights the following facts:
● There is a considerable temperature drop in the umbilical. This temperature drop depends on the temperature at
the machine, umbilical length, flow rate and sea temperature.
○A lower temperature and a higher flow rate can transport as much heat as a higher temperature and a
lower flow rate.
○A higher temperature transfers heat more effectively to the diver, but increases the risk of scalding and
hyperthermia which may happen if the water reaching the diver is at temperatures in excess of about
45°C. Also, if the temperature or flow rate is too low there is a risk of hypothermia.
● After some time in the water, the diver may not be able to assess his heating requirements adequately. Also,
hyperthermia and hypothermia are gradual processes and may not be noticed by the diver focusing on his task.
● Respiratory heat loss is particularly hard to detect because the body only has temperature sensors in the skin, not
in the lungs. Also, as already discussed in the presentation of the bell and helmet, the diver’s respiratory heat
loss increases with depth, as the density of the breathing gas increases, and the gas must be heated for dives
deeper than 150 msw (495 fsw).
● Note that according to DMAC 08 “Thermal stress in relation to diving”, the comfortable skin temperature in hot-
water suits was shown to be about 34°C (Presentation Dr Kuehn).
● The supply to the bellman must also be considered as too much heat to the divers may deprive the bell.

IMCA D 024 gives in section 8 the following guidelines regarding the way hot water machines should be organised:
● The equipment used to generate and supply the hot water to the diver must be suitable for the purpose

● There must be an alternative and independent source for supplying heat to the diver

● If electricity is required to generate heating or pump it to the diver then there must be a back-up system in the
event of primary failure (such as the vessel losing main power). This must be able to function for as long as it
takes to recover the diver(s) to safety.
● The diving supervisor must have a display showing the temperature of the water being supplied to the diver

● A high and low temperature alarm (audible and visible) must be fitted to alert the diving supervisor if pre-set
upper and lower limits are exceeded:
● All hot water machines need to have suitable provision of firefighting equipment in their vicinity. This may be
by means of permanent ship or platform provided equipment or by means of portable extinguishers etc. It must
be capable of dealing with any type or size of foreseeable fire hazard.
● If any hot water machines are situated in enclosed and unmanned areas then consideration should be given to
fitting a fire detection system. This should be particularly considered for oil-fired units.
IMCA also says that manufacturers usually publish charts or tables for the adjustment of the hot water machines they
sold. However, note that these documents may not be necessary with some last generation models.

1.1.12.2 - Description of a hot water machine

The machine used for this description is the electric water heater installed on UDS Lichtenstein and Picasso that was
fabricated by Comanex (http://www.comanex.fr/), a well known company based in Marseille (France).
Note that because these vessels have two bells, three hot water units are provided. Each machine is designed to deliver
heated seawater from 30ºC to 80ºC with a continuous flow up to 60 l/min (3.6 m³/hr) at a maximum pressure of 65 bar,
which is sufficient to supply one bell during extreme conditions. Thus, one unit is provided for each bell, and the third
one is to be online in the case of a breakdown.
The Machine is designed as follows:
● The unit is composed of an isolated water tank of 830 litres capacity where the water is heated using six heat
elements of 35 kW/h each (total = 210 kW/h). This tank allows regulation of the water temperature. Also, it
stores sufficient hot water to supply the diver for 20 min in the case of a failure of the heating elements, which
allows returning safely to the bell or starting the backup unit. A temperature controller automatically switches
the heating elements on or off, and a safety thermostat stops them in the case of overheating.
A 3-way valve mixes the hot water with cold sea water to adjust the selected temperature to the flow rate. The
water is then pressurized to the desired pressure through a booster pump specially designed to handle hot sea

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 140 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
water. As a result, this device automatically delivers the water at the selected temperature at all times, and the
charts used with the machines of the previous generation for the manual adjustment of flow rates according to
the number of heating banks activated are unnecessary with this last generation machine.
● Depending on the option selected by the owner, the machine can be controlled by a computer through a Human
Machine Interface (HMI) which is provided on its electrical enclosure and in the dive control, or manually
through electrical panels in the dive control and on the machine.

1 The photo on the side shows the

three hot water machines of UDS
Picasso. They are installed at the
direct proximity of the bell
reclaim system, above the dive
control.

Note the six heaters (see #1) at

the extremity of each machine,
and the motor of the pump with
the protection of its transmission
belt to the pump (see #2).
2

7 8 View of a hot water machine

4 6 above from the other side:
3 - Thermometer (#3)
16 - Pressure gauge (#4
18 - Regulation valve (#5)
5 - Regulation valve motor (#6)
- Thermostat (#7)
- Safety thermostat (#8)
- Pump (#9)
- Mixing manifold (#10)
17 - Flow controller (#11)
- Water inlet (#12)
9 10 - Delivery manifold with the
temperature sensor, and the
15 bypass regulator (#13)
- Hot water outlet (#14)
- Sea water filter (#15)
11 - Controls (#16)
14 - Alarms + emergency stop (#17)
13 - Heaters switches and their
12
corresponding lights (#18)

Control panels of the machines in the

dive control:
- On the left the system installed on the
Picasso, on the right the system
installed on Lichtenstein.
20
- The difference is that Picasso has a
classical system that is electrical (see
#19), and that Liechtenstein has a last
generation system that is managed
19 through computers which are
controlled through a HMI.
21
Note the two HMI which each one
corresponds to a machine (#19 and
#20). Also, note the emergency stop on
the side of each HMI.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 141 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The elements of the machine described previously are more detailed on the scheme below.
Note that fresh water can be delivered to the hot water machine. However, fresh water is not used during the dives but
mostly for the maintenance of the machine (Salt removal). Also, a Ultra-Violet (UV) light is added before the filter to
neutralize pathogen organisms.
Dump Fresh water inlet

LC
Electrical supply and machine control cabinet

THER

TS PS
THER

UV

Sea water inlet

Drain Drain
M
Mixing manifold

BP

Hot water delivery

Delivery manifold

TS PS

PS LC
Heating element Pressure bypass Pressure sensor Level controller

¼ turn valve Filter Pressure gauge M Electric motor

One way valve THER Thermostat BP Booster pump Temperature regulator

TS
Relief valve THER Safety thermostat Thermometer Temperature sensor

Vacuum relief valve Inlet pressure switch Flexible hose UV Ultra Violet (UV) lamps

Important and not indicated previously: The control cabinet has a main and a backup electrical supply.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 142 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Note regarding equipment that are specific to hot water machines:
● Vacuum relief valves
Relief valves used on diving systems are generally designed to protect pressure vessels and other items against
overpressure. Opposite to that, the function of a vacuum relief valve is to protect the tank from being in
depression and then being crushed by the atmospheric pressure. In case the container becomes depressurized,
this valve opens to equalize it with the surrounding pressure.
● Piston booster pumps
Hot water machines are fitted with piston booster pumps instead of centrifugal pumps or of another design for
following technical reasons:
○ Centrifugal pumps are commonly used in the marine and diving industries. These pumps are able to
deliver high flow rates and are appreciated for their simple design that consists of an impeller that is
rotated by a motor and is installed in a casing shaped in the form of a volute. The rotation of this
impeller draws the fluid into the housing and transfers its kinetic energy to the liquid, which is then
pushed to the discharge hose. However, due to their design, these pumps do not deliver high pressures or
several stages (pumps) are necessary to achieve it, their flow rate is dependent on the delivery pressure,
they may develop cavitation with warm water or low intake pressures, and they cannot auto prime if they
are not pre-filled, which is the reason they are generally in the lowest parts of the boat.
As a result, these pumps are ideal for supplying water to the machine, but not as a booster pump.

Water outlet Impeller

Impeller

Water inlet

Volute
Volute

○ A piston pump is designed to draw a liquid in a cylinder and compress it using a piston that moves up
and down. Inlet and outlet valves are alternatively open and close to fill the cylinder and release the
liquid when it is pressurized. Thus, the principle of work of piston pumps is similar to piston
compressors. Note that piston pumps can be simple or double acting. In the case of a double acting
pumps, the liquid is drawn in and compressed when the piston moves up and down (see below)
Outlet valve Outlet valve
Inlet valve (Opens when
Inlet valve (Opens when the piston
Cylinder the piston is fully up)
moves down)

Piston
Inlet valve Outlet valve
(Opens when (Opens when
the piston the piston is
moves up) fully down)

Single acting pump Double acting pump

The advantages of piston pumps are that they are less affected by variations of pressure than centrifugal
pumps, they can deliver high pressures, and they are not affected by the heat. It is the reason they are
also used with high-pressure water jets. Also, the pressure they deliver is not affected by their flow rate,
and some models are able to auto prime.
Their main inconvenience is that they deliver lesser flow rates than centrifugal pumps, and that this flow
is pulsating. To finish, and as already said, their maintenance costs are more expensive.
Piston pumps of the latest generation are equipped with a pulsation dampener. The system consists of a
cylinder where a membrane separates a gas from the liquid that flows into it. The gas behind the
membrane acts as a spring that flexes and absorbs the pulses, allowing a laminar flow downstream of the
dampener. Note that this system is similar to the load limiters described in point 2.3.11.7.
Also, to increase their durability, last generation pumps are fitted with ceramic pistons. The advantage of
this material is that it has a highest resistance to corrosion, wear, and heat.
● Thermostat
A thermostat is a device that controls the temperature of equipment by switching on or off the heating or cooling
elements. On water heating machines, they are used to regulate the heat transfer from the heating elements to
maintain the tank at the desired temperature.
These devices can be mechanical and electronic and can be programmable. They work on the principle of the
thermal expansion of solid materials. A lot of mechanical systems exploiting this principle can be found in the

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 143 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
form of strips that are coiled or not, bellows filled with gas, springs, etc. One of the simplest systems which are
commonly used with thermostats is the “bimetallic strip” system:
○ This mechanism consists of two pieces of different metals which have varying coefficients of expansion
and are connected to form a single blade. These strips are arranged to create a bridge that can open and
close in the electric circuit.
○ When these metal strips are cold, the bridge is established, allowing the electricity to flow and activate
the electrical elements (see below).
bimetallic strip
Fixation point
Contact point

Electrical flow
Electrical circuit established

○ Depending on time and its intensity, the electricity flowing through these small pieces of metal heats
them. As a result, the most conductive strip becomes hotter than the other, and because its expansion is
different that the expansion of the coldest one, it bends the bridge and breaks the electrical circuit. As a
result, the electrical elements are switched off.
Blade with the highest expansion coefficient

Contact point Fixation point

Electrical circuit interrupted Blade with the lowest expansion coefficient

○ When the 2 strips return cold the bridge is reestablished and the electrical elements are energized again.
Electronic thermostats use the same principle, but they are controlled through a device called “thermistor”. A
thermistor is a resistor that reacts on temperature. Thermistors are also used for electronic sensors. Depending
on the application two types of resistors can be used:
With a Negative Temperature Coefficient (NTC) thermistor, the resistance decreases when the temperature
increases. NTC type thermistors are commonly used in thermostats, temperature sensors, or inrush current
limiters.
With a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistor, the resistance increases when the temperature
increases. This type of thermistor is generally used as a fuse.
● Temperature sensors:
Temperature sensors measure temperature and may be used to actuate switches. They are classified into two
basic types: “Contact” and “non-contact” temperature sensors
○ “Contact temperature sensors” must be in physical contact with the object being sensed and use
conduction to monitor changes in temperature. They are the models commonly used with hot water
machines.
Alcohol or mercury thermometers are based on the expansion of a fluid that it is exposed to heat.
They consist of a liquid that is contained in a glass bulb which is connected to an expansion bulb by
a capillary. Both connected bulbs are sealed at the extremities of the device. The space above the
liquid is a mixture of nitrogen and the vapour of the liquid.
These thermometers are commonly used, and one unit is fitted on the tank of the Comanex hot water
machine described.
The “bimetallic strip” system described above for thermostats is also used to design thermometers.
In this case, the deformation of the blades, which is proportional to the heat, is used to display
temperatures.
Thermocouples and Resistance Temperature Detectors are typical examples of electrical-based
contact temperature sensors.
- A thermocouple is a device that creates electricity when heated. It is based on the thermoelectric
effect that states that a temperature difference in a circuit made of two different conductors creates
electricity and it does not with a circuit made of the same conductor.
The thermocouple consists of two wires made from different metals that are welded together at one
end, creating a junction called “hot Junction”. This junction is where the temperature is measured.
The other ends of the cables are connected in the “cold” junction which is maintained at a constant
reference temperature.
When the temperature of the “hot junction” change, it generates electricity through the loop. This
electrical flow can be read using a voltmeter which reading is then translated into temperature
using an appropriate formula.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 144 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Cold junction
Hot junction
Wire type A
Reading

Object to measure
Wire type B Wire type C (copper)
-A “resistance temperature detector” is a temperature sensor that contains a resistor that changes its
resistance value as its temperature changes. The temperature sensor is made from a material whose
resistance at various temperatures is documented and can be predicted. An electrical current is
transmitted through this material and its resistance is measured and converted to temperature
according to the resistance reading. Negative temperature coefficient (NTC) thermistors used for
temperature sensing are part of this family.
○ “Non-contact temperature sensors” detect the energy being transmitted from an organism, an object, a
liquid or a gas, in the form of infra-red radiation (IR). The process is based on the fact that an element
with a temperature above the absolute zero (-273.15°C = 0 Kelvin) emits an infrared radiation which is
proportional to its temperature and can be measured. An infrared measurement device is composed of
the following parts:
A lens that collects the emitted thermal radiation from a defined surface and a spectral filter.
A detector that converts this energy into an electronic signal
A correction system that is used to adjust the instrument according to the properties of the target.
A compensator that prevents the detector from factoring its own temperature into the output signal.
Object to measure Lens Optical diaphragm
Infra-red (IR) Spectral filter Corrector + compensator

Reading

Measuring distance Focal length Detector

● Heating elements:
Electrical diving hot water machines use immersed heating elements that heat the water of a tank as it is the
case with the Comanex machine taken as an example for this topic. The volume of this tank and the number
and the power of the elements vary according to the design of the device.
A typical heating element is a coil, ribbon or strip of wire that gives heat similarly as a filament lamp. Thus it
converts the electrical energy passing through it into heat that radiates out in all directions. The power of the
heating element depends on the size and the materials used for this resistance.
Heating elements are typically made of iron or nickel-based alloys. However, other alloys can be used. Nickel-
chromium is often used with immersed heating elements because this material has a high melting point
(1400ºC), a constant resistance, does not oxidize and does not expand too much when heated. This heating
element is protected from the water by a metallic sheath. Also, magnesium oxide powder is widely used as a
filling and isolator for electrical heating elements in contact with liquids. This material is employed because it
has high thermal conductivity and low electrical conductivity.
Heating element

Bank of heating elements

Resistance

Compacted magnesium oxide Metal sheath electrically isolated

● Ultraviolet (UV) rays:
Divers in saturation live in a closed environment with an oxygen partial pressure of 400 mbar and above that is
favorable for the proliferation of pathogens. Also, the duration of a saturation dive is up to six hours and long
exposures to hot water rinses and alter the superficial layers of the skin which become more permeable to
external agents like chemicals and micro-organisms. For these reasons, saturated divers are more vulnerable to

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 145 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
pathogens than surface orientated divers, and it is reasonable to ensure that pathogens that might have
contaminated the hot water circuit are neutralized upstream to the Diver.
Ultraviolet (UV) radiations are known to alter the nucleic acids (DNA & RNA) of microorganisms and
inactivate them. The effectiveness of this process is related to exposure time, lamp intensity and wavelength, as
well as the number and varieties of the pathogens in the water.
Most lamps found in UV systems emit a wavelength of 254 nanometres, which is considered the optimum
range for UV energy absorption by nucleic acids. The exposure time is reported in "microwatt-seconds per
square centimetre" in some countries. However it is said that most scientists and engineers use units such as
"millijoule per square centimetre" (mJ/cm2) or "joule per square metre" (J/m2). Studies have demonstrated that
nearly all organisms are neutralized at doses above to 12 mJ/cm2.
Ultraviolet lamps are generally installed in a pipe that is incorporated to the water circuit and is sufficiently
narrow to neutralize the pathogens passing through. The bulb is housed in a quartz sleeve that protects it from
the water. This pipe can be opened to change the bulb and being cleaned. Some installations use several units
installed in series.
Water inlet Enclosure Water outlet
Electrical wire

UV lamp in its quartz sleeve

Waterproof plug Watertight connector

- Advantages of computer-controlled machines:

As indicated previously, the hot water systems studied in this presentation can be controlled from the electrical cabinet
of the devices and from the dive control. However, the newest generation systems provide, more flexibility and more
information than those of the previous generation. That can be demonstrated by comparing the command panels that are
installed in the dive-control:
● The panel below, which is from the hot water machine of the previous generation is installed on UDS Picasso
and provides the following indications and alarms:
#1 - Emergency stop hot water machine #1
#2 - Emergency stop hot water machine #3
#3 - Indicator heaters on
#4 - Water level fault
#5 - Heaters fault
#6 - Indicates that the control cabinet is on emergency power (alarm)
#7 - Buzzer (audible alarm that switch on in the case of a fault)
#8 - Indicator pump at work
#9 - Alarm pump
#10 - Alarm insufficient flow
#11 - Outlet temperature display
#12 - Adjustment outlet temperature
#13 - Mute audible alarm

1 2

Not a part of the

hot water machine
control panel

3 6 8 11

7 13
4 5 9 10 12
○ With this system, the essential information is provided but it is not detailed.
○ The six 35 kW heaters are triggered and stopped at the same time by the controller, and the supervisor
cannot operate them one by one.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 146 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
○ It is true that it is possible to switch on or off some heating elements. However, in this case, the diving
supervisor must ask the dive technician to do it from the panel of the machine where the six separate
switches are installed (See below and #14 in the photo of the machine on the previous page).
○ As the commands of this machine are electrical, it is not possible to program-specific tasks that
automatically optimise the functions of the device.
● As already explained, with the latest generation machines controlled by computer the electrical commands on
the machine and in the dive control are replaced by Human Machine Interface (HMI) screens. These screens
provide identical information on the machine and in the dive control. However, the HMI of the machine is the
“master” and the one in the dive control the “slave”. For this reason, to activate the screen of the dive control,
the operator must enable it from the HMI installed on the electrical cabinet of the machine. In other words, the
HMI in the dive control is an extension of the HMI of the machine.

UDS Picasso: Previous generation Lichtenstein: New generation

Each HMI screen is designed as follows:
1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8

11
14 9

10

13
12
15
17 16 19

18
#1 - Command “off” HMI (similar to the on/off of a computer)
#2 - Selection “pre-heating panel” (that is part of the pre-dive process of the machine)
#3 - Selection “operation panel” (it is this panel, which is used during normal operations)
#4 - Selection “pump alone procedure panel” (provides water from an external hot water source).
#5 - Date and time
#6 - Status:
Booster pump (enabled or disabled)
Tank heating (enabled or disabled)
Preheating (not done or done)
Status electrical supply (control cabinet & power cabinet)
Sea water heater control used (”local” indicates that the control is done from the machine)
#7 - Delivery temperature setting
#8 - Tank temperature setting
#9 - Alarms temperature & water level tank
#10 - Temperature and pressure water tank
#11 - Heating elements (green when active and red if in fault)
#12 - Status & alarm pump (green when active and red if in fault)
#13 - Alarm inlet pressure
#14 - Status/alarm 3-way valve (hot & cold water mixing)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 147 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
#15 - Temperature et pressure sea water inlet
#16 - Transfer to remote command (activate the unit in the dive control)
#17 - Alarm mute command
#18 - Alarm message records (time & description)
#19 - Machine start & stop commands
With this system, the status of the main elements can be controlled at any moment. As a result, the
○

operator is informed of what is performed by the machine from the water inlet to the delivery.
The delivery temperature and the temperature of the tank, can be precisely set up
○

The heating elements can be selected automatically or on demand from the cabinet or the dive control
○

Alarm messages are documented and recorded

○

As a conclusion, computerized systems provide more flexibility and comfort in addition to the fact that the energy
necessary to heat the diver is more optimised.

- Additional temperature controls

Already indicated with the heating system of the bell in point 2.3.2.7, sensors may be installed in the bell and linked to
the dive control to alert the diving supervisor in the case of temperature, flow, or pressure change. That allows him to
immediately adjust the temperature of the hot water machine to the desired temperature (The system installed in
Lichtenstein and Picasso is designed by Fathom). However, these sensors provide the temperature supplied at bell level
and not at the end of the umbilical of the diver. For this reason, the supervisor is still obliged to extrapolate the needs of
the diver according to the length of umbilical deployed from the bell.
In less advanced bells, temperature and pressure readings can be performed by the bellman using the thermometer and
the pressure gauge installed on the hot water manifold. These readings are then reported to the diving supervisor.
Pressure gauge

Sensor diver 1

Sensor diver 2

Thermometer
Sensor bell (not visible)

1.1.12.3 - Settings
Before setting up the machine the necessary heat to provide, which is the addition of the desired temperature of the diver
and the heat loss from the surface to the end of the umbilical, must be calculated.
Some manufacturers provide tables such as the one below to roughly evaluate the heat loss.
Umbilical length (metres)
0 30 45 60 75 105 120 135 150 165 180 195 210 225 240 255 270 285 300
Temperature lost (Celsius degrees)

11

17

22

28

Approximate temperature loss through a 1/2” Synflex hose or equivalent, used with a surrounding seawater
temperature of 2 - 5ºC (source: Divex).

However, these tables are theoretical and cannot take into account the numerous variables that must be considered such
as those listed below:
● The temperature of the surface of the sea varies according to the latitude, the season, and the weather conditions
encountered. Also, note that rivers influence the temperature of the sea at the proximity of their mouth.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 148 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● The temperature of the sea is not affected by the weather conditions at deep depths but may vary according to
the latitude.
● Cold currents may be encountered at any depth and speed up heat loss due to the increased convection.

● The configuration of the hot water system has an influence on the heat loss:

○ Heat loss will be different depending on whether the hot water machine and the umbilical are inside the
vessel, or exposed to weather conditions.
○ The distance of the machine from the umbilical and the quality of isolation of the pipes also has an
influence on the heat loss.
○ Heat loss may also depend on the configuration of the umbilicals and the quality of the hoses used.
○ As indicated in IMCA D 022 the water flow through the umbilical also influences the heat loss.
Experienced technicians and supervisors familiar with the diving system and the areas where the boat operates can
establish heat loss charts more precise than those provided by manufacturers. Theoretical temperature loss can then be
calculated using these tables. Nevertheless, if these charts cannot be created, the team can refer to those from the
manufacturer.
Whatever table is used, some adjustments may be necessary when the bell arrives at depth. As indicated in the previous
point, the water temperature and pressure can be read in the bell, and these data should be used to refine the setting of the
machine. For these reasons, it is essential to set the machine in such a way that it will be available for supplying an
increased demand for heat if requested.
Regarding this point, note that the manufacturer of the machine used as support for this study recommends to preset the
tank 20ºC above the desired delivery temperature.
Note that the delivery temperature of the machine described is regulated by a motorised regulation valve that mixes hot
and cold water to adjust the final temperature from 30 ºC to 60 ºC with a flow of 60 l/min (see #5 & 6 in the photo). The
temperature setting can be done and modified on the machine or in the dive control. When this setting is done, the device
automatically adapts to deliver water at the temperature selected.
Similar systems can be found on other last-generation devices. However, a lot of old machines are not fitted with this
option, and in this case, the water mixing must be done manually according to tables provided by the manufacturer. Also,
the heating banks of a lot of modern, but less advanced machines, are not automatically switched on or off. In this case,
the team will have to use the charts previously described that indicate the ideal combination of heating elements to obtain
the desired temperature.
Note that, depending on the model, these machines generally require water supply at 2 to 3 bar minimum. Also, modern
machines have a pressure by-pass fitted on the delivery manifold to protect the pump in the case of a blocked
downstream flow. This valve can be set at the factory, or be adjusted according to the recommendations of the
manufacturer.
Pre heating and “pump alone” procedure:
Hot water machines must be pre-heated prior to launching the operations. The duration of this procedure depends on the
power of the device, the size of the tank to heat, the temperature of the seawater, and the desired delivered warmth.
This pre-heating phase can be speeded up or avoided with some machines that allow using the booster pump to transfer
the hot water from another source. This function, which is available with the machine described as an example, also
allows using this second source in the case of a breakdown of the heating system of the device.

1.1.12.4 - Oil-fired heaters

As mentioned previously, it seems that these machines become rare with built-in saturation systems and that they are
more encountered with portable systems and surface orientated diving systems.
Their general design is similar to electric hot water systems except that the electrical heaters are replaced by a separate oil
burner (see #1 in the photo) which heats freshwater or a fluid in a closed primary circuit that then heats the seawater
through an exchanger. The heated seawater is then stored in a tank (see #3). This process prevents salt deposits in the
seawater canalizations. A separate fuel reservoir supplies this oil burner (see #4).
Downstream from the tank, the delivery temperature is regulated by
the 3-way regulation valve, already described with the electrical units,
that mixes the hot and the cold water (see #5).
The water is then circulated to the bell through the piston booster 3 8
pump and the delivery manifold that is fitted with a temperature
sensor, and a bypass regulator as with electrically heated machines 2
(see #6). Also, note that the mixing manifold is similar to the one
described previously (see #7). 5
Modern units such as the one in the photo on the right are provided
with sensors that regulate the oil burner and allow the temperature
control of the hot water machine from its panel (see #8) or from the 1
dive control. Old generation units do not offer this option. As a result, 4
the supervisor can monitor the parameters but cannot adjust the
machine from the dive control and must ask the technician to do it. 6
7
The advantage of oil-fired heaters is that they can work with a limited
electrical supply. It is the main reason they are appreciated by teams
diving from vessels of opportunity or in cold and isolated areas.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 149 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
However, due to the fact they burn fuel, these machines have numerous inconveniences that must be addressed. For this
reason, IMCA D 024 / section 8, provides the following guidelines:
● Oil fired heaters must be located such that they present no risk to the dive system in the event of fire.

● Their position must also present no risk in terms of pollution or contamination of air supply intakes to the vessel
or any breathing air compressors.
● They must be fitted with a spill tray which drains off to a safe area (to reduce risk of fire or pollution)

● Where possible the fuel supply should be hard piped.

● The local tank filler should be fitted with a dead-mans handle or automatic shut off valve which closes when the
tank is full.
● The local tank must be fitted with an overflow system with a capacity greater than the filling supply system (i.e.
capable of allowing a rate of overflow greater than the filling rate)
● The overflow system must dump to a safe area.

● The fire fighting systems are those indicated in point 2.3.13.1.

Another problem with this type of machine is that they emit a naked flame. Even though this flame is in a controlled
space, that limits their use to areas that are not likely to a sudden gas release. Note that such conditions can be found on
some oilfields.

2.3.12.5 - Routine maintenance and inspection

As for every device that is part of the diving system, periodic maintenance and test of the hot water machine should be
carried out on a regular basis. IMCA D 024 says the following:

Visual external + Visual internal + Internal + external+

Items function test , external + leak test at leak test 1,5 max. Other
calibration max. Working pressure working pressure

Manufacturer
Fire fighting portable system 6 months
specifications
Manufacturer
Fire fighting fixed system 6 months 12 months
specifications
Manufacturer
Automatic fire detection 12 months
specifications
Manufacturer
Hot water system 6 months
specifications

Pipework and fittings 6 months 24 months

Gauges (calibration and test) 6 months

Electrical systems 6 months

Pressure vessels 6 months 15 months 5 years

Alarms 6 months

Relief valves 6 months 30 months

Manufacturers provide the following guidelines:

● The machine must be visually checked before starting it.

● The seawater filter must be checked and cleaned daily, or in the case of loss of pressure or flow.

● The oil level of pumps and motor outputs must be checked every day. This oil should be replaced according to
the recommendations of the manufacturer.
● The tension of the belt (electric motor - pump) must be checked every week, or in the case of unusual noise or
vibrations.
● The circuits and pump must be rinsed with fresh water after the bell run. In addition, in the event of an extended
shut-down period, the heating tank must also be cleaned with freshwater and drained.
● The zinc anodes fitted on the machine to prevent corrosion should be checked monthly.

● Because the failure of the automaton will prevent the use of the machine, the manufacturer of the system
described recommends storing a backup device with its program as a precaution.
● It may happen that some parts are more sensitive to wear than initially planned. That can be linked to numerous
reasons that may be difficult to investigate and not only the machine itself. In this case, it is prudent to increase
the frequency of checks and the renewal of these sensitive parts.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 150 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.12.6 - Overview of the heating system
As for other systems, this drawing allows a general view of the heating system of the bell and the divers.

Dump Fresh water inlet

LC

Electrical supply & control cabinet

THER

Surface unit THER

TS PS

UV

Drain Drain
M

Heating element
Mixing manifold

¼ turn valve

One way valve

BP
Relief valve
SP
Vacuum relief valve

Pressure bypass

Delivery manifold Sea water inlet

Filter
TS PS
THER Thermostat

THER Safety thermostat

ilical

Inlet pressure switch

u mb

Bell
Bell

PS
Pressure sensor
Emergency supply
Scrubber #1
Pressure gauge

Thermometer

TS
Temperature sensor
TS
TS
PS FS
PS Hot Water Diver #1
Temperature regulator FS
TS
FS
PS Hot Water Diver #2
M Electric motor

BP Booster pump

LC
Level controller

Flexible hose Scrubber #2

UV Ultra Violet (UV) lamps

Hot Water dump

Supply pump ( 3 bar) Hot Water Diver #3

SP

TS
FS
PS Press. - Tº- flow sensor

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 151 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 152 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.13 - Dive control

The dive control is the place from which the diving supervisor manages the diving operations. For this reason, it must be
organized to allow him full control of the dive and of the elements that may interfere with it and to provide him a
minimum of comfort. As a result, the commands of the systems previously described are grouped in with the
communications to the essential parts of the vessel. The dive controls are generally installed above the launching area or
at its level to allow a panoramic vision of the bell from the control console of the Launch And Recovery System (LARS),
which is usually in a nearby room or the same room as the dive control. Their access should be comfortable and safe.
IMCA D 024 provides precise guide-lines regarding the way a dive control should be organized that are followed by most
manufacturers.

1.1.13.1 - General design

IMCA says that the diving supervisor must be protected from weather and other elements (including dropped objects)
which may affect his concentration, and be kept suitably warm or cool.
Also, all gauges, displays, and relevant areas of control should be easily accessible and readable without difficulty. For
this reason, the dive control and its controls must be adequately illuminated for operations during the day and night. In
addition, the dive control should be suitably isolated from external noises that may disturb clear communications.
Usually, the dive controls of portable systems are organized in a dedicated 20 feet container which is protected from
extreme temperatures and noises from the deck by several layers of appropriate isolation foam or wool. Also, it is
warmed and cooled by relevant heating elements and air conditioning systems. However, due to their direct exposure to
the weather conditions and the activities on deck, these dive controls are less comfortable than those of built-in systems
that are installed in calm and weather protected areas of the vessel. It is the case of the dive control rooms of UDS
Lichtenstein and Picasso which are situated between the moon pools at shelter deck level, so is inside the boat and in an
area protected from external temperatures by appropriate isolating materials. As these vessels are provided with two bells,
two fully separate diving panels allow controlling the starboard side bell and the port side bell. In fact, there are two dive
controls grouped in one room (see below).

Moon pool Starboard side Moon pool Port side

LARS consoles Bell Port side

Bell Starboard side room
Bell hangar Bell hangar
Starboard side Port side

Umbilical winch
Dive control

Lifting wire winch

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 153 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Each dive control panel is organised as follows:
1. The gas panel is already described in point 2.3.12 “Gas reclaim system of the bell”.
As a reminder, the gas inlet panel is supplied with pre-mix supplies, gas reclaim make-up supply, and a supply
from the divers reclaim system.
Note that the pre-mix supplies and gas reclaim makeup are fed from the distribution panel in the gas storage
room situated on the tween deck, or from the gas storage on deck. The pre-mix supplies and gas reclaim make-
up supply are individually regulated to the required pressure for the diving operation.
There is a valve system which directs the incoming gasses to the bell blow down hose, and the divers breathing
hose in the bell’s umbilical. The reclaim system can also be charged from this panel. The valve system prevents
the reclaimed gas supply from being directed into the bell blow down hose.
2. The reclaim management panel, also described in point 2.3.12, allows the entire reclaim system to be monitored
and operated from the dive control. It receives gas from the main gas supply panel. An O2 supply is also
included for PPO2 control.
3. The gas analysis panel consists of the 4 x Carbon dioxide, 4 x Oxygen, analysers described in point 2.3.12.
Below this panel is a patch panel fitted with quick connectors. This allows the dive supervisor to connect
between the various supplies to individual analysers in order to provide calibration and zero gases, analyse the
diver breathing gas, the bell internal atmosphere, the reclaim supply and any of the pre-mix supplies.
4. The diving monitoring panel accommodates the electronic depth gauges of the divers, bell (internal and
external), bell trunk, and transfer lock. These gauges are readable from afar. Also, classical pneumo gauges are
installed to double check the depth of the bell and the divers.
Communication systems to the divers and the bell are in place. They are digital systems designed by Fathom
systems http://www.fathomsystems.co.uk/. Also, a diver monitoring system, designed by the same
manufacturer, groups all the essential information on a screen in the middle of the control panel. This system is
described with others in the next points.
Wired communications to the bridge, superintendent and client offices, and radios to contact the bridge, the
personnel on deck or a boat cruising in the vicinity during the diving operations are also installed.
A series of screens allows controlling the divers, the inside of the bell, the ROV, the position of the divers and of
the vessel, the transfer lock and the strategic points of the deck are in place.
Audible and visible alarms conforming to IMCA D 024 requirement are also installed.
5. Two side racks house the black boxes and video recording systems, the controls of the bell lights , The hot water
controls, the power supply controls of the bell and diving panels with Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), The
emergency sound powered phone, the through water communication system (wireless communications to the
bell), and the intercom interface in which all intercoms are connected.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 154 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.13.2 - Gas management panels
As already said, these panels control the distribution and the recycling of the gas to and from the bell. For a better
understanding, it is essential to have an overview of the gas distribution to and from the dive control to provide sufficient
breathing gas to the bell. It is the purpose of the scheme below.
Vent to gas bag reclaim chambers

Gas reclaim system Banks HeO2

Gas reclaim
volume tanks

HeO2 make up reclaim

To back pressure regulator pilot

HeO2 Supply - Bank #2

HeO2 Supply - Bank #1

HeO2 Supply - Bank #3

HeO2 Supply - Bank #4
O2 make-up
Analysis gas out

Gas reclaim divers

Gas reclaim divers

Depth Diver 3 & ext. bell
Depth Diver 2
Depth Diver 1
Depth internal bell Diving Panel
Analysis bell control room

O2 make-up supply
Bell pressurization/Exhaust
Divers gas reclaim exhaust
Depth Diver 3 & ext bell

Depth internal bell

Divers gas supply

Bellman supply

Vent analysis to deck

Depth Diver 2
Depth Diver 2

Vent to deck
Analysis bell

Zero gas supply

Banks O2
Span gas supply

Calibration
panel

Bell - on-board oxygen

Bell - on-board Heliox
Bell - on-board Heliox

Bell

HeO2 bank #1 HeO2 bank #2 HeO2 bank #3 O2 bank

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 155 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
As a complement of the scheme on the previous page, the drawing below, which is also displayed in point 2.3.12, shows
the interconnections between the gas supply and gas reclaim panels and the function of the various supply lines.

1 Gas panel

Standby Mix 1
diver
(60 bar) (220 bar)
Analysis Depth Analysis
gauges panel
Exhaust
bell

Analysis

Pressurization Mix 2
& exhaust bell
(60 bar) (220 bar)
Analysis

Divers
#1 & #2

Analysis

Mix 3
(60 bar) (220 bar)

Reclaim volume tank (55 bar)

2 Reclaim panel

To divers
return hose

HeO2 HeO2
Make up supply
(220 bar)

To BPR
pilot

To divers O2
Gas reclaim supply

Vent

Direction of flux Switch Needle valve Filter

Regulator Low pressure gauge Solenoid valve Relief valve

Back pressure regulator High pressure gauge ¼ turn valve One way valve

Flow restriction

Note that the gas analysis panel is already fully explained in point 2.3.12 and is not explained again here for this reason.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 156 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Regarding gas supplies, IMCA D 024 says that sufficient sources of gas of breathing quality must be available and
suitably arranged, so that if the online source to the diving bell or the diver fails an alternative source can be immediately
switched on line. This point is confirmed by other organizations such as NORSOK, which also says that a minimum of
two independent gas supplies is required to the panel supplying the main umbilical, and that the divers at work and the
stand-by diver must have their own dedicated primary gas supply and a separate secondary gas source immediately
available as a back-up.
Note that the diving systems taken as examples are widely beyond these minimum requirements as four distinct gas inlets
are connected to the gas panel and should be in service in addition to the onboard gas of the bell. Also, the gas
management panel of the bell described in point 2.3.2.7 is designed to open and isolate the supply lines according to the
requirements indicated above.
Regarding gauges, IMCA D 024 says that there must be enough suitable gauges so that the diving supervisor is aware of
the depth of the diving bell, each diver and of the supply pressures of each main and secondary breathing supply. These
gauges must be protected by pressure limiting devices to avoid over pressurization that may damage them. Note indicated
by IMCA, but very important, the gauges used with mixes containing more than 25% oxygen (22% with NORSOK) must
be oxygen compatible and cleaned. The gauges used in last generation systems can be analogical or digital.
● Analogical gauges are usually bourdon tubes. They consist of a tube
with the shape of an interrogation point and an oval cross-section which
Deformed state
is open at one end and closed at the other one. The gas is directed inside
this tube, and its pressure produces motion in the closed end of this tube,
Original state
which is attached to a lever and a small mechanism that moves a needle.
This needle indicates the pressure to read on a dedicated scale. The Bourdon tube
inconvenience of this system is that with the time the shape of the tube Gas inlet
slightly change and it must be recalibrated or replaced.
● Digital pressure gauges are devices that convert applied pressure into signals which are displayed numerically.
These gauges are based on various technologies that react to change in pressure such as the mechanical
deflection of a specific flexible element or a diaphragm, or strain-sensitive variable resistors that are used as
elements in resistance bridge circuits that perform measurements. Also, pistons, vibrating components, micro-
electromechanical systems, or thin-film can be used to sense changes in pressure.
Also, IMCA divides the gauges into two categories according to their function: Depth monitoring and and gas supplies
monitoring.
● Depth monitoring gauges are used for operational and decompression control. IMCA says that the scale of
analogical gauges must be appropriate to their usage and large enough to be read efficiently and accurately.
They should operate in the range of 25 to 75% of their full-scale deflection (see below). IMCA also says that
they must work in the 0 to 25% range if used for decompression and must have scale divisions of no more than
0.5 msw / 2 fsw if used for the final stages of decompression. However, the bell is not the place where
decompression is usually undertaken.
If digital gauges are used, their display must be large and clear enough to be read in all conditions and the unit
used must also be marked, they must display at least one decimal point (see below).

● Gas supply gauges are used for life support or as indicating gauges. IMCA says that they are not calibrated as
depth gauges and must be positioned to show the line pressure of sources coming into the panel and also of any
supplies leaving the panel. In addition, a system must be in place to ensure that incorrect readings cannot happen
in certain valve positions. Their scale divisions must be as for depth gauges above except that they may be much
smaller and with larger scale divisions. All gas supply gauges should be marked in the same unit system
(imperial or metric) and dual scale marking is accepted.
Supply gauges are usually provided with a flow restrictor that reduces the gas flow into a tiny gas trickle, so the
gas leak does not affect the diving operation in case a gauge is dislodged or damaged. This item must be
indicated on the panel schematic. Another system is to fit the gauges with an isolation valve providing that:
○ closing the valve does not interfere with the diver’s supply.
○ the handle on the valve clearly indicates whether it is open or closed.
○ the handle is secured in the open position using light wire, tape or similar such that it cannot be
inadvertently closed.
IMCA recommendations regarding valves are the same as those explained with the bell:
● The valves must be easy to operate, not be corroded, and their function must be clearly marked.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 157 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Also, when used with gas mixes containing more than 25% oxygen (NORSOK says 22%) valves and pipework
Should be cleaned for oxygen service. IMCA says that “oxygen cleaning” should be demonstrated using a
suitable procedure to ensure cleanliness, which is applied when any components are new or after there has been
any significant alteration. Not indicated by IMCA, but very important, the materials used with these supplies
must be oxygen compatible. This important requirement is explained at the beginning of this document. Also,
NORSOK and classification bodies recommend to minimize to use of flexible hoses.
IMCA says that due to the depths involved in saturation diving, the pressure of such gases will often require to
be above 15 bar, and that valves carrying oxygen and mixes containing more than 25% oxygen (22% with
NORSOK) at a pressure higher than 15 bar must not be quarter turn. The reasons of this rule are linked to the
possible ignition of oxygen that may destructs the gas circuit and injury or kill the divers. These effects are
already explained in point 2.3.2.6 and at the beginning of this document. Note that the American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM) recommends needle valves with a non-rotating stem.
● Exhaust pipework must not vent into an enclosed space. For this reason, they are generally directed to safe areas
on deck (see the general scheme). IMCA says that panel pressure relief valves and sampling for analysis do not
constitute exhaust pipework. However, they are usually directed outside the room as well to avoid any
unexpected oxygen concentration in the room.
● IMCA says that gas pipework, particularly in panels and at connection points, must be easily accessible for
maintenance and repair. It is the reason that most dive controls are designed with access to the back of panels. It
is the case of the systems used as support for this presentation which cabinets where the panels are housed can
be opened from the back. Also, note that these cabinets are separated from the wall of the room by a space of
approximately 70 centimetres that allows the technician to intervene comfortably.
Sp
ace
cab
ine
t -w
all
cm
70

Access to the back of the depth gauges,

combos, and communication panels

Back of the reclaim and analysis panels

Back of the gas supply panel

● Cross over valves are often installed on gas panels of saturation systems. IMCA says that cross-over valves
should either be fixed in one position (the handles may be removed to avoid accidental changes) or should
indicate very clearly which source they are connected to. In any event any gauge fitted with a cross-over valve
must indicate very clearly at all times exactly what it is reading. This is particularly important if one gauge can
show the depth of more than one diver.
Analysers used to control the gasses supplied to the bell and the panel in which they are grouped are already described in
point 2.3.12.4 “Control console unit”. Please, remember that regarding this point IMCA says the following:
● There must be an oxygen analyser with an audible and visible high and low alarm fitted in line on the
downstream gas supply to the divers
● If diver gas reclaim is being used, there must be a carbon dioxide analyser with audible and visible high level
alarm fitted to the down-stream side of the diver gas supply. The adjustment of gas sample flow rate must not
affect any other analyser fitted
● There must be a means by which the diving supervisor can monitor the bell atmosphere for oxygen and carbon
dioxide levels. This may be by a manual procedure carried out by the bellman or by a remote reading in dive
control
Note that a hydrocarbon analyser is often installed in the dive control. This item is optional with IMCA, which considers
that it should be installed following a risk assessment. However, it is mandatory with IOGP (international association of
oil & gas producers). As a result, contractors working for IOGP members must have this device permanently in place.
The reason for this stringent rule from IOGP is that the majority of hydrocarbons are found in crude oil and natural gas,
where decomposed organic matter provides an abundance of carbon and hydrogen. Hydrocarbons can be found near the
installation where the diving operations are organized and can enter the bell during the dive or soil the diving suits of the
divers and then be released in the bell atmosphere. Hydrocarbons can cause pneumonitis and systemic effects such as
central nervous system depression with respiratory and cardiac failure. Some other potential damages can be done to the
liver, kidneys, or bone marrow. The onset of these effects is usually rapid. Note that hydrocarbons and their effects are
described in the document “Diving accidents” of this manual.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 158 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
In appendix 8 “saturation diving“ of IOGP 411 “Diving recommended practices” it is indicated that the bell must be
equipped with a hydrocarbon analyzer similar to the “hypergas MK2” proposed by the company Analox. This analyzer
has a bell monitor which will detect the presence of vapoured hydrocarbons, and the topside repeater installed on the
diving panel. Both items have audible and visual alarms running before the anesthetic threshold is reached.

HYPER-GAS S
TOPSIDE REPEATER

Data

OK
output
Repeater in the
Analyser in the bell DANGER

SENSOR FAULT
Test
dive control
FLOW ALARM
BELL COMM'S ALARM

l oo k in g aft e r t h e a ir yo u b re at he

Vent
Sample inlet

In addition to the analysis of the gasses of the bell, the atmosphere of the dive control must be monitored for oxygen
content. The reason is that undetected leaks may happen and build a flammable atmosphere.
Note that this requirement, which is indicated in the latest version of IMCA D 024, was not in force when some old
generation systems had been built. As a result, ambiance oxygen analysers must be added in the dive control to comply
with this rule if they are not already installed. Such analysers are specifically designed for this purpose and must not be
confused with those used to monitor the bell atmosphere. Their concept may be based on those previously described in
point 2.3.12.4 which may be fitted with a fan that creates a regulated gas flow through the sensor to adapt them to this
function. However, a lot of systems are using electrochemical cells similar to those used with personal oxygen analysers
that need a very reduced gas flow.
Manufacturers recommend installing the air intake of such devices approximately 1 metre off the floor of the room. The
reason is that when it is not yet mixed with the atmosphere of the room, oxygen is heavier than air and tends to
concentrate on the lowest parts of the room.

1.1.13.3 - Communications, surveillance, recording, alarms, and electrical supplies

Communications, surveillance, and recording are of utmost importance during the diving operations. These elements can
be divided into two segments: Communication and supervision of the bell and communications with the bridge and other
vital parts of the vessel involved in the diving operation. Note that some elements are mandatory and some other are
optional with IMCA. However, these optional elements may be required by clients or other safety organizations. For this
reason, new saturation systems and Diving Support Vessels (DSV) are often fitted with them to avoid last-minute
installation and improve their efficiency and safety. They can be classified into the two tables below:
Communications and monitoring bell
Requirements from
No Description Requirements IMCA clients and other Additional information
organizations
There should be four wires into the
communication cable to allow the
Two way voice communications
installation of duplex communications.
1 divers (working divers & rescue Mandatory Mandatory
A duplex communication system enables
diver)
all parties connected to the system to
talk and listen at the same time.
Two way voice communications
2 Mandatory Mandatory
to the bellman

3 Sound powered phone Mandatory Mandatory

Through water communications

3 Mandatory Mandatory
(wireless comms)
According to NORSOK U100, all
chamber compartments, bells, habitats
and winch drums when necessary, shall
Mandatory be equipped with video monitoring
Video cameras outside and inside
5 Not indicated (NORSOK and most system, enabling the surface support
the bell
clients) crew to visually monitor the occupants
and operations.
Cameras are usually installed at the top,
bottom and inside the bell.
Mandatory According to NORSOK U100, a diver
6 Video cameras divers Not indicated (NORSOK and most must be monitored by an ROV or a 2nd
clients) diver camera.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 159 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Communications and monitoring bell (continuation)
Requirements from
No Description Requirements IMCA clients and other Additional information
organizations
Not mandatory
outside Norwegian
NORSOK says: “A diver monitoring
7 Diver Monitoring System Not indicated waters / Mandatory
system shall be provided for each diver”
with NORSOK and
some clients

Communications divers - Retention of records is 24 hours with

8 Mandatory Mandatory
supervisor recording IMCA and 48 hours with NORSOK

Mandatory with
9 Divers’ video camera recording Not indicated NORSOK and most Retention of records should be 48 hours
clients

Mandatory with NORSOK says that the diving contractor

10 Divers’ exposure data recording Not indicated NORSOK and some must have a system for recording the
clients divers exposure data

Communications, monitoring and alarms vessel

Requirements from
No Description Requirements IMCA clients and other Additional information
organizations
The primary link must be hard wire,
Hard wired communications to
1 Mandatory Mandatory immediately available and unable to be
and from the bridge (Intercom)
interrupted.
Wired secondary communications The secondary link can be hard wired,
2 Optional Optional
to and from the bridge or a dedicated radio channel.

Hard wired communications to These communications can be verbal if

3 and from the launch and recovery Mandatory Mandatory the console is in the same room as the
console (winch operator) supervisor.

Hard wired communications to Radio is no more accepted as main

4 Mandatory Mandatory
and from the crane (Intercom) communication with the crane
There should be a clear connection
between the competent person who
Hard wired communications to Mandatory with monitors the bell on deck and the LARS
5 bell trunk LARS deck (trunk Mandatory most clients and operator and the diving supervisor. Hard
connection) contractors wired communications have the
advantage to be dedicated and not
interrupted.
Hard wired communications to
6 Mandatory Mandatory
and from the ROVs (Intercom)
There should be a permanent and clear
connection between the the diving
Hard wired communications to Mandatory with
supervisor and the Life Support
7 and from the saturation control Mandatory most clients and
Technician (LST) on duty . Hard wired
room (Intercom) contractors
communications have the advantage to
be dedicated and not interrupted.
Secondary hard wired Saturation control rooms are often in
Mandatory with
communications to and from the Nothing indicated places where radio communications
8 most clients and
saturation control room (It can be the phone) cannot work. For this reason, secondary
contractors
(Intercom) communications should be hardwired
Hard wired communications to Surface orientated divers may be
Mandatory with
and from the surface orientated Mandatory involved to rescue the bell. Hard wired
9 most clients and
dive control room (if the dive communications have the advantage to
contractors
controls are separate) be dedicated and not interrupted.

Hard wired communications to Mandatory with

10 and from the survey control room Mandatory most clients and See above
(Intercom) contractors

Hard wired communications

Mandatory with
(Intercom) to and from Offshore Nothing indicated
11 most clients and See above
Installation Manager (OIM) (It can be the phone)
contractors
office

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 160 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Communications, monitoring and alarms vessel (continuation)
Requirements from
No Description Requirements IMCA clients and other Additional information
organizations
Hard wired communications Onboard new vessels, this office is
Optional Optional
12 (Intercom) to and from the generally connected to the dive control
(It can be the phone) (It can be the phone)
conference room by hard wired communications
Hard wired communications
Optional Optional
13 (Intercom) to and from the See above
(It can be the phone) (It can be the phone)
inspection office
Radio communications to boats
14 cruising within the vicinity of the Mandatory Mandatory
vessel

Radio communications to key Can be used as a 2nd means of

15 people or used as 2nd means of Mandatory Mandatory communication with areas that have
communication primary hard-wired communications
Phone (wired) communications to Optional Onboard new vessels, office and cabins
Mandatory with
16 the areas indicated before and (It can be the are generally connected to the dive
most clients
other parts of the vessel intercom) control by phone communications

17 Video signal from ROV Mandatory Mandatory The picture is the same as the pilot

Video signal from the launching

Cameras are not mandatory for the areas
18 and recovery areas and Mandatory Mandatory
the supervisor has a direct view
appropriate working areas
Surface orientated divers may be
Video signal from surface
Mandatory with involved to rescue the bell. For this
19 orientated dive control (if the dive Not indicated
most clients reason, the saturation supervisor must
controls are separate)
have a visual of what is carried on
A data screen indicating the position of
Data from survey control to Mandatory with
20 Not clearly indicated the vessel and the divers is common
combo screen. most clients
today and often mandatory.
A video screen showing the ongoing
work of the diver to the bridge is
Mandatory with mandatory with most clients. A similar
21 Video signals to bridge Not indicated
most clients screen from the ROV and the surface
orientated dive-control is also
compulsory.
A video screen showing the ongoing
work of the diver to the client office is
Mandatory with mandatory with most clients. A similar
22 Video signals to client office Not indicated
most clients screen from the ROV and the surface
orientated dive-control is also
compulsory.
The diving supervisor must be able to
23 DP alarms Mandatory Mandatory mute the alarm if it is disturbing the
communications.
Fire alarm, abandon ship, personnel
24 Vessel emergency alarms Mandatory Mandatory falling to the sea, gas release, etc.
This alarm can also be muted.

Electrical supplies to and from the dive control

Requirements from
No Description Requirements IMCA clients and other Additional information
organizations
Dive controls are generally supplied
with 220 volts AC, which is converted
Mandatory Mandatory from the main generator(s) that provide
Main electrical supply 220 volts
1 (but voltage not (but voltage not current of higher voltages for the needs
AC from generators
indicated) indicated) of the vessel.
Note that some variations of voltages
may be found such as 230 volts AC.
Mandatory Mandatory
Backup electrical supply 220
2 (but voltage not (but voltage not See above
volts AC from generators
indicated) indicated)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 161 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Electrical supplies to and from the dive control (continuation)
Requirements from
No Description Requirements IMCA clients and other Additional information
organizations
24 volts DC is generally converted from
the 220 volts AC, which is converted
from the main generator(s) that provide
current of higher voltages for the needs
Mandatory Mandatory of the vessel.
Main electrical supply 24 volts
3 (but voltage not (but voltage not This current is sent to the bell (24 Volts
DC from generators
indicated) indicated) DC is not dangerous) and used to supply
elements working with this type of
electrical supplies.
Note that some variations of voltages
may be found such as 36 & 26 volts DC.
Mandatory Mandatory
Backup electrical supply 24 volts
4 (but voltage not (but voltage not See above
DC from generators
indicated) indicated)
An UPS is a device that allows essential
devices to keep running for at least 30
minutes (IMCA) when the primary
power source is lost and the secondary
220 volts AC and 24 volts DC (or supply is not yet engaged.
relevant voltage) from Systems commonly supplied:
5 Mandatory Mandatory
Uninterruptible Power Supply - Communications systems not fitted
(UPS) with batteries
- Recording
- Emergency lights allowing to continue
to manage the dive .
- Video systems (optional with IMCA)
This current is used to supply the
elements of the bell for the reasons
indicated in point 3. The switches of of
helmet lights are in the electrical cabinet
The elements usually supplied are:
- Bell external cameras
- Bell internal camera
Electrical supply of Electrical supply of
- Bell lights
Current 24 volts DC to diving the bell is mandatory the bell is mandatory
6 - Divers lights
bell (voltage not (voltage not
- Divers cameras
specified) specified)
- Scrubbers
- Onboard batteries (charging)
- Through water communication
batteries
- Sensors monitoring system
- Hydrocarbon analyser (mandatory
IOGP)
This current usually supplies the
Current 220 or 110 volts AC to
7 Noting specified Nothing specified external lights only. The switches of
diving bell
these lights are in the electrical cabinet

Machineries controlled from the dive control

Requirements from
No Description Requirements IMCA clients and other Additional information
organizations

Refer to the full description in point

2..3.12
1 Bell reclaim system Mandatory Mandatory
An emergency stop allow to stop the
unit from the dive control.

Refer to the full description in point

2..3.13
2 Hot water machine divers #1 Mandatory Mandatory
An emergency stop allow to stop the
unit from the dive control.

3 Hot water machine divers #2 Mandatory Mandatory See above

This pump supplies the water to the hot

4 Water pump Nothing specified Nothing specified
water machines.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 162 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The scheme below, which is based on drawings of UDS Lichtenstein, represents the main electrical supplies and wired
communications of the dive control. Note that the communications and supplies to and from the bell and the client
representatives office are not in this scheme and are explained on the next pages.
Electrical supplies

Main Emergency Saturation

Aft bridge
generator(s) generator(s) control

OIM
Survey
office

Switchboard(s) Switchboard(s)
LARS Field engineer

Data to dive-control screen

Video signals diver 1 & 2
Vessel emergency alarms
console office

DP alarm system
LARS Conference
deck room
Supply Supply
transformer transformer
Moon pool Inspection
area office
220 volts

220 volts

Converter Converter Air dive Saturation dive

AC - DC AC - DC control control #2

Video air divers (optional)

24 volts 24 volts
Crane 1 Crane 2

DP alarm system
Vessel alarms ROV 1 ROV 2
● Diver recorder #1 control control
Video signals diver 1 & 2
● Diver recorder #2
● Black box Data to dive-control screen
1

2
1
2

3
Video air divers (optional)
PO 3 M
4
1 1
PO

Video signal from and to ROV #1 & #2

Intercom signals

Bell supplies & signals Bell reclaim

(See next drawing)
Electrical & Hot water
data cabinet Machine #2

UPS
Hot water
Machine #1
Telephone:
To all parts of the boat Water pump

● Diver 1 & 2 video signals Marine radio:

● Sensors monitoring system signals ● Boats at proximity VHF radio:
● Bell internal and external video signals ● Bridge ● Key personnel
● Transfer lock video signal
● Trunk video signal 000.0
● LARS video signal 000.0
● Deck video signals 000.0 000.0 000.0 000.0
● ROV video signals
● Air dive video signals Intercom
● Survey positioning screen signals
● Communications diver 1 & 2 signals
● Communications standby diver signals
● Communications bell signals
● Dedicated intercom signals(see above)

Control panel

Electrical supply only Signals only Electrical supply + signal

Intercom communications - vessel Phone communications Generators (main & backup)
Converter
Current distribution chain AC - DC Converter AC to DC 24 volts UPS Uninterruptible power supply
Bell reclaim
Elements energized & controlled Part of the vessel involved diving List & nature of signals

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 163 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The scheme below represents the main electrical supplies and wired communications to and from the bell.

Rack #1 Rack #2 Umbilical winch junction box

- Electrical supplies
● Bell external lights (6 units) [220 volts AC]
● Bell external cameras (2 units)
● Bell internal overhead lights (4 units)
● Bell internal camera
● Scrubbers (2 units)
Supplies ● Diver 1 helmet light
● Diver 1 helmet camera
1

2
1
2

3
● Diver 2 helmet light
PO
3

4
M 4
● Diver 2 helmet camera
1 1
PO
● Sensors monitoring system
● Hydrocarbons analyser (option - mandatory IOGP)
● Onboard batteries
● Through water communications batteries

- Signals
● Diver 1 video signals
● Diver 2 video signals
● Sensors monitoring system signals
● Bell external bottom camera video signals
● Bell external topside camera video signals
Signals ● Bell internal cameras video signals
● Sound powered phone
● Microphone & earphone Diver 1 signals
● Microphone & earphone Diver 1 signals
● Microphone & earphone standby diver signals
● Microphone & earphone bell signals
● Hydrocarbons analyser signals

Dive control - electrical & data cabinet

Slip ring junction box
Legends
External light (220 volts AC)

Bell umbilical
Light helmet (24 volts DC)
CAM Camera

Internal light Top side

Scrubber (3 units) CAM

Sound powered phone

Bell
batteries Batteries
Through
water comms Through water communications Bell external oil-filled junction box

Comms Communications helmets

Electrical supply only

Signals only (3 units) CAM Bell

(4 units)
Electrical supply + signal Bottom side Intercom CAM

Bell
Comms Bell internal junction box
batteries

St by diver Through
water comms
(2 units)

CAM

Comms
Divers (2 units)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 164 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Client representatives office:
Client representatives are in charge of monitoring the performance of the contractor, report the progress of the operations
and any incident, and help the contractor to achieve the planned task. However, they are not the persons the supervisor
refers to directly as their action should be done through the chain of command. So, in the case of diving operations, and
depending on the situation, through the Offshore Construction Manager (OIM), the diving superintendent, and the master
of the vessel.
Their office is usually fitted with:
● Video screens from the dive and ROV controls showing the ongoing work of the divers and the ROV. They are
mandatory with most clients.
● Positioning screen from the survey system that provides the position of the vessel, ROV, and divers.

● Dynamic Positioning (DP) alarms. They are not always in place but usually required by the clients.

● Phone communications with external and internal access. It is the minimum wired means of communication
asked. However, a lot of oil and gas producers request an additional intercom that allows contacting the critical
areas of the boat directly.
● A marine radio. It is in place in the client office of a lot of Diving Support Vessels (DSV), but not in all of them.

● UHF/VHF deck radios. They are commonly used. Sometimes the client provides his systems.

The diving monitoring panel allows the supervisor to monitor other parameters than the quality of the gas supplied to the
bell and is already described in point 2.3.14.1 “General design”. It groups the following elements:

19
5 4 3
6
2

11 9 7

12 10 8

15 16
13 14

17

18

1 - Depth bell trunk 2 - Depth transfer lock 3 - Internal depth bell

4 - External bell / diver 3 depth 5 - Depth diver 2 6 - Depth diver 1

7 - Camera Diver 1 8 - Camera diver 2 9 - Screen survey

10 - Divers monitoring system screen 11 - Screen bell trunk & transfer lock 12 - Screen bell (external & Internal)

13 - Communications bell / divers 14 - Communications bell / divers 15 - Marine radio

16 - VHF radio 17 - Intercom system 18 - Phone

19 - Master base-stations of wireless communications to divers (See more details in the next descriptions)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 165 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Notes:
● Divers monitoring system (see #10 on the previous page) is a specific electronic system which is optional with
IMCA, but mandatory inside some national waters. It is explained on the next pages.
● The communications bell/divers (see #13 & 14 on the previous page) are digital systems of the latest generation.
They are also explained on the following pages with more classical systems.
● Screens to monitor the transfer of the divers to and from the bell and the entry lock and the screen to monitor the
external and internal of the bell (see #11 & 12 on the previous page) are divided in four. Other screens are
above the gas panels and are used to control what happen on deck.

The electrical and data transfer cabinet groups some elements that cannot be integrated into the diving monitoring panel
and is also the interface of the electrical supplies and the various video and data signals. Depending on the complexity of
the system, it can be limited to one rack or be composed of several units where the following items can be found:

PORT RACK 2 PORT RACK 1

BUS 1 BUS 2 Gas reclaim SW pump BUS 3 BUS 4 BUS 5 BUS 6 BUS 7 BUS 8 BUS 9 BUS 10

1 1
Video splitter
7 Video splitter

Diver 1 & 2 recorder

BELL IN WATER
2
8
9 Intercom interface

Bell through water communications

10 3
Black-box divers

11
Alarm annunciator
1 1

2 2

3 3

4
4 4

1.99 1.99 5

6
5

6
CAMERA OVERRIDE CAMERA OVERRIDE POWER

12
DIVER 1 MUTE 7
LIM LIM 7
DIVER 1 DIVER 8 8
(200kΩ) (200kΩ)
9 9

1.99 1.99 10 10

LIGHT MUTE LIGHT MUTE POWER

DIVER 2

Dive control consumer Dive control consumer

5 LIGHT 1 & 2 SCRUBBER 1 INTERNAL

CAMERA
EXTERNAL
CAMERA
TOP
EXTERNAL
CAMERA
BOTTOM
ON BOARD
GAS
BELL EXT
LIGHTS 1 & 6
BELL EXT
LIGHTS 2 & 5
BELL EXT
LIGHTS 3 & 4 LIGHT 3 & 4 SCRUBBER 2 BATTERY
CHARG
5
Colour quad processor 1 Colour quad processor 2

13 Colour quad processor 3 3

Emergency stop

6
Bell sound
14 powered phone Fathom system
15

Fathom system 16

Central Processing Unit (Fathom) 17

Power Supply Unit (Fathom)

18

Uninterruptible Power supply (UPS)

19

1 - Electrical inlets 2 - Dynamic Positioning (DP) alarms 3 - Hot water machines interfaces

4 - Alarm annunciator 5 - Dive control consumer 6 - Emergency stop gas reclaim

7 - Video splitter 8 - Video recorder divers 9 - Intercom interface

10 - Through water communications 11 - Black-box comms divers 12 - Cameras and lights divers

13 - Colour quad processors 14 - Bell sound powered phone 15 - Intelligent acquisition unit *

16 - Intelligent Network Logger * 17 - Central Processing Unit * 18 - Power supply Unit Computer *

19 - Uninterruptible Power Supply * = Elements of the Divers Monitoring System (See the notes above)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 166 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Notes:
● The definition of an interface is a connection between two pieces of electrical or electronic equipment, or
between a person and a computer.
● The dive control panel incoming power supply arrangement groups several “BUS” at the top of the cabinet (see
#1). In a power system, a “BUS” is defined as the vertical line at which the several components of the power
system (generators, switchboards, transformers, etc.) are connected.
● DP alert status panel (see #2) is mandatory and provides visual and audio alarms. Note that last generation
systems are provided with a “blue status” when the bell is in the water
● Interfaces with hot water machines (see #3) are described in the relevant topic on the previous pages
● Alarm Annunciator Panel (see # 4) displays the status of alarm signals using lights and sound features.
● The dive control consumer (see #5) groups the several switches of the bell that are illuminated when activated.
● A video splitter (see #7) is a device that takes one signal from a video source and replicates it over multiple
monitors.
● Intercom interface (see #9) is a device in which all intercoms are connected and from which the signal emitted
from one unit is routed to the selected intercom.
● The cameras and lights of the divers are switched on and off from the dive control (see #12). A resistor allows
dimming the lights of the divers when needed.
● A “colour quad processor” (see #13) turns any monitor into a quad monitor with security features and allows to
connect up to four cameras and view all four locations simultaneously in real-time.
● An Intelligent Acquisition Unit (see # 15) is a system that acquires and processes measurement signals and
convert them for the control of the applications of the system. In the Divers Monitoring system, it collects data
from the various sensors and provides precise system diagnostics through the use of multiple status Light-
Emitting Diodes (LED ) which indicate the condition of input signals from sensors and the state of power
supplies and telemetry links.
● An intelligent network logger (see #16) is a device that collects the “messages” emitted by network devices,
operating systems, applications, and all manner of intelligent or programmable devices, and classify them in
such a way that they can be accurately stored and interpreted.
● The Central Processing Unit (CPU) of a computer is a piece of hardware that carries out the instructions of a
computer program (see #17). It performs the basic arithmetical, logical, and input/output operations of a
computer system.
● A Power Supply Unit (PSU) converts mains AC to low-voltage regulated DC power for the internal components
of a computer (see #18).
● Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) is described previously in the list of power supplies to the dive control.
Note that in addition to the devices described in the list, this model is also designed to supply the Divers
Monitoring System, which is mandatory in some national waters. Also, note that the batteries are housed in an
open-air area outside the room.

1.1.13.4 - Communications with divers breathing heliox

Heliox mixtures are used in saturation as they alleviate the effects of narcosis and dyspnea (respiratory difficulty) which
otherwise occur at depths deeper than 30 m with air.
However, the main disadvantage of such mixtures is that they increase the velocity of sounds and generate acoustic
impedances with are altering the speech emitted by the diver to such an extent that its intelligibility is heavily impaired.
Also, it has been established that trying to change the voice characteristics and slowing down the speech to adapt to the
new environment generally results in a less intelligible conversation. As a result, severe mistakes in comprehension may
occur that can lead to fatal errors. For these reasons, corrective systems have been created and implemented.
The first speech unscramblers were based on studies related to the general structure of vocal tracts and assumed that the
voice distortion depended mainly on the physical and chemical parameters of the breathing mixture. Thus, the distortion
of the voice in a helium-based atmosphere was supposed to be a linear process. As a result, these systems were not
perfect, and the supervisor needed to be familiar with deformed voices to understand the divers fully.
More detailed researches on the emitted frequencies and the structure of vocal tracts demonstrated that the intelligibility
of a conversation varies from one person to another and that the distortion of the voice of a diver breathing a helium-
based mix is a non-linear process. However, the first systems based on these studies were limited by the available
technologies and were not capable of independent manipulation of frequency bandwidths and amplitudes, which resulted
that the modification of one parameter impacted the others. These problems demonstrate that the comprehension of a
conversation also depends on the restitution of the bandwidth emitted by the equipment used, and thus, is directly linked
to the quality and the technical possibilities of the material used.
The latest generation of unscramblers makes a profit of the progress of the quality of the materials and of the computing
technologies that allow treating any problem separately without affecting the other parameters. However, despite the
tremendous improvement, the results are not yet 100% perfect and research to improve the next generations continue.
Helium speech unscramblers used in diving and saturation control rooms are generally designed to be inserted in the
control panel (see the previous point) with their electrical and communication wires connected to their back, thus not
visible and protected from shocks and inappropriate manipulation.
However, portable units are sometimes found with some small saturation systems. They are usually inserted in a

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 167 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
solid waterproof shell that is designed to protect their back from shocks and moistures. As a result, the communication
wires that link the divers to the dive control must be connected to their front panel with the microphone and the headset.
Also, the majority of portable models are based on systems designed for surface orientated air diving to which an
unscrambling device is added. The advantages of mobile devices are their robustness and the possibility to replace them,
in case of a breakdown, quickly. Also, most devices provide duplex communication allowing to speak and listen at the
same time. However, their unscrambling performances are inferior than those of panel mounted models initially designed
for heliox diving.

Portab
le commu
n icator

A lot of efficient portable communication systems designed for heliox are available on the market. However, it is
impossible to describe all of them in detail. It is the reason the AMCOM III heliox communicator, which is often seen in
dive controls (see above) and is a representative example of such equipment is described.
This model is a three diver communicator to which an optional unscrambler is fitted. It is designed with independent
volume controls of the microphone, and earphone of the diving supervisor and each diver. Also, a connection to the
tape/DVD/HDD recorder is available and can be connected to the video system. In addition, an external microphone with
a push to talk command and a headset can be installed, so the supervisor can isolate from external noises when needed.
This diving communicator is usually powered with Alternative Current (AC) 220 volts, but it is also fitted with an
internal battery and can also be supplied by an external 12 volts battery or transformer. The internal battery condition can
be checked through a light that is green when the battery is full and red when it is empty or out of order.
Note that the optional unscrambling system converts the analog audio information to digital, store these digital data, and
recombine them to reconstruct the audio without the frequency shift caused by the helium gas.
The model represented below has a “noise reduction” function which reduces background sounds such as hum and
whistling which are increased by the concentration of helium. Mode A is usually for shallow depths and mode B for
deeper depths. This function is completed by the “Depth adjustment” command which modifies the correction made by
the algorithm according to the depth. “Treble boost” control enhances the frequency from the microphone of the diver.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 168 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The portable communicator described above is based on reliable technologies that have evolved over the years and
continue to be updated by small touches. Nevertheless, it is based on a concept from the nineties in which the quality of
the sound is optimised using a series of potentiometers, and that limits the communications channels to those that are
visible on the facade of the device. As a result, any new channel requires the installation of a corresponding module or
the use of another unit.
Such inconvenience can be avoided with the latest generation of diver communications products that are based on a fully
digital signal processing and routing. These systems that make a profit of the most recent progress of the computing
industry can be configured for a wide range of applications ranging from a simple 3-channel stand-alone comms system
up to a complex multi-channel system spread over a number of separate interconnected units. The advantages and
possibilities provided by this new technology can be listed as follows:
● Improved audio performance which result from the fully digital audio processing (volume controls and channel
mixing / routing) and the improved quality of the audio codecs and low-noise analogue signal paths;
● Fully isolated diver interfaces;

● As a result of the improved initial audio performance, the helium speech unscramblers allow for more
intelligibility of conversations. Also, they are configurable on multiple channels.
● Their architecture provides more flexibility with the possibility to link multiple units together through a digital
fibre-optic network, allowing any channel to be accessible from any communications unit. That avoids the
installation of additional modules or units.
● Similarly to tablets and computers, there is the possibility for the supervisor to use a wireless communication
system, allowing him to be always in communication with the divers when moving in the dive control and
performing tasks such as adjusting the gas panels.
● Another advantage that is similar to those offered by last generation computers, tablets, and smartphones is that
the supervisor can store his preferred system settings and organize for automatic standby redundant operation for
mission-critical applications.
● Not normally used with bell management but in the saturation control room, a telephone interface allows the
divers dialling internal or external numbers from within chambers and to speak to others in an unscrambled
voice.
The drawing below, which shows the organization of the communications of the dive control that is taken as an example
in this presentation (refer to the photo of the monitoring panel), illustrates some of the possibilities offered by such new
systems. Note that in this example, the interconnections have been limited to the dive and saturation controls.
Audio interface ship system

Connection to saturation control

Audio interface ship system

Black box Black box

Dive control Dive control
Starboard side Port side

Unscrambled
Communicator
(See #13 in the photo)
Dive control Master Dive control
Starboard side Station port side
Unscrambled
(System Chassis)
Communicator
(See #14 in the photo)

Junction box Bell umbilical Junction box Junction box Bell umbilical

Junction box

Diver 1
Diver 2
Diver 3
Bellman

Bell

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 169 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
In addition to the extensive possibilities of interconnections, one crucial element to take into account with this new
generation of communicators is that their control is based on series of menus that are accessed from the touch screen of a
terminal that is linked to a master station which is installed in the dive control. That is a significant change compared with
the previous generation systems to which most supervisors are familiar. For this reason, a description of the devices that
are installed in the dive control taken as a reference is necessary. Note that the manufacturer of this system is Fathom.
As it can be seen in the scheme on the previous page, operation of the communicator, which is called “Digital Diver
Communication System (DDCS)” by the manufacturer, requires a “master user”, who is usually the diving supervisor,
who controls one or more comms units which link to the various “remote devices”. The remote devices can be a diver’s
helmet, the intercom of the bell, the saturation control room, or an outstation in a chamber if the system is configured for
this purpose.
The system is composed of a chassis that can be mounted in any suitable location and does not need to be installed in the
control panel, as is the case with classical communicator systems. This chassis is equipped with modules designed to
provide sufficient channels to perform the operational requirements expected such as:
- The power supply module that provides Alternative Current (AC) 90-265 volts to Direct Current (DC) 24 volts.
- The Master Controller module in with a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) performs all signal routing, switching, mixing,
level adjustment, multi-channel parallel helium speech unscrambling, breathing rate extraction, and filtering to reduce
breathing noise levels.
This module can be equipped with an optional fibre optic interface module that allows the audio channels to be
available on any connected unit.

Master controller module (rear) Master controller module with fibre optic interface (rear)
- A module provides galvanically isolated audio channels to the divers and the bellman in the bell, and if configured for,
to chamber outstations or other remote stations. Note that “galvanic isolation” is a principle of isolating the functional
sections of electrical systems to prevent current flow and provide safety from fault conditions in wired communication
between devices that regulate their electrical supply. Each channel is designed with a configurable interface supporting
various power and signalling technologies.
- A module provides input and output (I/O) channels that are used for connections of recording equipment, entertainment
systems, and third-party equipment. When configured for, such module can also support a telephone interface that
allows unscrambled telephone calls between the divers and any location in the vessel or onshore.
The modules described above are controlled from an “Operator Control Panel (OCP)” unit which can be installed in the
chassis or remotely on a separate user’s control stand. With the system taken as an example, the supervisor can use two
“Operator Control Panels” (see #13 & #14 in the photo of the control panel point 2.3.14.3).
Note that several versions of operator control panels are available and that the model in the dive control taken as an
example is the “version 3” (see the picture below).

7 4
2
Channel strip

3
Horizontal BUS

8 6

1 5

- This Operator Control Panel (OCP) is composed of a touch-screen display which is connected to an internal embedded
computer card that manages its functions (see #1 above). This touch-screen provides information about the connected
channels and the settings of the system. Also, it allows the user to adjust the setup and navigate through several
configuration pages.
The main display is the “communications matrix” that represents various channels which are arranged in vertical
columns that are identified by "tiles" and are divided into five horizontal rows or ‘buses’. Each horizontal “bus” is a
common connection that runs across all remote user channels in the vertical strips (In computing, a “bus” is a
communication system that transfers data between components inside a computer, or between computers). As a result,
when touching the “channel tile” on the desired bus, the user can select any channel of this particular bus.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 170 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Three “User controls” buttons are provided on the right side of each of the five horizontal buses (see #2). These buttons
provide the following functions:
● “Listen”, which illuminates green when it is pressed on, allows the supervisor to listen
to all the selected channels on the corresponding “bus”.
● The “Talk buttons” allow the supervisor talking on a latching mode to remote users
who are connected on the selected bus. These buttons illuminate blue when they are
pressed on. Also, if the “listen” button is not already pressed on, this function is
switched on automatically as it is assumed that the operator wants to receive an
answer.
● The “Press to Talk” buttons which are labeled “P.T.T.” are only functional when the
Supervisor is not in latched talk mode (the "talk button" is off, and the corresponding
blue light is not illuminated). In this condition, the supervisor can use the "Press to
Talk" button to call or answer to the user(s) connected through the corresponding bus.
- Situated further to the right of the touch-screen, the “data control wheel”, which is marked “Data Entry”, can be rotated
either clockwise or counterclockwise (see #3). It is a digital encoder knob that allows adjustments of parameters and the
selection of controls on the particular touch-screen display page selected.
- The power button of the unit is installed in the corner above the “data control wheel” (see #4). This button is illuminated
in green when the power is on.
- A Universal Serial Bus (USB) socket is visible below the “data entry wheel” (see #5). It allows connecting various
devices such as a keyboard, a mouse, or a memory stick for software updating or other maintenance activities.
- A loudspeaker which is protected by a stainless steel grille is on the left of the touch-screen (see #6). It can be used to
listen to the person the user is talking with without a headset or headphones. It is switched on or off via the relevant
configuration page in the software.
- A 3-pin XLR / ¼” mono jack combination socket is available at the top left of the panel and identified as “Pa Mic.
P.T.T” (see #7). This connector is used for either a panel microphone, such as a goose-neck microphone, or another
type of wired microphone, or a “press-to-talk” wired switch.
- In the corner below the “PANEL MIC. & P.T.T.” connector described above, there is a screw-locking type 7-pin DIN
socket that is labeled “Headset” (see #8), which is designed for connecting a wired headset to allow for private
communications. This connector also allows a remote “press to talk” switch to be used.
The rear of the “Operator Control Panel” allows noticing that this system is very different from the communicators of the
previous generation and is, in fact, a network of computers.

15

9
10 11 12 13 14 16
- Similarly to the modules in the System Chassis the “Operator Control Panel” is supplied with Direct Current (DC) 24
volts, through a power connector (see #9) that is linked to an external power supply module.
- The “Operator Control Panel” communicates with the modules of the System Chassis via a
dedicated RS232 serial link for its control functions (see#10). In computing systems,
Recommended Standard 232 (RS-232) refers to a standard for serial communication transmission
of data which defines the signals connecting between a data terminal equipment (DTE) such as a
computer terminal, and a data circuit-terminating equipment or data communication equipment
(DCE) such as modems, printers, computer mice, data storage, uninterruptible power supplies,
and other peripheral devices. RS232 serial link is found on any desktop.
- An Ethernet connector is provided to link to other Digital Diver Communication System (DDCS)
components and share information (see #11). In computing technology, “Ethernet” refers to a
system that connects computers together in a local area network or LAN. Dedicated cables
connect to boxes called hubs or switches. Several standards exist that allow multiple computers
to send data at any time. Such connection is commonly found on any desktop or laptop.
- In addition to the one provided on the facade, two utility Universal Serial Bus (USB) are provided on the rear panel (see
#12). USB is a standard that has been developed to simplify and improve the interface between personal computers and
peripheral devices. It establishes specifications for cables and connectors and protocols for connection, communication
and power supply between computers, peripheral devices and other computers.
- A D-sub (also called D-subminiature) connector is in place to provide power, audio interfaces and
telemetry signals to the wireless master station (see #13). Such connectors ensure correct
orientation and screen against electromagnetic interference.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 171 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- An XLR connector is in place to install an external microphone (see#14). XLR connectors are
circular electrical connectors primarily found on professional audio, video, and lighting
equipment. They are most commonly associated with balanced audio interconnection, including
digital audio, but are also used for lighting control, low-voltage power supplies, and other
applications.
- There is also a connection for an external speaker (see#15). Note that this connection is similar to those used with
communicators of the previous generation.
- Another D-sub connector is in place to provide additional power, audio interfaces and telemetry signals to the wireless
master station (see #16).
As indicated before, a 2.4 GHz wireless communication system that provides an audio link in both directions can be used
by the supervisor. Note that for several years, wireless systems at a frequency of 5 GHz are available. The differences
between the two frequencies are that 5 GHz band transmits data at a faster speed but provides less coverage. The more
reduced coverage is due that the fact that high frequencies cannot penetrate solid objects, such as walls and floors. That
explains the choice of many manufacturers of Wi-Fi controlled equipment not to use this frequency for their applications.
The supervisor connects to the system through a battery supplied hand-held or belt-worn unit which contains the wireless
interface in addition to a headphone and a microphone interface. The battery that powers the device can be refilled with a
phone USB charger. A keypad allows selecting one of three of the buses, and a press-to-talk button is used to communi-
cate with the selected Bus. A failsafe system informs the user in the event of a link failure. Additional wireless units can
be configured in the system for other users such as an example the person responsible for checking the bell on deck.
The wireless pack communicates with an interface module in the Operator Control Panel. It must, therefore, be paired
with it to operate correctly. Note that in the networking process, “pairing” is the procedure to set up a dedicated linkage
between devices, allowing them communicating together and not being affected by other communications. This process
allows multiple wireless packs to operate in the same area.
Note that the latest Operator Control Panel version of the system described can be fitted with an external base station
which is wired to it to improve the connection. These base stations are visible on the photo of the diving monitoring panel
of the dive control taken as an example in point 2.3.14.3 (see #19).

Hand-held unit belt-worn unit

The presentation above shows that the setting up and control of this new generation of communicators are very different
from those of more classical systems where the adjustment is made through a series of switches and potentiometers.
However, People familiar with computers and tablets will not be disturbed with such a new design.
As explained previously, this concept considers that the horizontal buses displayed on the touch screen are a common
connection that runs across all remote user channels in the vertical strips.
The user can select any channel of a particular bus to be connected through it. To do it, he touches the channel “tile” on
the desired bus. As a result, the channel’s tile on the bus is illuminated (see #17 &18 below), and the channel is connected
to the desired bus. To disconnect the channel from the bus, the user touches the illuminated tile again, and the tile returns
to the dark grey colour. There are 5 Buses on the model presented that are numbered from top to bottom on the “User
Controls” keypad which is directly on the right-hand side of the touchscreen (see #19). This keypad, which has been
previously described (see #2) allows to listen or listen and talk, depending on the button selected.

17

19
18

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 172 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
If the user wishes to talk to a location, he places the location’s channel on a bus (any bus will do), and then selects the
corresponding button(s) on the keypad at the right of the touch-screen to be connected on that bus.
The space on the matrix screen is limited to eight (8) strips at one time. Also, it is organized with four static strips that are
dedicated to the communications with the divers and are always visible. These essential strips are grouped to the right-
hand side of the screen (See #20 below).
To accommodate additional channels, the left-hand side section of the matrix screen is configured so that some channels
are not always visible (see #21 below). They can be accessed using two tiles in the topside left-hand side corner that
allow scrolling to the left and the right (see #22). To inform the user that there are active channels on a particular bus
which are hidden due to the scrolling function, a small “activity indicator” is displayed for the involved bus pointing in
the direction where an active channel is located (see #23 & 24).
27

22

26 24

23

25

21 Strips that can be hidden 20 Strips permanently displayed

Fifteen “local channels” are available on the “System chassis” that can be connected to the “Operator Control Panel” and
be visible on the matrix display if the corresponding modules are installed. Local channels are those limited to the
modules in the “System chassis”. They are connected through connectors which are specific to link several printed circuit
boards together within the computer system.
Also, if the hardware configuration of the system includes the fibre-optic interface modules described
previously, there is the possibility of communicating with remote stations in the ship through eight
additional channels. In this case, a total of twenty-three (23) channels strips that can be visualized on
the matrix display. Note that the remote fibre channels assigned to an “Operator Control Panel” have
an indication on their tile that shows their status and whether the station is active or offline.
As a result of the numerous possibilities of channels, the supervisor may request that the function or the location of each
channel is precisely indicated for a more suitable display and a better ergonomic. For this reason, the channel strips are
configurable and can be named by the technician.
Diving communicators must be fitted with a connection to the safety recording system (Black box).
Several channels can be configured for this purpose so that they are included in the "black-box"
recording output group. This function is used to collect a number of audio comms channels and send
them on a particular channel so that the audio can be recorded on a separate digital audio/video
recorder. The selection of which channels are recorded is set up by the technicians, and all channels
that are being recorded have a small red Light Emitting Diode (LED) on their title tile.
When the supervisor calls another station, both users can talk and listen at the same time without the need to press any
buttons. It is the default setting for conversation, which is based on an algorithm called “Round-Robin Mode” that uses
scheduling techniques to assign processing time slices, and transfer queued data packets. However, the supervisor can
modify this setting using the functions of the “user controls” keypad.
“Cross-talk mode” which is commonly used with classical communicators to allow the divers in the water to talk to each
other can be implemented. To do it, the channel strip tiles are merely selected onto the same bus.
Also, the supervisor can reduce the connection of one or several remote users to listen only. As an example, he wants the
bellman hearing to the divers in the water but does not want him intervening in their conversations. In this case, the tile
corresponding to the station is held pressed for a couple of seconds. As a result, it becomes yellow (amber) which
indicate the new status of the station (see # 25 in the drawing above). Also, the supervisor can talk to this station using
the “press to talk mode. In this case, the yellow tile becomes light blue when the supervisor is talking (see #26 in the
drawing above).
Note that there are theoretically no limits to the number of remote users connected on the same bus. However, the
manufacturer recommends limiting to two or three connection on a single bus as it can get quite confusing trying to
understand who is talking if there are too many stations connecting at once.
Adjusting the volume of the channels is performed through the touchscreen: The user press first the ‘title tile’ at the top

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 173 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
of the vertical channel strip he wants to adjust (see #27 in the drawing on the previous page). As a result, the display
changes to the channel adjustment page where two linear adjustment controls, also called “sliders”, for the volume of the
microphone and the speaker/headset are displayed with the name of the channel and the commands of the unscrambler.

28

The volume of each device can be adjusted using a finger on the touchscreen or using the data wheel (see #3 in the photo
of the OCP’s facade). In this case, the operator must touch the adjustment control of the device to be adjusted on the
touchscreen to select it. When an adjustment control is selected, a green light labeled “adjust” is illuminated (see #28
above). If the volume of the device is set to 0%, the symbol above the slider shows a red X, and a red indicator below the
label “mute” lights to note that the function is turned off (see #29 below).

29

30
31

The helium speech unscrambler (HSU) can also be turned on or off from this page (see #30 above) and the depth of the
diver adjusted to provide the best intelligibility (see #31 above). To do it, the operator presses the corresponding tiles on
the touchscreen.
When the adjustments are completed, the operator presses the tile “done” to close the page.
In addition to the settings of the several remote stations, the supervisor must adjust his microphone and speaker/headset
settings. To do it, he presses the “Settings” button on the matrix display to obtain the adjustment page. The page dis-
played is similar but provides more options than the one described above.

32

The sliders for the adjustment of the microphone and the earphone are similar to the one of the user channel described
previously. For this reason, they are adjusted using the same procedure.
However, four possible microphone inputs can be used (see #32 above):
● Wired headset

● Front panel microphone

● External panel microphone

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 174 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● Wireless belt-pack

They are selected by touching the relevant button on the touchscreen to provide the supervisor with the desired function-
ality. Nevertheless, only one microphone input can be selected at a time. As a result, choosing a new microphone via the
touch-screen turns off the previously selected input (see #33 below).
Note that each selected microphone input has its volume/gain setting that is displayed on the adjustment control of the
slider. Choosing a different microphone input causes the adjustment control to show the volume setting for the selected
microphone automatically. Thus, if these adjustments were previously satisfactory, the supervisor does not need to touch
them again.

33
34
35
Three possible speaker/ears outputs can be selected for use with the Operator Control Panel.
Wired headset
Front speaker
External panel speaker
They are selected to provide the desired functionality of the “Operator Control Panel”. The system allows multiple
outputs to be active together, and therefore the three buttons are used to toggle the particular output on and off. As there
are three possible speaker/ears outputs, a “Select volume adjust” button allows the user to select which of the outputs is
being adjusted (see #34 above). In this case, the chosen output “Volume Adjust” indicator is illuminated in green (see
#35 above).
Note that if the wireless belt-pack system is in use, the headphone output on the wireless belt-pack is
automatically enabled. However, such a device must be “paired” to the “Operator Control Panel” the 1st
time it is connected. To do it, the operator presses the button “wireless outstation”. When the device is
successfully paired, the red status indicator becomes green.
The supervisor can place the “Operator Control Panel” into standby mode by pressing the relevant but-
ton. In this case the station is powered down and disconnected as it is the case with every computer.
When the button is pressed, a confirmation pop-up asks the user for confirmation of this request.
As with the menu for external users, pressing the button “done” returns the display to the main matrix view.
Phone communications:
The “Digital Diver Communication System (DDCS)” can be configured to provide one or more telephone interface
channels through a module that connects to the host vessel phone system.
The purpose of the telephone system is to allow the supervisors or chamber occupants in saturation to talk to people such
as doctors, family members, company managers, and others. That can be done with the benefit of the helium speech
unscrambler if needed. Note that satellite phone communications in the dive and saturation controls are mandatory with
the majority of the IOGP members and other clients.
The telephone page is displayed when the title tile for the phone channel at the top of the vertical channel strip is pressed.
This page provides a dial pad that is used to compose the number to call and the sliders to adjust the volume of the
microphone and the speaker that are similar to those used with the other setting up pages.

Operating the telephone is similar to using any smartphone. The supervisor dials the number to call or selects it from the
list, and then presses the button labeled “call” to make the call. If the vessel telephone exchange requires an outside line,
the relevant digit is to be dialed first.
Depending on the reason for the call, the supervisor places the telephone channel on a bus in round-robin mode and
selects talk & listen to that bus. He can then talk to the party being called and handle the transfer to the diver in the
chamber if needed. In the case of a private conversation, the supervisor then deselects his channel from the bus once the
call is underway. The call can be ended by pressing the red button as with a smartphone.
The system also allows incoming calls to be handled. In this case, the system rings and flashes the channel title tile on the
matrix view. The supervisor can choose to answer or reject the call.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 175 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
When there are two identical “Digital Diver Communication Systems (DDCS)” operating side by side and interfacing to
the same group of users, but with only one system being used at a time, they can be configured to operate in dual
redundant mode. This function provides a backup system that can be used immediately in the event of a failure or
problem with the primary system.
In this case, the primary “Digital Diver Communication Systems (DDCS)” must be powered up and the backup DDCS in
standby mode. As a result, the unit standing by displays a “splash screen” that indicates its condition (see below).

If the Operator Control Panel (OCP) is a member of a redundant pair, this status is shown for both Operator Control
Panels in the redundant pair, allowing the user to check that the two units are operating correctly.
Note that when a redundant pair of Operator Control Panels is first powered up, the two units are into standby mode. For
this reason, the operator must press the button “Switch to duty mode” of only the OCP that is going to be used. When the
selected Operator Control Panel is placed into duty mode, the button “Switch to duty mode” is disabled on the screen of
the second unit as long as the selected Operator Control Panel is on duty (see the photos below). We can see that it is the
case with the photo of the control panel taken as an example in point 2.3.14.3.

Operator Control Panel standing by Operator Control Panel on duty

The manufacturer recommends that the duty and standby “Digital Diver Communication Systems’ are alternated on
successive dives / bell-runs to ensure that both systems are maintained fully functional and tested regularly.
To swap the Operator Control Panel on duty, the unit in service must first be placed into standby mode. Then the unit to
be used can be implemented. In the event of a fault or critical problem, it can be done by switching off the power to the
defective unit.
Note that the systems described above can also be configured to operate in concurrent mode. As a result, the two master
users can communicate with the same group of remote users at the same time (as an example, divers). In this case the
stations used are on “duty mode”
This configuration is commonly used when inspection activities are carried out by one diver who needs to be in close
communication with the inspection coordinator at the same time as the other diver continues to focus on other tasks under
the diving supervisor’s instructions. In this case, it is vital that the diving supervisor can monitor all the diving activities
he is responsible for, and this mode allows him doing it.
When the system is adjusted according to his preferences, the supervisor can save hi settings. The system provides twelve
profiles that can be stored in the machine or the possibility to save profiles on memory sticks that can be connected to the
USB port of the facade. To do it, the supervisor touches the button labeled “Profiles” on the matrix screen (see below)

Usuers
Profile 1

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 176 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The selection page that opens displays the twelve buttons of the profiles that can be saved (see below).

To save his profile, the supervisor presses the button he selects to store it and then presses the button labeled “Done” (see
above). Note that the stored profile should be recorded on a document that is easily visible to avoid another supervisor
from erasing it by accidentally.
If the supervisor prefers saving his profile on a memory stick, he inserts it into the USB slot of the active OCP and
presses the tile labeled “Save”. Then he follows the instruction provided by the machine. Note that the manufacturer says
that memory stick provided must be compatible, not contain other files, and be certified virus-free.
To load a profile, the supervisor inserts a relevant memory stick into the USB slot and presses the button labeled “Load”
(see above). As a result, the machine prompts him to confirm the operation. When the procedure is confirmed, the profile
settings saved on the USB stick replaces the settings for the currently active profile.
To conclude on diver communication systems:
The presentation above shows two types of communicators that are based on technologies that are not from the same
generation and coexist with their advantage and inconvenience. Both systems provide a Modified Rhyme Test (MRT)
score above 0.91 (see below), and so, can be used to manage a conversation in a pressurized heliox atmosphere.
Communication requirement MRT score

Exceptionally high intelligibility; separate syllables understood 0.97

Normally acceptable intelligibility; about 98 % of sentences correctly heard; single digits understood 0.91

Minimally acceptable intelligibility; limited standardized phrases understood; about 90% sentences
0.75
correctly heard (not acceptable for operational equipment).

It must be noticed that the fully digital system presented is one of the most advanced that can be found on the market, and
its MRT test scores 0.97 and above. Such last generation computing technology systems can replace all the
communication systems present in the dive control, as in addition to the communications from and to the divers, the
system is designed to replace the intercom and the phone and interact with them if necessary. Also, the latest
developments of the computing industry allow navigating through the menus as easily as with a smartphone. That enables
the supervisor to refine and save his selected settings, which is not possible with devices from the previous generation.
Nevertheless, we can see that this system is not exploited in full in the dive control taken as a reference in which a
separate intercom and a phone are provided for the communications outside the diving area (see #17 & #18 in the photo
of the control panel point 2.3.14.3). As a result, we can say that the choice of the features offered by communicator
systems depends not only on the design of the system but also on the working and safety philosophy of the diving system
owner.
Note that most manufacturers propose fully digital systems that give good results but often have less advanced functions
as those described here.

1.1.13.5 - Particularities of emergency communications to the bell

In point 2.3.14.3 it is indicated that A “sound powered phone” and “through water communications (wireless comms)”
are mandatory in the dive control. It is also indicated in point 2.3.2.7 “Bell internal equipment”. Both systems are located
in the “Electrical & data cabinet”.
- A sound-powered telephone is a communication device powered by the sound pressure of the voice of
the user rather than batteries or an electrical power source.
When the user speaks into the mouthpiece, the sound waves of his voice cause a diaphragm to vibrate.
The vibrations are transferred from the diaphragm through a drive rod to an armature centered in a
wire coil that generates an electrical current. The current then is transmitted to the earpiece of the
receiver, where the process is reversed. As a result, the person at the other end of the circuit hears the
sounds transmitted. Note that the earpiece and the mouthpiece can be used interchangeably. As a
result, the user can talk into the earpiece or hear through the mouthpiece, which allows continuing a
conversation if one of these two elements fails. Ringing is accomplished by a manually activated
magneto producing sufficient electrical power to operate a howler at the called station. This system is

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 177 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
robust and was already used during the 2nd war. However, the communications performed with this device are not
unscrambled. Thus, a conversation with divers in a pressurized heliox atmosphere will be difficult to understand.
Nevertheless, it can be used to transmit a message from the surface and verify that the divers are well.
- “Through water communications”, also called “Emergency bell communicator”, are wireless communications that must
be available to allow the supervisor to talk to the divers inside the bell when it is in the water and communications
through wired systems are no more possible.
The system operates by using high-frequency ultrasonic sound waves that are passed through the water between the bell
and the surface vessel. As an example, the set installed in the dive control taken as a reference, which is built by
Fathom, uses a frequency of 25kHz. This frequency is also used by other manufacturers. However, 30 to 35 kHz are
also very common frequencies.
The set installed in the bell is powered by the onboard electrical supply of the bell and a dedicated battery pack allowing
a conversation during approximately 5 hours. The set installed in the dive control is supplied through the
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). There is an output from the topside transceiver for a black-box recorder and also
for the helium speech unscrambler. Also, the unit that is in the bell of the system taken as an example has a pinger
function that repeatedly sends an “S.O.S.” morse code.
The emitter/receptor (antenna) is usually deployed in the water when the bell left the surface and is recovered when it is
close to the surface. The manufacturer says that the transmission range is about 3 Km, depending upon the underwater
conditions. It is true that previously reported experiences have shown that sometimes teams were obliged to deploy the
emitter very close of the bell.

Surface unit

Antenna deployment device

Surface
Antenna

Power supply from surface

Antenna

Internal power supply

Bell unit

Oil filled junction boxes &

pressure compensators

Note that the wireless communication systems used with scuba divers are based on the same principle.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 178 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.13.6 - Diver monitoring system
This system, which is also designed by Fathom in this example, is integrated into the dive control taken as a reference. It
is a computing tool that provides accurate information from the dive system through a dedicated monitor to the diving
supervisor (see #10 in the photo of the diving monitoring panel point 2.3.14.3). A similar display is available for the Life
Support Supervisor (LSS) . It is also designed to be easy to operate and maintain for both operations and maintenance
personnel. Such systems are gradually adopted in the diving industry as they allow for better controls of the operations
ongoing. Another reason for the implementation of these systems is that they are mandatory with NORSOK standard
U100 which says in point 7.11.3.3 that a diver monitoring system must be provided for each diver. As these standards are
to be applied in Norway, the company working in this country are mandatory to use such equipment.
The system is designed to display, record, and provide alarms for at least the following parameters:
● Divers depth (Diver 1 & 2 and standby Diver 3 in the bell).

● Bell internal depth.

● Bell external depth.

● Bell internal temperature.

● Divers’ breathing gas PO2 and ppm CO2.

● Sampled bell internal gas PO2 and ppm CO2.

● Hot water temperature supply to the bell measured at the surface

● Hot water supply flow rate supply to the bell measured at the surface

● Hot water temperature supply to each diver measured at the bell

● Duration of each bell-run.

● Duration of the “in-water time” of each diver.

● Depth of each chamber lock in the saturation system.

● For each chamber lock in the system:

○ PO2
○ ppm CO2
○ Temperature
○ humidity
NORSOK standards also request to display the temperature at the divers’ suit, and the hot water flows of the divers
measured at the bell in case of dives deeper than 200 m.
The manufacturer can also provide additional optional features such as:
● Personnel management features (tracking Divers, Dive supervisors, and LSSs/LSTs)

● Remote access for maintenance

● Secondary / system status alarms and alerts

● Provision of Diver’s Gas temperature, measured at the Diver.

● Scheduled data archiving and management

The Diver Monitoring System (DMS) is composed of networked computers which communicate with bespoke hardware
devices that acquire data from sensors fitted to various parts of the dive system. These sensors measure parameters such
as depths, temperatures, gas compositions, hot water flow, humidity, etc. The primary function of the system is to
measure these physical parameters and store the values on a computer disk file for archiving and subsequent analysis. In
addition to recording the sensor values, there are a number of computers that provide operators with real-time graphical
displays of the sensor values to assist in the management of diving operations.
- The “Data Server computer” is the “Master device” of the Diver Monitoring System. It receives signals from various
sensors over a dedicated Ethernet network via multiple interfaces, and stores these values to files on its hard disk drive.
One data file being created every hour. There are therefore 24 separate files recorded to disk every day, with their
filename identifying the start and end times. These saved files can be copied to CD/DVD ROM for off-line examination
and analysis, and long-term archival.
This computer is also fitted with the “master time-clock”, which is used to provide a universal system time for all
computers on the network. As a result, the various system timers that are used to measure the in water durations and
bell-run times, and provide relevant clock alarms thresholds are provided by this unit and synchronized with this clock.
The server also displays the data stored in real-time to the computers in the dive and saturation control rooms, and even
various utility or maintenance computers. That allows the supervisors and technicians managing the dives and the
maintenance of the saturation system to react proactively.
Also, the server records personnel movements such as the status and identity of the supervisors on duty and the identity
and location of the divers in the dive system.
- There is one Diver Monitoring System “Client computer” for each diving bell. It is situated in the control panel with a
display located in front of the supervisor. As the saturation system taken as a reference has two bells, two units are
installed in the dive control. These displays have been designed to be ergonomically correct and straightforward to read.
They provide a full range of relevant information, so the supervisor has an accurate view of the condition of the divers
and the dive system during the operations.
- Another Diver Monitoring System “Client computer” is located in the saturation control room. This computer runs an
application that displays a graphical representation of the chamber complex, which is overlaid with live real-time data
values for the Life Support Supervisor (LSS) and Technicians (LST). In addition to sensor parameters, the names of the

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 179 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
divers in each chamber lock or at work in the bell are indicated. For convenience, because the saturation control panel is
extensive, this computer is fitted with two monitors that provide the same information at opposite ends of the saturation
control panel. Note that the procedure for managing the information provided by this computer is not described here,
but in the chapter that explains the saturation control.
- The manufacturer also says that other “Client computers” (not indicated in the scheme below) can be used for
maintenance purposes.
The scheme below summarizes the computer network of the Diver Monitoring System.

Bell clamping system Gas supplies and reclaim

& transfer trunk system chambers
- Provide information to the Data - Provide information to the Data
Server computer Server computer

Hot water machines Gas supplies & reclaim

divers systems bells
- Provide information to the Data - Provide information to the Data
Server computer Server computer

Bells Chambers
- Provide information to the Data - Provide information to the Data
Server computer Server computer

Computer dive-control Computer dive-control

Portside Starboard side
- Live real time data display Data Server computer - Live real time data display
� Depth Divers 1 to 3 - Receives all the signals from the system � Depth Divers 1 to 3
� Internal & External Bell Depth sensors. � Internal & External Bell Depth
� In water & bell temperatures � In water & bell temperatures
� In-water timers divers 1 to 3 - Stores these sensor values to files on its � In-water timers divers 1 to 3
� Shift-time remaining divers hard disk drive. � Shift-time remaining divers
� Bell-run elapsed timer and bell-run - Provides data compression & � Bell-run elapsed timer and bell-run
� time remaining classification. � time remaining
� Hot water supply to bell at the � Hot water supply to bell at the
� surface: flow, temperature & - Allows data extraction for analysis. � surface: flow, temperature &
� pressure - Transmits sensor data to the various � pressure
� Bell atmosphere (O2 CO2, ppO2 “Client” computers on the system. � Bell atmosphere (O2 CO2, ppO2
� and Hydrocarbon concentration) � and Hydrocarbon concentration)
� Divers’ breathing gas: O2 & ppO2
- Master time-clock (reference time). � Divers’ breathing gas: O2 & ppO2
� Divers’ reclaim gas: O2 and ppO2 - System timers (divers, bell runs…). � Divers’ reclaim gas: O2 and ppO2
� Utility gas analyser: O2 and ppO2 - Personnel movement records. � Utility gas analyser: O2 and ppO2
� Status of the bell handling - Provides relevant alarms. � Status of the bell handling
� equipment (bell location, clamp and � equipment (bell location, clamp and
� interlock status etc.) � interlock status etc.)
� Bell trunk and Entry Lock depths � Bell trunk and Entry Lock depths
� Real-time trend display of diver and � Real-time trend display of diver and
bell depths � Bell depths

Computer
Saturation control
- Graphical representation system
- Live real time data display
� Depth chamber locks
� Depth bell(s) internal & external
� pressures
� Depth of the two SPHLs
� Depth bell trunks
� Depth Transfer Lock connecting
� trunk
� Depth SPHL access trunks
� Rate of change of depth chambers
� and SPHL
� Gas composition (O2, ppO2 and
� CO2) chambers
� Location of all divers in the system

The data from the bell that are collected are sent to the Master Unit through an “intelligent Acquisition Unit (iAU)” that
acts as the local interface. This unit, which is visible on the side of the bells of the system taken as a reference is a
stainless steel oil-filled enclosure that is pressure compensated to the ambient depth. An acrylic window on the front of
the unit allows technicians to diagnostic the status of each interface channel. This intelligent Acquisition Unit
communicates through a communication protocol that is designed to transmit signals over long distances to the intelligent

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 180 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
comms router (iCR) in the dive control, where the data from the bell sensors are converted and transferred to the server
across the network. Note that similar “intelligent Acquisition Units” are provided for the other components of the dive
system. However, as they are located at the surface, they do not require a pressure compensated oil-filled enclosure.

Pressure compensator

intelligent Acquisition Unit

A lot of sensors are permanently installed on the dive system to provide various signals to the central computer of the
Diver Monitoring System, giving immediate information on the physical parameters and conditions of interest.
Also, specific sensors, such as those designed for measuring the depth of the divers, give a substantial advantage.
These depth sensors that are installed at the far end of the excursion umbilicals are of similar technology as those used
with ROVs. They measure the divers’ depths at regular intervals and are as small as possible so as not to disturb the
divers. Their signals are sent to the local “intelligent Acquisition Unit’ and then to the central computer that interprets and
records the data coming from them and draws diving excursion curves in nearly real-time.
As a conclusion, this system offers significant advantages over the conventional pneumo gauges. It is also a helpful tool
to progress in the comprehension of saturation procedures when coupled with other information such as the temperature
at the diving suit, the composition of the gas breathed and its consumption. We can imagine that in the near future other
sensors, which technologies already exist for surface activities, may be adapted to inform the supervisor of the heart rate,
blood pressure, and other parameters in real-time.
Another specific sensor fitted to the bell that provides significant progress is the “intelligent Contents Gauge (iCG)”. This
unit contains four specially designed pressure transducers and a custom interface circuit that monitor the pressure of the
three HeO2 banks and the O2 in real-time and displays them on the monitor of the diving supervisor. With systems where
this device is not installed, such information can be provided by the bellman only.

Ø = 99 mm Ø = 26 mm

intelligent Contents Gauge (iCG) Depth sensor

The “real-time data” of the dive system are displayed as in the drawing underneath on a monitor that is on the control
panel. Their description allows a better understanding of the possibilities of the Diver Monitoring System.
2 1

3 7

5 6

22

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 181 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Note that the reference numbers of the elements described are those in the drawing on the previous page.
1) - Display screen title:
This title shows which bell, also called Submersible Decompression Chamber (SDC) is being viewed (see #1).
2) - Software revision (see #2 in the drawing on the previous page):
Details of the software revision status of the Dive Control display client. Clicking on the Fathom logo provides more
details.
3) - Diver depth displays (see #3 in the drawing on the previous page):
Three colour-coded digital display readouts show the current divers’ depth in metres
of seawater (MSW), with an accuracy of 0.1 MSW. The colour coding is green for
Diver 1, purple for Diver 2 and orange for Diver 3. When the diver’s depth signal is
either unavailable, in a fault condition or out with the preset alarm limits, the digital
display changes from its standard colour to red. A signal fault is represented as a row
of red dashes ( see on the side).
Normally, the signals for these readouts come from the divers’ depth transducers attached to the end of the excursion
umbilical (at the D-ring) and connected back to the “intelligent Acquisition Unit (IAU)” mounted on the outside of
the Bell. In this case, a small label under the depth reading shows "FROM iAU". If for some reason the intelligent
Acquisition Unit depth signal is unavailable, the system automatically reverts to the surface Pneumo depth transducer
reading. In this case, the depth value is displayed in red and the label beneath shows "FROM PNEUMO". When no
valid depth signal is available, the label shows "NO DEPTH".
Clicking on the depth display readout for a particular diver opens up the window of the depth alarm settings:

Using the up and down arrows and the buttons on this window allows the diving supervisor adjusting the diver’s
minimum and maximum depth alarm set-points.
When a Diver’s depth signal is in an alarm condition, this is initially presented as an ‘Active’ alarm, where the depth
value flashes red, and the audible alarm sounds every 10 seconds. The Supervisor can click the button "Accept
Alarm" on the alarm setting window to accept this alarm or click on the global "Accept Alarms" button (see #22 in
the drawing on the previous page).
4) - Diver location indicator (see #4 in the drawing on the previous page):
This status display panel shows the current location of the diver, either in the bell or in the Water. The information
displayed here comes from the pushbutton switches operated by the dive supervisor. This information is also stored
in the master data file on the server to allow dive profiles to be recorded for each dive.
5) - Diver in water timer display (see #5 in the drawing on the previous page):
A digital display is provided for each diver to show the duration that he has spent in the water (his in-water time).
This display is colour-coded the same as the depth displays and automatically increments every second so long as
the supervisor has pressed the pushbutton on the panel to indicate that the diver is actually in the water. When the
pushbutton is returned to the off state, the timer stops but continues to display the last total time figure.
This display indicates hours, minutes and seconds as follows: HH:MM:SS
The dive supervisor can reset the in-water accumulated time to zero via the timer configuration window (accessed by
clicking on the "in-water" or "time remaining" time displays).
The in-water timers have an alarm system which results in a red alarm indicated on the screen when the elapsed in-
water time exceeds the alarm threshold. Configuration of the alarm thresholds is made via the timer configuration
window.
6) - Diver shift-time remaining display (see #6 in the drawing on the previous page):
A digital display is provided for each diver to show the time remaining for his current operational shift. This display
is documented every second so long as the supervisor has pressed the pushbutton on the panel to indicate that the
diver is actually in the water. When the pushbutton is returned to the off (in Bell) state, the timer stops but continues
to display the last total time figure. This display also indicates hours, minutes and seconds (HH:MM:SS).
As with the in-water timer, the shift timers have an alarm system which results in a red alarm on the screen when the
shift time remaining is less than the alarm threshold. The alarm thresholds are configured though the timer
configuration window.
7) - Diver Identification (name and ID number) (see #7 in the drawing on the previous page):
Before starting the bell run, the Life Support Supervisor (LSS) logs the names, identification numbers(ID), and the
function (Diver 1, 2 or bell-man) of the divers transferred to the bell. As a result, their names and ID numbers
automatically appear in this display window.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 182 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

10 12

11

8) - Dive supervisor name, identification (ID) number, and login/log off button (see #8 above):
This display window shows the name and ID number of the dive supervisor currently on shift. The supervisor logs on
or off using the pushbutton
9) - Alarm indicator (see #9 above):
The alarm indicator is grey when all alarm conditions for a particular diver depth or bell depth are within limits and
healthy. The alarm indicator is illuminated red when a depth alarm condition for a diver or the Bell are outside the
boundaries, or the signal is faulty. The alarm indicator flashes until the supervisor accepts the alarm through the
Alarm Settings window.
10) - Bell Internal depth display (see #10 above):
This colour-coded digital display provides the bell internal depth in metres of seawater (MSW) with an accuracy of
10 centimetres. If this signal is faulty or unavailable, or the bell is outside the preset alarm limits, the digital display
changes from its standard yellow colour to red.
The signal for this readout comes from a depth transducer mounted external on the bell and connected to the bell
internal depth sample pipework. The signal from this transducer is connected back to the “intelligent Acquisition
Unit (IAU)” mounted on the outside of the Bell. In this case, a small label under the depth reading shows "FROM
iAU". If for some reasons the iAU depth signal is unavailable, the system automatically reverts to the surface
Pneumo depth transducer reading. In this case, the depth value is displayed in red and the label beneath shows
"FROM PNEUMO". When no valid depth signal is available, the label shows "NO DEPTH".
When the supervisor clicks on the display readout for the bell internal depth, he opens up the alarm settings
adjustment window (similar to the Diver depth alarm settings window described above)
11) - Bell internal temperature display (see #11 above):
This display indicates the current ambient temperature inside the diving dell in degrees Celsius. The sensor for this
display is mounted on the bell internal Diver Monitoring System junction box. Its signal is converted to run over
long distances with minimal signal losses (4 to 20 mA type) and connects through the penetrator to the “intelligent
Acquisition Unit (IAU)” on the outside of the Bell.
12) - Bell-run timer display (see #12 above):
Bell-run timers are started and stopped automatically from the status of the bell transfer trunk pressure sensor (a
difference in pressure between the trunk and the bell internal implies that the bell is locked off and bell-run timer
running). Three modes for the bell-run timer are available:
● Normal mode – where the timer is started and stopped automatically based on the “bell seal” status from the
trunk pressure sensor. This mode requires a manual reset of the timer at the start of each bell-run.
● Automatic reset mode – where the system works the same as in Normal Mode, except the bell-run timer is reset
to 0 when the bell locks back on to the trunk.
● Don’t Stop mode – where the bell-run timer continues to run even if the bell is locked back on to the trunk. This
mode is used where the bell is required to be returned to the system and then launched again all within a single
bell-run.
Bell door seal status is implied automatically from a pressure (depth) difference between bell internal and bell
external depth readings.
A digital display shows the total elapsed duration of the bell-run. This display is yellow colour-coded and
automatically increments every second whenever the bell-run timer is running. The bell-run timer is running when
one of the following sets of conditions are satisfied:

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 183 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● The bell is located on its mating trunk, and the bell internal depth is more than 5 metres sea water (MSW) deeper
than the trunk and there are one or more divers in the bell;
● The bell is not above the bell trunk and there are one or more divers in the bell;

● The Dive Supervisor has selected the “Don’t Stop” bell-run timer mode;

● There is a fault / logic error with any of the signals that are used to control the bell-run timer.

The dive supervisor can reset the accumulated bell-run time to zero at any time via the bell-run timer configuration
window (accessed by clicking on either the bell-run timer display or the bell-run time remaining display). This reset
function is provided automatically by the trunk pressure signal when the "Automatic Reset/ timer mode" is selected.
The Bell-run timer is fitted with an alarm, which triggers a red signal on the screen when the elapsed bell run time
exceeds the alarm threshold. The setup of the alarm thresholds is made via the bell run timer configuration window.

17

13

15 18 14

16

13) - Bell-run time remaining display (see #13 above):

This function displays the time remaining for the bell run ongoing to ensure that the maximum legal duration of the
bell run is not exceeded (strictly 8 hours seal to seal). This display is documented every second as long as the bell-run
timer is running. The target time and the alarm threshold are set using the relevant configuration window.
14) - Bell door seal status display (see #14 above):
This display indicates whether the Bell door is sealed. This tool compares the bell internal depth with the Bell
external depth to provide a status. When the difference of two depths is 3 metres of Seawater (MSW) and above, the
system assumes that the door of the bell is sealed. As a result, the indicator is illuminated in green.
15) - Bell External depth display (see #15 above):
This colour-coded digital display provides the bell external depth in metres of seawater (MSW) with an accuracy of
10 centimetres. If this signal is faulty or unavailable, or the bell is outside the preset alarm limits, the digital display
changes from its standard blue colour to red.
The signal for this readout comes from a depth transducer mounted inside the “intelligent Acquisition Unit (IAU)”
on the outside of the bell. In this case, a small label under the depth reading shows "FROM iAU". If for some reasons
the iAU depth signal is unavailable, the label shows “NO DEPTH” (there is no bell external Pneumo signal to use).
When the supervisor clicks on the display readout for the bell external depth, he opens up the settings adjustment
window (similar to the Diver depth alarm settings window described above).
16) - Bell external temperature display (see #16 above):
This display indicates the ambient temperature outside the diving bell in degrees Celsius. The sensor for this display
is mounted on the bell “intelligent Acquisition Unit”.
17) - Vessel time display (see #17 above):
This function shows the time on the bridge of the vessel which is the reference for all vessel operations. The vessel
time is synchronized to the real-time server clock of the Diver Monitoring System. If for some reasons, the server is
unavailable, this display can be used as reference time. However, it is not synchronized, and for this reason, it is
displayed with red numbers.
18) - Bell run ID display (see #17 above):
This window shows the dive log reference number that should match the
one used for the dive records hand-filled by the supervisor. This tool
allows correlating the recorded data against the manual dive logs. Clicking
on this display opens a small pop-up window that is used to set the dive
log number.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 184 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

23
19
20
24
21
22

19) - System Alarm Indicator (see #19 above):

This indicator panel is illuminated in red and flashes whenever there are one or more active alarms on the system, or
is illuminated steady red when there are one or more accepted alarms (and no active alarms).
20) - Status display (see #20 above):
This window provides diagnostic information and status of the Diver Monitoring System. As a result, the alarms are
also documented in this window. Over time, this list of status messages increases and the oldest logs will not be
visible in the window. For this reason, the previous messages can be accessed using the vertical scroll bar at the right-
hand side of the window.
21) - Bell “Hydrocarbon analyser” display (see #21 above):
This alarm status panel indicates the hydrocarbon concentration inside the bell and illuminates red when the alarm is
active. This function uses the data from the “Analox hypergas MK2” analyzer which are updated every 10 seconds. It
is merely a repeat of the sensor values displayed on the relevant display inside the bell.
Note that the alarm threshold is adjustable which allows setting a low alarm limit for an early warning in case of
hydrocarbons building up in the bell.
22) - Accept all Alarms Button (see #22 above):
This button allows the Supervisor to accept all active alarms at once. Of
course, he must be sure that he understands them, as this button does not
require that each alarm condition be viewed prior to accepting. The
System status window (see #20 above) does, however, provide a list of
active alarms to assist in this operation. The system requests confirmation
from the supervisor that he acknowledges his responsibility for accepting
all alerts at once with a relevant dialog box.
23) - Hot-water supply to the Bell displays (see #23 above):
Three digital readouts provide details of the hot water supply to the bell
(temperature, flowrate and pressure), measured at the surface. The
relevant sensors are located at the hot-water machines and interfaced via
the “intelligent Network Logger (INL)”. The hot-water flow is measured
by an ultrasonic non-invasive flowmeter attached to the outside of the
supply pipework of each bell. These sensors connect to the “Intelligent
Network Logger” in the dive control using a signal that is designed to run
over long distances with minimal losses (4 to 20 mA type).
The supervisor can adjust the alarm of each hot-water sensor. That is
performed by clicking on the particular digital display. As with other
warnings, the test in the window flashes red when an alarm is activated or
is steady red when it is accepted.
24) - Diver Breathing Gas composition displays (see #23 above):
This window shows the composition of the breathing and reclaimed gasses before they enter the gas hoses of the
main umbilical of the bell. The PO2 and ppm CO2 values are generated by the gas analysers in the dive control that
are connected to the “intelligent Network Logger (INL)”. These values are measured at surface-equivalent pressure
and therefore are based on 1-atmosphere concentrations.
Note that the system displays the values of the deepest Diver. The reason for using the most profound depth is to
indicate the most critical condition.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 185 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

25 26 28

30

29
27
25) - Bell atmosphere composition display (see #25 above):
These displays provide details of the composition of the atmosphere of the Bell (internal). The partial pressure O2
and parts per million CO2 values are those from the gas analysers in the dive control that are transmitted to and read
by the “intelligent Network Logger (INL)”. These values are measured at surface-equivalent pressure and therefore,
are based on 1-atmosphere concentrations.
The ppO2 is calculated from the surface-referenced partial pressure O2 sample reading and the bell internal depth
(pressure) reading from the “intelligent Acquisition Unit (IAU)” sensor.
26) - Utility analyser display (see #26 above):
This window provides the PO2 and ppm CO2 values that are generated by the utility gas analyser in the dive control
whose Ethernet data is transmitted to the server of the Diver Monitoring System. These values are measured at
surface-equivalent pressure, and therefore are based on 1-atmosphere concentrations.
The ppO2 is calculated from the surface-referenced partial pressure O2 sample reading and the bell internal depth
(pressure) reading from the “intelligent Acquisition Unit (IAU)” sensor.
27) - Utility analyser sample selection display (see #27 above):
The online sample to the Utility Analyser (one from six possible inputs) is shown, and the supervisor can select this
online sample. An auto-scan function is provided that cross-checks the primary gas analyzer readings against the
Utility analyzer automatically and is enabled with the check-box.
28) - Bell Onboard Gas displays (see #28 above):
These displays show the pressure in the bell onboard gas banks (HeO2 and O2). The signals for these displays come
from the “Intelligent Content Gauges (ICG)”, that has been previously described, and is mounted on the outside of
the bell and send the data from the sensors to the “intelligent Acquisition Unit”.
29) - Shut Down pushbutton (see #29 above):
This button is used to shut down the dive control client display screen. A prompt dialog appears to check that this
action is required before the application is shut down.
30) - Bell position, clamp and trunk status displays (see #30 above):
This area of the display screen shows the status of the clamp that secures the bell to the trunk when it is under the
control of the diving supervisor. This is done using several mimic drawings. Note that when the bell is not above the
trunk, there is no mimic picture of the bell shown. The display indicates the four possible states below:
CLAMP
INTERLOCKED

Clamp Clamp between Clamp Clamp fully closed

fully open Open & closed fully closed & interlocked
A digital indicator for the depth (pressure) of the bell mating trunk is visible below the drawing of the clamp. This
value comes from the pressure transducer located in the dive control.
In addition, there is another digital indicator for the depth of transfer lock below the the trunk depth display. This
value comes from the pressure transducer located in the saturation control.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 186 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

39

40
37 33

38 32
36

34

35

31
31) - Server status indicator (see #31 above):
This indicator is illuminated green when the data server computer runs correctly and provides the dive control client
display with correct information. If the server is down or unavailable, this indicator illuminates red.
32) - Depth profile display (see #32 above):
This large display shows a real-time plot of the five key depth signals against time. It is updated automatically and
provides a graph of depth (on the Y-axis) against time (on the X-axis), and uses colour-coded traces to represent each
of the following depth sensor signals:
● Diver 1 Depth (Green)

● Diver 2 Depth (Purple)

● Diver 3 Depth (Orange)

● Bell Internal Depth (Yellow)

● Bell External Depth (Blue)

A graticule allows reading the scales easily. Clicking on the main graph area selects various (alternate) display
scaling modes. The depth range of the display area automatically re-scales to suit the desired display settings
The data visible on this display are held locally in the dive control display application and is retained in the client
computer memory for 12 hours. Data older than 12 hours are discarded, so if a review of older data is required, the
“Report Generator application” should be used.
33) - Profile depth scale (see #33 above):
The depth profile is scaled vertically in metres of seawater (MSW).
34) - Profile time scale (see #34 above):
The depth profile is scaled horizontally in time. The timescale for the data is either 1, 4, or 12 hours, and the actual
time of day (Vessel time) is shown on the horizontal display.
35) - Profile time and depth scale selector buttons (see #35 above):
These buttons allow selecting the different profile time scales and adjusting the depth range shown on the graph.
Checking the “automatic” check-box scales the depth to the most suitable range automatically.
36) - Bell call indicator (see #36 above):
This display indicates that there is a pending call from the bell to the supervisor (taken from the bell call system
status signal). This indicator illuminates red and reads “BELL CALL” when a call is pending. This condition is
cleared by the Supervisor
37) - Profile maximum and minimum depth cursor reset buttons (see #37 above):
The horizontal colour coded dashed lines show the limits of excursion of Divers 1 to 3 within the previous 12 hours.
These cursors can be reset with the three buttons, one for each diver. That would typically be done before starting a
bell run.
Note that when reinitialised, these cursors only track depth changes from this time onwards and not historically over
the past 12-hours.
38) - Profile maximum and minimum depth cursor enable buttons (see #38 above):
These horizontal colour coded dashed lines show the limits of excursion of Divers 1 to 3 within the previous 12
hours. These cursors can be turned on or off using the dedicated buttons (one for each Diver).
39) - Profile trend key (see #39 above):
This key shows the colour coding used for the profile display traces.
40) - Diver's hot water temperature at bell level (see #40 above).

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 187 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Diver monitoring system preparation:
The diving supervisor is required to log onto the system at the start of his shift. To do it, he clicks the “Dive supervisor
Login” button on the Main screen display (See #8 in the drawings on the previous pages), and then selects his name from
the list provided. A prompt is then presented to the supervisor to enter his password before login is permitted.

If the Supervisor has never worked on the vessel where the Diver Monitoring System is installed, he must enter his
details at first into the Monitoring System database. It is usually performed from the client computer of the saturation
control. It can also be done by the dive technician using a remote saturation control client session.
Note that when the supervisor is logged on, the text displayed on the button changes from “Dive supervisor Login” to
“Dive supervisor Log off”. At the end of his shift, the supervisor must log off the system. To do it, he clicks the “Dive
supervisor Log off” button on the Main screen display and follows the menu.
When the supervisor is logged in the system, he must reset the timers before starting the bell run.
- To access the menu of the “Diver in-water timer”, the supervisor clicks on the particular diver’s timer display (see #5 in
the description of the monitoring screen) to open the configuration window. Then he clicks on the button “reset to 0”
(see #A below). Also, he configures the alarm time using the scrolling arrows to adjust the time as required (see #B
below).
The Supervisor should adjusts the duration of the shift of the diver by clicking the up and down the scrolling arrows of
the boxes “target time” (see #C below). When the desired target time for the shift has been entered, the supervisor clicks
the tile “Reset to Target” (see #D below) to transfer the values entered to the “live timer”. The alarm is configured as for
the in-water time (see #E below). When both alarms have been setup their displays flash in with red digits until the
setup is accepted through the dedicated button (see #F below). The widow is then closed by clicking the button
“Done”(see #G below).
- The “bell run timer” must be also configured. To access the menu, the supervisor clicks on the bell internal or external
depth readings (see #10 & 15 in the description of the monitoring screen). He can also open this window by clicking on
the bell-run timer displays (see #12 in the drawing of the monitoring screen). The configuration of the bell run timer is
similar as the divers in-water timers, but there are three additional buttons which relate to the operating modes(see #H
below).
● “Normal mode” : Based on the “bell seal” status from the trunk pressure sensor, the timer is started and stopped
automatically. This mode requires a manual reset of the timer at the start of each bell-run.
● “Automatic Reset mode” : The system works the same as in Normal Mode, except the bell-run timer is reset to 0
when the bell locks back on to the trunk.
● “Don’t Stop’ mode” : The bell run timer continues to run even though the bell is locked back onto the trunk.
This mode is used where the bell is required to be returned to the system and then launched again all within a
single bell-run.

A
B
D
C

E
F G
Diver in-water timer The bell run timer
- Prior to transfer the divers to the bell, the supervisor ensures that their names are those indicated in the relevant displays
and that their function during the planned bell run is correctly logged (Diver 1, Diver 2, and bellman).

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 188 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
If the diver's names are incorrectly logged, the diving supervisor informs the life support supervisor (LSS) who
rearranges the assignment of the divers in the Bell.
- During pre-dive checks, the diving supervisor must ensure that the values on the Diver Monitoring System display
conform with the primary instrumentation. If a displayed parameter disagrees with a primary instrument reading, the
reason for the discrepancy should be investigated and the problem solved before commencing the dive.
- The diving supervisor does not need to interact frequently with the software, except for adjusting the alarm settings,
selecting alternative display modes, or logging on or off the system. However, he must enter the names of the divers
moving from the bell to the water and vice versa. To do it he presses the pushbutton switches on the control panel of the
Diver Monitoring System computer monitor (see #4 in the drawing of the monitoring screen). As a result, the indicator
lamp is illuminated, which signifies that the diver is in the water. When the switch is in “out” position, the light is not
activated, which means that the diver is in the Bell.
- During the operations, the Diver Monitoring System may raise an alarm that can be a repeated display of a diving
system alarm, or an alert relating directly to one of its features. As a reminder, the warning generated by the system can
be one of those listed below:
● Diver in-water timer alarm for each diver (target duration has been exceeded)

● Diver shift remaining timer alarm for each diver (time remaining is less than the alarm set point)

● Bell-run timer alarm (target Bell-run duration has been exceeded)

● Bell-run time remaining timer alarm (Bell-run time remaining is less than the alarm set point)

● Diver depth alarm for each diver (maximum or minimum depth alarm set point has been exceeded)

● Bell internal or external depth alarm (maximum or minimum depth alarm set point has been exceeded)

● Hot water supply to the Bell flow alarm (water flow is below low flow alarm set point)

● Hot water supply to the Bell temperature alarm (water temperature is above or below alarm set point)

● Hot water supply to the Bell pressure alarm (water delivery pressure is below or above the alarm set points)

● Hypergas anaesthetic level percentage (high alarm).

● Onboard gas bank pressures (high and low alarms).

This alarm status results in:

● The digits of the element affected turning red

● The alarm indicators are illuminated red and flashing (see #9 & #19 in the drawing of the monitoring screen).

● An audible warning generated every 10 seconds

● A description of the problem published in the status box (see #20 in the illustration of the monitoring screen).

● In case of a system error or fault alarm is generated, the display changes to a row of red dashes.

Remember that the active alarm must be accepted by the supervisor to stop the indicator from flashing and the audible
warning from being repeated.
Clicking on the red numeric display of the parameter in the alarm state opens the “alarm settings window” for the
particular sensor (see #9 in the drawing of the monitoring screen).
Once accepted, the alarm indicator remains illuminated red and the digital parameter display remains red also.
When the alarm returns within the setpoint(s), the display returns to its normal display colour and the alarm indicator
returns to grey.
Also, the Supervisor can accept all the active alarms at once through the button “Accept all alarms” (see #20 in the
illustration of the monitoring screen). As already said, he must be sure that he understands them, as this button does not
require that each alarm condition be viewed prior to accepting it.

No alarm
- The display is normal
- The alarm indicator is grey
- No audible warning
The parameter
returns to the normal
Alarm event
value or the alarm set
The parameter point is readjusted
returns to the normal
value or the alarm set
point is readjusted
Active alarm Accepted alarm
- Red display - Red display
- Red indicator flashing - Red alarm indicator
- Audible warning activated - No audible warning

Alarm accepted
by the supervisor

In case of a system error alarm or a warning from a part of the diving system, the manufacturer recommends informing
the technician who is the competent person to investigate the error remotely and effect a repair as necessary.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 189 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.1.13.7 - Fire fighting
IMCA D 024 says: “Suitable firefighting arrangements must be made for dive control. It may be by means of permanent
ship or platform provided equipment or by means of portable extinguishers etc. It should be capable of dealing with any
type or size of foreseeable fire hazard”.
IMCA D 024 also says: “Whether fixed or portable the fire fighting system should be in accordance with manufacturer’s
specification and fit for the purpose it will be used for”.
Also, NORSOK standard U100 says that facilities for human-crewed underwater operations must have fire detection and
firefighting equipment covering the entire plant both internally and externally and that the material must have adequate
capacity to put out fires that might occur. Classification societies confirm this requirement.
In addition to the above, in chapter II-2 of SOLAS (International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea), it is said that a
vessel must be equipped with fire detection and firefighting systems. As a result, all built-in saturation systems are
protected with the detection and firefighting system of the boat. In addition to portable extinguishers, this system is
composed of smoke, heat, and flame detectors, and a water mist system that is fed by two fire pumps 140 m3/h each is
installed in the dive control. The operating panel, control unit, and power supply of this system are contained in a central
cabinet on the bridge.
However, some transportable saturation systems are not equipped with fixed firefighting installations, and in this case,
portable systems have to be provided. Also, as said above, built-in control rooms are equipped with hand-carried systems
in addition to the firefighting system of the boat. The following extinguishing agents can be used:
● Water:
Water is used to cool and protect from heat or flame impingement. Water properly applied (in the form of fog or
spray and in sufficient quantity, generally estimated at 10 litres per m 2 ) can absorb the heat and prevent
damage (throwing streams 20 litres per m²). Water does its most effective job of cooling when it is converted
into steam.
Available water should be used to cool the most critical areas of the fire engulfed equipment and the equipment
in the radiation zone.
Water may be used in two principal forms: Spray or fog and straight streams. Each has its particular advantages,
disadvantages, and scope of application.
In general, the straight stream has the greatest range of driving force, the wide angle spray (fog) has short range
and affords the maximum protection for the fire fighter; and some in between position, which combines the two,
will in most cases be the most desirable. The objective is to get the water in the right form and on the place
where it will have the most effect as a cooling or extinguishing agent.
● Foam:
Fire extinction is normally achieved by the use of fresh or salt water, because of its good cooling characteristics.
However, with oil, which has a lower specific gravity than that of water, effective extinction can best be
achieved by smothering the burning fuel with foam, thus cutting off the oxygen feeding the fire.
- Mechanical air foam is a mixture of water under pressure, foam concentrate and air combined in set
proportions to provide stabile foam.
- Foam concentrate is a liquid foam making chemical that will normally be one of two types:
○ Protein Concentrate — manufactured from natural or organic products.
○ Synthetic Concentrate — manufactured from detergent based material
Foam is not generally used in the dive control room as items filled with oil are usually not present in it.
However, depending on the design of the saturation system, such extinguishing agents may be present outside
the room and at its direct vicinity.
● Carbon dioxide (CO2):
Carbon dioxide dilutes the air surrounding the fire until the oxygen content is too low to support combustion. It
has a very limited cooling effect and does not conduct electricity. Also, carbon dioxide does not support
combustion in ordinary material. However, it reacts with magnesium and other metals.
As a result of its characteristics, CO2 is considered a “clean extinguishing agent” by fire combat specialists who
recommend it for the protection of computer server rooms as it can be used to combat electrical fires while
preserving the delicate electrical and electronic equipment.
● Halon:
Halon is made up of carbon and one or more of the following elements: Fluorine; Chlorine; Bromine; or Iodine.
Two halons are used in fire fighting:
- BTM (Bromo Trifluoro Methane) known as HALON 1301 is stored as a liquid under pressure. When
released in the protected area it vaporises to an odourless, colourless gas and is propelled to the fire by the
storage pressure. Halon 1301 does not conduct electricity.
- BCF (Bromo Chlorodifluormethane) known as HALON 1211 is also colourless but has a faint sweet
smell. Halon 1211 is stored as a liquid and pressurised by a nitrogen gas. Pressurisation is necessary since
the vapour pressure of Halon 1211 is too low to convey it properly to the fire area. Halon 1211 does not
conduct electricity.
For the same reasons as Carbon dioxide, Halon is considered a “clean extinguishing agent” by fire combat
specialists and recommended to combat electrical fires.
● Dry Chemical Powders:
They are considered multipurpose extinguishing agents. Dry chemicals may be used in fixed systems or portable
extinguishers. They extinguish a fire by shielding radiant heat and to the greatest extent by breaking the

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 190 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
combustion chain. Class D dry powder is the only extinguishing media, which will successfully extinguish metal
type fires. However, note that powders are generally limited to electric fires below 1000 volts. Also, this
extinguishing agent is not considered a “clean extinguishing agent” and is very corrosive. Note that the
manufacturer proposes several types of dry chemical extinguishing agents.
Extinguishers are the most common portable fire extinguishing devices in dive controls. The reason is that they are easy
to use and can be stored near the strategic points without the need for a specific installation.
Note that there are two main types of extinguishers:
● “Stored-pressure extinguishers” contain the extinguishing agent at the bottom, and the rest of the vessel is filled
with a propellant gas which is usually nitrogen. The propellant gas at a pressure between 12 and 17 bar, and this
operation is usually performed in the factory. A gauge is installed on the device to ensure that the gas pressure in
the reservoir is still adequate. The advantage of this design is that it is very simple with a minimum of parts. Its
main disadvantage is that it cannot be opened on site and must be returned to the factory or a specialist for this
operation
Gauge

Valve

Propellant gas

Siphon tube

Discharge hose
+ nozzle
Extinguishing agent

● “Cartridge-operated extinguishers” have the fire extinguishing agent not stored under pressure and the propellant
gas that is in a separate small sealed cartridge. Depending on the design, this cartridge is operated by a specific
mechanism triggered by the valve that pushes a plunger or by pressing a dedicated built-in squeeze lever. The
advantage of such a system is that the extinguishers can be opened on-site as the reservoir is not under pressure.
Their disadvantage is that their mechanism is slightly more complicated.
Note that IMCA says that portable systems must have an external visual examination and check that any indicating
device reads within the acceptable range at least every six months.
Also, nozzles, valves, pipework, and other elements of fixed systems must be visually examined every six months.
Besides, the system must be function tested or have a simulated test using air or gas as the test medium every year.
IMCA also recommends that automatic detection and activation systems are tested at least every 12 months

1.1.13.8 - Emergency breathing apparatus

IMCA D 024 says: “Emergency breathing apparatus fitted with communications must be available for the supervisor
(and winch operator if relevant) so that he may perform his duties in a smoky or polluted atmosphere”.
The breathing apparatus must also allow the supervisor and the Launch and Recovery System (LARS) operator to escape
with the rest of the team when they have completed their duty. For this reason, the breathing apparatus must be fitted with
a bottle that allows doing it.
Also, new models enable connecting to a gas reserve without using the
bailout bottle during the time the people finish the ongoing diving
operation. As an example, Drager, a well-known manufacturer,
proposes an “Automatic Switch Over Valve” that is designed for this
purpose and connects automatically from the external supply to the
bailout if this supply fails (see below).

Automatic Switch Over Valve

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 191 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Note that the breathing apparatus must never be connected to a compressor as the air intake may be in a polluted area. For
this reason, the air provided must be from a gas reservoir only.
In addition to the emergency breathing apparatus, several escape sets should be provided to allow the not essential
personnel present in the dive control to escape. These items are composed of a small bottle and a hood or a breathing
mask and do not allow any other activities than moving to the muster station.

MCA D 024 says that Emergency breathing apparatus (and escape sets) should be function tested (including voice
communications) at least every six months and at the same time their cylinder is fully charged. Also, the bottle should be
tested for leaks at its maximum working pressure of and externally examined every two and a half years. The same
inspection increased with an internal examination has to be performed every five years.

1.1.13.9 - Documents to be provided in the dive control

IMCA Says that the following documents must be present in the dive control:
● Copies of the diving contractor’s manuals and diving rules.

● Emergency procedures (Generic procedures supplemented by project-specific addendums).

● Diving logs or pre-printed sheets and other relevant documentation.

● Copies of the diving bell internal and external pre-dive checklists.

● A photographic record that clearly identifies the bell valves, internal and external, should be available to allow
the supervisor to guide the divers in an emergency.
● Plan to deploy a surface standby diver in emergency, unless a robust alternative plan (proven through exercises)
has been developed to ensure assistance can be rapidly given to a stricken or fouled bell at all depths within the
working range of a surface diver, including the period while the bell is close to or in a moonpool.
● A layout of the vessel thrusters and other obstructions must be displayed if the ship operates on Dynamic
Positioning mode, with also a diagram of the maximum permitted lengths of the umbilicals of the working and
standby divers for each depth at the specific dive location(s). This should include the umbilical ranges for the
emergency surface standby diver.
Not indicated by IMCA, but very important, the following documents should also be available:
● The list of the divers in saturation, their function, and working periods.

● The list of the personnel on deck, their function, and working periods.

● The phone numbers of the key persons.

● Emergency communication channels and the emergency response plan chart should be displayed at the direct
vicinity of the supervisor.
● The task plans and risk assessments for the project.

● Tool box talk forms.

● Safety observation cards & stop cards.

● Incident report forms.

● Equipment manuals and implementation procedures.

● A plan of the diving system where the important elements linked to the management of the dive are highlighted
must be displayed.
● The list of the gasses in line with their % oxygen.

1.1.13.10 - Summary of the maintenance of the elements in the dive control room
There is no change of the rules of certification of the mechanical and electrical components present in the dive control
compared with those of other parts of the diving system.

Visual external + Visual internal + Internal + external+

Items function test , external + leak test at leak test 1,5 max. Other
calibration max. Working pressure working pressure

Manufacturer
Communications 6 months
specifications
Manufacturer
Alarm testing 6 months
specifications
Manufacturer
Analysers 6 months
specifications

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 192 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Visual external + Visual internal + Internal + external+

Items function test , external + leak test at leak test 1,5 max. Other
calibration max. Working pressure working pressure

Gauges 6 months

Valves and pipework 6 months 2 years

Relief valves 6 months 2 ½ years

Electrical 6 months

Manufacturer
Fire fighting portable system 6 months
specifications
Manufacturer
Fire fighting fixed system 6 months 12 months
specifications
Manufacturer
Automatic fire detection 12 months
specifications
Manufacturer
Emergency breathing apparatus 6 months 2 ½ years 5 years
specifications
Remote bell contamination Note: Mandatory with
6 months
control (hydrocarbons +H 2 S) IOGP

The computing systems described in the previous points are perfect tools for the observation of the diving system during
the operations. However, that does not replace the classical planned maintenance system promoted in IMCA D 024 and
described in the previous texts and the table above. Also, these tools need particular maintenance that is not yet taken into
full account by IMCA and other professional organizations.
Computing systems can be subject to errors, faults, or flaw in programs or hardware systems. Such problems that are
commonly called “bugs” produce unexpected results or cause a system to behave unexpectedly.
A lot of bugs are due to errors made by developers designing the source code of a program, or within components and
operating systems used by the program in question. Also, malicious users can exploit potential bugs or weaknesses of an
application to bypass access controls to obtain unauthorized privileges. Nevertheless, note that it is well known that most
viruses are implemented accidentally through access to corrupted programs.
For this reason, the updates published by the manufacturers that correct the errors and vulnerabilities of software or the
exploitation system should be installed on time. Also, memory sticks are identified as a significant source of transmission
of bugs and viruses. For this reason, the manufacturer of the systems described in this presentation recommends not
connecting such devices that contain other files and programs than those from the system. Considering that the price of
such an item is negligible, the best procedure is to provide a new one to each supervisor arriving on board and ensure that
these devices are always stored in the control room.

1.1.13.11 - To conclude with the latest generation dive controls

The latest generation of dive controls have their ergonomics improved compared to systems of the previous generation.
Also, they provide additional tools that can be used for the management of the gasses, the condition of the divers, and the
tasks performed. Nevertheless, note that dive controls from the previous generation can be upgraded to this latest
standard by the addition of these new tools.

The dive control of Seven Pelican that has been built 35 years ago is an example of an old system upgraded to the latest standards.
The implementation of technologies from the computing industry allows significant improvements in the
communications and the management of the conditions of the diver health and of the system his life depends on during
the bell run. As a result, and even though new technologies such as the Diver Monitoring System are not mandatory with
IMCA (International Marine Contractor Association), IMO (International Maritime Organization), and ADCI
(Association of Diving Contractors International), we can say that such equipment should be used.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 193 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The implementation of such technologies with divers is merely the continuation of their use in many industries, and
particularly the space, aviation, and maritime activities for more than 40 years.
However, we can see that the manufacturer of the system taken as an example acts prudently and that the classical control
systems are still present and ready for immediate use. It is probably the best philosophy for systems that are designed to
protect the life of people working in a dangerous surrounding, which is the case of saturation diving activities. Several
accidents that have happened in the aviation industry prove that fully computerized systems may lead to catastrophic
events. As a result, despite clear menus, the management of such new systems requires the supervisor to be familiar with
them, and the owner of such a system should organize a specific formation before the beginning of the operation. This
formation should be anyway mandatory with all saturation systems, even those that do not provide electronic tools as
each system has its specifications and the supervisor must keep his knowledge regarding the use of the classical
commands.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 194 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

1.2 - Checklists

As indicated in Book #2, each saturation system has its specifications to which the checklist must be adapted. For this
reason, this chapter indicates only the main principles to be in place when creating checklists.
Note that the old rule that says that a bell checklist is valid six hours should be in force

1.2.1 - Dive control panel checks

1.2.1.1 - Electrical supplies, recording , and communications

Electrical supplies of the dive control and the bell must be started. They are usually grouped in the electrical and data
transfer cabinets where the electrical supplies and the various video and data signals are interfaced.

PORT RACK 2 PORT RACK 1

BUS 1 BUS 2 Gas reclaim SW pump BUS 3 BUS 4 BUS 5 BUS 6 BUS 7 BUS 8 BUS 9 BUS 10

1 1
Video splitter
7 Video splitter

Diver 1 & 2 recorder

BELL IN WATER

2
8
9 Intercom interface

Bell through water communications

10 3
Black-box divers

11
Alarm annunciator
1 1

2 2

3 3

4
4 4

1.99 1.99 5

6
5

6
CAMERA OVERRIDE CAMERA OVERRIDE POWER

12
DIVER 1 MUTE 7
LIM LIM 7
DIVER 1 DIVER 8 8
(200kΩ) (200kΩ)
9 9

1.99 1.99 10 10

LIGHT MUTE LIGHT MUTE POWER

DIVER 2

Dive control consumer Dive control consumer

5 LIGHT 1 & 2 SCRUBBER 1 INTERNAL

CAMERA
EXTERNAL
CAMERA
TOP
EXTERNAL
CAMERA
BOTTOM
ON BOARD
GAS
BELL EXT
LIGHTS 1 & 6
BELL EXT
LIGHTS 2 & 5
BELL EXT
LIGHTS 3 & 4 LIGHT 3 & 4 SCRUBBER 2 BATTERY
CHARG
5
Colour quad processor 1 Colour quad processor 2

13 Colour quad processor 3 3

Emergency stop

6
14 Bell sound
powered phone Fathom system
15
Fathom system
16

Central Processing Unit (Fathom)

17

Power Supply Unit (Fathom)

18

Uninterruptible Power supply (UPS)

19

- The electrical supplies must be opened on the main electrical distribution panel, so the lights indicating that the “BUS”
are energised are illuminated (see #1 above).
- The “Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)” must be tested. That must be done with a minimum of elements activated.
Computing systems or similar may be damaged by a sudden shut down and should not be activated during this test.
- Interfaces with hot water machines should be opened. They will be setup when preparing the hot water machine.
- The Alarm Annunciator Panel (see # 4) that displays the status of alarm signals using lights and sound features should
be illuminated and active.
- The electrical supplies of the bell should be activated, except the external lights that will be tested during the external
checks of the bell and will be opened only when the bell is in the water (see #5).
- The video screens of the bell control panel should be switched on, and the video system and video splitters activated
(see #7). The clarity of the pictures should be checked and the cameras organised for the task. The colour quad
processor (see #13) should be tested.
- The camera lights of the helmets (see #12) will be checked during the internal checklist of the bell.
- Intercom systems should be activated. They are usually installed on the diver monitoring panel with their interface in
the electrical cabinet (See #9).
- The diver monitoring screens should be switched on.
- The Power Supply Unit of the computers should be switched on. As a result, the Intelligent Acquisition Unit (see #15),
Intelligent Network Logger (see #16), and Central Processing Unit (CPU), that are components of the diver monitoring
system, should be activated.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 195 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.2.1.2 - Bell monitoring panels
- Diving monitoring system preparation (for systems equipped with):
● The diving supervisor logs on the system through the “Dive supervisor Login” button on the main screen display
(see #10 below).
● When the diving supervisor is logged in, he resets the timers of the diver monitoring system, adjusts the duration
of the shift, configures the bell run timer, and ensures that the names of the divers are correct.
- The appropriate gas mixes are online with their oxygen percentage indicated on the panel. The gas panel is to be setup
with the reclaim system
- The analysers must be calibrated (see in point 1.1.11.4).
- Diving monitoring panel.
● Pressure gauges of the transfer lock and the trunk should be active (see #1 & #2 below).

● Internal depth gauge of the bell should indicate the pressure in the bell (see #3 below).

● External bell / diver 3 depth gauge should indicate zero (see #4 below).

● Depth gauges diver #1 & diver #2 should indicate the pressure in the bell (see #5 & #6 below).

● Cameras diver #1 and diver #2 should be switched on (see #7 & #8 below) and tested (the tests can be performed
during the internal bell check).
● Cameras of the bell trunk & the transfer lock must be switched on (see #11 below).

● External cameras of the bell must be switched on (see #12 below).

● ROV cameras should be displayed on the diving supervisor’s panel (see #12 below).

● The phone must be tested (see #18) - The test can be performed with the bridge.

● The intercom must be tested (see #17) - The test can be performed with the bridge.

● Marine radio must be checked (see #15) - The test can be performed with the bridge.

● The VHF radio must be tested (see #16) - The test should be performed with the diving team.

● The Dynamic Positioning lights must be tested - The test must be performed with the DP operator.

● Main and backup bell and divers communication systems (see #13 & #14 below) must be tested (these tests are
performed during the bell checks).

19
5 4 3
6
2

11 9 7

12 10 8

15 16
13 14

17

18

1.2.1.3 - Survey system

The function of the survey team is to establish a precise map of the worksite and position the vessel, and the divers in this
map displayed on a monitoring screen in a direct view of the supervisor so he can easily assess the positions of the boat
and the divers during the dive (see #9 in the photo on the previous page).
The combo screen of the supervisor may be provided with limited functions such as zooming a section. However, the

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 196 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
elements displayed and their distances are controlled by the surveyor, who is always in direct communication with the
supervisor.
For clarity, the surveyor should minimize the elements displayed on the screen to those useful for the operations in
progress. That means that elements that have been dismantled and do not represent harm to divers should not be
displayed. Also, the display must be continuously refreshed so the supervisor is aware of the position of the divers and
the boat.

The reference systems used depend on the conditions of the project and are described in point 8.2.4.2 “Reference
systems” of Book #1. For convenience, they should be installed in sufficient time in advance to allow for a reliable
calibration and stability of the system.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 197 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.2.2 - Bell reclaim system setting up
The bell reclaim system is explained in point 1.1.11.5.
- Three suitable diving mixes for the depth planned are online and should be analysed using the analysis panel. One mix
is selected to supply the gas reclaim system, and the two other mixes can be used as backup, for bell pressurization, and
to supply the standby diver’s umbilical.
- The selected make‐up gas is supplied to the “reclaim panel”.
- Pure Oxygen is ready for oxygen make‐up.
- Pure helium should not be connected to the system under any circumstances.
- Ensure that all valves of the control panels are closed and that the hand-knobs of the regulators have been returned to
zero (fully turn the hand-knob anticlockwise and then turn it back ¼ turn).
- Prepare the compressor:
● Ensure that suitable electrical power is available for the compressor drive motors. It should be 440 Vac/ 60 Hz/
40 KW for the model taken as an example.
● Check the level of oil and that the cooling system of the compressor is ready for use.

● Prepare the compressor for the depth of the dive, and switch off the 1st stage of the compressor if the dive is
planned at 160 m or below.
● When the electrical power is supplied, the compressor can be started.

Human Machine
Interface (HMI)

#1 - Selection switch
#2 - Start
#3 - stop
#4 - Emergency stop
4 #5 - Alarm lights test

5
1 2 3 Alarm & status
lights

- The scrubbers must have been prepared as indicated in point 1.1.11.5. Soda lime canisters must be ready for
replacement during the operations.
- Start the compressor according to the procedure indicated in point 1.1.11.5. Note that the starting procedure changes
depending on whether the pressure in the reclaim tank is below or above 45 bar:
● If the pressure of the reclaim volume tank is below 45 bar, the outlet valve between the outlet of the scrubbers
and the inlet of the storage tanks must be closed prior to starting the compressor. When the compressor is
started, wait for the machine to reach its normal speed, then open again the closed valve.
● If the volume tank is at a pressure above 45 Bar, the compressor cannot be started due to the high resistance of
this pressure. If this is the case a message comes up on the HMI saying “Press. too hi for start” and the amber
“warning” pilot light will be on.
To start the compressor the valve between the inlet to the reclaim tanks and the outlet of the scrubbers must be
closed. Then, the volume tank must be vented using the dedicated valve to the gas panel until the pressure gauge
between the inlet to the reclaim tanks and the outlet of the scrubbers reads below 45 bar. Once the pressure is
below 45 bar, start the compressor and wait for the machine to reach its normal speed, then the outlet valve V2
on the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU) can be opened again.
- When the compressor is started, the volume tank can be pressurized to the required value:
● On the “gas panel” in the dive control (see the first scheme on the next page):

○ Select the mix to be used as the source in the reclaim system among mixes 1 (valve Va1), mix 2 (valve
Va2), or mix 3 (valve Va5).
○ Then, open the corresponding valves of mix 1 (valve Va1), mix 2 (valve Va2), or mix 3 (valve Va5), and
sets the regulators “Reg 1a”, “Reg 2a”, “Reg 3a” to the correct pressures (see on the next page).
○ When the regulators are adjusted to the desired pressures, use the cross‐over valves Va7‐Va10 or Va8-
Va9 to supply the "makeup supply valve" Va6 with the mix selected and also have the “standby diver”
and “bell pressurization” lines ready for use.
○ When the regulators are set up and the selected mix is supplied to the makeup supply valve “Va6”, open
this valve. As a result the selected gas flows to “divers 1 & 2”.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 198 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Gas panel
Ga2 Ga1
Va2
Standby Mix 1
diver
(60 bar) (220 bar) Va1
Reg 1a
Analysis Depth Analysis
gauges panel
Exhaust
bell
Va8 Va7

Analysis
Ga4 Ga3
Pressurization Mix 2
& exhaust bell
Va4 (60 bar) (220 bar) Va3
Reg 2a
Analysis

Divers
#1 & #2
Va9 Va10
Ga8
Analysis
Ga6 Ga5
Mix 3
Va6 (60 bar) (220 bar) Va5
Reg 3a

Ga7
Reclaim volume tank (55 bar)
Va11

Vb3
To divers
return hose

¼ turn valve Low pressure gauge Solenoid valve Flow switch Filter

Needle valve High pressure gauge Back Press. Reg Pressure regulator Relief valve

Flow restriction One way valve Va1 Reference valve Reg 3a Ref. Regulator Ga1 Reference gauge

● On the “reclaim panel” in the dive control:

○ Set the make‐up regulator (see “Reg 1b” in the drawing below) to the desired “reclaim volume tank”
pressure.
○ Then, open valves “Vb1” and “Vb2”. These valves should be kept open throughout the diving mission.
Note that the pressure can be read on the pressure gauge of the Topside Reprocessing Unit (see in the
drawing below).
From gas panel
Reclaim panel
Gb8 Gb7
To divers
return hose
Vb3

Gb6 Reg 1b Gb4

HeO2 HeO2
Make up supply
Vb2 Vb1 (220 bar)
Gb5
To BPR
pilot
Vb9 Reg 2b Vb4

Gb3
Gb2 Gb1
To divers O2
Gas reclaim supply
Vb6 Vb5
Reg 3b

Vent
○
Vb7 Vb8

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 199 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● On the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU)
○ Ensure that the “Reclaim gas out valve” and “HEO2 makeup inlet valve” are open.
○ Enter the “reclaim volume tank” pressure as an alarm set point through the human Machine Interface
(HMI). As a result, a warning light is visible if the actual pressure is 3 bar above the set point.
- Charge the return line and set up the Back Pressure Regulator pilot pressure on the “reclaim panel” in the dive control:
● Open the supply valve Vb4 and the exhaust valve Vb9 (see in the drawing on the previous page).

● Slowly open the cross‐over valve Vb3 until the entire umbilical reaches the bottom depth pressure. Note that the
pressure can be read on the pressure gauge G6 on the TRU. When the pressure is reached the valve Vb3 must be
closed.
● When the valve Vb3 is closed, set the Back Pressure Regulator (see “Reg 2b”) to the requested pressure
indicated in the “reclaim table”.
- Set the bypass BPR pressure on the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU) and using valve Vb3 on gas the reclaim panel:
● To prevent the compressor from speeding up during the set‐up, set the bypass pressure to 15.5 Bar on the
Human Machine Interface (HMI) on the TRU.
● Then, start the compressor and keep the compressor suction pressure to at least a pressure equal to the bypass
pressure set point according to the “reclaim table” with the cross‐over valve Vb3 on the gas reclaim panel.
● When the pressure on the gauge on the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU) is at the required volume tank
pressure, stop the compressor.
● The inlet valve of the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU) is closed

● Set the bypass pressure as a set point on the Human Interface Machine (HMI) on the Topside Reprocessing Unit
(TRU) according to the “reclaim table”.
● Open the Back Pressure Regulator “Reg 1” one turn

● Start the compressor, and with “Reg 1” regulate the compressor suction until this pressure has stabilised at the
bypass pressure set point according to the “reclaim table”.
● Set the required bypass pressure according to the dive table as a set point on the Human Interface Machine.

- Set the oxygen to the required level:

● Open the reclaim gas inlet valve on the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU).

● Slowly open the cross‐over valve “Vb3” on the “reclaim panel” in the dive control, and leave this valve in this
position.
● On the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU), when the compressor suction pressure has reached a value higher
than the bypass pressure set point, start the compressor. As a result, the gas is circulating through the volume
tank.
● On the “reclaim panel” in the dive control, adjust the oxygen regulator (see “Reg 3b) to the desired pressure for
the planned dive. Then, close the valve Vb3.
- Setting up in the bell
Note: The numbers below are those of the drawing on the next page.
1. Ensure that Diver has gas supply to helmet (regulator adjusted to the value indicated in the “reclaim table”).
2. Close the bell scrubber valve.
3. Check that the SAECO/POS valve is fully open (The indicator is out).
4. Close water trap drain valve.
5. Close the diver exhaust manifold valve.
6. Push in the water trap isolation valve.
7. Open the diver exhaust hull valve slowly.
8. Turn the BPR Loader needle valve anticlockwise until it stops rotating, then turn back half a turn.
9. Adjust the BPR bleed (metering) valve to read 0.5 L/min on the BPR flowmeter (once set do not re-adjust).
10. Adjust the BPR loader until the negative pressure gauge reads according to the “reclaim tables” (If using a
different brand of helmet than Divex, the manufacturer’s recommendations). The Diving Supervisor must
advise the divers of the desired negative pressure.
11. Adjust the pneumo supply valve to read 0.3 l/min on the corresponding flowmeter (0.4 l/min maximum)
12. Connect the exhaust hose to the helmet.
13. Open the “shut off valve” of the helmet.
14. Open the diver exhaust manifold valve.
15. Put on helmet and breathe on recovery.
- Important note from the manufacturer of the equipment taken as example regarding shallow diving procedures:
● Diving at depths less than 40 MSW (130 SFW), makes further demands on the system. At shallow depths, the
compressors are exposed to the highest‐pressure ratio and, as such, shallow diving makes the greatest demands
on the compressors.
● For this reason, the regulator settings advised should be rigidly adhered to. Low range gauges are also required
for the BPR loader and umbilical suction. It might even be advisable to go for a shorter main umbilical,
bypassing the umbilical winch, in order to reduce pressure losses.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 200 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● On the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU)
○ Ensure that the “Reclaim gas out valve” and “HEO2 makeup inlet valve” are open.
○ Enter the “reclaim volume tank” pressure as an alarm set point through the human Machine Interface
(HMI). As a result, a warning light is visible if the actual pressure is 3 bar above the set point.
- Charge the return line and set up the Back Pressure Regulator pilot pressure on the “reclaim panel” in the dive control:
● Open the supply valve Vb4 and the exhaust valve Vb9 (see in the drawing on the previous page).

● Slowly open the cross‐over valve Vb3 until the entire umbilical reaches the bottom depth pressure. Note that the
pressure can be read on the pressure gauge G6 on the TRU. When the pressure is reached the valve Vb3 must be
closed.
● When the valve Vb3 is closed, set the Back Pressure Regulator (see “Reg 2b”) to the requested pressure
indicated in the “reclaim table”.
- Set the bypass BPR pressure on the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU) and using valve Vb3 on gas the reclaim panel:
● To prevent the compressor from speeding up during the set‐up, set the bypass pressure to 15.5 Bar on the
Human Machine Interface (HMI) on the TRU.
● Then, start the compressor and keep the compressor suction pressure to at least a pressure equal to the bypass
pressure set point according to the “reclaim table” with the cross‐over valve Vb3 on the gas reclaim panel.
● When the pressure on the gauge on the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU) is at the required volume tank
pressure, stop the compressor.
● The inlet valve of the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU) is closed

● Set the bypass pressure as a set point on the Human Interface Machine (HMI) on the Topside Reprocessing Unit
(TRU) according to the “reclaim table”.
● Open the Back Pressure Regulator “Reg 1” one turn

● Start the compressor, and with “Reg 1” regulate the compressor suction until this pressure has stabilised at the
bypass pressure set point according to the “reclaim table”.
● Set the required bypass pressure according to the dive table as a set point on the Human Interface Machine.

- Set the oxygen to the required level:

● Open the reclaim gas inlet valve on the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU).

● Slowly open the cross‐over valve “Vb3” on the “reclaim panel” in the dive control, and leave this valve in this
position.
● On the Topside Reprocessing Unit (TRU), when the compressor suction pressure has reached a value higher
than the bypass pressure set point, start the compressor. As a result, the gas is circulating through the volume
tank.
● On the “reclaim panel” in the dive control, adjust the oxygen regulator (see “Reg 3b) to the desired pressure for
the planned dive. Then, close the valve Vb3.
- Setting up in the bell
Note: The numbers below are those of the drawing on the next page.
1. Ensure that Diver has gas supply to helmet (regulator adjusted to the value indicated in the “reclaim table”).
2. Close the bell scrubber valve.
3. Check that the SAECO/POS valve is fully open (The indicator is out).
4. Close water trap drain valve.
5. Close the diver exhaust manifold valve.
6. Push in the water trap isolation valve.
7. Open the diver exhaust hull valve slowly.
8. Turn the BPR Loader needle valve anticlockwise until it stops rotating, then turn back half a turn.
9. Adjust the BPR bleed (metering) valve to read 0.5 L/min on the BPR flowmeter (once set do not re-adjust).
10. Adjust the BPR loader until the negative pressure gauge reads according to the “reclaim tables” (If using a
different brand of helmet than Divex, the manufacturer’s recommendations). The Diving Supervisor must
advise the divers of the desired negative pressure.
11. Adjust the pneumo supply valve to read 0.3 l/min on the corresponding flowmeter (0.4 l/min maximum)
12. Connect the exhaust hose to the helmet.
13. Open the “shut off valve” of the helmet.
14. Open the diver exhaust manifold valve.
15. Put on helmet and breathe on recovery.
- Important note from the manufacturer of the equipment taken as example regarding shallow diving procedures:
● Diving at depths less than 40 MSW (130 SFW), makes further demands on the system. At shallow depths, the
compressors are exposed to the highest‐pressure ratio and, as such, shallow diving makes the greatest demands
on the compressors.
● For this reason, the regulator settings advised should be rigidly adhered to. Low range gauges are also required
for the BPR loader and umbilical suction. It might even be advisable to go for a shorter main umbilical,
bypassing the umbilical winch, in order to reduce pressure losses.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 201 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

88- Turn the BPR Loader valve 10 - Adjust the BPR loader until the
fully anticlockwise, then negative pressure gauge reads
turn it back half a turn according to the reclaim tables

Pressure gauge water trap - Read the adjustment

Read 0.5 L/min on the BPR of the BPR loader on this gauge (see #10 ). Note
bleed flowmeter (see #9 ) that the reading is normally a negative pressure.

11 - Pneumo supply valve: Adjust it to read 0.3 l/min

on the corresponding flowmeter

To diver tracking pneumo 22- Close Bell scrubbing

(exhaust) valve

1 - Ensure of gas supply to

98 - Adjust the BPR bleed Helmets (regulator panel)
valve to read 0.5 L/min on
the BPR bleed flowmeter From divers supply

Back Pressure Regulator 33 - Check SAECO/POS valve

fully open (Indicator out)

77 - Open diver exhaust hull valve Connection return

hose umbilical

To bell external water trap 12

12 - Connect the exhaust
hoses to the helmets
66 - Push-in isolation valve
55 - close diver exhaust valve
13
13 - Open the shut off valve helmet. Acrylic water trap

15- Put on the helmet and breathe.

15 44- Close drain valve 14
14 - Open diver exhaust manifold valve

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 202 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.2.3 - Bell hot water machine setting up

The hot water machine is explained in point 1.1.12.

1.2.3.1 - Machine starting

- Perform pipe leak tests
- Remove any filter clogging on water filters
- Switch on the command cabinet (Main switch on Control cabinet)
- Switch on the power cabinet (circuit breaker DN)
- Check that the electrical motor turn in the right direction (arrow sign on motors)
- Check that the pump by-pass (PBP) is set to the minimum (spring released)

1.2.3.2 - Regulation setting

- Close the manual valves of the mixing manifold (see #1 below).
- Open the isolation valves of the regulation valve (see #2 below).
- Open the isolating hot water valves of the tank (see #3 & #4 below).
Dump Fresh water inlet
Electrical supply and machine control cabinet

LC 5

THER

TS PS
7 THER

6
UV

Sea water inlet

3 3
2 Drain Drain
M

4
Mixing manifold

BP 13

15
12

Hot water delivery

Delivery manifold

TS PS
14
PS LC
Heating element Pressure bypass Pressure sensor Level controller
¼ turn valve Filter Pressure gauge M Electric motor
Temperature
One way valve THER Thermostat BP Booster pump
regulator
TS Temperature
Relief valve THER Safety thermostat Thermometer
sensor
Vacuum relief Inlet pressure Ultra Violet (UV)
Flexible hose UV
valve switch lamps

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 203 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.2.3.3 - Temperature setting
On the controller in the dive control:
- Press the arrows to set the desired temperature values (see #8 & #9 below) using a HMI system.
- Use the potentiometer to set the desired temperature using a classical system (see #10 below).

8 9

11

10

1.2.3.4 - Pre-heating
- Open vent valve (see #5 in the drawing on the previous page).
- Turn on the operation switch
- ensure that the safety thermostat is set to 80°C max (See #6).
- Switch the selected heating elements on the power cabinet
- When the heating elements are started, their corresponding light is on in the cabinet and on the remote control panel.
- Monitor the water temperature in the tank on the thermometer of the tank (See # 7) and the display of the remote control
panel (see #11 above)

1.2.3.5 - High pressure feed

Once the tank has reached the desired heating temperature, a light switches-on on the cabinet’s panel and the temperature
is displayed on the Human Machine Interface. At this moment, the following operations can be undertaken.
- Open the water delivery valve (see #12 in the drawing on the previous page).
- Close vent valve (see #5 in the drawing on the previous page).
- Make sure that the downstream circuit and the diver distribution panel are ready to function
- Open water inlet valve of the bell and the water dump valve to establish the circuit.
- Start the booster pump (see #13 in the drawing on the previous page) using the dedicated button on the control cabinet.
- Check the delivery pressure on the pressure gauge of the delivery manifold (see #14 in the drawing).
- Set the pump by-pass 10 bars above the service pressure needed to supply the divers, up to a maximum of 70 bars (see
#15 in the drawing on the previous page).
- Complete the temperature adjustment, using the setting buttons on the remote control panel (see #8, #9, & #10 in the
picture above), according to the readout temperature indicator (See #11). Note that it is also possible to check the
delivery temperature on the temperature regulator on the delivery manifold and the control cabinet.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 204 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

1.2.4 - Onboard gas

Onboard gas and oxygen add systems are described in points 1.1.2.6 and 1.1.2.7.
The onboard gas supply is designed to supply the diver if the surface supply fails. It is normally arranged to come on-line
automatically if the surface supply pressure drops below a set level. It usually incorporates an audible and visual
indication that the changeover has occurred, to warn the bellman to recall the diver and inform the diving supervisor.
IMCA says that there must be an emergency supply of breathing gas carried on board sufficient to support each working
diver plus the bellman outside the bell for a minimum of 30 minutes at a breathing rate of 40 litres (1.5 ft³) per minute at
the maximum depth of the diving operation. This is to allow the diver(s) to return safely to the bell or allow the bellman
to recover an injured diver, or allow a diver to clear debris if the bell is fouled. Note that the rates recommended by
NORSOK (62.5 litres per minute) and the UK HSE study “The provision of breathing gas to divers in emergencies” (50
to 75 litres per minute) should be preferred; however, it may happen that the gas reserves have been calculated according
to IMCA guidelines without more margins.
The onboard gas reserves should be checked prior to each bell run and should always be full.
The PPO2 should be between 380 mb (0.375 ata) and 1400 mb (1.38 ata). The recommendation is to try to use higher
PPO2 limits. The table below indicates the lower and upper limits of various oxygen percentages.

Depth with Depth with Depth with Depth with

% O2 in mix % O2 in mix
The table below gives an ihe possible ranges mb PPO2
380 mb PPO 2 1400 380 mb PPO2 1400 mb PPO2

21 8.1 m 56.7 m 10 28 m 130 m

20 9m 60 m 9 32.2 m 145.6 m

19 10 m 63.7 m 8 37.5 m 165 m

18 11.1 m 67.8 m 7 44.3 m 190 m

17 12.4 m 72.4 m 6 53.3 m 223.3 m

16 13.8 m 77.5 m 5 66 m 270 m

15 15.3 m 83.3 m 4 85 m 340 m

14 17.1 m 90 m 3 116.7 m 456.7 m*

13 19.2 m 97.7 m 2 180 m 690 m*

12 21.7 m 106.7 m 1.5 243.3 m 923.3 m*
11 24.5 m 117.3 m 1 370 m 1390 m*
Note: The maximum depths indicated with * are not reachable

IMCA says that sufficient oxygen must be available for metabolic consumption by the maximum number of divers at 0.5
litres/minute per diver for at least 24 hours at the end of a bell run. This system is explained in point 1.1.2.7 of this book.
Scrubber soda lime cartridges must be provided accordingly to collect the CO2
It must be noted that 24 hours is a very minimum, and for this reason, many manufacturers propose bells with more
onboard O2 reserves than this minimum.
Water is often found inside the bell on-board gas cylinders charged by means of a manifold system, and in some cases in
significant amounts.
● The presence of any moisture inside such cylinders can lead to the development of corrosion which could
jeopardise the integrity of the cylinder.
● In an extreme case the ingress of water may be so large that a cylinder may no longer contain a sufficient
quantity of gas to ensure the diver's safety. A circumstance which would not be detectable from a pressure
check.
The following recommendations should be applied:
● The manifold's design should limit the atmospheric volume between the isolation valve and plug to a minimum
and provide for venting it before removing the plug. Also, it should point downwards so that it will self-drain on
the removal of the plug.
● Consideration should be given to using 'O' ring seal hand connectors on charging whips to ensure watertight
integrity.
● Before connecting the charging whip, the manifold should be vented back. Of course, it is not possible when the
manifold is fitted with a non-return valve; in this case, the portion between the non-return valve and the plug
should point downwards, so it will self-drain. A screw lift isolation valve may also be installed.
● After fitting the plug, the isolation valve should be momentarily opened to back-charge from the charging point
up to the plug, which must be suitable for the maximum working pressure of the manifold and provided with a
venting capability. That should confirm the seal integrity of the plug and increase the gas pressure in this portion
above the atmospheric pressure, so it will not be in depression when the bell is at depth.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 205 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● When bottles are pressure checked prior to refilling and a low pressure reading is obtained, consideration should
be given to the fact that moisture may have entered.
● Charging panels and pillar valves should be checked for leaks during the bell checks. That can be done by
spraying soapy water or specific leak detection products on the parts that can be sources of leaks.
● Leak checks must also be performed when the bell arrives at depth and prior to starting the working operations:
Small bubbling indicates a leak that must be precisely located for repair. Also, its impact on the gas reserves
must be evaluated. If the identified leak evaluation suggests that the gas reserves may be too impacted, the dive
should be stopped and the bell repaired.

Potential leaks to check

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 206 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.2.5 - Bell checks

Bell checks must be performed before each bell run.

1.3.5.1 - External checks

- Lifting devices, main umbilical, and protection frame:
● The visible parts of main lifting wire and its socket must be in good condition and secured.

● The main umbilical and its Chinese finger must be in good condition and appropriately secured.

● The emergency recovery sling should be in good condition and secured.

● Backup lifting hooks must be in good condition.

● The fixations of the protection frame must be appropriately secured, and the frame should not have deformations
that may affect its integrity.
- Emergency panel (to which the emergency umbilical is to be connected):
● Emergency blow down must be closed and plugged (see #9 in the drawing on the next page).

● Hot water must be closed and plugged (#43 in the drawing).

● Depth monitoring connector must be plugged and the control valve closed (#10 in the drawing).

● The power supply and comm's connector must be plugged.

- Bell locators and emergency communications:

● Bell emergency location beacon must be secured in place and checked.

● The through water communication transducer should be secured. It should be periodically tested underwater.

● The strobe light must be secured at the top of the bell and working.

● The external lights should be in good condition and function tested with normal and emergency supplies.

● The tapping code should be in place.

- The viewports should not be corroded or scratched and be less than 10 years old. Their covers should be in place.
- The integrity of hollow and electrical penetrators should be checked.
- The oil filled connection boxes must be checked: There should not be water intrusion (small bubbles) and the box
should be fully filled.
- The divers gas supply from the surface must be open (see #8 in the drawing on the next page).
- The onboard gas cylinders must be open.
- The onboard banks tacking lines must be open (see #14, #15, & #16 in the scheme).
- The hull valves of the emergency supplies from the onboard banks must be open (see #12 & #13 in the drawing).
- The supply to diver 3 from the dedicated onboard bank must be open (see #11 in the drawing).
- The bell blow-down and exhaust valve must be open (see #5 in the drawing).
- The tracking lines of the regulators of the oxygen banks should be open (see # 17 & #18 in the drawing).
- The oxygen cylinders must be open.
- The isolation valves from the oxygen banks must be open (see #19 &20 in the drawing).
- The external depth isolation valve must be open (see #21).
- The hot water supply valve must be open (see # 42).
- The hot-water dump valve must be open.
- The bilge drain must be open.
- The isolation of the safety pressure release valve must be open (see #3 in the drawing on the next page).
- The hot-water supply to diver 3 must be open.
- The gas supply from the surface to diver 3 must be open (see #4 in the drawing on the next page).
- The isolation valve of the return to the reclaim system must be open (see #40 in the drawing).
- The external water trap of the reclaim must be open (see #40 in the drawing).
- The external water trap drain valve must be closed (see #40 in the drawing).
- The valve of the internal depth monitoring from the dive control must be open (#7 in the drawing).
- Diver #1 & #2 depths isolation valves must be open (see #1 & #2).
- The analysis isolation valve to dive control must be open (#6 in the drawing).
- Medical Lock:
● The equalization valve is opened to ensure that no gas or water is present, and then closed.

● The vent valve is closed.

● The door is closed and secured.

- The onboard oxygen charging panel should be closed and plugged.

- The onboard gas charging panel should be closed and plugged.
- The inlet and outlet hydraulic valves of the external bottom door must be open.
- Connections to the external backup hydraulic pump of the doors must be closed and plugged.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 207 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- The isolation valve of the external oil accumulator must be open.
- Bottom door:
● Outside of the door: Equalization valve 1 is closed and equalization valve 2 is open.

● Inside of the door: Equalization valve 1 is open and equalization valve 2 is closed.

- Stand by diver (Diver 3) umbilical:

● It should be correctly secured so it cannot escape during the launching and the recovery of the bell.

● Its communications must be checked and then plugged.

● The hot water hose must be plugged

● The gas hose must be plugged

● When there are only two divers in the bell, the extremity of the umbilical must be stored such it can be recovered
without launching the standby diver.
- Bailouts:
● Bailouts may be stored in the clamp weight or in the storage box of the standoff frame.

● They must be filled at their maximum working pressure with the appropriate mix for the planned depth, that
must be indicated on the cylinder and be recorded by the diving supervisor.

4 6 8
3 5 7 10 12
To gas reclaim 9 11
system
13
15
2 14
1 16
23 17
18
43
19
42
24
22
37
20
25 26 27 28
44
34 21
36 35

40 29
39
38 31 32

33
30
Umbilical
To
Diver 3
scrubbers

41
Umbilical D1 Umbilical D2
To heaters
Direction of flux Flow control valve
Depth gauge One way valve Filter
Low pressure gauge Relief valve Pressurization silencer
High pressure gauge ¼ turn valve Anti-suction device
Regulator Needle valve Manifold + quick-connectors
Back pressure regulator Flow meter Back Pressure Regulator loader

1.2.5.2 - Internal checks

- Black box recorder and analysers:
● Ensure that the black box is recording.

● Record the gas status to the bell.

● Ensure that the analysers are working and record the partial pressures of oxygen and CO2.

● Ensure that the hydrocarbons analyser (if the bell is provided with) is working and its status.

● Confirm with the technician and the divers that fresh soda lime cartridges have been transferred to the bell.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 208 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Lights and communications.
● The intercom of the bell should work appropriately. Note that the check list is performed through it.

● The electrical supplies should be checked and conform with the manufacturer recommendations.

● The lights and the scrubbers must be tested with the normal and emergency supplies.

● The sound powered phone must be checked.

● The through water communications should be powered (it can be checked when the bell is in the water).

● The communications, lights and camera of the helmets must be tested.

- The external condition of the helmets and the full face must be checked. Their communications, lights, and camera
must be tested.
- Implement the gas supplies to the “Mara panel”:
● The divers gas supply valve (see # 8 & #27 in the scheme on the previous page and below) should be opened,
and the pressure reported (usually approximately 14 bar).
● The regulator (see below #27) must be adjusted to the recommended working pressure (approximately 12 bar).
As a result of the established pressure the visual indicator of shuttle block (see #29), which is designed to protect
the divers from loss of gas supply, should be green.
● The helmets should be tested by opening the valves #31 and #32 of the “Mara panel”. Then, the valves are
closed and the helmets are vented.
● The onboard gas supplies must be tested one by one. For this reason the supply valves of the onboard mix
should be opened (see lines #12 - #28 & #13 - #26 in the drawing and the photo below) .
● The regulators (see below #26 & #28) should be adjusted to the recommended working pressure (approximately
10 bar). As a result of the established pressure the visual indicator of shuttle block (see #29), should be green.
● The helmets must be tested with the onboard gas by opening the valves #31 & #32. The divers’ BIBS are also
tested by opening the valve #34. If the tests are satisfactory, the valves are closed and the helmets and BIBS are
vented.
● The onboard supply of the standby diver (diver 3) must be tested: The hull valve (see #11) must be opened, the
regulator adjusted appropriately (see below #25), and the full face mask tested by opening the valve #41. The
BIBS of diver 3 is also tested by opening the valve #33. When the tests are satisfactory the valves are closed and
the full face mask and the BIBS are vented.

11 8

4 13 12

25 26 27 28

33
29

41 34
31 30 32

- The internal O2 analyser must be tested

- Implement the oxygen add system:
● The hull valve of an onboard oxygen supply is opened (see valves #19 & 20 in the drawing on the previous
page).
● The valve of the buffer tank is then opened to fill it (see #23 in the drawing). It is closed when the buffer tank
has been filled.
● The inlet valves of the O2 add manifold (see #22 in the scheme on the previous page) are opened. The oxygen
injection valves are opened and the flow meter adjusted.
● The valves are kept open until the PPO2 f the bell is adjusted to the desired value. When this value is reached,
the opened valves are all closed.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 209 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
When the preparation of the Mara panel and the oxygen add system is completed, the check list can be undertaken:
- Depth gauges:
● Internal depth gauge is open (see #44 in the drawing in the previous page)

● External depth gauge is open (see # 21 & #44 in the drawing in the previous page).

● Bell internal depth monitoring from dive control is open (#7 in the drawing in the previous page).

● Diver 1 and diver 2 depth (see #41 & #2 in the drawing in the previous page)

- The bell blow-down and exhaust hull valve must be open (see #5 in the drawing).
- The bell blow-down valve must be open (see #24 in the drawing).
- The bell exhaust valve must be open (see #24 in the drawing).
- The divers gas supply valves from the surface must be open (see #8 & #27 in the drawing).
- The divers supply valves of the Mara panel are closed (see #31 & #32 in the drawing).
- Standby diver supply from the surface must be open (#4 in the drawing).
- Divers 1 & diver 2 onboard gas valves must be open (see #12 & #13 in the drawing).
- Divers 1 & diver 2 onboard gas sensing lines must be open (see #15, & #16 in the drawing).
- The hull valve of the dedicated onboard supply to diver 3 (standby diver) must be open (see #11 in the drawing).
- Divers 3 onboard gas sensing line must be open (see #14, in the drawing).
- Diver 3 supply (Mara panel) must be closed (see #41 in the drawing).
- Emergency bell blow down Mara panel must be closed (see #30 in the drawing).
- BIBS supply valve diver 1 & diver 2 must be closed (see #34 in the drawing).
- BIBS supply valve diver 3 must be closed (see #33 in the drawing.
- The hull valve of the Pressure relief valve must be open (see #3 in the drawing).
- Oxygen banks hull valves must be open (see #19 & #20 in the drawing).
- Oxygen sensing lines must be open (see #17 & #18 in the drawing).
- Oxygen valve buffer tank must be closed (see #23 in the drawing).
- Oxygen valves manifold to and from buffer must be closed (see #22 in the drawing).
- Oxygen valves to scrubbers must be closed
- Reclaim system (note that this system is described in point 1.1.11):

BPR loader valve Flow-meter tracking pneumo (flow 0.3 l/min)

4
Pressure gauge water trap
7
Flow-meter BPR 5
(flow 0.5 l/min) Tracking pneumo supply valve

Non return valve

BPR metering valve

6 Bell exhaust to reclaim system
To diver tracking pneumo
8 (Also called “bell scrubber exhaust”)

1 SAECO/POS valve

Back Pressure Regulator 3 Diver’s supply

To bell external water trap

2 Diver’s exhaust
Acrylic water trap 9

Isolation valve umbilical diver

Purge water trap

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 210 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● The BPR (Back Pressure Regulator) loader valve (see #4 above) must be set up as per manufacturer
recommendations.
● The BPR bleed flow meter (see #5 above) must be adjusted as per manufacturer set up procedure.

● The pneumo flow meter (see near #5 above) must be adjusted as per manufacturer set up procedure.

● The tracking pneumo supply valve (see near flow meters) should be set up as per manufacturer
recommendations.
● The tracking pneumo ¼ turn valves (see near flow meters) diver 1 & 2 must be closed.

● The BPR metering valve (see #6 in the drawing on the previous page) must be closed.

● The bell exhaust to reclaim system (see #8 in the drawing) must be open.

● The water trap must be in good condition (See #9).

● The water trap isolation plunger should be pulled out.

● The water trap water purge must be open.

● Divers’ exhaust must be closed (see #2).

● The valve of reclaim to surface (bell to external water trap) must be opened (see below the Back pressure
regulator in the drawing).
● The hull valve of the reclaim to surface (bell to external water trap) must be opened (not visible)

- Hot water system:

● The hot water inlet valve must be open (see # 1 below).

● The emergency hot water supply is closed (see #1 below).

● The hot water supply to manifold is open (see #2 below).

● The inlets to scrubber #1 and scrubber #2 are open or closed as required (see #3 below).

● The outlets from scrubber #1 and scrubber #2 are open or closed as required (see #4 below).

● The manifold isolation valves to diver 1 and diver 2 are closed (see #5 below).

● The manifold isolation and hull valves to diver 3 is closed (see #6 below).

● The hull isolation valve to diver 3 is open (see #6 #7 below).

● The manifold isolation and hull water dump valves are open (see #8 & #9 below).

Scrubber #1

Temperature gauge
(0 to 100ºC)

Isolation valve

Main hot water supply 4

3
1 Emergency supply 5 Hot Water Diver #1
2
5 Hot Water Diver #2

6
3
4 8

Pressure gauge
(0 to 40 bar)

External wall of the bell

Scrubber #2

Hot Water dump 9

Hot Water Diver #3 7

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 211 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Medical lock:
● The equalization valve must be closed.

● The door must be closed and secured

- The Hull valve of the analysis to dive control must be open (see #6 in the drawing of the top of the bell).
- The bilge drain and flood up hull valve must be closed (see below).
- The Spring loaded valve of the bilge drain is closed by the spring (see below).
- The flood-up valve must be closed (see below).

Flood-up hose Flood-up valve

Spring loaded valve

Bilge drain hose

External hull valve

Wall bell Internal hull valve

- Hydraulic system for the opening and closing of doors

Directional control valve
N2
4 4 Accumulator
Oil

3
Manual pump 2

1 1 5
Oil tank

Oil

6
Counter balance valve 7
Close

Open

Connectors external pump

Direction of flux One way valve Quick-connectors Manual pump

Pressure gauge ¼ turn valve Filter Directional control valve
Pressure regulating valve Needle valve Pressurization silencer Counter -balancing valve

● The manual hydraulic pumps are ready for use as required (see #1 above).
● The needle valve to/from the accumulator must be open (see #2 above).
● The hull valve to/from the accumulator must be open (see #3 above).

● The directional valves should be closed (see #4 above).

● The hull valves (inlet and outlet) to the external door are open (see #5 above).

● The hull valves (inlet and outlet) to/from the external pump are closed (see #6 above).

- Internal bottom door:

● Outside of the door: Equalization valve 1 is closed and equalization valve 2 is open.

● Inside of the door: Equalization valve 1 is open and equalization valve 2 is closed.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 212 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
When the valves have been organized, the team must ensure that the elements that compose the internal equipment are
present:
- The divers should wear hot water suits and harnesses when transferring to the bell. Also, they should have their hat
liners, knives, scissors, and personal tools (adjustable spanner, pliers, etc.).
- If used, the buoyancy control devices must be checked prior to be installed on the bailouts.
- Divers’ fins with spare straps and buckles must be in the bell. An additional pair of fins should be available.
- Working gloves should be provided. Burning gloves should be provided in case of such operations are planned.
- Weigh belts with adequate weights for the divers must be provided.
- Spare neck dams and hat-liners should be provided with two spare diving knives and an additional belt with spare
weights.
- Emergency procedures, reclaim procedures, and the bell tapping code should be stored in the upper parts of the bell.
- Lung Power Scrubbers with in-date charges for at least 24 hours must be available (one per diver).
- Survival suits should be stored in the upper parts of the bell. There must be one unit per diver.
- The diver recovery hoist must be ready for deployment and in perfect condition.
- The diver medical kit that conforms to the guidance DMAC 15 must be in the bell.
- The Dragger Pump with in-date Tubes (for CO2 and contaminated bell atmosphere) must be present.
- Two waterproof lights with spare batteries must be provided.
- One spare hat light, camera and pig-tail must be in place.
- One spare speaker and one spare microphone for the helmets must be provided.
- When open circuit bailouts are used, two spare first stage regulators and contents gauges must be provided.
- Spare “O”- rings for the bottom door, the medical lock and the bailouts must be provided with silicone grease.
- Spare batteries for the internal O2 analyser should be provided.
- Tape meters, paint sticks, light sticks, duct tape, electrical tape, a full set of tie-wraps (small, medium, large) should be
provided.
- Disinfectant for the helmet and soap must be provided in the bell.
- Sufficient drinking water (150 ml/hour) and food must be in the bell.
- A set of spanners, pliers, and screwdrivers must be in the bell to allow performing small repairs.

Important note for testing helmets and masks:

To avoid the transmission of pathogens, the only person breathing in a helmet or a mask to test the regulator should be
the diver diving with it. These tests should be performed before launching the bell.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 213 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

1.2.6 - External bottom doors

Bells hatches are provided with two doors that are described in points 1.1.2.5 and 1.1.2.7: The internal door protects the
divers from depression, so any accident that may arise from such a situation, and the external door protects the divers
from overpressure if the bell is accidentally lowered below the planned level. As a result, the divers are secured at the
storage depth during the deployment and the recovery of the bell. Of course, there is no protection against these potential
accidents as soon as these doors are opened.
Having these two doors in place is required by most safety organizations and clients. As an example, in section 5 of
IMCA D 024, it is written that "hatches should be capable of providing a pressure seal against both internal and external
pressure".

Internal door

Rotary actuator

External door

External bottom doors are usually closed by hydraulic rotary actuators, and their closure is performed by acting on a
manual pump described in point 1.1.2.7. However, the closure of this door is often slow. For this reason, it may happen
that the dive team asks permission to remove it to gain time during the recovery of the bell and speed up the shift change.
The opportunity of this operation must be discussed with the client representative as his company policy may prohibit
such configuration. Also, the bottom door can be removed only when the divers work on the seabed, and so the planned
storage depth of the bell is in its proximity. Thus, the team must be sure that the bell cannot be below a level close to its
storage depth in case of an accidental descent. Some companies suggest ensuring that the potential flooding of the bell is
limited to 15 - 20% of its volume.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 214 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

1.2.7 - Maximum divers’ umbilical length and selection of bailouts systems

Umbilicals are described in point 1.1.2 of this book.

Calculation of umbilical length when diving from a Dynamic Positioning vessel is explained in point 8.4.1 of Book #1
and not explained again in the text below.
Umbilical length calculation linked to bailout endurance is already explained in point 1.1.6.1 of this document.

1.2.7.1 - AODC 20 guidelines (IMCA D 022)

AODC 20 has been removed from IMCA publications and is kept in IMCA D 022. This guidance says:
A figure of 100 ft (30 m) has been established by custom and practice and has become the norm for North Sea operations.
While this is a reasonably practical figure, it should not be construed that 25 m is always safe or that 35 m is unsafe as the
selection of 30 m was entirely arbitrary, based on the average from a number of operations.
Factors which should be considered when deciding on the length of an umbilical are:
● The distance of the job from the proposed bell location.

● The duration of the divers bail out bottle at the depth. In the event of loss of gas supply, the diver must be able to
return to the bell using his bail out bottle alone and this may dictate the distance he is away from the bell. The
diameter of the bell manway must be considered when sizing the bail out bottle, as this will dictate the divers
ease of entry into the bell.
● The size of the bell in relation to the storage of the diver’s and bellman’s umbilicals.

● The type of umbilical, its bulk and buoyancy. A long length of negatively buoyant umbilical will act to drag a
diver down, while a bulky umbilical in current may have a similar effect.
● The condition of the worksite, including debris, rocks or other obstructions which could hinder the diver’s return
to the bell in an emergency.
● The unforeseen safety factor needed for particular situations such as DP incidents, loss of diver heating or
trapped umbilicals.
Each operation should be considered on its merits and the length of diver’s umbilical determined on the above and other
factors relevant to the particular circumstances. In an emergency the bellman may need to pay out more umbilical than
the pre-determined maximum length and for this purpose. “Spare” umbilical inside the bell, but lightly tied off to prevent
routine use, is desirable.
In all operations the bellman’s umbilical should be at least 2 metres longer than the divers’.

1.2.7.2 - Bailout
- IMCA says that every diver must carry a bailout bottle that contains enough gas that allows him to reach a place of
safety if his main supply fails. For this reason, a calculation should be available showing that the capacity of the
cylinder(s) at the depth of diving will allow breathing gas for 1 minute for every 10 metres of umbilical deployed from
the diving bell. The calculation, which is based by IMCA on an emergency breathing rate of 40 litres (1.5 ft3 ) per
minute, should be displayed in the dive control and consider the available pressure of the gas in the bailout bottle after
deductions for depth and working pressure of the regulator.
● Divers consumption calculation:

Gas consumption metric (Emergency) = Absolute pressure x litres/min in emergency

Gas consumption Imperial (Emergency) = Absolute pressure x ft3/min in emergency
● Free gas volume:

Free gas volume = Floodable volume x pressure

● Available gas:

1) Find the available pressure: Pressure bail out - pressure bottom - pressure regulator
2) Find the available gas : Floodable volume x Available pressure
3) Time available: Gas available / gas consumption = Time available

1 m in u te/1 0 m
- Note that the emergency breathing rate of 40 litres (1.5 ft3 ) per minute given by IMCA to allow for the effects of cold

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 215 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
shock and apprehension is insufficient and not based on scientific studies. For these reasons, other competent bodies
recommend calculations with higher breathing rate values that should be applied in place of the IMCA 40 litres/minute.
It is the case of the UK HSE document “The provision of breathing gas to divers in emergencies”, that is already taken
as a reference in point 1.1.6.1 of this book, which says that these values should be between 50 to 75 litres per minute.
Note that the NORSOK standard value of 62.5 litres minutes, which many companies commonly apply, is the medium
value of those indicated above. In addition, helmet manufacturers such as Kirby Morgan and JFD provide tables
indicating that the gas consumption values in an emergency can be higher than those indicated above. However, the
breathing muscles are not designed to sustain such high respiratory rates for a long time.
- Also, note that other competent bodies propose methods of calculation and control that differ from the IMCA one and
should be taken into account:
● NORSOK standard U 100 limits the umbilical length to 45 m and says in point 7.8.3 that the bail-out system
should provide the diver with gas for 10 min based on average consumption of 62,5 1/min surface.
● NORMAM-15 limits the umbilical length to 33 metres and the bailout duration to at least 15 minutes during
exceptional saturation.
- DMAC 04 says that the maximum PPO2 in a bail-out bottle should be 1.4 bar regardless of depth. The recommended
limitation is more conservative than calculated limits based on the following Morrison and Reimers equation:
T = 108 In 109 ( pO 2 -[( DO2 + Di )/ DO2]0,21 [Y/2]3,33 - 122y1, which can be found in the document NORSOK
U100, and where:
T = maximal exposure time in minutes
pO2= allowable partial pressure of 02 in kPa
DO2 = partial density of 02 in gas mixture
Di = partial density of inert gas in gas mixture
Y= diver workload measured in oxygen-uptake (I/min STPD)
It is good to indicate the oxygen percentage and the depth limits of the mix the bail-out is filled with on the calculation
sheet and the cylinder. The LST in charge should confirm this percentage.
- As indicated in point 1.1.6.2 of this book, open circuit bailouts systems offer a limited operational range past a certain
depth. As an example, a set 2 x 7 litres at 300 bar allows less than 6 minutes breathing time at 100 m, and a set 2 x 10
litres at 300 bar allows for 4 minutes at 200 m. For this reason, it is advisable to replace them with “Compact Bailout
Rebreathing Apparatus,” such as those proposed by JFD, which are described in point 1.1.6.3, which provide longer
breathing times in addition to heating of the breathed gas. For example, such systems allow for 30 minutes of breathing
at 100 m and 22 minutes at 200 metres.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 216 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

1.2.8 - Remembering the guidance “diver attachment by means of weak link” (IMCA 058)

Divers often need to secure themselves to a structure in order to be able to carry out certain tasks using a safe and reliable
weak link device which should break or release at a predetermined force. However, a lot of divers use incorrect devices,
and the supervisor must be very attentive to this point. For this reason, procedures taking into account the guidelines of
IMCA D 058 should be taken into account to establish safe procedures the divers are comfortable with. Note that this
guide line was previously AODC 058.

1.2.8.1 - Design requirements indicated in IMCA D 058

- 1 - Supporting a fully equipped working diver in water.
- 2 - Breaking/releasing reliably on application of an appropriate load, considered to be around 70 kg.
- 3 - Withstanding environmental conditions, e.g. mud, water, grease etc.
- 4 - Capable of manual release under tension by the diver.

1.2.8.2 - Unsuitable options indicated by the guidance

- “Carabino” or “Carabineer” clips - Cordage

- Cable ties (Ty wraps) - Welding rods

- Ascenders or “Jumar” clips - Safety hooks

(if used alone)

1.2.8.3 - Solution proposed by the guidance

AODC (today, IMCA) tested a device constructed of “Cosmolon” (another brand is “Velcro”), which is a hook-and-loop
fastener of width 24 mm, with a contact closure surface of length 70 mm as indicated below

D - ring Contact closure area 70 X 24 mm

300 mm

Coarse side of touch and close fastening

Clip able to be released

under tension

Diver’s harness

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 217 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.2.8.4 - Rules to apply
It is not an obligation to fabricate exactly the system proposed by the guidance IMCA D 058 (previously AODC 058),
but the four rules indicated in point 1.2.8.1 should be implemented. For this reason, the systems selected must be
rigorously tested to see whether they comply with these four requirements before approving them for use.
It must be highlighted to the divers that a sudden loss of position does not happen only to Dynamic Positioning vessels,
and that a weakness of the mooring can trigger the same result to an anchored vessel. The effects resulting from a vessel
losing its position should be sudden traction of at least several hundred tons for the diver. Because the umbilicals and the
harnesses are calculated to withstand very high traction, if there is no proper weak link in place, the weak link will be
the diver who will suffer from various traumas such as fractures of the ribs and crushing of organs.
Regarding magnets designed to keep a diver attached to smooth steel structures, they should be calculated to release as a
result of traction of 70 kg or be equipped with a system that conforms with the requirements indicated in point 1.2.8.1

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 218 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

1.3 - Check the working documents

1.3.1 - Task plan

The task plan is one of the most important documents and must be closely reviewed by the supervisor before starting the
diving operations. In case of elements missing or unclear, the problems must be resolved before starting the dives:
● The task plan is an official document that must be approved by the client.

● The task plan is the referential working document of the diving team. It must be based on technical studies and
best safety practices, and the working phases, safety precautions, and recovery measures to be implemented
should be based on it.
● The task plan is the means of control of the progress of the operations.

● The task plan should be designed to help the supervisor to concentrate on his tasks: Control the safety, help and
manage the diver, and make sure that the job is done accordingly to what is planned.
● The task plan must be agreed and signed by the supervisor.

The task plan is normally built in 7 parts :

1) - Presentation
2) - Description of the task
3) - Risk assessment
4) - Preparation of the task
5) - Dive plan
6) - Management of changes
7) - Post dive / next task
For any part read, the supervisor must ensure that the key elements are present and comprehensive:
1) Presentation: The task plan is an official document where the following elements should be indicated:
● Name of the client.

● Names of the contractor and subcontractors (the team may operate as a subcontractor).

● Date of issue.

● Number of revision.

● The elements which have been modified if there were one or several previous revisions.

● The name and the company of the issuer (the task plan may have been issued by a subcontractor).

● The name and the signature of the company managers who have approved the task plan.

● The name and signature of the client representatives who have checked and agreed the task plan for the client.

● The date of approval of the task plan by the client.

2) Description of the task:

There must be a quick description of what to do, where to do it, and why. The team must have an idea of the project to
which their task is linked. There must be:
● A description of the whole project (what to do?)

● The reason of the task inside the project (why?)

● A map of the oilfield indicating where the job is planned (where to do it?)

● A study of the weather conditions with prevailing winds, currents and the records of the tides

● A description of the job site with:

○ Precise drawings of the facility where the intervention is planned.

○ The potential hazards:
▪ Pipe lines , risers (and what they carry).
▪ Impressed current system, electrical.
▪ Water intakes and discharge.
▪ Scaffoldings
▪ Every item which can trouble the access and the safety of the divers…
● The surface support selected and the reasons for this choice must be explained by documents such as:

○ A technical description of the surface support with precise drawings.

○ Studies of the positioning of the surface support on the job site.
○ Studies for the deployment of the divers and loads to transfer.
● Previous and simultaneous tasks: The task plan is part of an ensemble of works. For this reason, there must be a
description of the previous tasks and the expected status of the job site after completion of these tasks, and a
description of the simultaneous operations that may interfere with the planned operations.
● Step by step procedures: This part must be precise because the dive plan is built on it. There must be:

○ The description and precise drawings of the elements to be installed, if any.

○ Important calculations for the divers such as pressure, apparent and real weight, etc.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 219 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
○ The simultaneous tasks linked to the task plan (for example, lifting…)
○ The lifting plan if a crane has to be used.
○ The step by step sequences of installation or inspection, using drawings and precise descriptions.
○ Technical information about particular materials to be used.
○ The technical references, client operating procedures, and international and local rules on which the
sequences of installation and the safety procedures must be based.
3) Risk assessment:
● The process of a risk assessment is:

○ Identify the hazards.

○ Assess the risk .
○ Identify the suitable control measures.
○ Record the selected control measures.
○ Implement the control measures.
○ Ensure that the residual risks are as low as reasonably practical.
This document must be as compact as possible and focus only on the task to be performed. Generally, the clients
request to have the risk assessment under their company format for internal reasons, and in this case, the official
document must be under this format. Nevertheless, the risk assessment discussed with the divers and the supporting
team during the toolbox talk can be under the format they are used to if that improves communication. The risk
assessment must cover (but is not limited to) the following phases:
● The procedure to access to the diving station must indicate:

○ The dangerous areas.

○ The path to follow to safely reach the dive station and other working areas.
● Preparation of the task

○ Diving system function test.

○ Filling the bail outs and banks.
○ Preparation of the LARS and diving bells.
○ Preparation of the pieces to be sent to the bottom.
○ Procedures for working on deck.
○ Any additional task which may be necessary to prepare the dive.
● Launching the dives and divers’ deployment

○ Transfer under pressure (divers).

○ Bell transfer.
○ Bell lowering and positioning on the job site.
○ Opening of the hatch and launching of the divers.
● Access to the job site

○ Distance of the bell from the job site.

○ Impact of underwater currents.
○ Impact of the underwater visibility.
○ Job site access.
○ Elements that may harm the divers to be under control, such as impressed current, electrical wires, pipes
under pressure, pump intakes, etc.
○ Down line installation.
● Risks linked to diving

○ Technical break downs (regulators, helmet, gauges, hot water supply….).

○ Loss of communication.
○ Diving profiles during excursions.
○ Umbilical stuck or entangled.
○ Effects of misunderstanding.
○ Dangerous marine life.
○ Dynamic Positioning system alerts, failure of mooring, or risk of collision…
○ Fishing lines.
● Risk linked to the task

○ Simultaneous operation (lifting…).

○ Use of particular tools (Welding, burning, cutting, lever hoists ….).
○ Risks linked to several phases of the task (load transfers, use of lift bags..).
● Diver recovery

○ Umbilical recovery.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 220 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
○ Contingencies due to technical problems.
○ Bell transfer to deck and clamping.
○ Transfer under pressure.
○ Post dive inspections.
● Leaving the dive station.
○ Description of how the shift change should be performed.
○ Safe transfer of deck personnel to the accommodation.
4) Preparation of the task:
● List of Tools needed. The tools are those identified in the “step by step procedure” such as, but not limited to:

○ Spanners, pliers, hammers, lump hammers , chisels…

○ Impact wrenches + sockets, tensioners, saw…
○ Air lift, water jets , HP water jets…
○ Down lines, carabineers, basket tools …
○ Particular tools planned…
○ Inspection tools if the job is inspection (CP meter , UT, ACFM…)
● List of rigging for the pieces to be installed. If some - it must strictly conform to the rigging and lifting plans

○ Wire slings (Certificate number indicated)

○ Soft sling (Certificate number indicated)
○ Shackles (ref number indicated)
○ Tirfors, chain blocks , lever hoist…
○ Lift bags (Certificate number indicated)
● Communications (Notice that these chains of communication will often change from one task to another)

○ Chain of communications with radio channels and/or interphone numbers.

○ Chain of communications in case of an emergency with radio channels and phone numbers.
● List of documents to be in place before starting

○ List of consignation certificates.

○ List of conflicting activities & simultaneous jobs.
○ List of permit to work (with some clients there may be more than one, particularly when doing cold and
hot work).
○ Dive permit: The form to be used (client or internal) must be specified.
● List of work site protection

○ Barriers, segregations …
○ Conflicting activities to be stopped during the dive.
○ Maritime signalization.
○ External boat management procedures.
● List Extra deck personnel (names and function)

5) Dive plan: It is built on the “step by step procedure”, but the steps must be detailed more precisely.
○ The depth indicated must be to those indicated in the description.
○ The range of the tides should be specified.
○ The number of divers planned for the task must be specified.
○ Each step must be indicated by a reference number.
○ The action of each step must be clearly explained.
○ There must be a column to “tic” when the action is completed.
○ Particular actions performed from the surface to support the diving activities must be indicated.
○ The hazards must be integrated in the dive plan and highlighted.
○ Ensure that the duration and depth planned conform to those possible from the storage depth.
○ Check the excursion profiles.
6) Management of changes plan: It is part of the bridging documents and must be agreed by the client.
On occasions, site conditions of equipment, resources, timing, schedule or sequence may mean that an approved
procedure cannot be followed. In this case, it is essential that a management of change process is considered to
examine and identify risks associated with change and ensuring that the risks are controlled “As Low As Reasonably
Practicable”.
The plan must define clearly the process of change:
● Which form to use (company form or client form).

● The procedure to present the change request. Generally it conforms to the following plan:

○ What to change and what are the risks.

○ How the change is implemented.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 221 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
○ How the appropriate risk reducing measures are implemented.
● The level of authorities for approval.
7) Post dive: It must indicate the following:
● Situation on the job site at completion, and next task planned.

● Safety procedures for the divers.

○ Behaviour in chamber after the dive.

○ Minimum interval before the next dive.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 222 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.3.2 - Check the emergency response plan

The emergency response plan is part of the bridging documents and must be agreed by the client.
The diving superintendent/supervisor must ensure that this plan is comprehensive, easy to implement, and that the
information provided is reliable. In case of missing or incorrect information, the problems seen must be solved before
starting the dives.

1.3.2.1 - Check the document

● The name of the client is indicated.
● The name of the contractor is indicated.
● If the company is operating as subcontractor, the name of the main contractor is indicated.
● Date of issue.
● Revision number.
● If there were one or several previous revisions, what have been modified.
● The name of the issuer.
● The name and the signature of the company representatives who have approved the emergency response plan.
● The name and signature of the client representatives who have checked and approved the emergency response
plan for the client.
● The date of agreement of the emergency response plan by the client.
● There must be a chart indicating the chain of command and means of contacts.
● The procedure for MEDEVAC (Medical Evacuation) must be properly explained (chart) and simple.
● At least 2 diving medical specialist are indicated.
● The diving emergency procedures are listed and clearly explained.
● The procedures in case of fire and abandon barge are properly explained and simple.

1.3.2.2 - Check some elements of the document

● The diving medical specialists approved for the project must be called using the satellite phone in the chamber
room.
● The persons indicated in the chain of command and supposed to be in direct contact with the supervisor are still
in the position indicated and their contact details are valid.
● In case a helicopter is to be used to evacuate a diver immediately following a decompression, the procedure
must indicate that it must fly below 300 m and as low as possible.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 223 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.3.3 - Check the permits to work and the isolation certificates

The purpose of this point is not to explain how to fill the permit to work, because each client has his permit to work
system:
● Cold work & hot work permits are in force in most systems.

● Some clients may have additional permits like:

○ Equipment disjointing.
○ Electrical intervention.
○ Diving operations.
Normally the application of the permit is done by the representative of the company. It may be the diving supervisor or
the diving superintendent. Most clients request the applicants to pass their module “permit to work” before being
authorised to do so.
In most systems, the application of permit to work must be submitted at least 24 hrs before starting the project. The
duration of validity are from a few hours to several weeks, depending of the client’s systems.
When the permit to work returns to the dive station, it is signed by the authorizing authority (generally the Offshore
Installation Manager or similar position) and the chain of command identified in the permit to work system (the area
authority and the performing authority). Normally, the permit to work conforms with what is planned, but several
experiences have shown that mistakes can happen. For this reason, the diving supervisor must check it in detail:
● At the reception of the permit to work the diving supervisor/superintendent must ensure that:

○ The work description conforms to what is indicated in the task/dive plan.

○ The work description is corresponding to the permit to work selected.
○ The hazard identification is corresponding to what is indicated in the risk assessment.
○ The control measures are corresponding to what is indicated in the risk assessment.
○ The necessary protective equipment conforms to the control measures indicated in the risk assessment.
○ The document is signed by the authorising authority and the chain of command identified in the client’s
work permit system, and the dates of validity are indicated in the dedicated slots.
● The isolation certification is part of the client’s permit to work system. As for the main form, the diving
supervisor/ superintendent must ensure that:
○ The supporting documents attached to the permit to work conform to what is indicated.
○ The isolation certificates are fully completed, signed, dated, and the duration of the isolation conforms
to what is indicated in the permit to work.
○ The reference numbers of the supporting documents and isolation certificates also conform to those of
the list indicated in the task plan.
If something does not conform, the permit to work must not be signed, and the operation cannot start until the problem
detected is resolved.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 224 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

1.3.4 - Falling object prevention

Many teams and companies think that the bell is sufficiently robust to protect the divers from falling objects and that they
are in a safe place if they are recalled under it, either on the clump weight or in the standoff frame, during load transfers.
Opposite to this belief, a bell is extremely fragile, and a falling object may easily damage it and make the recovery of the
divers impossible, if the diving system is provided with only one bell.
It must be remembered that the bell is equipped with numerous items that are essential for the divers' survival and are
very vulnerable to shocks. They are protected from damage by the protection frame during the launching and the
recovery of the bell. However, this protection system is not designed to protect the bell from weighty falling objects. For
example, a pipeline section of which half its overall length was found vertically sunk in the mud during a seabed cleaning
operation in Indonesia. If this object had hit a bell with this angle, this bell's integrity could have been seriously
compromised.
For this reason, the bell and the divers should never be under a load and within an area where it may fall. Thus, the object
to transfer should be lowered to the bottom before the bell, or the deployment area must be sufficiently far away, so the
bell and the divers will not be affected in case the load is dropped.
Several calculation methods to keep the bell and the divers away from falling objects have been published, which some
of them are based on probabilistic databases. Among these procedures, two guidelines are commonly used by teams to
calculate safe distances: The IMCA guideline D 007 "Overboard scaffolding operations and their effect on diving safety",
and the recommended practice DNV-GL-RP-F107 “Risk assessment of pipeline protection”.
IMCA D 007 says that diving operations must not be conducted directly underneath activities such as scaffolding or
overboard movement of tubes or any other construction work. This guideline also says that between scaffolding activities
and diving operations, a minimum horizontal distance should be applied of 1.3 times the depth at which the diver is
working. Note that this calculation is based on an approximate evaluation resulting from working experiences instead of
specific calculations. However, this procedure has proved its efficiency since 1996, and IMCA still recommends it. Note
that it has often been used to calculate distances from voluminous objects than in the absence of other evaluation means.

Extremity object

Safe area Safe area

Unsafe area
Depth = 35 m

45.5 m 45.5 m

DNV-GL-RP-F107 is a document based on scientific studies regarding sinking objects' trajectories that provides a
methodology for assessing the risks and required protection from dropped crane loads and ship impact to risers and
pipeline systems within the safety zone of installations.
This guideline, which says that an object excursion in water is extremely dependent on its shape and weight and that the
fall pattern of a pipe is dependent on the entry angle into the sea, concludes that an object falling area can be calculated
using the following equation:

where:
● P(x) = probability of a sinking object hitting the sea bottom at a distance x from the vertical line the drop point.
● x = horizontal distance at the sea bottom (in metres)
● δ = lateral deviation (in metres). Note that “ δ ” means “delta” in the Greek alphabet.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 225 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

d = Depth
α
δ (delta) = Distance of deviation, which is the tangent of the angle
d
α (alpha) = Angle in degrees

δ
DNV-GL provides seven categories of angular deviations based on the weight and the shape of the objects commonly
transferred, and are indicated in the table below, which can be used to predict an object's falling area.
Weight in air Angular deviation
Cat. Description Typical objects
(tonnes) (Degrees)

1 <2 15 Drill collar/casing, scaffolding

2 Flat/long shaped 2-8 9 Drill collar/casing

3 >8 5 Drill riser, crane boom

4 <2 10 Container (food, spare parts) , basket, crane block

5 Box/round shaped 2-8 5 Container (spare parts , basket), crane test block

6 >8 3 Container (equipment) , basket

7 Box/round shaped >>8 2 Massive objects as BOP, pipe reel, etc.

The object's falling area can be calculated through a specific software based on the formula provided on the previous
page or by calculating the tangents of the angular deviations indicated above that are displayed in the table below. Thus,
the δ (delta) of the angular deviations DNV-GL can be found by multiplying the relevant tangent value by the depth.

Angle Tangent Angle Tangent Angle Tangent Angle Tangent

(Deviation for (Deviation for (Deviation for (Deviation for
(Degrees) 1 m depth)
(Degrees) 1 m depth)
(Degrees) 1 m depth)
(Degrees) 1 m depth)

1º 0.0174 5º 0.0875 9º 0.1584 13º 0.2309

2º 0.0349 6º 0.1051 10º 0.1763 14º 0.2493

3º 0.0524 7º 0.1228 11º 0.1944 15º 0.2679

4º 0.0699 8º 0.1405 12º 0.2125 16º 0.2867

Note that IMCA D 060 “Guidelines for lifting operations”, says that these angular deviations are based on a standard
deviation of 1, which gives 68% impact probability, and that an accepted practice is to apply 3 standard deviations to
ensure that 99.7% of objects fall within the drop cone diameter to obtain a conservative approach.
This procedure consists of multiplying the δ (delta) of the angular deviations DNV-GL (standard deviation of 1) by 1.96
or 2.58 to obtain 95% and 99% probabilities of impact.
IMCA D 060 provides an example of such a reinforcement for a depth of 90 m, which gives the following results:
Weight in air Angular Distance δ = 1 Distance δ = 1.96 Distance δ = 2.58
Cat. Description
(tonnes) deviation (68% probabilities) (95% probabilities) (99% probabilities)

1 <2 15 24 47 62.2

2 Flat/long shaped 2-8 9 14 28 36.7

3 >8 5 8 15 20.2

4 <2 10 16 31 40.9

5 Box/round shaped 2-8 5 8 15 20.2

6 >8 3 5 9 12.1

7 Box/round shaped >>8 2 3 6 8.1

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 226 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
As already said, the safe distances δ (delta) = 1 can be obtained by multiplying the relevant tangent by the depth; for
example, an angular deviation of 15 degrees = 0.2679 x 90 m = 24.11 m, and an angular deviation of 9 degrees = 0.1584
x 90 m = 14.26 m, etc.
Because the purpose of the calculation is protecting divers, it can be considered suitable to calculate a probability of
impact using the less favourable angular deviation category, so category #1 of the DNV-GL classification, and to take
into account the recommendations from IMCA D 060, to reinforce the deviations provided by the original δ (delta) by
multiplying it by 3 to obtain a conservative calculation that can be used in many situations. The reason for using a δ
(delta) reinforcement that is more stringent than the 2.58 recommended in IMCA D 060 is that IMCA says that a δ (delta)
reinforcement of 2.58 provides a 99% probability that the load falls within the predicted falling area. Thus, a δ (delta) of
2.58 does not guarantee at 100% that a falling load will be within the safety limit required for divers.
Note that most safety organizations say that the safe distance should be calculated considering the maximum possible
dispersion angle for each type of object that may fall through the water. For this reason, it not ridiculous and safer to
apply a safety factor of 3 instead of 2.58 to ensure that no falling object hits the divers and the bell. The table below is an
example of such calculations.
Deviation Deviation Deviation Deviation Deviation Deviation
Depth Depth Depth
δ=1 δ=3 δ=1 δ=3 δ=1 δ=3

10 2.68 8.04 130 34.83 104.49 250 66.99 200.97

20 5.36 16.08 140 37.51 112.53 260 69.67 209.01

30 8.04 24.12 150 40.19 120.57 270 72.35 217.05

40 10.72 32.16 160 42.87 128.61 280 75.03 225.09

50 13.4 40.20 170 45.55 136.65 290 77.71 233.13

60 16.08 48.24 180 48.23 144.69 300 80.38 241.14

70 18.76 56.28 190 50.91 152.73 310 83.06 249.18

80 21.44 64.32 200 53.59 160.77 320 85.74 257.22

90 24.12 72.36 210 56.27 168.81 330 88.42 265.26

100 26.79 80.37 220 58.95 176.85 340 91.1 273.30

110 29.47 88.41 230 61.63 184.89 350 93.78 281.34

120 32.15 96.45 240 64.31 192.93 360 96.46 289.38

Note that the safe limits of IMCA

D 007 are more stringent than
those of DNV-GL-RP F107 with
a reinforcement of δ (delta) = 3

Extremity object

7 Sa
00 fe
lim
D it I
CA MC
it IM A
Safe area lim Unsafe area D Safe area
00
S afe 7
DNV-GL-RP-F107 with δ = 3
Depth = 35 m
45.5 m 45.5 m
28.14 m 28.14 m

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 227 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Regarding the application of the model in deep waters, DNV-GL says the spreading of long/flat objects will increase
down to approximately 180 metres depth, and does not significantly increase further down.
Note also that in deep waters, the spreading of objects on the seabed does not necessarily follow the normal distribution
(Katteiand and Oygarden, 1995).
DNV-GL-RP-F107 also says the following regarding currents:
The effect of currents becomes more pronounced in deep water. The time for an object to reach the seabed will increase
as the depth increases. This means that any current can increase the excursion. At 1000 metres depth, the excursion has
been found to increase 10-25 metres for an average
current velocity of 0.25 m/s and up to 200 metres for a current of 1.0 m/s (Katteiand and Oygarden, 1995).
The effect of currents may be included if one dominant current direction can be identified. This can be applicable for rig
operations over shorter periods, such as during drilling, completion and intervention on subsea wells. However, for a
dropped object assessment on a fixed platform, seasonal changes in current directions can be difficult to incorporate.
Note also that the current may change direction through the column for large water depths. If applicable, this should be
accounted for.
The effects of current should be considered when establishing a “safe distance" away from lifting activities.
The table below compares values of DNV-GL-RP-F107 with safe distances δ (delta) x 3 with those of IMCA D 007.

DNV-GL DNV-GL DNV-GL

Depth IMCA D 007 Depth IMCA D 007 Depth IMCA D 007
δ=3 δ=3 δ=3

10 8.04 13.0 130 104.49 169.0 250 200.97 325.0

20 16.08 26.0 140 112.53 182.0 260 209.01 338.0

30 24.12 39.0 150 120.57 195.0 270 217.05 351.0

40 32.16 52.0 160 128.61 208.0 280 225.09 364.0

50 40.2 65.0 170 136.65 221.0 290 233.13 377.0

60 48.24 78.0 180 144.69 234.0 300 241.14 390.0

70 56.28 91.0 190 152.73 247.0 310 249.18 403.0

80 64.32 104.0 200 160.77 260.0 320 257.22 416.0

90 72.36 117.0 210 168.81 273.0 330 265.26 429.0

100 80.37 130.0 220 176.85 286.0 340 273.3 442.0

110 88.41 143.0 230 184.89 299.0 350 281.34 455.0

120 96.45 156.0 240 192.93 312.0 360 289.38 468.0

Important notes:
In case several load transfers have to be performed that cannot be at a distance that is guaranteed 100% safe for the
divers, the bell (and the clump weigh) must be recovered to a safe depth and then lowered again to the worksite when the
load is close to the bottom. Such procedure obliges several deployments and recoveries of the divers and the bell.
However, it guarantees that the divers are always safe. Also, note that today's technology allows not exposing the divers,
as ROVs can be used to monitor the descent of the load and pre-position it near the final installation place. Thus, a
relevant organization of the operations can avoid unnecessarily exposing divers to potential dangers.
Another important point is to ensure that no unplanned operation will be carried on during the dives. That is usually
prevented by implementing a permit to work system and announcements when launching the dive.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 228 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.3.5 - Ensure the dive system checks and of suitable weather conditions

The method to establish reliable check lists is indicated in point 1.3.

Check lists include the housekeeping and the organisation of the dive station. Some parts of the system, such as the living
chambers, the machinery, or gas storage are performed by the technicians who are in charge.
The diving supervisor is responsible for the checklists under his responsibility. For this reason, he must ensure that:
● The people who are performing checklists are competent and understand how important it is to do it properly.
Note IMCA D 022 chapter 12/ point 3,5 indicates: “After a period of time, when the team has become
completely familiar with procedures, there is sometimes a tendency to become casual. This is typically seen in
the use of check lists. Items are ticked off without being properly checked. It is at this stage that accidents may
happen”.
● All parts of the diving system should have been properly checked.

● Each checklist is signed with the date and time indicated.

● Corrective action to close-up the defects which could have been reported should have been successfully
implemented.
● Any defect indicated in the checklist should be reported to the management of the company with the corrective
actions implemented to solve them. Note that the dive may be delayed or aborted if the defects seen could not be
quickly solved.
● The Offshore Construction Manager (OCM) and the client representative are informed of every defect, which
could delay the operation or abort it.
● Updated weather forecasts must be available in the dive control and suitable for diving.

● Sky observation conforms to what is indicated in the weather forecast, and that no sign of imminent degradation
is visible.
● The underwater current is to be checked as far as possible. It should conform to the previsions and be acceptable
for diving.
● The diving operations can be started only if the diving system and the weather conditions allow it to be done
safely.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 229 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.3.6 - Toolbox talk

For obvious operational reasons, when the divers have been transferred in the chambers, there should be separate toolbox
talks for the personnel on deck and the divers in the saturation complex.
It has been proved that the toolbox talk is a convenient and effective method of communicating for reinforcing the safety
message throughout the workforce that significantly enhances the development of a safe working culture.
The toolbox talk is a means of discussion between the supervisor and the diving team that allows monitoring the health
and the mood of the diving team. Several topics and not only the task to perform during the shift must be discussed
during this meeting.

1.3.6.1 - Health / temporary unfitness to dive

The divers are responsible for their own safety and the safety of others who may be affected by their actions. It must be
remembered that a dive performed by people not in good health, under medical treatment, under stress, or excessive
fatigue, constitute a hazard not only for the diver himself but also the other divers. Diseases and injuries can become very
critical during saturation. That is why the divers must indicate any problem or stress they are suffering to the diving
supervisor. On his side, the diving supervisor must implement all the necessary precautions to ensure that the divers are
in a condition to be in saturation and dive safely.
● Any disease, ear infection or inability to equilibrate the ears must be indicated to the diving medical specialist.

● Any medical treatment must be agreed by the diving medical specialist before committing the diver in
saturation.
● Emotional distress must be reported to the management and the medic. In this case, the person must not be
allowed to dive without evaluation and green light from the diving doctor. Support and recovery to surface may
have to be implemented.
● Note that the symptoms of diseases linked to diving are listed and explained in the document “Diving accident”.

● Particular problems may be posed by personnel under alcohol or drugs. Note that the document CCO Ltd
“Implement a drug and alcohol abuse policy” , that is available free of charge, provides guidelines based on
scientific facts to ensure that such a problem never happens on the worksite.

1.3.6.2 - Task & dive plan

To have an efficient and positive discussion, the written task plan should be transmitted to the divers at least 1 day before
the toolbox talks to understand what is planned and prepare their questions and suggestions. The
superintendent/supervisor must remember that people discovering a work procedure will not ask good questions because
they have to understand what to do first.
● The organisation of the team and the function of every team member is clarified during the discussion of the
task plan.
● The team must review the risk assessment, and additional precautions can be implemented: This is the last step
of the risk assessment. Because the divers will be exposed to the identified risks and are responsible for their
safety, they can request more precautions if they consider the preventive measures insufficient.
● At the end of the discussion, the divers must be able to explain to the supervisor what they have to do.

1.3.6.3 - Site rules

Each work site has particular rules linked to the procedures applied by the client. These particular rules must be explained
to the members of the team.

1.3.6.4 - Safety and onboard life

The safety directly linked to the task to be performed must be discussed during the discussion of the task plan.
Nevertheless, it is important to discuss all other aspects of the safety onboard the vessel.
● The safety observation cards emitted by the team members and the onboard personnel are discussed with the
measures to be in place to follow up each case.
● Safety flashes can be discussed.

● The safety recommendations from the management and the clients are explained and discussed.

● Some safety procedures like emergency alarms must be remembered.

● Diver rescue procedures must be remembered and discussed.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 230 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

1.4 - Last pre-dive checks

The permit to dive is an official document indicating that the dive can be performed safely.
When the client does not have a permit to dive system in place, the document to issue should be the form of the diving
company.
Before signing this document, the diving supervisor must ensure that all precautions for safe operations are in place.

1.4.1 - Work site inspection and element to install

1.4.1.1 - Above the surface

In most permit to work systems, the area authority must ensure that the work-site conforms to the safety requirement
before signing the permit to work. However, when the diving supervisor has access to the facility where conflicting
activities are performed, it advisable to control by himself that the things are secured as requested. Normally, this
inspection has to be performed with the client representative.

1.4.1.2 - Underwater
An inspection should be undertaken immediately on arrival on the job site.
Prior to sending the inspection dive, the possible falling objects above the job site should be removed or secured, and
conflicting activities must be stopped. Then, the ROV (or air divers for the shallow parts) should be sent to carry out a
full visual inspection of the work site.
The diving supervisor should be present during the survey. He has the authority to require the ROV pilot to prolong
investigations he may judge necessary. As a result of this inspection, the diving procedures may have to be organized in
another manner.
A precise task plan is to be established, indicating where the ROV starts, the areas and elements to check, and where the
inspection finishes. The travelling of the machine is to be organized, so the risk of catching the umbilical is minimized,
and to allow the people involved to easily follow the operation.
Obstructions, debris, gas bubbles, and other dangers which may harm the divers should be recorded precisely. Then
corrective actions should be implemented to ensure that the hazards recorded will be under control:
● The position of the bell should be modified in case of obstructions

● If pipe lines, risers, or manifolds, not recorded previously are found, they should be identified and depressurized
according to the guide lines given in IMCA D 06 and IMCA D 044
● If electrical systems are found and not previously indicated, they should be identified and secured according to
IMCA D 044 & D 045.

1.4.1.3 - Pieces to install

The pieces to install must be checked by the dive team and the field engineer in charge.
● The specifications of the piece must be those indicated in the dive plan.

● The tools and spares planned for the installation must be present and secured.

● The rigging must conform to what is indicated in the dive plan, and the certification of the slings must be up to
date.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 231 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.4.2 - Communications to deck and to clients

Note that communications to the bridge and boats, and the Dynamic Positioning alarm systems have normally been tested
during the check list of the dive control.

1.4.2.1 - Communications to surface team

● Communication with the supervisor in charge of the rescue team.
● Communications (direct line) to the person in charge of the launching and recovery of the bell must be checked.
● Communication (direct line) with the person in charge of the opening /closing of the clamp must be checked
● Communications to the diving technician must be checked.
● Communications to the dive station (2 way loudspeaker and headsets) must be tested.
● Audio and video communications with the chamber control room must be checked.
● If the supervisor has no direct vision of the dive station, the video installed must be working.

1.4.2.2 - Communications to the client representatives

● The radios should be tested.
● The phone to the client's office must also be tested.

1.4.2.3 - Communications with ROV

● The main communications (hands free) with the ROV pilot are checked.
● The backup communications with the ROV are checked.
● The main ROV screen is displayed in the dive control and active.
● The screen indicating the map of the worksite and the position of the ROV and the divers should have been
tested during the dive control checklist. It should be active.

1.4.2.4 - Dive planned with crane operations

● The direct communications to the crane operator are tested.
● Communications to the deck foreman and the banksman are tested.

1.4.2.5 - Dive planned with specific machines (for example, grouting…)

● The communications to the operators must be tested.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 232 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.4.3 - Surface support and rescue boat pre-dive checks

The vessel check list is the responsibility of the master and must be done prior to starting the dive.

1.4.3.1 - Anchored vessels

● The vessel must be moored as explained in the chapter “Diving from anchored vessels” in Book #1
● The mooring must be checked, particularly in the sensitive points.
● The tension of the mooring must conform to the anchoring plan.
● The distance from the work site conforms to what is planned.
● The signalization of the vessel must in place.
○ By day light, the alpha flag must be on the mast and visible and the signal buoys Ball - Diamond - Ball
must be in position.
○ By night the lights Red -White-Red must be in place and visible.
● The surrounding vessels must be warned to keep outside the 500 m perimeter around the job site.
● The weather forecast is confirmed suitable for diving by the master.
● Main and backup communications have been tested
● The Offshore Installation Manager and the area authority are informed that the diving operation is going to start.
● An announcement warning the people on deck that the diving operation is going to start has been performed.
● The supervisor turns on the warning light above the dive station. (This light is the complement of the
announcement of the bridge informing the people on deck that diving operations are in progress).

1.4.3.2 - Dynamic positioning vessels

● The vessel must be as explained in the chapter “Diving from DP vessels” in Book #1. Before moving on
location and starting the “location set up check list” the DP pre-dive check list must have been completed.
● The drift test (if requested) must have been completed and conforms to the previsions: At the end of the drift
test, the vessel must be at the place indicated in the calculation submitted before (a margin of few metres is
acceptable).
● The emergency lights (green, yellow, red) and audio alarms must have been tested (at the end of the test, the
lights are kept on, and the alarm status must be on Red).
● The main priority (hands free) communication between the DP officer and the dive control must have been
tested.
● The backup communication has been tested.

● The position of the vessel and the worksite is visible on the screen in the dive control.

● The position of the vessel above or along side the worksite conforms to what was planned.

● The reference systems conform to what is planned. Remember:

○ Three references should be online and at least two should be of a different type. If the work is in water
depths of less than 60 m, the scope of each of the three position references should be equal to or greater
than 30% of the water depth, and never less than 5 m. Also, one of the 3 reference systems should be a
radio or surface position reference.
○ Two wind sensors in different locations, with separate supplies and cable routes, should be provided.
○ Two vertical reference sensors should be provided.
○ Three gyro compasses should be provided.
- The signalization of the vessel is in place.
○ By day light: The alpha flag must be on the mast and visible and the signal buoys “Ball - Diamond -
Ball” must be in position.
○ By night the lights Red -White -Red must be in place and visible.
● The surrounding vessels must be warned to keep outside the 500 m perimeter of the job site

● The weather forecast is confirmed suitable for diving by the master.

● The OIM and the Area authority are informed that the diving operation is going to start

● An announcement warning the people on deck that the diving operations are going to start has been performed.

● At the end of the check list the diving supervisor turns on the warning light above the dive station (This light is
the complement of the announcement of the bridge informing the people on deck that diving operations are in
progress).
● At the end of the checks, the DP operator gives the “30 minute pre-dive notice” to the supervisor. During this
time, the DP crew complete the check lists and the monitoring of the vessel in working position. The supervisor
uses these 30 minutes to dress the divers.
● At the end of the “30 min notice”, the DP officer switches the alarm status lights from red to green and verbally
informs the diving supervisor that the dive can start. The document from the bridge is sent to the supervisor at
this time.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 233 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.4.3.3 - Static surface supports (facilities)
The precautions must be as indicated in Book #1 of this manual.
● The signalization of the diving work is in place:

○By day: The alpha flag must be on the mast and visible and the signal buoys Ball - Diamond - Ball must
be in position
○By night time, the lights Red -White-Red must be in place, visible and the work station illuminated.
● The surrounding vessels must be warned to keep outside the 500 m perimeter around the job site.

● The weather forecast is confirmed suitable for diving by the facility control.

● Main and backup communications have been tested.

● The OIM and the Area authority are informed that the diving operation is going to start.

● An announcement warning the people on the facility that the diving operation is going to start has been
performed.
● The supervisor turns on the warning light above the dive station (This light is the complement of the
announcement of the bridge informing the people on the facility that diving operations are in progress).

1.4.3.4 - Rescue boat pre-dive checks

IOGP 411, Diving recommended practices, appendix 8 requires a “towing/reception vessel to support hyperbaric
evacuation”.
This vessel must be contacted at regular intervals during the day and the night. It is also a good practice to inform it
when the bell is launched and recovered. This contact should be performed by the bridge, but the diving supervisor /
superintendent should ensure that the contact with this boat is established.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 234 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
1.4.4 - Bell pre-launch checks

1.4.4.1 - Check the clamp and check the trunk for leaks
Before allowing the divers to transfer from the transfer lock to the bell, the clamp should be visually inspected by a
competent person and the trunk should be checked for leaks. (This should be part of the check list)

1.4.4.2 - Check the tenders

Before opening the guards and deploying the bell, the diving supervisor must ensure that the people working near the
edge of the boat or the moon pool have a safety harness secured to dedicated rings and an adequate work vest to avoid
potential falls and drowning.

1.4.4.3 - Ensure that the checks of the rescue team have been completed
The check list of the diving system and of the stand by diver at the surface should have been performed. These checks
must be recorded: IMCA D 022 point 3.9 / chapter 5 communications says: “Record all voice communications, starting
with the pre-dive checks. The recording must be kept until it is clear that there have been no problems during or
following the dive. It is recommended that recordings are kept for at least 24 hours”

1.4.4.4 - Ensure that the divers know what they have to do and how the work site is organised
Some time may have elapsed between the time the bell is going to be launched and the tool box talk. The work site may
have been changed, and the diver(s) may have forgotten some important elements. Before transferring the divers to the
bell, it is important to ensure that the diver(s) know(s):
● Where the work site is (depth, level if on a jacket…).

● How to reach the work site.

● What are the potential dangers to avoid, such as: water intakes, electrical systems, pipe lines, risers… and where
these dangers are situated.
● If working from a Dynamic Positioning vessel and using taut wire, where the taut wire is deployed.

● Where the down line is installed (There may be several down lines…), and if used the surface reference tugger.

● Where the tools are (Basket tool or dedicated places).

● What has been done on the bottom.

● What will be their task.

● What are the difficulties they may have to face, and what are the risks and the precautions to implement.

1.4.4.5 - Ensure that all personnel are ready

The transfer under pressure of the divers and the launching of the bell are critical phases requiring organization and
discipline.
Before starting the transfer under pressure, the supervisor should make sure that the team is ready. Normally, it is done
with the communication checks, nevertheless, it happens that some team members are busy with other tasks during these
checks and are not at their assigned position for the launching/recovering of the bell.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 235 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Page left blank intentionally

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 236 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

2) Diving operations

2.1 - Summary of the compression procedures to the 1st storage depth discussed in Book #2

Elements to
Steps Values or procedure Explanations
consider
0.4 to 0.57 bar (400 to 570 mbar)
PP O2 570 mbar is acceptable only at the arrival at the storage level

PP CO2 < 0.005 ATA (< 5 mb)

The procedure consists of establishing an initial seal, then pressurize the
chamber to 10 m (33 ft), and stop the descent at this depth for a minimum of
20 minutes. During this time, checks must be performed.
Establish 1st Two options can be used to pressurise the system:
partial Press 1 - A single gas to storage depth sometimes called an “ideal gas”.
oxygen 2 - A rich mix to an initial depth then a lean mix (also called “poor
mix”) to storage.
The divers should be on BIBS at least during the first 10 metres.
- Depth range: 0 to 100 m
- Maximum compression speed: 1 metre / minute
- Stabilization stops:
● Two hours at 100 m or proportional time to the depth between the
surface and 100 m, calculated by the expression:
Stabilization time (min) = 2 x 60 x depth (m)/100
- Depth range: 101 to 180 m
- Maximum compression speed: 1 metre / minute
- Stabilization stops:
● 1st stabilization stop for 2 hours at 100 m
● 2nd stabilization stop at the arrival at depth, calculated by the
expression: Stabilization time (min) = 2 x 60 x (depth - 100)/100 Book #2/point 3.2:
- Depth range: 181 to 240 m “Pressurisation to
Pressurization
the 1st storage
to 1st storage - Maximum compression speed:
depth and elements
depth ● Surface to 100 m: 2 minutes/msw (0.5 msw/minute)
to control during
● From 100 to 200 m: 4 minutes/msw (0.25 msw/minute)
the saturation”
● From 200 to 240 m: 6 minutes/msw (0.166 msw/minute)
- Stabilization stops:
● 1st stabilization stop for 2 hours at 100 msw
Compression ● 2nd stabilization for two hours at 200 msw
rates ● 3rd stabilization of at least 6 hours at the saturation depth
- Depth range: 241 to 300 m
- Maximum compression speed:
● Surface to 100 m: 2 minutes/msw (0.5 msw/minute)
● From 100 to 200 m: 4 minutes/msw (0.25 msw/minute)
● From 200 to 300 m: 6 minutes/msw (0.166 msw/minute)
- Stabilization stops:
● 1st stabilization stop for 2 hours at 100 msw
● 2nd stabilization for two hours at 200 msw
● 3rd stabilization of least 12 hours at the saturation depth
- Depth range: 301 to 350 m
- Maximum compression speed:
● Surface to 100 m: 2 minutes/msw (0.5 msw/minute)
● From 100 to 200 m: 4 minutes/msw (0.25 msw/minute)
● From 200 to 300 m: 6 minutes/msw (0.166 msw/minute)
● From 300 to 350 m: 8 minutes/metre (0.125 msw/minute)
- Stabilization stops:
● 1st stabilization stop for 2 hours at 100 msw
● 2nd stabilization stop for 2 hours at 200 msw
● 3rd stabilization stop for 2 hours at 300 msw
● 4th stabilization stop of least 12 hours at the saturation depth

- Calculate the He partial pressure and the bottom time and apply a
Aborted corresponding bounce heliox table if available (Comex MT92 closed bell Book #2 / 3.2.2.5
Depth +
pressurization recommended). “Aborting the
bottom time
procedure pressurization”
- If no bounce table is available, perform normal saturation decompression.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 237 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Elements to
Steps Values or procedure Explanations
consider

0.38 to 0.45 bar (380 to 450 mb)

PPO2
Divers can be at 800 mb during excursions
Book #2 / point
Initial storage PP CO2 < 0.005 ATA (< 5 mb) 3.4.2
depth after “Stabilization
Downward & Prior to undertaking excursions, the pre-dive stabilization periods must be
stabilization periods before
upward completed.
excursions”
excursions at After this initial stabilization period, upward and downward excursions are
arrival. possible regardless of the depth in which the saturation is.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 238 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

2.2 - Launch the ROV

Diving with Remotely Operated Vehicles (ROV) is discussed in point 10 of Book #1. During diving operations, they are
commonly used for:
● Acoustic transponder installation.

● As-found and as-built surveys.

● Bell descent monitoring and checks when arrived on the bottom.

● Divers observation.

Acoustic transponder installation must be performed in sufficient time in advance to ensure the correct calibration of the
system that must be stabilized before performing the final checklists.
As found survey should have been performed before preparing the checklists as indicated in point 1.5.1.2 in chapter “Last
pre dive checks”.
The ROV should be sent first to be ready to inspect the bell at its arrival at depth. It is today a common ROV task that
should be organized according to the standard procedures indicated in point 10.5.3.3 of Book #1.
When the inspection of the bell is completed, the ROV is usually used to give a panoramic view of the worksite, which
provides the supervisor a better appreciation of the situation of the divers if the visibility underwater permits it. The ROV
can also be employed to visualize some elements that are far from the divers or some critical parts of a system the divers
are working on. The precautions indicated in point 10.5.3.4 “Divers observation” of Book #1 must be implemented.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 239 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

2.3 - Transfer the divers under pressure and locking off the bell

The divers will have to transfer into or from the bell during the project. This phase is one of the most critical as an error
could have fatal consequences (see “Byford Dolphin” accident in Book #4). For this reason, the transfer under pressure
(TUP) requires precautions, organization, and discipline.
Transfers under pressure in the saturation complex and from the Life Support Supervisor's point of view are explained in
point 3.3 of Book #2.

- Before transferring, the diving supervisor checks the atmosphere in the bell and ensures it is breathable. He makes sure
the bell is at the storage depth.
- The Diving supervisor and LSS/LST ensures there are no leaks and it is safe for the bellman to enter the trunk.
- As already indicated in Book #2, the bellman transfers into the transfer lock (TL) and closes the chamber doors behind
him.
Note #1: In this example, the Bellman enters the Transfer Lock (TL) first; nevertheless, it is considered acceptable that
the other team member(s) enter the TL simultaneously. This is depending on the decisions of the diving
supervisor and the LSS. One rule to always remember is that transfer doors should be closed at all times.
- The LSS/LST tells the bellman that it is clear to open the internal TL door to the bell trunk.
- The bellman enters the bell (alone), close the internal door and checks that the scrubber is running.
- Meanwhile, the other divers check their personal gear, get dressed, and stand by in the chamber in case any equipment,
tools, drawings etc., have to be sent in. (Refer to “Note #1” regarding this point)
- At completion of the bell check, the diving supervisor tells the LSS/LST he is ready for the divers to come into the bell.
- The divers enters the TL on direction from LSS/LST with their equipment and close the doors behind them.
(Note that the divers may be already in the TL as indicated in note #1)
- The divers notify the LSS/LST that the doors are closed and they are opening the door to the bell trunk.
- The LSS/LST then notify the diving supervisor that the divers are ready to open the door of the trunk and come through
to the bell.
- On the diving supervisor’s "go ahead", the LSS/LST sends the diver(s) into the bell. The isolation door of the trunk is
closed when the last diver enters into the bell.
- The last diver, into the bell, ensures the internal bell door's equalization valves are closed and then closes the door.
- The bellman reports to the dive supervisor that they are ready to seal the trunk.
- The diving supervisor contacts the dive control and tells the LSS/LST that he is ready to take a seal on the bell trunk.
- On confirmation from the LSS/LST that it is "good to go," he vents off the trunk 1 to 3 m.
Note #2: The divers in the bell push on the door for a good seal. The LSS/LST might require the assistance of a diver to
seal the trunk door in the TL. Note that with some systems, the trunk is controlled by the LSS/LST.
- Upon confirmation from the bellman and the LSS/LST that they have got a seal and it is holding, the diving supervisor
tells the LSS/LST that he will vent the trunk to surface.
- When the diving supervisor gets confirmation from the clamp operator and the LSS/LST that the trunk is at "0 by
gauge" and the interlock is disengaged, he tells the clamp operator to open the clamp.
Note #3: Because this phase is very critical to the divers safety, the clamp operator wears a headset to be in direct
communication with the diving supervisor all the time.
Note #4: Lesson learnt from the “Byford Dolphin” accident in 1983 (see report in book #4 “Diving accidents” /
“Decompression accident”): It is of outmost importance that there is communication silence and no talking
going on except for the orders and confirmations needed during the transfer phase.
- The clamp operator must "never" operate the clamp unless:
● He receives a clear order from the diving supervisor (the order must be confirmed).

● The gauge on the trunk indicates "zero".

● The bleed valve is fully open and no gas is coming through.

● The interlock is confirmed disengaged.

- When the clamp operator has confirmed the clamp is fully open with "0 - by gauge" and the interlock is disengaged, the
diving supervisor tells the clamp operator to "open the clamp".
- The bell is now ready to be taken away from the chamber system.
- The diving supervisor gives instruction to the clamp operator/winch operator to take the bell away from the system.
- All vent valves should be closed. The O-ring should be checked, lubricated, and changed if necessary. The trunk should
be left ready for “bell recovery”.
- A top mated bell trunk should have a light weigh protection cover put on to protect it from damages.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 240 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

2.4 - Oxygen partial pressure adjustment

In point 2.1, it is indicated that after the stabilization period, the divers performing excursions can breathe mixes between
380 to 800 millibars (0.38 to 0.8 bar) instead of 380 to 450 millibars in chambers.
The selection of the mixes to be used during the bell run and how the partial pressure of oxygen is increased is the diving
supervisor's responsibility.
Depending on the dive profile, the activity planned, and the storage depth of the bell, he may decide to increase only the
partial pressure of oxygen of the breathing mix of the divers and keep the oxygen partial pressure of the bell equal to the
partial pressure of the chambers or also increase the partial pressure of oxygen in the bell. The formula to calculate the
volume of oxygen to add in the bell is as follows:

Volume of oxygen added = (Final partial pressure - Initial partial pressure) x Floodable volume of the bell

Note that this calculation is to be done using bar and cubic metres (metric system),
or atmosphere and cubic feet (Imperial system)

As an example, if the initial PPO2 in the bell is 0.4 bar (400 mb), and the desired partial pressure is 0.6 bar (600 mb), 0.2
bar (200 mb) of oxygen is to be added (0.6 bar - 0.4 bar = 0.2 bar)
If the volume of the bell is 6 m³, the volume of oxygen added is 0.2 bar x 6 m³= 1.2 m³

0.4 bar x 6 m³ = 2.4 m³ + 0.2 bar x 6 m³ = 1.2 m³ 0.6 bar x 6 m³ = 3.6 m³

Initial status Final status

If the partial pressure of the bell has been raised above the PPO2 of the chambers, it will mix with the gas present in the
entry lock if the bell has not been ventilated with fresh gas of the same PPO2 of the chamber. However, note that the
connection between the two units is made by the trunk of 90 - 80 cm diameter and that they are at the same pressure. So,
full mixing will take some time. The formula to calculate the final partial pressure after mixing is:

New PPO2 = (PPO2 chamber x floodable volume Chamber) + (PPO2 bell x floodable volume bell)
(volume bell + volume chamber)

As an example, in the theoretical case that the bell above is not closed for a sufficient long period (which is not
recommended) after the dive, and the volume of the transfer lock is 24 m³, the final partial pressure should be:
▪ Oxygen volume in the bell: 0.6 bar x 6 m³ = 3.6 m³
▪ Oxygen volume in the transfer lock: 0.4 bar x 24 m³ = 9.6 m³
▪ Total volume oxygen: 3.6 + 9.6 = 13.2
▪ Volume transfer lock + bell: 24 + 6 = 30
▪ Partial pressure bell + transfer lock after mixing: 13.2 / 30 = 0.44 bar (440 mb)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 241 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

2.5 - Launch and recover the bell

It must be remembered that due to the movements of the surface support, huge forces will be applied to the lifting system
during the transfer from air to water. For this reason, great care must be taken, and the duration of this phase should be as
reduced as possible. The bell movements must be monitored all the time during this phase, particularly with a portable
system designed to launch overboard that have fewer means of control than a built-in system designed for launching
through a moonpool, such as the LARS described in point 1.1.10.5 of this document.
Despite its weight of several tonnes, the waves can be sufficiently powerful to toss the bell to the hull when it is in the
splash zone, resulting in damages and puts the divers in an uncomfortable or critical situation. For this reason, the bell
should not be kept in the air and at the surface for a longer time than necessary, particularly when waves are established.
If the weather conditions become unsuitable, the launching of the bell should be aborted.

2.5.1 - Transfer to the work site

Situation: The divers have been transferred in the bell, and the bell has been unclamped.
- If the transfer under pressure was performed using the lateral door, the external lateral door must be closed and dogged.
Note that the external bottom door must be closed.
- Before starting the transfer to the water, the person in charge on deck confirms the status of the external door(s), and the
integrity of the bell to the supervisor.
- During the transfer, the divers inside the bell must sit on their seats and be secured by the safety belts.
- On instruction from the supervisor, the Launch And Recovery System (LARS) operator adjusts the bell above the moon
pool or overboard it. Prior to to the descent, the guide wires are connected and secured on each side of the bell. Note
that these operations are detailed in point 1.1.10 “Bell launch and recovery and connecting systems”.
- The deck leader should inform the diving supervisor when the bell is ready to be lowered. The descent should start only
when instructed to proceed by the diving supervisor.
- The diving supervisor must be informed when the bell is in the water and has left the surface.
- The bell umbilical must be monitored to ensure it is not too tight or slack, both when lowering and raising (if its
deployment system is manually controlled). On old generation systems, whips may have to be installed to secure the
umbilical to the main wire. In this case, the bell will have to be periodically stopped during the descent.
- The depth of the bell should be monitored during the descent, and the bellman may be asked to report it to the
supervisor (from his external pressure gauge). If possible, the divers should keep a close lookout via the ports for
obstruction, anchor wires/chains, the seabed or sub‑sea structure, and the position of the umbilical. (Too slack may
induce fouling ‑ too tight may rip it off the bell.). Note that the ROV can also monitor the descent of the bell.
- Once the bell is on the worksite, it is adjusted with the help of the ROV.
- The bell must be positioned as close as possible to the divers work station to reduce repetitive ascents.
- The bell depth should remain within the “standard excursion limits” (see excursion tables).
- When working close to the bottom, the clump weight should be at least 5 m above the bottom or the obstructions seen
during the pre-dive inspection. Precaution should be implemented to ensure that the bell is not above gas bubbling from
the bottom (H2S and other gasses). The bell should not be exactly above the job site, but slightly away.
- The ROV performs a general visual inspection of the bell, looking for leaks and possible damages. The ROV also
makes sure that there is no gas emission from the bottom under the bell (see point .
- On instruction from the diving supervisor, the bellman opens the external bottom door, and adjusts the pressure of the
bell to open the internal bottom door.
- When the door is opened, if the bell is equipped with a standoff frame, the ladder or the stair in place can be used to exit
the bell. If the clump weight is used as a stair to enter and leave the bell, it must be adjusted according to the needs of
the divers. If the clump weight cannot be used for this purpose, the water level is adjusted in the trunking to let the diver
leaving and returning into the bell comfortably.
- When the bottom door is opened, the divers can be dressed. The following elements should be considered:
● Communications are clear.

● The bail out is checked and in good condition (it should have been tested during the pre-dive checks).

● The bail out content (pressure x volume) is corresponding to the excursion planned.

● The helmet is in good condition.

● The neck dam is in good condition (it should have been tested during the pre-dive checks).

● The light is working (it should have been tested during the pre-dive checks).

● The camera is working (it should have been tested during the pre-dive checks).

● The no return valve has been tested and is reported to be working fine.

● The bail-out bottle has been connected and tested. It is open and the side valve of the helmet is closed.

● If a rebreather such as COBRA or MK 4 is to be used, it must be satisfactorily tested. The gas supply hose must
be connected to the side block of the helmet, and the hot water flowing from the surface to the diver’s suit
should be diverted to the hot water housing of the backpack through the splitter block.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 242 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● The reclaim system is open and working satisfactory.
● The helmet is supplied (main supply) and is working satisfactorily.
● The depth gauge of the diver (‘pneumo’) has been tested.

● The neck dam is properly adjusted.

● The diver wears the helmet that should be secured so as not to be lost.

● The diver has a proper hot water suit connected to the supply system through a quick connector that is checked
not to disconnect during the dive.
● The hot water temperature and flow conforms to the recommendations for the depth and the surrounding
temperature.
● The diver has a harness in good condition.

● The umbilical is secured to the harness.

● The umbilical length is adjusted as requested by the supervisor.

● The diver has a knife.

● The diver has fins (If the diver is not wearing them, they must be available).

● The diver has his personal tools. (Most of the tools should be transferred into the tool basket)

● The diver has a weak link that conforms to IMCA D 058.

● The diver has gloves.

● The diver is fit to dive and is happy to go.

- The bellman umbilical may be stored at the outside of the bell. In this case, the 1st diver must be launched to pick up its
end. However, if there are only two divers in the bell, its extremity must be installed at the direct proximity of the door,
such it is not necessary to dive to collect it. The reason for this rule is that there must be a standby diver ready to
intervene for every diver in the water. Prior to sending the diver(s) to the worksite, the bellman’s mask should be
installed and his checks completed. Thus, the diver(s) should stay inside the bell during the bellman checks.
Note: The bellman must always be dressed in a state of readiness whilst the diver(s) is/are out of the bell, and the
"man‑lift" device should always be deployed or on hand in an operational (and lifting) mode.

Pulley fastened to the ceiling

and centralized to the middle
of the bottom hatch

Lever hoist
Lever hoist

Centralized line
ready for use

Feet above the bottom

hatch which can be closed

1 foot

- The diver moves to the job site only when instructed to leave the bell by the diving supervisor. When the/a diver leaves
the bell, the bellman:
● Indicates to the supervisor that the diver is leaving the bell.

● Report the umbilical length deployed, and make sure that the length is within the bail out range.

● Monitors the breathing and bell gas supplies, oxygen and CO2 levels.

● Monitors the reclaim

● Monitors the divers hot water temperature and flow rate

● Ensures that the CO2 scrubber is running.

● Tends the divers umbilical.

- The bellman should visually check the diver’s equipment as soon as the diver(s) leaves the bottom door to ensure
whether there are no leaks from the bailout set and connecting hoses. He should try to keep an eye on the diver(s) during
the work/task (if the diver(s) is/are in view of the bell).
- Whilst the diver(s) is/are working, the bellman should not call the supervisor unnecessarily, unless to clarify an
instruction, request permission to operate some valve or equipment, or informing the supervisor of a particular action he
is about to take.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 243 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
2.5.2 - Recover the divers to the saturation complex

- The bellman reports to the diving supervisor once a diver is back in the bell and whether the diver feels well or not.
- Before undressing the divers, the bellman umbilical must be returned to its initial position and adequately secured.
- Then, the bellman undress the diver(s), stow the equipment and prepares to leave the worksite (unless changing roles).
Note: Dirty suits and equipments should be cleaned prior to coming back into the bell. Additional precautions such as
over suits left outside the bell should be implemented if hydrocarbons are suspected.
- The external and internal bottom doors are closed and the bellman pressurises the bell 1 - 3 m above the surrounding
pressure to make a seal. The door is then checked for leaks, and the internal pressure monitored to make sure that the
seal is holding.
- Once the door is confirmed sealed, the bell can be recovered. However, the bellman must monitor the pressure gauges
to ensure the seal is maintained on the way up.
- Prior to coming up, the diver should be secured to their seats.
- The procedure and precaution to recover the bell to the deck are the same as for the launching (of course the steps are in
reverse order).
- The Diving Supervisor notifies the LSS/LST that the bell is coming up.
- The LSS/LST ensures that nobody is in the Transfer Lock, except for the person who may be needed for assistance.
- The LSS/LST also ensures that all the doors are closed.
- The bell is manoeuvred smoothly into contact with the flange (see in point 1.1.10).
- Once the bell is mated, the Diving Supervisor tells the clamp operator, to close the clamp. Note that with modern
systems, the clamp is closed from the control console by the winch operator.
- The clamp operator confirms the instruction from the supervisor by repeating it and closes the clamp. He informs the
Diving Supervisor when the clamp is closed and secured with the interlock in place. In the case of a modern system, the
interlock is controlled from the control console. However, a person should be assigned to check that it is really in place
and that the clamp is secured.

- The Diving Supervisor informs the LSS/LST and the divers in the bell that the clamp is closed, secured, and that the
trunk is ready to be pressurized 1 - 3 m on chamber mix.
- Depending on the system, the Diving Supervisor tells the clamp operator, or the LST in charge to pressurize 1 to 3 m
and to check for leaks.
- The clamp operator or the person in charge in the case of a clamp that is controlled from the console confirms that there
is no leak and the interlock is fully engaged.
- When the Diving Supervisor & LSS/LST confirm on their gauges that the pressure is holding, the trunk can be taken
down to 3 m shallower than the storage depth.
- After the leak tests, the Diving Supervisor orders to adjust the depth to the storage depth, and tells the divers to open
their door equalization valve. Note: NORSOK standard U-100 recommend 10 m/min (33 feet/min).
- Once the internal bell door is open to the trunk, the divers can transfer to the Transfer Lock when they are authorized to
proceed by the diving supervisor who informs the LSS/LST that they are coming through.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 244 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- The Bellman stays in the bell to clean-up, get read of old soda lime and trash. He ensures the bell is ready for the next
team (cleans and disinfects helmets) and do minor maintenance as needed. He will report technical problems to the
Diving Supervisor.
- Once the Bellman has completed the cleaning and post dive checks, he closes the internal bell door equalization valves
(if needed) and he transfers to the TL. He closes the door of the bell when he is in the trunk.
- When the Bellman is in the Transfer Lock, he closes the door and the equalization valves of the trunk and informs the
LSS/LST that he can take the bell trunk away (if needed).
- From the transfer lock, the team transfers into the living chamber for rest. Before, they transfer the suits and diving gear
they have used out of the complex for cleaning using the transfer tool lock.
- The LSS/LST ensures they close the doors to the Transfer Lock, and that they are secured in their chamber.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 245 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

2.6 - Excursions during the bell runs

2.6.1 - Types of excursions

2.6.1.1 - Ascending and descending excursions

● Ascending excursions, also called upward excursions, are dives performed at depths shallower than the “storage
depth”, also called “life level”.
● Descending excursions, also called downward excursions, are dives performed at depths deeper than the storage
depth.

Upward (ascending) excursions

Storage depth

Downward (descending) excursions

2.6.1.2 - Excursion depths range

Excursions are characterised by the pressure difference existing between the storage depth and the working depth which
is called the excursion depth range or the excursion depth amplitude. There are two types of excursion depth ranges:
● Standard excursions allow moderate amplitudes. These excursions are those to be used for normal diving
operations undertaken during underwater construction or inspection projects. Depending on the storage depth,
they allow from 2 to 15 m amplitude.
● The exception excursions allow greater distances than standard excursions. However, these excursions should
not be scheduled as routine and should be employed only in special or emergency situations.

Upward exceptional excursion Emergency & “special” dives

Upward standard excursion

Normal activities

Downward standard excursion

Downward exceptional excursion Emergency & “special” dives

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 246 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
2.6.1.3 - Explanation of the excursions ranges Normam-15
NORMAM-15 excursions are the evolution of those published in the COMEX saturation procedures MT-92 still in force
in France. These excursions are limited to roughly 1/3 of those described in the US Navy diving manual.
US Navy saturation excursions are still massively used in the diving industry. However, even though some scientists say
that no one has been able to document that excursion distances are involved in the risk of decompression accidents, it is
recognized that the U.S. Navy’s procedures have led to decompression accidents in many cases, especially vestibular
symptoms. Thus, it is reasonable to consider a relationship with the amplitude of the excursions. Regarding this point, the
UK HSE study "Excursion tables in saturation diving decompression implications of current UK practice" shows the
relationship between the magnitude of the excursion, the pressure from which the excursion starts, and the volume of gas
which is predicted to form into bubbles.
Considering these facts, many diving companies have reduced their excursion limits to between 70% and 50% of the
original excursions USN to secure them. However, this rule is empirical, and for this reason, some safety organizations
have implemented studies to obtain excursion limits based on more scientific facts. NORSOK standards U-100 excursion
limits result from these studies in Norway.
It must be noted that the distances of excursion proposed by NORSOK are very similar to the “standard” excursions of
NORMAM-15 and COMEX MT-92 tables, which proves that these amplitudes are relevant. Nevertheless, NORSOK
procedures do not propose exceptional excursions such as NORMAM-15 and MT-92, which can be a problem in an
emergency or other exceptional conditions. For this reason, although the study CCO Ltd "Reinforce the US Navy
saturation procedures", recommends adopting NORSOK excursions to strengthen this procedure, the study also suggests
keeping the original excursions USN as exceptional excursion limits that can be used in an emergency.
Other elements of NORMAM-15 and MT-92 not proposed by NORSOK are the tables to manage the combined
excursions and the stabilization periods between two excursions. Note that the fact that a sufficient decompression time is
necessary between two excursions is also highlighted in the UK HSE study "Excursion tables in saturation diving
decompression implications of current UK practice", which says that that excursions and decompression must be
considered together. The same study also says that decompression problems may result from the combination of
excursions followed by the final decompression before bubbles have totally disolved. For this reason the study
recommends a stabilization period after excursions, prior to start the final decompression.
The tables below show a comparison between NORMAM 15 and NORSOK U100 excursions.
Comparison downward excursions distances NORMAM-15 - NORSOK U-100 revision 5

NORMAM NORMAM
Storage level NORSOK Difference Storage level NORSOK Difference
15 15

12 3 3 0 97 10 10 0
15 3 4 -1 101 11 11 0
18 4 5 -1 104 11 11 0
21 4 5 -1 107 11 11 0
24 5 5 0 110 11 11 0
27 5 7 -2 113 11 11 0
30 6 7 -1 116 11 11 0
33 7 7 0 119 11 11 0
37 7 8 -1 122 12 12 0
40 8 8 0 125 12 12 0
43 8 8 0 128 12 12 0
46 8 8 0 131 12 12 0
49 8 8 0 134 12 12 0
52 8 8 0 137 12 13 -1
55 8 8 0 140 13 13 0
58 8 9 -1 143 13 13 0
61 9 9 0 146 13 13 0
64 9 9 0 149 13 13 0
67 9 9 0 152 13 13 0
70 9 9 0 155 13 13 0
73 9 9 0 158 13 13 0
76 9 9 0 161 13 13 0
79 9 10 -1 165 13 13 0
82 10 10 0 168 13 13 0
85 10 10 0 171 13 13 0
88 10 10 0 174 13 13 0
91 10 10 0 177 13 13 0
94 10 10 0 180 15 13 2
Negative differences indicate that NORMAM-15 is the most stringent

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 247 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Comparison upward excursions distances NORMAM-15 - NORSOK U-100 revision 5

NORMAM NORMAM
Storage level NORSOK Difference Storage level NORSOK Difference
15 15

12 2 0 2 97 10 10 0
15 2 1 1 101 11 11 0
18 4 4 0 104 11 11 0
21 4 4 0 107 11 11 0
24 5 5 0 110 11 11 0
27 5 5 0 113 11 11 0
30 6 6 0 116 11 11 0
33 7 7 0 119 11 11 0
37 7 7 0 122 12 12 0
40 8 8 0 125 12 12 0
43 8 8 0 128 12 12 0
46 8 8 0 131 12 12 0
49 8 8 0 134 12 12 0
52 8 8 0 137 12 13 -1
55 8 8 0 140 13 13 0
58 8 8 0 143 13 13 0
61 9 9 0 146 13 13 0
64 9 9 0 149 13 13 0
67 9 9 0 152 13 13 0
70 9 9 0 155 13 13 0
73 9 9 0 158 13 13 0
76 9 9 0 161 13 13 0
79 9 9 0 165 13 13 0
82 10 10 0 168 13 13 0
85 10 10 0 171 13 13 0
88 10 10 0 174 13 13 0
91 10 10 0 177 13 13 0
94 10 10 0 180 15 13 2
Negative differences indicate that NORMAM-15 is the most stringent

Note that the differences do not exceed 2 metres, and that most distances are identical. That proves what is said
previously regarding the convergence of results. Also, when several teams not working together obtain similar answers,
we can consider that they are not far from reality.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 248 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
2.6.2 - Stabilization periods before excursions

2.6.2.1 - Excursions upon arrival at the storage depth

Excursions upon arrival at the storage depth are not possible.
Prior to undertaking excursions, the pre-dive stabilization periods explained in point 3.2.2 of Book #2, must be
completed.
After this initial stabilization period, upward and downward excursions are possible regardless of the depth in which the
saturation is.

2.6.2.2 - Excursion after a previous excursion

Normam-15 says that after an excursion the diver should observe a stabilization period before going on another excursion
according to the table below:

After a standard After a standard After an exceptional After an exceptional

Stabilization period
downward excursion upward excursion downward excursion upward excursion

Before a standard
None None None 12 hours
downward excursion

Before a standard
None None 12 hours 12 hours
upward excursion

Before an exceptional
None None 48 hours 48 hours
downward excursion

Before an exceptional
12 hours None 48 hours 48 hours
upward excursion

Fundamental rule:
A saturated diver can perform only two exceptional excursions per saturation.
As a reminder, the maximum duration of a saturation dive is 28 days.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 249 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
2.6.3 - Combinations allowed for excursions with no break
Combinations of standard and exceptional downward and upward excursions may have to be performed. The possible
combinations are recorded below and should be done according to the criteria established in the previous point.

2.6.3.1 - Standard downward excursion followed by exceptional downward excursion

Storage level

Standard downward excursion

Exceptional downward excursion Consider as an exceptional

downward excursion

2.6.3.2 - Exceptional downward excursion followed by a standard downward excursion

Storage level

Standard downward excursion

Consider as an exceptional
downward excursion

Exceptional downward excursion

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 250 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

2.6.3.3 - Standard downward excursion followed by standard upward excursion

Standard upward excursion

Storage level

Consider as a standard
downward excursion
Standard downward excursion

2.6.3.4 - Standard upward excursion followed by standard downward excursion

Standard upward excursion

Storage level

Consider as a standard
downward excursion

Standard downward excursion

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 251 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

2.6.3.5 - Standard upward excursion followed by exceptional downward excursion

1
Standard upward excursion

Storage level

Consider as an exceptional
Standard downward excursion downward excursion

Exceptional downward excursion

2.6.3.6 - Standard upward excursion followed by exceptional upward excursion

Exceptional upward excursion

Standard upward excursion

1
Storage level

Standard downward excursion Consider as an exceptional

upward excursion

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 252 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

2.6.3.7 - Exceptional upward excursion followed by a standard upward excursion

1
Exceptional upward excursion

2
Standard upward excursion

Storage level

Standard downward excursion Consider as an exceptional

upward excursion

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 253 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
2.6.4 - Recommendations for organizing bell runs and excursions (NORSOK & French decree 15th of May 92)

The working times should be organized in a way that the divers have regular rotations, so the working time and recovery
times happen at the same hours every day. This point is very important to allow the divers a full recovery of their efforts.
For a given bell run, the preferred choice should be:
● Descending excursions rather than ascending ones. It is preferable to have the storage level (chamber) and the
bell above the working level.
● Standard excursions rather than exceptional ones.

● The work planning to be arranged so as to avoid repeated ascents for the divers.

● The living depth that is as close to the working depth as possible.

When adjusting the bell:

● The depth of the bell must be kept within the limits of “standard excursion” dives.

● A bell depth equal to or deeper than the storage level is preferable.

The storage level should be as close to the working depth as possible to limit the amplitudes of the excursions.

Storage level & bell Storage level

above the working
level is preferable

The amplitudes of
the excursions
should be limited

Working level

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 254 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
2.6.5 - Duration of bell runs

The bell run durations are given “seal to seal” (from bell locked off the system to bell locked on the system).
Note that these durations are the maximum allowed by NORMAM-15 for 24 hours and that there must be at least 12
hours of full rest between 2 bell runs. The bell runs can be shortened according to the real time spent in the water.
The bell runs and times in the water should be organised as follows:

Depth 0 - 210 m 211 - 260 m 261 - 300 m 301 - 350 m

Maximum duration bell run 8 hours/24 hours 8 hours/24 hours 8 hours/24 hours 6 hours/24 hours

Maximum time in the water 6 hours/24 hours 5 hours/24 hours 4 hours/24 hours 3 hours/24 hours

Not specified
Resting time 30 min or diver change * At mid-dive At mid-dive At mid-dive
(At mid dive)

Resting time 30 min or diver change * :

The diver who goes into the water can at his own discretion and with the authorization of his supervisor, be replaced by
the emergency diver.
If he is not replaced, he should have a resting period inside the diving bell where he can remove his diving helmet, eat,
and re-hydrate. It is recommended that this resting period is to be up to thirty minutes.
Diver change or the rest period should be organized at the halftime of the time to be spent in the water.
Note that NORSOK U-100 says the following:
● The total in water time shall not exceed 5:30 hours and the break in the bell must be logged. During a two-man
bell-run, total time in water during a 12 h period shall not exceed 4 h for each diver.
● Each diver shall be given a dry day as bell-man every third day

● The diving supervisor shall have a rest period from the direct communication control after a period of 4 h. The
rest period shall be at least 30 min. The total time for this function shall be limited to 8 h in the course of a 12 h
period. The workload should determine the length of the rest periods. Inside a 24 h period supervisory personnel
should normally have a 12 h period of continuous rest.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 255 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
2.6.6 - Excursion tables

The excursion tables displayed below and on the next pages indicate the maximum excursion depths and distances metre
by metre from 10 msw to 350 msw.
To read the table, select the depth in the column on the left side and follow the horizontal line to read the corresponding
maximum distances and depths of the downward or upward standard or exceptional excursions.
In the case of a storage depth between two levels:
● For an upward excursion, select the depth immediately deeper. As an example, for a depth between 20 & 21
msw, select 21 m. It is also possible to calculate the excursion using the “upward distance”.
● For a downward excursion, select the depth immediately shallower. As an example, for a depth between 20 & 21
msw, select 20 m. It is also possible to calculate the excursion using the “downward distance”.

Life Standard excursions Exceptional excursions

depth
Downward Downward Upward Upward Downward Downward Upward Upward
(metres)
distances depths distances depths distances depths distances depths
10 3 13 2 8 Forbidden – Forbidden –
11 3 14 2 9 Forbidden – Forbidden –
12 3 15 2 10 Forbidden – Forbidden –
13 3 16 2 11 Forbidden – Forbidden –
14 3 17 2 12 Forbidden – Forbidden –
15 3 18 2 13 Forbidden – Forbidden –
16 3 19 2 14 Forbidden – Forbidden –
17 3 20 2 15 Forbidden – Forbidden –
18 4 22 4 14 Forbidden – Forbidden –
19 4 23 4 15 Forbidden – Forbidden –
20 4 24 4 16 Forbidden – Forbidden –
21 4 25 4 17 Forbidden – Forbidden –
22 4 26 4 18 Forbidden – Forbidden –
23 5 28 5 18 10 33 Forbidden –
24 5 29 5 19 10 34 Forbidden –
25 5 30 5 20 10 35 Forbidden –
26 5 31 5 21 10 36 Forbidden –
27 5 32 5 22 10 37 Forbidden –
28 5 33 5 23 10 38 Forbidden –
29 5 34 5 24 10 39 Forbidden –
30 6 36 6 24 12 42 Forbidden –
31 7 38 7 24 14 45 14 17
32 7 39 7 25 14 46 14 18
33 7 40 7 26 14 47 14 19
34 7 41 7 27 14 48 14 20
35 7 42 7 28 14 49 14 21
36 7 43 7 29 14 50 14 22
37 7 44 7 30 14 51 14 23
38 7 45 7 31 14 52 14 24
39 7 46 7 32 14 53 14 25
40 8 48 8 32 16 56 16 24
41 8 49 8 33 16 57 16 25
42 8 50 8 34 16 58 16 26
43 8 51 8 35 16 59 16 27
44 8 52 8 36 16 60 16 28

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 256 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Life Standard excursions Exceptional excursions

depth
Downward Downward Upward Upward Downward Downward Upward Upward
(metres)
distances depths distances depths distances depths distances depths
45 8 53 8 37 16 61 16 29
46 8 54 8 38 16 62 16 30
47 8 55 8 39 16 63 16 31
48 8 56 8 40 16 64 16 32
49 8 57 8 41 16 65 16 33
50 8 58 8 42 16 66 16 34
51 8 59 8 43 16 67 16 35
52 8 60 8 44 16 68 16 36
53 8 61 8 45 16 69 16 37
54 8 62 8 46 16 70 16 38
55 8 63 8 47 16 71 16 39
56 8 64 8 48 16 72 16 40
57 8 65 8 49 16 73 16 41
58 8 66 8 50 16 74 16 42
59 8 67 8 51 16 75 16 43
60 9 69 9 51 18 78 18 42
61 9 70 9 52 18 79 18 43
62 9 71 9 53 18 80 18 44
63 9 72 9 54 18 81 18 45
64 9 73 9 55 18 82 18 46
65 9 74 9 56 18 83 18 47
66 9 75 9 57 18 84 18 48
67 9 76 9 58 18 85 18 49
68 9 77 9 59 18 86 18 50
69 9 78 9 60 18 87 18 51
70 9 79 9 61 18 88 18 52
71 9 80 9 62 18 89 18 53
72 9 81 9 63 18 90 18 54
73 9 82 9 64 18 91 18 55
74 9 83 9 65 18 92 18 56
75 9 84 9 66 18 93 18 57
76 9 85 9 67 18 94 18 58
77 9 86 9 68 18 95 18 59
78 9 87 9 69 18 96 18 60
79 9 88 9 70 18 97 18 61
80 10 90 10 70 20 100 20 60
81 10 91 10 71 20 101 20 61
82 10 92 10 72 20 102 20 62
83 10 93 10 73 20 103 20 63
84 10 94 10 74 20 104 20 64
85 10 95 10 75 20 105 20 65
86 10 96 10 76 20 106 20 66
87 10 97 10 77 20 107 20 67
88 10 98 10 78 20 108 20 68

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 257 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Life Standard excursions Exceptional excursions

depth Downward Downward Upward Upward Downward Downward Upward Upward
(metres) distances depths distances depths distances depths distances depths
89 10 99 10 79 20 109 20 69
90 10 100 10 80 20 110 20 70
91 10 101 10 81 20 111 20 71
92 10 102 10 82 20 112 20 72
93 10 103 10 83 20 113 20 73
94 10 104 10 84 20 114 20 74
95 10 105 10 85 20 115 20 75
96 10 106 10 86 20 116 20 76
97 10 107 10 87 20 117 20 77
98 10 108 10 88 20 118 20 78
99 10 109 10 89 20 119 20 79
100 11 111 11 89 22 122 22 78
101 11 112 11 90 22 123 22 79
102 11 113 11 91 22 124 22 80
103 11 114 11 92 22 125 22 81
104 11 115 11 93 22 126 22 82
105 11 116 11 94 22 127 22 83
106 11 117 11 95 22 128 22 84
107 11 118 11 96 22 129 22 85
108 11 119 11 97 22 130 22 86
109 11 120 11 98 22 131 22 87
110 11 121 11 99 22 132 22 88
111 11 122 11 100 22 133 22 89
112 11 123 11 101 22 134 22 90
113 11 124 11 102 22 135 22 91
114 11 125 11 103 22 136 22 92
115 11 126 11 104 22 137 22 93
116 11 127 11 105 22 138 22 94
117 11 128 11 106 22 139 22 95
118 11 129 11 107 22 140 22 96
119 11 130 11 108 22 141 22 97
120 12 132 12 108 24 144 24 96
121 12 133 12 109 24 145 24 97
122 12 134 12 110 24 146 24 98
123 12 135 12 111 24 147 24 99
124 12 136 12 112 24 148 24 100
125 12 137 12 113 24 149 24 101
126 12 138 12 114 24 150 24 102
127 12 139 12 115 24 151 24 103
128 12 140 12 116 24 152 24 104
129 12 141 12 117 24 153 24 105
130 12 142 12 118 24 154 24 106
131 12 143 12 119 24 155 24 107
132 12 144 12 120 24 156 24 108

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 258 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Life Standard excursions Exceptional excursions

depth Downward Downward Upward Upward Downward Downward Upward Upward
(metres) distances depths distances depths distances depths distances depths
133 12 145 12 121 24 157 24 109
134 12 146 12 122 24 158 24 110
135 12 147 12 123 24 159 24 111
136 12 148 12 124 24 160 24 112
137 12 149 12 125 24 161 24 113
138 12 150 12 126 24 162 24 114
139 12 151 12 127 24 163 24 115
140 13 153 13 127 26 166 26 114
141 13 154 13 128 26 167 26 115
142 13 155 13 129 26 168 26 116
143 13 156 13 130 26 169 26 117
144 13 157 13 131 26 170 26 118
145 13 158 13 132 26 171 26 119
146 13 159 13 133 26 172 26 120
147 13 160 13 134 26 173 26 121
148 13 161 13 135 26 174 26 122
149 13 162 13 136 26 175 26 123
150 13 163 13 137 26 176 26 124
151 13 164 13 138 26 177 26 125
152 13 165 13 139 26 178 26 126
153 13 166 13 140 26 179 26 127
154 13 167 13 141 26 180 26 128
155 13 168 13 142 26 181 26 129
156 13 169 13 143 26 182 26 130
157 13 170 13 144 26 183 26 131
158 13 171 13 145 26 184 26 132
159 13 172 13 146 26 185 26 133
160 13 173 13 147 26 186 26 134
161 13 174 13 148 26 187 26 135
162 13 175 13 149 26 188 26 136
163 13 176 13 150 26 189 26 137
164 13 177 13 151 26 190 26 138
165 13 178 13 152 26 191 26 139
166 13 179 13 153 26 192 26 140
167 13 180 13 154 26 193 26 141
168 13 181 13 155 26 194 26 142
169 13 182 13 156 26 195 26 143
170 13 183 13 157 26 196 26 144
171 13 184 13 158 26 197 26 145
172 13 185 13 159 26 198 26 146
173 13 186 13 160 26 199 26 147
174 13 187 13 161 26 200 26 148
175 13 188 13 162 26 201 26 149
176 13 189 13 163 26 202 26 150

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 259 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Life Standard excursions Exceptional excursions

depth Downward Downward Upward Upward Downward Downward Upward Upward
(metres) distances depths distances depths distances depths distances depths
177 13 190 13 164 26 203 26 151
178 13 191 13 165 26 204 26 152
179 13 192 13 166 26 205 26 153
180 15 195 15 165 30 210 30 150
181 15 196 15 166 30 211 30 151
182 15 197 15 167 30 212 30 152
183 15 198 15 168 30 213 30 153
184 15 199 15 169 30 214 30 154
185 15 200 15 170 30 215 30 155
186 15 201 15 171 30 216 30 156
187 15 202 15 172 30 217 30 157
188 15 203 15 173 30 218 30 158
189 15 204 15 174 30 219 30 159
190 15 205 15 175 30 220 30 160
191 15 206 15 176 30 221 30 161
192 15 207 15 177 30 222 30 162
193 15 208 15 178 30 223 30 163
194 15 209 15 179 30 224 30 164
195 15 210 15 180 30 225 30 165
196 15 211 15 181 30 226 30 166
197 15 212 15 182 30 227 30 167
198 15 213 15 183 30 228 30 168
199 15 214 15 184 30 229 30 169
200 15 215 15 185 30 230 30 170
201 15 216 15 186 30 231 30 171
202 15 217 15 187 30 232 30 172
203 15 218 15 188 30 233 30 173
204 15 219 15 189 30 234 30 174
205 15 220 15 190 30 235 30 175
206 15 221 15 191 30 236 30 176
207 15 222 15 192 30 237 30 177
209 15 224 15 194 30 239 30 179
210 15 225 15 195 30 240 30 180
212 15 227 15 197 30 242 30 182
213 15 228 15 198 30 243 30 183
214 15 229 15 199 30 244 30 184
215 15 230 15 200 30 245 30 185
216 15 231 15 201 30 246 30 186
217 15 232 15 202 30 247 30 187
218 15 233 15 203 30 248 30 188
219 15 234 15 204 30 249 30 189
220 15 235 15 205 30 250 30 190
221 15 236 15 206 30 251 30 191
222 15 237 15 207 30 252 30 192

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 260 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Life Standard excursions Exceptional excursions

depth Downward Downward Upward Upward Downward Downward Upward Upward
(metres) distances depths distances depths distances depths distances depths
223 15 238 15 208 30 253 30 193
224 15 239 15 209 30 254 30 194
225 15 240 15 210 30 255 30 195
226 15 241 15 211 30 256 30 196
227 15 242 15 212 30 257 30 197
228 15 243 15 213 30 258 30 198
229 15 244 15 214 30 259 30 199
230 15 245 15 215 30 260 30 200
231 15 246 15 216 30 261 30 201
232 15 247 15 217 30 262 30 202
233 15 248 15 218 30 263 30 203
234 15 249 15 219 30 264 30 204
235 15 250 15 220 30 265 30 205
236 15 251 15 221 30 266 30 206
237 15 252 15 222 30 267 30 207
238 15 253 15 223 30 268 30 208
239 15 254 15 224 30 269 30 209
240 15 255 15 225 30 270 30 210
241 15 256 15 226 30 271 30 211
242 15 257 15 227 30 272 30 212
243 15 258 15 228 30 273 30 213
244 15 259 15 229 30 274 30 214
245 15 260 15 230 30 275 30 215
246 15 261 15 231 30 276 30 216
247 15 262 15 232 30 277 30 217
248 15 263 15 233 30 278 30 218
249 15 264 15 234 30 279 30 219
250 15 265 15 235 30 280 30 220
251 15 266 15 236 30 281 30 221
252 15 267 15 237 30 282 30 222
253 15 268 15 238 30 283 30 223
254 15 269 15 239 30 284 30 224
255 15 270 15 240 30 285 30 225
256 15 271 15 241 30 286 30 226
257 15 272 15 242 30 287 30 227
258 15 273 15 243 30 288 30 228
259 15 274 15 244 30 289 30 229
260 15 275 15 245 30 290 30 230
261 15 276 15 246 30 291 30 231
262 15 277 15 247 30 292 30 232
263 15 278 15 248 30 293 30 233
264 15 279 15 249 30 294 30 234
265 15 280 15 250 30 295 30 235
266 15 281 15 251 30 296 30 236

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 261 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Life Standard excursions Exceptional excursions

depth Downward Downward Upward Upward Downward Downward Upward Upward
(metres) distances depths distances depths distances depths distances depths
267 15 282 15 252 30 297 30 237
268 15 283 15 253 30 298 30 238
269 15 284 15 254 30 299 30 239
270 15 285 15 255 30 300 30 240
271 15 286 15 256 29 300 30 241
272 15 287 15 257 28 300 30 242
273 15 288 15 258 27 300 30 243
274 15 289 15 259 26 300 30 244
275 15 290 15 260 25 300 30 245
276 15 291 15 261 24 300 30 246
277 15 292 15 262 23 300 30 247
278 15 293 15 263 22 300 30 248
279 15 294 15 264 21 300 30 249
280 15 295 15 265 20 300 30 250
281 15 296 15 266 19 300 30 251
282 15 297 15 267 18 300 30 252
283 15 298 15 268 17 300 30 253
284 15 299 15 269 16 300 30 254
285 15 300 15 270 15 300 30 255
286 14 300 14 272 14 300 25 261
287 13 300 13 274 13 300 25 262
288 12 300 12 276 12 300 25 263
289 11 300 11 278 11 300 25 264
290 10 300 10 280 10 300 25 265
291 10 301 10 281 Forbidden – 25 266
292 10 302 10 282 Forbidden – 25 267
293 10 303 10 283 Forbidden – 25 268
294 10 304 10 284 Forbidden – 25 269
295 10 305 10 285 Forbidden – 25 270
296 10 306 10 286 Forbidden – 25 271
297 10 307 10 287 Forbidden – 25 272
298 10 308 10 288 Forbidden – 25 273
299 10 309 10 289 Forbidden – 25 274
300 10 310 10 290 Forbidden – 25 275
301 10 311 10 291 Forbidden – Forbidden –
302 10 312 10 292 Forbidden – Forbidden –
303 10 313 10 293 Forbidden – Forbidden –
304 10 314 10 294 Forbidden – Forbidden –
305 10 315 10 295 Forbidden – Forbidden –
306 10 316 10 296 Forbidden – Forbidden –
307 10 317 10 297 Forbidden – Forbidden –
308 10 318 10 298 Forbidden – Forbidden –
309 10 319 10 299 Forbidden – Forbidden –
310 10 320 10 300 Forbidden – Forbidden –

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 262 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Life Standard excursions Exceptional excursions

depth
Downward Downward Upward Upward Downward Downward Upward Upward
(metres)
distances depths distances depths distances depths distances depths
311 10 321 10 301 Forbidden – Forbidden –
312 10 322 10 302 Forbidden – Forbidden –
313 10 323 10 303 Forbidden – Forbidden –
314 10 324 10 304 Forbidden – Forbidden –
315 10 325 10 305 Forbidden – Forbidden –
316 10 326 10 306 Forbidden – Forbidden –
317 10 327 10 307 Forbidden – Forbidden –
318 10 328 10 308 Forbidden – Forbidden –
319 10 329 10 309 Forbidden – Forbidden –
320 10 330 10 310 Forbidden – Forbidden –
321 10 331 10 311 Forbidden – Forbidden –
322 10 332 10 312 Forbidden – Forbidden –
323 10 333 10 313 Forbidden – Forbidden –
324 10 334 10 314 Forbidden – Forbidden –
325 10 335 10 315 Forbidden – Forbidden –
326 10 336 10 316 Forbidden – Forbidden –
327 10 337 10 317 Forbidden – Forbidden –
328 10 338 10 318 Forbidden – Forbidden –
329 10 339 10 319 Forbidden – Forbidden –
330 10 340 10 320 Forbidden – Forbidden –
331 10 341 10 321 Forbidden – Forbidden –
332 10 342 10 322 Forbidden – Forbidden –
333 10 343 10 323 Forbidden – Forbidden –
334 10 344 10 324 Forbidden – Forbidden –
335 10 345 10 325 Forbidden – Forbidden –
336 10 346 10 326 Forbidden – Forbidden –
337 10 347 10 327 Forbidden – Forbidden –
338 10 348 10 328 Forbidden – Forbidden –
339 10 349 10 329 Forbidden – Forbidden –
340 10 350 10 330 Forbidden – Forbidden –
341 9 350 10 331 Forbidden – Forbidden –
342 8 350 10 332 Forbidden – Forbidden –
343 7 350 10 333 Forbidden – Forbidden –
344 6 350 10 334 Forbidden – Forbidden –
345 5 350 10 335 Forbidden – Forbidden –
346 4 350 10 336 Forbidden – Forbidden –
347 3 350 10 337 Forbidden – Forbidden –
348 2 350 10 338 Forbidden – Forbidden –
349 1 350 10 339 Forbidden – Forbidden –
350 Forbidden – Forbidden – Forbidden – Forbidden –

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 263 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

2.7 - Intermediate compressions and decompression

2.7.1 - intermediate compressions

The 1st storage depth may be the final life level from which the operations are organized. Nevertheless, it often happens
that the chamber has to be readjusted to a depth that allows reaching a workplace that is beyond the range permitted by
the downward excursions from the initial storage level.
The relocation of the chamber cannot be undertaken at the speed of 10 metres/minute used by the divers during
excursions and a procedure similar to the one used for the 1st pressurization must be implemented.
Two scenarios may happen that are explained in this chapter: Pressurization of the chamber during a rest period and
pressurization of the chamber during a bell run.

Initial storage level

Standard downward excursion

2nd storage level

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 264 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
2.7.2 - Summary of the pressurization procedure of the chamber during a rest period

2.7.2.1 - Procedures for compressions starting within the standard saturation range
2.7.2.1.1 - Gas parameters
PP O2: 0.4 to 0.57 bar (400 to 570 mb)
PP CO2 : < 0.005 bar (< 5 mb)
2.7.2.1.2 - Pressurization speeds and stabilization stops

Amplitude of the
Maximum compression speeds Stabilization stops
pressurization

< 30 metres - From 10 to 180 m: 1 minutes/metre

- No stabilization required, even in the case of transition to a
Range: from 10 m to - From 181 to 200 m: 4 minutes/metre
deep saturation (below 180 m).
above 210 m - From 201 to 210 m: 6 minutes/metre

30 to < 50 metres - From 10 to 180 m: 1 minutes/metre - 2 hours stabilization when reaching the new saturation
Range: from 10 m to - From 181 to 200 m: 4 minutes/metre depth, not stopping at 200 m in case of a transition to a
above 230 m - From 201 to 230 m: 6 minutes/metre deep saturation (below 180 m).

Apply the same procedure as for an initial Apply the same procedure as for an initial compression:
compression: - Depending on the final depth, apply the stabilization
> 50 metres
- From 10 to 180 m: 1 minutes/metre criteria of a standard or a deep saturation indicated in
Range: from 10 m to - From 181 to 200 m: 4 min/metre points 3.2.2.1, 3.2.2.2, and 3.2.23.
above 350 m
- From 201 to 300 m: 6 min/metre - Start from the storage depth where the chamber is and
- From 301 to 350 m: 8 minutes/metre apply the procedure from this point to the next depth .

2.7.2.2 - Procedures for compressions starting within the deep saturation range
2.7.2.2.1 - Gas parameters
PP O2: 0.4 to 0.57 bar (400 to 570 mb)
PP CO2 : < 0.005 bar (< 5 mb)
2.7.2.2.2 - Pressurization speeds and stabilization stops

Amplitude of the
Maximum compression speed Stabilization stops
pressurization

< 30 metres
- From 181 to 200 m: 4 minutes/metre
Range: from 181 m to - From 200 to 300 m: 6 minutes/metre - No stabilization required.
above 330 m

31 to 50 metres
- From 181 to 200 m: 4 minutes/metre - Two hours of stabilization when reaching the new
Range: from 181 m to - From 200 to 300 m: 6 minutes/metre saturation depth.
above 350 m

Apply the same procedure as for an initial compression, but

Apply the same procedure as for an initial starting below 180 m:
> 50 metres compression, but starting below 180 m: - Depending on the final depth, apply the stabilization
Range: from 181 m to - From 181 to 200 m: 4 minutes/metre criteria of a deep saturation indicated in points 3.2.2.2, and
above 350 m - From 200 to 300 m: 6 minutes/metre 3.2.2.3.
- From 300 to 350 m: 8 minutes/metre - Start from the storage depth where the chamber is and
apply the procedure from this point to the next depth .

2.7.2.3 - Procedures for compressions starting within the exceptional saturation range
2.7.2.3.1 - Gas parameters
PP O2: 0.4 to 0.57 bar (400 to 570 mb)
PP CO2 : < 0.005 bar (< 5 mb)
2.7.2.3.2 - Pressurization speeds and stabilization stops
Intermediate compressions should not be done in dives with storage depth (life level) between 300 and 350.
However, if it is necessary for safety reasons, the speed for pressurization and the procedures for stabilization stops
should be those of the initial pressurization that can be found in the table on the next page.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 265 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Compression rates and stabilization in the initial compression prior to start the diving operations

Saturation depth Maximum compression speed Stabilization stops

- From 300 to 350 m: 8 minutes/metre

300 to 350 metres Stabilization stop of least 12 hours at the saturation depth
(0.125 m/minute)

2.7.2.4 - Excursions upon arrival at the storage depth

Prior to undertaking excursions, the stabilization periods for compression distances superior to 30 m that can be read in
the tables in point 2.1 must have been completed. After this initial rest period, upward and downward excursions are
possible regardless of the depth in which the saturation is.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 266 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
2.7.3 - Pressurization of the chamber during a bell run

It may happen that small readjustments of the chamber have to be performed during a bell run.
Change the chamber storage level to a deeper depth during a bell run is possible only if the new depth of the chamber is
within the standard excursion limits of the divers at work.
Also, the divers at rest in the chamber must not have performed an exceptional upward excursion within the previous 12
hours.
The change of level must be performed at the compression speeds indicated in point 3.5.2.

Compression speeds of 1 Storage level #1

intermediate compressions

Compression within
the standard
excursion limits from
Downward standard
storage level #1
excursions
2 Storage level #2

Maximum downward standard excursions limit level #1

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 267 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
2.7.4 - Decompression during a bell run and excursions after an intermediate decompression

2.7.4.1 - Decompress the chamber during a bell run

It may happen that small upward readjustments of the chamber have to be performed.
However, we must keep in mind that NORSOK standard U 100 says that “a decompression shall not start with a pressure
reducing (upward) excursion”, and that this point is also confirmed in the French decree of May 1992.
For these reasons, the chamber should never be decompressed during a bell run.

2.7.4.2 - Excursions after an intermediate decompression

NORMAM-15 says:
After an intermediate decompression, no stabilization period is required to do a downward excursion upon arrival at the
new depth.
However, to do an upward excursion, it will be necessary to have a stabilization period equivalent to the decompression
time up to the excursion depth. In other words, the stabilization period must be equal to time needed to reach the
shallower storage level (level #2) at an ascent speed of 50 minutes/metre (or 90 min/metre above 20 m) plus the time that
should be necessary to reach the upper level of the planned excursion at the same speed.
To do an upward excursion it will be necessary
to have a stabilization period equivalent to the
decompression time up to the excursion depth.
Thus, the ascent time #1 + the ascent time #2.

2
Storage level #2

1 Storage level #1

No stabilization period is
required to do a downward
excursion.

Notes:
● After an ascent to a new storage depth, there is an increased risk of a decompression accident which will last
several days. Thus, the upward excursions should be avoided or minimised for several days.
● As indicated in point 2.5.4 “Recommendations for organizing bell runs and excursions”, it is preferable to
establish a shallower storage depth rather than perform a series of repetitive upward excursions.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 268 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

2.8 - Divers at work during the bell runs

- The divers leave the bell only when the supervisor permits them to do so.
- When leaving the bell, the divers ensure that the underwater conditions are practicable: The job site is easily reachable,
the current is fair, their gear (helmet, hot water suit…) is working fine.
- The divers ensure at all times that their umbilicals are in a direct way to the bell and will not be entangled: The divers
should be able to return quickly to the bell at any moment.
- If not already installed, the divers install the downline at the dedicated place.
- The installation of the job has to be done according to the task plan.
- Load transfers from the surface to the bottom or above the surface should not be performed when the bell and the divers
are at the bottom and potentially underneath (refer to point 1.2.6).
- The potential dangers such as water intakes, electrical, pipelines, and others, must be avoided by the divers… They
must remind the divers before leaving the bell and when on the worksite: The supervisor must stop a diver coming
towards dangerous areas.
- The diver must never be in front of devices which are or were under pressure or causing suction:
● The approach must be from the side, even for devices indicated secured.

● Before any action, the diver should ensure no residual pressure (rag at the end of a stick, “zero on gauge”).

● The supervisor must stop any diver working in a front of a device with potential suction or blow-out.

- The diver should not start any action if he is not 100% sure that it is safe.
- When working in the vicinity of an ROV, the divers and the supervisor ensure the position of the machine and that it is
sufficiently far from the divers and their umbilicals.
- If working from a Dynamic Positioning vessel using a taut wire, the location of the taut wire must be remembered.
- The diver should be in direct communication with the supervisor all the time, and misunderstanding must be avoided:
● The diver should always repeat the instructions given by the supervisor and report to him any action he is
performing.
● When the instructions are unclear, the diver requests clarification.

● The diver should return to the bell if the communications set is not working properly: Trying to understand
instructions or reports through a bad communication system can lead to misunderstanding, thus an accident.
● If the diver does not perform the task correctly, the supervisor must stop him and ensure that the procedure
explained during the toolbox talk is followed.
● If the supervisor considers that he has no control of the diver, the supervisor must stop the dive.

- In case of an incident, even minor, the diver should report to the supervisor.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 269 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

2.9 - Bell and helmets cleaning following the bell run.

2.9.1 - Bell cleansing

The bell may be dirtied during the bell run and must be cleaned at the end of it to ensure that the next team will operate in
a clean bell without pollutants and pathogens. The procedure used will depend on the degrees of dirt of the bell. The bell
is often soiled when the divers work on muddy bottoms. However, it can be nearly clean when the divers operate in clear
water at mid-depth.
If the bell is not dirty, the procedure of cleaning can be similar to the one recommended in the document DMAC 26 for
the cleaning and disinfection of chambers.
● Cleansing with disinfecting agents such as "Tego 103G", “Tego 2000”, or “Trigene” should be started at the top
of the bell and continued downwards, with excess cleanser ultimately drained from the bottom. Relays of fresh
clothes/sponges should be used on each occasion and discarded after limited use.
● The disinfectant agents selected should be very effective against the microbes known to flourish in the bell and
be non-toxic to man. Additionally, they should be odourless, non-volatile, and be free from irritant and
sensitising properties. "The advantage of Tego products compared with others is that they combine the
requirements above. These disinfectants should be used at the appropriate dilution, skin contact should be
minimised by the use of personal protective equipment, and they should be applied by cloth or sponge to avoid
the formation of an airborne aerosol.
● Note that the reclaim system must be regularly cleaned, which includes the regular cleaning of the water traps.

If the bell is dirty, or the diving operations have been performed in contaminated waters, the procedure above will be
insufficient to return it as it should be. In this case, a substantial quantity of water may be necessary, in addition to more
working time. For this reason, it may be advantageous to recover the unit to the surface and disconnect it to allow the
surface assistants to do it with more appropriate tools such as soft water jets.
● When the bell is opened, the water jet is used to clean all the soiled parts. That includes the umbilicals.

● When the dirt has been removed, the bell must be disinfected. The products to be used and the procedures for
final cleaning and disinfection are the same as those indicated above.
● When the full disinfection is completed, the bell can be returned to service.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 270 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
2.9.2 - Helmet cleaning
Helmets are parts of the diving system that are the most susceptible to be contamination vectors, as pathogens accumulate
here during the dive. An additional problem linked to common practices is that helmets are usually shared between
divers, increasing the risk of contamination. For this reason, they must be cleaned after each dive.
IMCA suggests using a quick procedure between two dives and a full cleaning procedure at the end of the day.
The proposed quick sanitizing procedure implies the following steps:
1. Wet or immerse all components to be sanitized with an appropriate disinfectant solution for at least 10 minutes
and lightly scrub over the components with a nylon brush or a clean dishrag to remove saliva mucus build up.
2. After 10 minutes, thoroughly rinse components using running potable water.
3. Allow to dry or pat dry with clean towel.
This cleaning procedure requires time to be performed adequately. Also, there is a risk that some parts of the oro-nasal
remain contaminated, particularly the exhaust regulator. Thus, considering these problems and the fact that each diver
uses the same helmet during the bell run, the best option can be replacing the helmet used with a clean one that have been
fully cleaned and reviewed by the technicians after the bell run. Changing a helmet takes 10 minutes, which is the time
given to allows the disinfectant to operate.
The full cleaning procedure presented by several safety organization implies the following steps:
1. Secure and bleed the gas supplies. Disconnect the gas connections, disconnect the communication wires, and
secure the open ends with a dedicated cap or tape them to ensure that no water can enter them.
2. Transfer the helmet outside the bell.
3. The demand regulator clamp is opened, and the components such as cover, diaphragm, assembly oral-nasal
mask, and nose cleaning pad are dismantled and stored adequately not to lose them.
○ The demand regulator must be rinsed with mild detergent and fresh water and then rinsed thoroughly.
○ Depending on the recommendations of the manufacturer, the parts are soaked for at least 5 minutes. Note
that IMCA suggests the sanitary solution stays in contact for 10 minutes.
○ Then the elements are scrubbed using a small nylon brush. The pieces that have been in contact with the
detergent must be rinsed.
4. The pieces that have been in contact with the detergent are then soaked in fresh water to ensure that the
detergent is fully is rinsed off.
5. The head cushion assembly must be removed. If it is wet with perspiration or water, it must be cleaned and
dried.
6. Then, the technician should inspect the spares for damages.
7. The helmet liner should be washed with soap and water, rinsed in freshwater, dripped, and dried.
8. The earphone covers and the microphone should be removed from the oral-nasal mask, washed with a mild
detergent solution, rinsed with fresh water, and dried.
9. The components should be laid out to allow for drying before storing
10. The neck-dam ring assembly is then cleaned with a mild detergent solution and thoroughly rinsed with fresh
water.
11. When the components are fully dried, they can be reinstalled.
12. The helmet should be then tested.
13. When the tests are satisfactory, The helmet is protected from contamination in a sealed bag and then be
transferred into the system when required.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 271 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Page left blank intentionally

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 272 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

3) Emergency procedures

The scenarios indicated below are only some of the numerous scenarios which could happen during a bell run. It must be
remembered that when an undesirable event happens, it may not be exactly as indicated in the scenario considered and is
often cumulated with another undesirable event.

3.1 - Principles for injured or unconscious diver recovery

3.1.1 - Diver injured but conscious

3.1.1.1 - Potential consequences

- Diver suffering
- Panic
- Unable to return to the bell
- It must be kept in mind that the situation can quickly change and a person conscious, can quickly fall unconscious.

3.1.1.2 - Actions to control

Action diver Action bellman Action surface

- Depending on the depth and availability,

- Deploy the man-lift & flood the bottom the 2nd diver, the bellman, or the
of the bell. standby diver is warned in case
- Prepare for rescue if required and wait for assistance is needed
instructions from the supervisor. - Alert the team, diver medics (chamber
- Follow the instructions from the and outside) contact the diving medical
supervisor (rescue or umbilical). specialist (Ask the diver medic to do it).
- Inform the surface. - Recover the casualty in the bell, check - Alert the bridge.
- Give a status of his situation. the condition of the casualty, and report - Instruct the bellman to come up on the
to surface + 1st aid (Diver medic), umbilical if the injured diver is able to
- Try to return to the basket if he can do it. secure the casualty (If necessary put the speak and give clear indications. Apply
casualty on BIBS with rich mix). the procedure for unconscious diver if
- Prepare for recovering. Close and seal the the casualty does not answer properly to
bottom door, and prepare for transfer. the questions.
- When the bell is connected to the system, - When the casualty is in the bell, inform
help the injured diver to transfer in the the diver medic and give a 1st status.
TL. - Recover the bell and transfer the casualty
to the chamber (hospital).

Note: Diver reporting injured

If there is too much umbilical in the bell, and
the bellman has no time to stow it, and/or the Supervisor:
need of space to assist the casualty, the - Send the “rescue diver”
umbilical can be cut, and the hat and the bail - Alert the team, diver medics, diving medical specialist.
out dropped outside the bell. - Alert the bridge

Injured diver
Yes able to speak and to No
answer properly to
questions ?

Injured diver Do not come up on the umbilical

Yes able to return to the No and wait for the information
bell with the help of from the rescue diver
Come up on the umbilical the umbilical? Wait for the rescue diver

The “rescue diver” helps the Apply the procedure for

casualty to return to the bell unconscious diver recovery
Yes Injured diver able to No
enter in the bell ?
The Bellman wait for the rescue diver or connects the
The casualty comes man-lift onto the top D link of the harness. Check the condition of the
up into be the bell casualty and report + 1st aid.
The Bellman transfers the injured diver into bell with Prepare the bell for recovery
the help of the rescue diver or using the man-lift.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 273 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.1.2 - Diver unconscious due to wrong gas, loss of supply, or other reason

3.1.2.1 - Potential consequences

Depending on the reasons:
- Asphyxia
- Hat off / Drowning
- Injuries
- Fatality if nothing is undertaken

3.1.2.2 - Summary of the actions to control

Action diver (rescue) Action bellman Action surface / In chamber

- If not informed by the supervisor that

the back up supply from surface is on
Diver (Casualty) : line, change the divers supply to the
Unconscious onboard gas. Supervisor:
- Deploy the man-lift & flood the bottom - Switch on backup supply and inform the
of the bell bellman that the diver is unresponsive
- Prepare for rescue if required, and wait and the supply on back up.
Rescue diver:
for instructions form the supervisor. - Depending on possibilities send: The 2nd
- Follow diver’s umbilical to locate diver.
- Follow the instructions from the diver, the bellman or the standby diver.
- Once the casualty is reached, open the
supervisor (rescue or umbilical).- - Request monitoring from the ROV
free flow to flush the line.
Recover the casualty into the bell (with - When the rescue diver is on the casualty,
- Report the status to the surface the help of the rescue diver or alone). request him to flush the mask (to be sure
- Drag the diver to the bell and upon When the casualty is in the bell: that there is no wrong gas in the line).
arrival , hook the man-lift onto the D - Record the status and inform LSS/LST &
link (top of harness). - Secure him and remove his hat ASAP.
the diver medic in chamber.
- Recover diver into the bell as soon as - Check the casualty.
- When the casualty is in the bell, prepare
possible. (If the rescue diver is the - Install a semi-rigid collard and a guedel
the team for bell recovery and the
bellman , he has to return in the bell 1st) tube on the casualty to free the airways
transfer of the casualty to the chamber.
and drain the mouth. Start assisted
ventilation and CPR if necessary (see Diver medic in TL & chamber:
Warning: next page). Follow the instructions. - Remove the casualty from the bell.
It could be possible that in case of 2 divers - Recover and store the umbilicals, close - check airways, CPR may be necessary.
at work, the 2 divers become unconscious. and seal the door, prepare for ascent and - Put the casualty on BIBS with rich mix.
In this case, the first priority is to restore report when ready.
a correct gas supply to the unconscious - Report status to surface and wait for
- Put the casualty on rich mix gas, and instructions from the diving medical
divers prior to recovering into the bell. watch him during the ascent. Perform
This is the worse scenario, and in this specialist.
CPR if necessary.
case, the ROV may be used to help.
- Transfer the casualty to the TL when the
bell is back on the system.

3.1.2.3 - Water level control before leaving the bell

Note that this topic is already discussed in point 1.1.2,
"Diving bell", of this document.
Flood up hose
The transfer of an unconscious casualty through the bottom
hatch requires strenuous efforts that, depending on the size
and weight of the casualty, the bellman may not be able to
provide. Also, the bell may not be equipped with a standoff Valve opened
frame or a clump weight designed to be used as a stair. Water level
Raising the water level inside the bell can help in this matter,
as a higher water level will help the bellman or the divers
climbing back inside. Note that if the bellman forgets to raise
the level before leaving the bell, he may have great difficulty
getting back inside.
Also, care must be taken not to flood equipment such as the
scrubber unit and communications systems.
The partial flooding system's function is to avoid the bell to
be totally flooded if the valve is left open by mistake while
the bellman is leaving the bell to rescue the diver.
When the divers are back in the bell, the excess water is
flushed out by activating the pressurization valve. For this
reason, this system is gas consuming.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 274 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.1.2.4 - Transfer an unconscious diver into the bell
There must be a mechanical lifting device installed in the bell to secure the casualty and lift him as high as possible inside
the bell to clear the trunking. During the bell run, the lifting device's hook should be deployed and adjusted around 1 foot
below the hatch.

1 foot

The hook of the lifting device must be connected to the D link on the top of the harness as another lifting point could
compromise the recover of the unconscious diver into the bell. (see picture below)

3.1.2.5 - Priorities
Experience has shown that bringing the man inside the bell, clearing him from the trunking, closing and sealing the door,
can take a surprisingly long time, and therefore the helmet needs to be removed as soon as possible after the diver is
secured in the bell. Note that the resuscitation must take place first.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 275 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.1.2.6 - Assessing the state of the diver (Source: COMEX medical book)
When the casualty is back and secured inside the bell, the bellman/diver medic should assess the state of the diver:
- Breathing may have stopped. Presence of breathing will be confirmed or not as soon as his mask is removed.
- Heart beat may have ceased. Cardiac function will have to be checked at the carotid artery.
- He can present some visible injuries.
- Note that the casualty may recover consciousness.
The state of the diver should be immediately reported to the diver medic at the surface who should be in touch with the
Diving Medical Specialist.

3.1.2.7 - Assisted ventilation (Main source: COMEX medical book)

When it has been established that the diver is not breathing:
- Airway must be cleared of vomit or other foreign matter.
- Respiration must be restored.
- The rigid collar fitted around the neck will raise the chin and open the airway.
- The Guedel tube (oropharyngeal airway) must be inserted (A screw type mouth opener should be provided in the medical
kit DMAC 15):
● It will ensure the tongue is "out of the way"
● It will ensure a free airway
- The resuscitator can be then installed if possible. (Resuscitator is preferable than mouth to mouth)

Resuscitator

“Guedel” tube

Collar

- Then, assisted ventilation can be started along with cardiac massage

if necessary.
- It is recommended to keep the water level high to prevent pooling of
blood in the legs, as the blood density is similar to that of sea water.
- It is important that the Dive Supervisor keep the communication to a
minimum
at this point so the bell man can concentrate on the rescue. Water level kept high to prevent
pooling of blood in the legs.

3.1.2.8 - External cardiac massage

The main problem in a diving bell is the limited space to manage a casualty. If the casualty is hanged and a pressure is
applied without fulcrum, the result will be the victim swinging and inefficient massage, as a cardiac massage cannot be
performed if there is no fulcrum.
Several procedures can be used to answer to these problems.
- The 1st procedure consists to sit the patient in the lower part of the bell, which is partially flooded, or on a seat. The legs
can be raised to improve the blood supply to the vital organs (heart, brain), and gain some space. The casualty is
maintained in position by his harness which is secured on the wall of the bell. This procedure is possible only if the bell
is sufficiently wide, and the casualty can be secured to not fall in the trunk.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 276 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
The victim must be secured to
the side of the bell. Do not secure
the rope on a valve or a pipe.

The wall is used as fulcrum

The two next procedures (2 & 3) were proposed in the medical book COMEX:

.- The 2nd procedure consists to maintain the patient suspended at bellman's level:
● Embrace diver from the front under his arms

● Lower and apply your head against his sternum

● Pull patient against your head rhythmically.

This technique is indicated as quite efficient and can be applied for extensive
periods of time.

- The 3rd procedure consists to maintain the patient suspended chest high:
● Get hold of patient's harness at shoulder level from the front

● Apply your knee against his sternum

● Pull him against your knee rhythmically.

- The 4th procedure is taught by some diving schools, and consists to maintain
the patient suspended in the bottom trunk and perform the CPR there:
● Push the casualty to the side of the trunk with your legs and maintain
him in this position.
● Start the compression when the side of the trunk can be used as
fulcrum.

These techniques allow cardiac massage to be performed without first removing the back pack, thereby saving some
precious seconds.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 277 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.1.2.9 - Use of defibrillators (Source: DMAC, Helix, & manufactures)
The Diving Medical Advisory Committee (DMAC) has published the“Report on tests of Zoll automatic external
defibrillator function in hyperbaric heliox conditions” from Helix Energy Solutions. This well-documented report shows
that the equipment tested had some malfunctions when used on a fully autonomous mode in the test chamber. To correct
this problem, the authors suggest that the preferred solution is to install the unit outside the chamber and connect its
external plug to an electrical penetrator with a corresponding plug internally onto which the defibrillator electrodes can
be connected. Unfortunately, such a solution is not possible with a bell or must necessitate studying and installing a
specific system.
Other articles regarding hyperbaric defibrillation in medical hyperbaric chambers exist mostly written by medics or
manufacturers. However, the tools described in these publications are not designed for the pressures in saturation
systems. Nevertheless, the progress of technology may quickly change this status.

3.1.2.10 - When cardiac and respiratory functions are restored (Source: COMEX medical book)
If the man is still not conscious, priority should then be given to:
- Clear him off the trunking
- Lower the water level
- Close and secure the hatch
- Check the patient again.
When the hatch is closed, the bell can be lifted up and the bellman can devote all his attention to the patient.
He should not be left hanging in the vertical position. Attempts should be made to sit him up.

Unconsciousness is a sign that blood circulation may not yet be normal, and that not
enough blood is reaching the brain.
In order to help in this respect, another manoeuvre can be attempted, which will
consist of re-lifting the man by means of the mechanical lifting device, but this time,
from one of the lifting eyes fitted on his harness at the belt or bottom level.
This manoeuvre may be restricted by the size of the bell but should allow a
sufficient flow of blood to reach the brain.

3.1.2.11 - Transfer the patient to the chamber (Source: COMEX medical book/ CCO Ltd )
If the bell is connected laterally, the patient is passed through the
lateral hub after mating the bell to the chamber, as follows:
- A blanket is laid in the hub,
- The diver is laid on the blanket,
- The blanket is gently pulled into the chamber.
While waiting for instruction from the Diving Medical Specialist,
put the patient on BIBS with high PO2 breathing mixture.

If the bell is connected through the bottom hatch, the

patient is lowered through the connecting trunk using Winch line
the dedicated winch and his harness.
In this case, there must be some precautions to ensure
that the casualty will not be caught by the rungs and
adequately managed:
- The limbs should be arranged such that they cannot
be passed behind a rung (eventually attach them).
- The body should be adequately oriented and is
guided during the lowering to the transfer lock.
- A diver should be present in the trunk to control the
casualty during the descent phase.

Rungs

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 278 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

3.2 - Incidents during the launching & recovery, and when the bell is at depth

3.2.1 - Incidents during the launching & recovery of the bell

3.2.1.1 - Uncontrollable bell movements during 1st lift

- Potential consequences:
● Shocks whith may result of damages to the bell, winches, and lifting cables.

● Damages to other equipment.

● Personnel injured.

● Falls to deck or at sea.

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Stop the action and return the bell to the

initial position. Use tag lines for
- Stay in his seat and secure his safety belt controlling the bell if possible.
- Stay in their seats and secure their safety or harness. - In case of shocks, make sure they have
belts or harnesses.
- Report uncomfortable condition. not damaged the bell, particularly the
flanges, clamp, and seal.
- Ensure the divers are in their seats.

3.2.1.2 - Too many waves in the splash zone

- Potential consequences:
● Bell tossed by the waves and damaged as a result of shocks to the hull.

● Divers uncomfortable or injured.

● The standby diver cannot be launched.

● The rescue ROV cannot be launched.

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Stop the dive and recover the bell

immediately, or use the aerator system if
- Requests aborting the dive immediately.
available (see point 1.1.10.8).
- Stay in his seat and secure his safety belt
- Stay in their seats and secure their safety - Ensure that the divers are secured in their
or harness.
belts or harnesses. seats and not injured.
- In case of shocks, perform a checklist
- Check the bell to make sure that shocks
and report to the supervisor.
have not damaged the bell, particularly
the flanges, clamps and seals.

3.2.1.3 - Strong current detected when the bell arrives at depth

- Potential consequences
● Fatigue

● Hypercapnia

● Intervention of the rescue diver dangerous or impossible.

● ROV launching and bell rescue difficult or impossible.

- Actions to implement

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Stop the descent if strong currents are

reported during the descent.
- Send the information to the supervisor as
- Send the information to the supervisor as soon as detected. - Stand by for improvement in the bell if it
soon as detected. is at the bottom and the rescue of the bell
- If the diver has been launched, recover
using ROV is possible.
- Return to the bell. the diver when instructed to do so.
- Abort the bell run if there is too much
- Wait for instructions.
current and the deployment of rescue
divers or ROV is not possible.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 279 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.2.2.4 - Loss of bell pressure when it is at the surface
- Potential consequences:
● Uncontrolled loss of pressure is one of the most critical incidents which can happen with a bell. It must be kept
in mind that such an incident can trigger a decompression accident, or worse, an explosive decompression. (See
the report of “Byford Dolphin” accident in Book #4 “Diving accidents”).
- The actions to control the situation will depend on:
● The nature of the leak. (what is affected, where it is, the quantity of gas lost).

● Where the bell is (at depth or the surface).

● Whether the problem can be solved or controlled.

● Whether there are sufficient gas reserves to perform a transfer to the chamber despite the leak.

● Whether a wet transfer can take place or not.

Notes:
All hollow penetrators of a bell must be fitted with protection valves or other devices to stop catastrophic pressure loss
(IMCA D 024 /section 5/ point 5.5 & section 6 / point 6.4).
There should be spare O-seals in the bell.
Viewports are sensitive parts: Viewports in the lower half should have protective covers both internal and external.
Other viewports require external protective covers only. This protection may be accomplished by the installation of
plastic covers (or similar) over the viewports (IMCA D 024 / section 2/ point 2.2). In addition, blank flanges should be
available in the bell to cover damaged portholes.
- Possible actions if the incident occurs at the surface

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

Maintain the pressure of the bell.

- Inform the surface and check for leaks.
- Ask the divers and the deck to identify
- If the problem is from a valve the reason for the leak.
unintentionally opened, close it.
- If the leak cannot be dealt with,
- If the problem is from a damaged pipe, depending on the situation (bell above
close the valve designed to isolate this the surface, in the process of locking on,
part of the bell. etc...), evaluate whether it is better to
- Assist the bellman - If the problem is from a porthole, install lock on the system and perform a quick
the blank. transfer or to send the bell to the
- If the problem cannot be solved, standby working depth for a wet transfer.
for instruction. - If the transfer to the TL is the chosen
- When the bell is locked on, transfer from option, alert the LSS/LST and divers in
the bell as quickly as possible and close the chambers to prepare the TL for quick
the trunking door. transfer and ensure that all door and vent
valves are closed.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 280 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.2.2 - Incidents when the bell is at depth

3.2.2.1 - Underwater current coming up during the dive

- Potential consequences:
● CO2 poisoning (Hypercapnia) / Fatigue

● Inability to return to the bell / Possible panic

● Launching of the rescue diver compromised (Rescue diver: Bellman or Diver #2, or surface stand-by if possible)

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

Information by:
- If not informed by the surface: Inform - Indicators on deck (current meter)
the supervisor that the status of the - Breathing rate of the divers
current is changing, and return to the - Recover the diver(s) in the bell and wait - Information from the divers.
bell. for instructions. Action:
- If informed by the surface: Return to the - Recover the divers as soon as possible
bell when requested - The dive must be stopped if the stand-by
/ bellman cannot be launched.

3.2.2.2 - Swell and sea motion increasing / Sudden bad weather (squall)
- Potential consequences:
● Swell/waves effects may result that the bell becomes unstable.

● Surface support becoming unstable, or not able to hold its position safely.

● Recovery becoming difficult and potentially dangerous.

● Launching the standby diver or the ROV becomes difficult or impossible.

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Recover the diver(s) without delay.

- Warn the team regarding the movements
- Recover the diver(s) in the bell of the bell during the recovery.
- Prepare for recovery - If diving from a DP vessel, and if
- Close and seal the bottom door possible, request the DP officer to
- Return to the bell as soon as instructed
- Report ready for recovery and prepare change the heading to a more stable
for possible difficult transfer. position for the recovery of the bell.
Note: The moonpool aerator system
allows for more comfortable launching
and recovery during bad weather.

3.2.2.3 - Poor visibility or no visibility

- Potential consequences:
● Diver lost (he may be near dangerous appliances).

● Panic

● Loss of production.

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- The supervisor recovers the divers to the

bell and ensures that the umbilicals are
- The divers follow their umbilical and not entangled or damaged and the divers
- Ensure that the bell is illuminated.
return to the bell if lost. are OK.
- Recover the umbilical (pickup the slack).
- Ensure that their umbilicals are not Note: The supervisor should ensure that
entangled or damaged. the divers are sufficiently trained to
work without visibility.
- The ROV should be away and cold.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 281 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.2.2.4 - Diver entangled in fishing lines, net, or other lines
- Potential consequences:
● Diver unable to return to the bell.

● Injuries due to fishing hooks.

● Panic

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Inform the bellman of the situation

- Send a rescue diver (depending on the
- The diver informs the surface of his situation: 2nd diver, bellman, standby
situation. - Follow the instructions. diver) to assist the diver, instruct the
- Stay calm and try to cut the lines (Recover the umbilical or rescue) rescue diver to approach prudently.
methodically. - Keep in communication with the diver
and reassure him.
- The ROV can be used for monitoring.

3.2.2.5 - Snagged umbilical

- Potential consequences:
● Diver unable to return to the bell.
● Panic.
- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Inform the bellman of the situation.

- Report to the supervisor
- Follow the instructions. - Warn and prepare the rescue diver.
- Try to sort out the situation, ensure that
the umbilical is not entangled, and goes (Recover the umbilical or rescue) - Send the rescue diver to assist if the
in a direct way to the bell. diver has difficulty sorting out the
situation.

3.2.2.6 - Conflicts with ROV

- Potential consequences:
● Caught by thruster.

● Umbilical entanglement.

● Divers injured by collision.

● Electrocution.

● Damaged or severed umbilical.

● Note: See Book #1 / point 10“Diving with Remotely Operated Vehicles (ROV)”

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Note that safe procedures consist of

- Apply the guidelines for injured or keeping the ROV away from divers.
unconscious diver recovery given in
points 3.1.1 & 3.1.2. - Apply the guidelines for injured or - Order the ROV pilot to make the
unconscious diver recovery given in machine “cold”.
- Before any intervention in direct points 3.1.1 & 3.1.2.
proximity of the ROV, request the ROV - Apply the guidelines for injured or
to be stopped and “cold”. unconscious diver recovery given in
points 3.1.1 & 3.1.2.

3.2.2.7 - Accident due to pressurized, in depression, or electrical devices

Note: Such incident should not happen if the hazard identification process has been correctly documented and the control
measures are implemented.
- Potential consequences:
● Injuries or fatalities.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 282 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bell man Action surface

- Contact the bridge / facility to shut

down the device, and make sure the
- Apply the guidelines for injured or - Apply the guidelines for injured or rescue diver will be safe.
unconscious diver recovery given in unconscious diver recovery given in
points 3.1.1 & 3.1.2. points 3.1.1 & 3.1.2. - Apply the guidelines for injured or
unconscious diver recovery given in
points 3.1.1 & 3.1.2.

3.2.2.8 - Bell atmosphere contaminated by hydrocarbons from the worksite

Note: The work site should be inspected using ROV and samples of the bottom should be analysed prior to start the
diving operations. Also, the hydrocarbon analyser should always be activated.
- Potential consequences:
● Divers in the bell affected (lungs, brain), falling unconscious, death may follow.

● Reclaim polluted.

● Risk to affect the whole complex when reconnecting the bell.

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Alert the bellman, and ask him to go on

- If not alerted by the surface, alert the
BIBS and flush the bell.
supervisor and go on BIBS immediately.
- Instruct the divers to return to the bell.
- Return to the bell when instructed. - Flush the bell.
- Ensure that the bell atmosphere is back
- Remove their helmets only when - Check that the atmosphere is back to
to normal values.
instructed. normal values.
- Investigate the reason for the
- Go on BIBS immediately if the pollution - Investigate the reason(s) of the
contamination, and if detected,
happens before launching the dive. contamination.
implement corrective action.
- Discard suits and equipment that are - Recover the divers when instructed and
- If the reason for contamination is not
suspected to be the source of when possible. Do not remove their
identified or the contamination likely to
contamination outside the bell. helmets if the atmosphere is not purified.
start again, abort the dive.
- When instructed, close the bell, and
- Ensure of the bell atmosphere and warn
prepare for ascent.
the LSS before connecting the bell.

3.2.2.9 - Gas supply to divers contaminated (divers not yet affected)

The supervisor can be alerted by the divers (Strange taste, or bad feeling, etc.), the change of breath rate of the divers, or
the change of gas values.
- Potential consequences:
● Divers intoxicated

● The initial intoxication can lead to loss of conscious

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Switch to backup supply (close the

main) or instruct the bellman to open the
- If not informed by the surface that the onboard gas.
supply is on backup, closes the surface - Asks the divers to flush their hat and to
- Indicate to the supervisor any bad taste, supply, and switch to onboard gas.
or feeling return to the bell.
- Switches to onboard gas if instructed. - Informs the bell-man. If not sure of the
- Switch the bailout on and return to the
- Makes sure of the gas values in the bell. backup , asks him to close the surface
bell
If any doubt, go on BIBS and flush the supply and activate the onboard gas.
- When on backup or onboard gas, flush bell. - Ensures that the bell atmosphere is at
their hat and return to the bell
- Recover the divers normal values.
- When instructed, close and seal the bell, - Investigates the reason for the
and prepare for ascent contamination, (technician + LSS/LST)
- Abort the dive and recover the bell to
surface.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 283 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.2.2.10 - Loss of the gas supply of the bell
Note: The onboard emergency panel should switch automatically to onboard gas.
- Potential consequences
● The diver is on onboard gas reserve. Normally, the divers should not notice any change when the changeover
valve is switched on, but there should be an alarm fitted to alert the bellman if the divers supply switches over to
the onboard gas.
- Actions to implement

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- The supervisor switches on backup supply

- The bellman should be warned of the on panel .
changeover valve switching over to the
- Instruct the divers to return to the bell.
on-board supply by the indicator's red
status. - Warn the bellman.
- Notify the diving supervisor and recover - If the reason is not identifiable on panel,
the divers to the bell as soon as possible. ask the technician & LSS/LST to
- Return immediately to the bell investigate the problem.
- Once the divers are back in the bell,
Prepare for recovery & wait for - The dive must be aborted if the reason for
instruction. the break down is not immediately
identified, or the problem due to an
- If the supply is not reestablished, close
incorrect checklist, or/and the reserves of
the door, make a seal, and inform the
onboard gas partially consumed.
surface that the door is secured and the
team is ready for ascent. - The reason for the incident will have to
be solved before launching another dive.

3.2.2.11 - Loss of the gas supply of the divers

Note: If one umbilical is severed or damaged, the bellman should be warned by the change over valve isolating the 2nd
half of the emergency panel, and the indicator switching from green to red.
- Potential consequences:
● One diver can be deprived of gas supply, resulting in panic, asphyxia, or drowning. It could be the two divers in
case of a malfunction of the system.
- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Open the bail out - The supervisor asks the divers to return
- Report to surface - The bellman quickly investigates from as soon as possible to the bell
- Return immediately to the bell where the problem is (valve not open, - Warn the bellman
regulator not working...) and makes - Request support from the tech and
corrective action if possible.
Note: The gas can return online after the LSS/LST to investigate the reason for
- Recover the divers as soon as possible, the break down.
opening of the bailout, and the diver
and prepare for rescue if necessary.
is on his way back to the bell. In this - If the problem is due to the umbilical
case, the bailout should be closed, - When the divers are in the bell, check the being severed or damaged , ask the 2nd
and the diver should continue to bail out pressures and report to the diver or the bellman to assist the diver in
return to the bell. supervisor, and wait for instruction trouble.
- If the problem cannot be solved - The dive should be aborted if the reason
immediately or the bailout(s) pressure(s) for the breakdown is not immediately
- If two divers are in the water and the
are too low, close and seal the door and identified, or the problem is due to an
problem is due to an umbilical being
prepare for bell recovery. incorrect checklist, or/and the bailouts
severed or damaged, the 2nd diver should
assist the diver in trouble. with insufficient range (pressure).

3.2.2.12 - Regulator not working properly

- Potential consequences:
● Difficulties to breathe.

● Fatigue

● Hypercapnia

● Panic

- Actions to implement:

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 284 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- The supervisor switches to backup

supply line on panel to make sure that
the problem is not due to the supply from
surface.
- Open the free flow - Recover the diver to the bell
- Check whether the problem is not coming
- Inform the surface and return to the bell
from the onboard panel ( improper - The 2nd diver or the bellman or the
- Dive aborted
regulator setting, valve half closed, etc.). standby diver is warned in case
- Recover the diver to the bell assistance is needed.
- Note:
The problem can be from the reclaim. In - Prepare for intervention if needed - Request support from the tech and
this case, activate the "open circuit" and LSS/LST to investigate the reason of the
- Wait for instructions break down.
return to the bell.
- The dive should be aborted if the reason
for the break down is not immediately
identified, or the problem is due to an
incorrect check list.

3.2.2.13 - Leaks on diver’s helmet supply fittings

- Potential consequences (Depending on the importance of the leak):
● Incorrect gas supply with possible difficulties to breathe.

● Risk of hose parting with loss of gas supply.

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Instruct the diver to return to the bell.

- The 2nd diver or the bellman or the
standby diver is warned in case
assistance is needed
- Inform the surface
- Recover the diver as soon as possible - With the assistance of the tech make sure
- Return immediately to the bell whether the problem can be solved
- Prepare for intervention if needed
- Open the bailout if necessary safely.
- Wait for instructions
- Dive aborted - The dive should be aborted if the
breakdown is not immediately solved, or
the problem is due to an incorrect
checklist or/and the bailouts with
insufficient range (pressure).

3.2.2.14 - Loss of communications

- Potential consequences:
● No instruction and information coming to and from the diver, and/or to and from the bell.

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- If the problem is from the bell and the If the problem is from the communications
surface is not aware: Attract the attention to the divers:
of the supervisor and use the sound - Ask the bellman to recover the divers.
powered phone if possible. Also, attract The divers' attention can be attracted
the attention of the divers and recover using flash signals, pull signals, and
them as soon as possible flash signals by the ROV.
- Attract the bellman's attention using line
- When the divers are back in the bell and a If the problem is from communications to
(umbilical) and supervisor using video
communication is established: Stand by the bell:
signals if they are not aware, and return
for instruction.
to the bell as soon as possible. - Ask the divers to return to the bell.
- When the divers are back in the bell and
if no communication is established, close - Contact the Bellman using the sound-
the bottom door, make a seal, and powered phone. If the sound-powered
indicate by signals through the video (if phone is not working, deploy, and use
working) that the team is ready for through water communications.
transfer. Then standby. Then: See on the next page

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 285 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

Then:
- Ask the technician to check whether the
problem can be easily solved. The dive
should be aborted if the breakdown is
Continuation from the previous page not immediately solved or the problem is
Continuation from the previous page
due to an incorrect checklist.
- To recover the bell, use the ROV to
check whether the bottom door is sealed
and the bell is not leaking. Try to get
information from the divers through the
internal video.

3.2.2.15 - Loss of hot water supply

Note: The hot water system is fitted with alarms, alerting the technician in charge, and the diving supervisor. The bellman
should be alerted by improper temperature reading or improper flow. Note that a backup machine should be
available.
Also, the divers may not realize that they have become hypothermic and may have to be re-warmed.
- Potential consequences:
● Diver quickly hypothermic

● If used to heat the regulator; regulator freezing

● Bell heating system not working

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Instruct the diver(s) of the problem and

tell him to return to the bell.
- Alert the bellman
- Alert the surface and standby to recover - Switch to the secondary system if
the divers available.
- Alert the surface and return to the bell if - Report the condition of the divers - Call upon the dive technician to solve the
needed. (hypothermic or or not) problem or start the 2nd heating unit. The
- Stand by for instruction dive should be aborted if the breakdown
- Prepare to close the door if required is not immediately solved or the problem
is due to an incorrect checklist.
- If the divers are hypothermic, the dive
should be aborted.

3.2.2.16 - Loss electrical supply

Notes:
The communications to the divers and the bell should be fitted with a backup power source (batteries) and continue to
work (see IMCA D 024 section 2 /point 2.4). Also, the recording system should be fed from a UPS or other system to
ensure continued operation for at least 30 minutes in the event of loss of main power (see IMCA D 024).
- Potential consequences:
● No lights, scrubber, and heater, etc.

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bell man Action surface

- Switch on the emergency power supply if - Instruct the divers to return to the bell.
it is not done automatically.
- Depending on the source of the problem,
- Inform the surface and recover the diver switch on the backup power supply.
as soon as possible. - Ask the technician to check whether the
- Alert the surface and return to the bell as
- Stand by for instruction. problem can be easily solved.
soon as possible.
- Prepare to close the door if required. - The dive should be aborted if the
- If no communication (which should not breakdown is not immediately solved or
happen), close the hatch, make a seal and the problem is due to an incorrect
prepare for recovering. checklist.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 286 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.2.2.17 - Fire in proximity of the dive control / chamber system
- Potential consequences:
● Abandon ship is necessary if the chambers cannot be used anymore.

● Lock on impossible.
- Actions to implement:
● If the bell can be connected to the complex, the divers should transfer to the Hyperbaric rescue unit as quickly as
possible and follow the procedure given in Book #2.
Actions by topside

If a bell run is in progress, the diving

supervisor should stop the dive, recover the
bell, and transfer the divers to the Hyperbaric
Rescue Unit (HRU)
Action by divers

Divers in the complex prepare to transfer to The LSS/LST raises the alarm and instructs
the Hyperbaric Rescue Unit (HRU). The last the divers in the chamber(s) to prepare to
Communication
diver to leave the Transfer Lock closes the evacuate to the HRU.
internal TL door and ensures that the The LSS/LST also ensures that the HRU is
equalization valve is shut adjusted to storage depth

When in the HRU, the divers close and secure The LSS/LST acknowledges the information
Communication
the hatch. Prepare for launching. Inform the from the divers, and takes a seal by venting 1
LST, and stand by for instruction to 3 m

No Fire under
control?

Yes

Stand by for information, and

Vent the trunk between the TL
prepare for “possible “ abandon
and the HRC
vessel

No Fire
Inform the divers of imminent
Prepare for launching contained ?
launching

Yes

The LSS/LSTs and the

Make sure of the environment
dedicated team prepare for the
in the chambers and instructs the
launching of Hyperbaric Rescue
divers to return to the chambers
Chamber (HRC)

Next: See Hyperbaric Rescue

Chamber launching

- If the bell cannot be locked on the system, evaluate whether it is preferable to:
● Wait for the fire to be extinguished.

● Start an emergency decompression.

● Prepare the bell for abandon vessel: Transfer the bell to another vessel and then the rescue facility. In this case,
the procedure is the same as for the transfer of the HRU (The ballast should be released if the option is to send
the bell from the deck in a similar manner as the HRU).

3.2.1.18 - Fire in the dive control

- Potential consequences:
● Diving supervisor unable to manage the dive.

● Possible loss of communication.

● The dive control/dive system may be damaged.

● Bell recovery impossible from the dive control.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 287 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● The divers are protected as long they are in the bell and the onboard gas allows 24 hours to recover them into the
complex.
- Actions to implement:
Actions by topside

The Diving supervisor raises alarm, wears the

breathing apparatus shut down the electrical
supplies.
The team fights the fire using extinguishers
and the other fire fighting systems available .

Action by divers
Inform the bellman and instruct him to
prepare for emergency recovery and that the
Return to the bell Communication
bell may be without communication and/or
Close and seal the bell supplies
Instruct the divers to return to the bell

Prepare for possible loss of

supplies and communication. Clean the control room, check Yes Fire under
Stand by for instructions. for damage. control?

No
Inform the LSS and the
Control Yes technician
panels
Inform the ROV, and request a
damaged?
visual of the bell

No Close the supply lines to dive

control at the source (quads) and
Complete the cleaning and abandon the room.
return to service ASAP

Organise the recovering of the

Depending on the damages in
bell from another point (ROV
the dive control, the bell may
control, LARS control... )
have to be recovered
Make sure that everything is
ready prior to starting the
recovery (communications with
the key persons are primary)

Close visual inspection of the No Communications

bell using the ROV to bell ?

Recover the bell slowly and

watch for leaks using the ROV Yes

Install communication and Make sure that the bell has been
establish contact with the divers sealed, and inform the divers
when possible that the recovery is starting

Recover the bell

Connect to the system, transfer

Transfer to the chamber when the divers, and make sure that
instructed the doors in the TL and the bell
are closed.

3.2.2.19 - Loss of bell pressure during the diving operations

- Potential consequences:
● Uncontrolled loss of pressure is one of the most critical incidents which can happen with a bell. It must be kept
in mind that such an incident can trigger a decompression accident, or worse, an explosive decompression. (See
the report of “Byford Dolphin” accident in Book #4 “Diving accidents”).
- The actions to control the situation will depend on:
● The nature of the leak. (what is affected, where it is, the quantity of gas lost).

● Where the bell is (at depth or the surface).

● Whether the problem can be solved or controlled.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 288 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
● Whether there are sufficient gas reserves to perform a transfer to the chamber despite the leak.
● Whether a wet transfer can take place or not.
Notes:
All hollow penetrators of a bell must be fitted with protection valves or other devices to stop catastrophic pressure loss
(IMCA D 024 /section 5/ point 5.5 & section 6 / point 6.4).
There should be spare O-seals in the bell.
Viewports are sensitive parts: Viewports in the lower half should have protective covers both internal and external.
Other viewports require external protective covers only. This protection may be accomplished by the installation of
plastic covers (or similar) over the viewports (IMCA D 024 / section 2/ point 2.2). In addition, blank flanges should be
available in the bell to cover damaged portholes.
- Possible actions:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Maintain the pressure of the bell.

- Inform the surface and check for leaks. Keeping the bell at depth allows
- If the problem is from a valve balancing the pressures.
unintentionally opened, close it - Ask the divers to identify where the leak
- If the problem is from a damaged pipe, is. The ROV can be used to perform a
close the valve designed to isolate this close visual inspection of the bell.
part of the bell. - If the problem cannot be dealt with,
- Assist the bellman , and try to find the - If the seal cannot be obtained on the organize a wet transfer if possible (see
leak on the outside bottom hatch, change the O-Seal. "lost bell procedures").
- If the problem is from a porthole, install - If the wet transfer is not possible, a
the blank. solution is to calculate the potential gas
- Pressurise the bell 1 to 3 m to ensure the loss and put sufficient gas on line to
problem is solved. maintain the pressure during the transfer
of the divers into the saturation complex.
- If the problem cannot be solved, standby
Emergency decompression in the bell
for instruction.
can be another option.

3.2.1.20 - Failure of the mooring

- Potential consequences:
● Collision with the structure with possible damage to the dive station.

● Diver pulled off due to surface support adrift and erratic.

● Vessel and passengers endangered.

- Actions to implement:

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Alert and instruct the divers to return

immediately to the bell.
- Alert the bellman and instruct him to
recover the divers and prepare for
- Return immediately to the bell , and - Recover the divers. emergency recovery.
prepare for quick recovery. - Close and seal the bell. - Alert the bridge.
- Inform the supervisor if injured. - Prepare for transfer. - Recover the bell as soon as possible and
transfer the divers to the chamber.
- In case of an injured or unconscious
diver, send the rescue diver, and recover
accordingly.

3.2.1.21 - Dynamic Positioning yellow alarm

- Potential consequences:
● A failure in a sub-system has occurred, causing a loss of position.

● The vessel’s position keeping performance is deteriorating and/or unstable.

● The vessel’s indicated position deviates beyond limits.

● The risk of collision exists from another vessel.

● Weather conditions are judged as becoming unsuitable for diving.

● Any condition which could reduce the status from normal.

- Actions to implement:

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 289 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- The diving supervisor should instruct the

divers to suspend operations and move to
- Suspend the work and move to a safe
a safe location close to the bell.
location as instructed by the supervisor
(it should be close to the bell) - Adjust the divers umbilicals - The diving supervisor contacts the bridge
- Prepare for quick recovery if needed to be informed of the evolution of the
- Ensure that they can move quickly into
status.
the bell if required.
- If the diving supervisor cannot get clear
advice from the DPO, he instructs divers
to return to the bell.

3.2.1.22 - Dynamic Positioning red alarm

- Potential consequences
● Inability to maintain a position or heading control.

● Any external condition exists, including imminent collision, preventing the vessel from maintaining position.

● Onboard this alert is often referred to as “abandon position”.

- Actions to implement

Action divers Action bellman Action surface

- Recover the divers as quickly as possible - The diving supervisor instructs the divers
to return immediately to the bell.
- Suspend the work and move to the bell - Close and seal the bell
as quickly as possible - Recover as soon as possible after due
- Inform the surface when ready
consideration of the hazards involved in
- Stand by for transfer the recovery.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 290 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

3.3 - Lost bell procedures

3.3.1 - Reminder of bell survival equipment

All bells should be fitted with a minimum survival equipment: Note that the equipment described are also discussed in
point 1.1 “Diving bells” and the document IMCA D 024.

3.3.1.1 - Communications
- A communications connection might also be available. (IMCA D 024 / section 5/point 5.14 ).
- A copy of the AODC/IMCA bell tapping code must be mounted on the outside of the bell in a clearly visible position,
and available for the occupants. (IMCA D 024 / section 5/points 5.15 & 6.55).
- Two-way voice communications between the supervisor and each diver including the standby diver (bellman) must be
provided. (IMCA D 024 / section 5/point 6.40).
- A means of through water communications must be available to allow the supervisor to talk to the divers inside the bell
when it is in the water. (IMCA D 024 / section 5/point 6.41).
- A sound powered phone should be fitted to allow the supervisor to talk to the divers in the bell. (IMCA D 024 / section
5/point 6.42).

3.3.1.2 - Bell localization

- A transponder operating on 37.5 kHz must be fitted to the bell to aid in location in an emergency. A means of testing
and interrogating this transponder must be readily available on the surface at the dive site. (See AODC 19 & IMCA D
024 /section 5/points 5.19).
- A strobe light with a minimum operating duration of 24 hours must be fitted to the bell to assist in location in an
emergency. (IMCA D 024 / section 5/point 5.20).
- External lights must be provided which illuminate the bell over 360 degrees. These lights must be wired in such a way
that failure of one does not extinguish the others. (IMCA D 024 / section 5/point 5.39).

3.3.1.3 - Secondary Lifting

- There should be a secondary attachment point on the diving bell if the main one is damaged. This secondary point
should also be a properly designed pad eye or similar. It may be a second hole in the same pad eye. (IMCA D 024 /
section 5/point 5.17).
- A lifting sling should be pre-installed for quick connection to a crane hook or similar device (ROV or diver).

3.3.1.4 - Onboard gas

- There must be an emergency supply of breathing gas carried on board sufficient to support each working diver plus the
bellman outside the bell for a minimum of 30 minutes at a breathing rate of 40 litres/minute at the maximum depth of
the diving operation according to IMCA D 024 / section 5/point 5.23. As explained previously, the breathing rate
should be between 50 and 75 litres per minute. However, the bell may have been built according to IMCA rates.
- Sufficient oxygen must be available for metabolic consumption by the maximum number of divers at 0.5 litres/minute
per diver for at least 24 hours at the end of a bell run. (IMCA D 024 / section 5/point 5.24).

3.3.1.5 - Onboard power supply

- There must be sufficient energy in the onboard batteries to supply the backup lighting system for at least 24 hours.
- Several portable lights should be available in case of failure of the main backup system

3.3.1.6 - Survival equipment

- There should be means provided, independent of surface supplies, to maintain the diver’s body temperature and reduce
CO2 for a minimum period of 24 hours in an emergency. This will normally be by means of survival bags and
emergency scrubbers.
1) Isolation: The Diver's Insulation System consists of a special survival bag and thick under suit.
2) Regenerators: This pack contains a carbon dioxide scrubber, and a thermal regenerator assembly (not required for
shallow dives in tropical areas).
3) Food, water and hygiene: There should be sufficient food and drinks and hygiene bags for at least 24 hrs. Note that
the snacks and drinks recommended for the bell run are not part of this kit.
● The food should consist to high energy and compact meals in sealed bags similar to those designed for combat
rations.
● Fluid intake needs to be maintained. 100-150 ml of water per man per hour should be provided for at least 24
hours. Isotonic drinks can be given to the divers to help counteract the effects of electrolytic imbalance.
● Toilet activities should be possible in sealable gel bags. Urinary sheaths should be considered to transport urine
to a gel bag without opening the suit. Vomit bags should also be provided.
● Because the divers will be motionless, anti-embolic stockings should be included in the survival equipment.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 291 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.3.1.7 - Emergency umbilical and connectors
This equipment is also described in point 1.1.2.6
- An emergency umbilical should be ready all the time. A manifold should be provided on the bell for connection of basic
supplies in an emergency. As a minimum this should provide two connections as laid down by IMO:
● ¾” NPT (female) for hot water

● ½” NPT (female) for breathing gas

- The document NORSOK U 100 recommends more connectors than those required by IMO, and considers some
connectors to be installed by ROV. This recommendation can be used as reference to provide more functions to the bell
in emergency situation:

Item Diver operable Diver and ROV operable

Breathing gas 1/2" NPT Female 1/2" Male Snaptite SVHN-8

Hot water/heating 3/4" NPT Female 3/4" Male Snaptite SVHN-12

Depth 1/4" NPT Female 1/4" Male Snaptite SVHN-4

8-contact-4-pins-EO connector 8-contact-4-pins-EO connector

Communication
(Contacts 1 and 2 used, others n.c.) (Contacts 1 and 2 used, others n.c.)
4-contact-4-pins-EO-connector 4-contact-4-pins-EO-connector
Emergency power
(Pin 1: 24V, pin 2: 0V, pin 3: ground, pin 4: n.c.) (Pin 1: 24V, pin 2: 0V, pin 3: ground, pin 4: n.c.)

Gas analysis 1/4" NPT Female 1/4" Male Snaptite SVHN-4

Keys:
● EO: "Electro Oceanics"- trade mark - underwater electrical connector
● n.c.: not connected
● NPT: National (standard) Pipe Tapered (threads)
● Snaptite SVHN: trade mark and type designation

3.3.1.8 - Buoyant ascent procedure

Bell ballast release system is an optional equipment described in point 1.1.2.4 of this book.
The ballast of some bells is designed to be released, allowing it to float, thus return to the surface. Nevertheless, this
operation can be very critical and requires methodology.

Bell Ascending
to the surface

Chain holding
the bell
Dropped chains & ballast

Dropped ballast

AODC 61 gives guide lines which should be considered for the ballast release operation and the buoyant ascent of the
bell being performed successfully:
a) The bell's ascent should not be impeded or prevented by the proximity of debris and associated lifting
equipment (such as severed wires etc.) and its path to the surface should be free from obstructions, including the
support vessel.
b) There should pressure integrity inside the bell.
c) There should be a safe procedure for attaching a lift wire for the recovery of the bell at the surface.
Many other factors should be considered. Because of the inherent difficulties in meeting all the requirements, the buoyant
ascent of the bell is regarded as the least desirable option. Emergency procedures should consider all other available
means of the bell recovery in preference to releasing the ballast.
The decision on whether or not to use ballast release systems rest with the company management after full consideration
of all relevant factors.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 292 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
If the decision is to not use the weight release system, then this decision must be clearly recorded in the appropriate
documents and made known to all on the work site.
The emergency procedures must also clearly identify the alternative method selected (typically a second diving bell). The
ballast weights must be secured such that they cannot accidentally come off.
When the bell is equipped with a ballast release system, the recommendation is to keep this possibility but to consider all
other procedures of recovery in preference, as recommended by AODC 61.
The ballast release system gives the advantage to clear the bell from the bottom to let the divers enter or leave it, if
needed. This can be very useful in the eventuality that the bell is laid on the bottom, even for bells designed to sit on their
clump weight or standoff frame with the bottom door open, as this system could be damaged or laid on it’s side.
- The system must be capable of release from inside the bell, and the release
mechanism must be protected against accidental release.
● Two independent actions must be needed to release the weights:

○ The first step is to release two short flat bars that enable the
bell to raise by 2 meters and then allow the divers to enter or
exit the bell in case the bell lays on the sea floor.
○ The second step is to release the 2 long chains, freeing the bell
which begins its buoyant ascent.
● The weights must not be capable of being shed accidentally, for
example if the bell is inadvertently tilted.
● If the system utilises only one weight, then there must be no single
component whose failure could cause the weight to become
detached. This requirement does not apply if there are two or more
weights operating independently.

3.3.1.9 - Cutters or release mechanisms for the main bell umbilical and/or the main lift wire
Optional cutters or release mechanisms of the umbilical and lift wires operated from inside the bell are also discussed in
point 1.1.28.
These systems' function is to cut the umbilical and the wires to avoid sending the diver to free the bell from these
elements. Nevertheless, many bells in use are not fitted with these mechanisms, and in this case, the operation should be
performed by the diver or the ROV.
● The system must be capable of operation from inside the bell, and the operating mechanism must be protected
against accidental operation.
● Two independent actions must be needed to operate the cutter(s) or release mechanism.

● If the cutter(s) or release mechanism are operated by means of pressurisation (gas or hydraulic), then isolations
need to be in place such that it cannot be activated accidentally by external water pressure or internal gas
pressure.

3.3.1.10 - Medical kit DMAC 15

The bell medical kit DMAC 15 is a part of the full kit available at the surface that should be stored in a sealed container.
Its content should be listed (use plastic boards for that) and regularly checked by the diver medics.

Description Description

1 Arterial tourniquet (e.g. CAT tourniquet) 1 Roll of 1 inch adhesive tape

3 Polythene bags – these can be used to cover burns or as

2 Crepe bandages – 3 inch
waste bags

1 Resuscitation face mask (preferably with a silicone filled

2 Pairs of non-sterile gloves (non-latex if possible,
face seal and a non-return valve) or shield, for mouth-to-
appropriately sized)
mouth ventilation

2 Oropharyngeal airway size 3 and 4 (e.g. Guedel type) 1 Watertight bag

1 Tuf cut scissors 1 Suction catheters: sizes 12 and 14

1 Medium dressing 1 Adult adjustable cervical spine collar

1 Large dressing 1 Hand operated suction pump

2 Triangular bandages 2 Space blankets

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 293 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.3.1.11 - Overview of bell emergency equipment

Manual or remote
Umbilical & cable cutter
Emergency connectors Secondary lifting point

Strobe light
Lights see point 6.1.2

Transponder

Trough water
Onboard Heliox communication

Tapping code Situation

3.3 Communication opening procedure (inside and outside)

1 Yes or affirmative or agreed

3 No or negative or disagreed

2.2 Repeat please

2 Stop

5 Have you got a seal?

6 Stand by to be pulled up

1.2.1.2 Get ready for through water transfer (open your hatch)

2.3.2.3 You will NOT release your ballasts

4.4 Do release your ballast in 30 minutes from now

1.2.3 Do increase your pressure

Battery packs 3.3 Communication closing procedure (inside and outside)

Tapping code
Blank porthole

Onboard O2
Spare O-seals

Survival equipment Sound powered phone

+ drink & food
Medical kit DMAC 15

Note:
It is of primary importance to ensure that the elements listed previously and summarised above are in the bell and in good
condition prior to any dive. In case elements are missing or not in perfect condition, the dive should not be launched.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 294 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.3.2 - Use of ROV

3.3.2.1 - Type of ROV to be used

ROVS are described in point 10.3 of book #1. They are usually classified in six classes taking into account their
characteristics and function.
ROVs are efficient means for recovering a diving bell. Nevertheless, it is admitted that a machine that can rescue a bell
must be sufficiently powerful to energize the tools needed for such operations and that an observation class, even with
payload option, is not sufficiently powerful to do it.
For this reason, only “work class” machines are really suitable for rescuing a diving bell, provided that they are equipped
with the relevant tools such as cable cutter, saw and grinder to cut the umbilical if necessary, and 2 multifunction
manipulators to remove debris and connect a crane if necessary.
It must be noted that some clients agree for the use of light work class ROVs (Class 3A IMCA & NORSOK) fitted with
the relevant tools described above, while others prefer using heavy work class (Class 3B IMCA & NORSOK) only.
Regarding this point, we can logically say that having powerful machines is always preferable.
Thus, except when rescue divers can be safely launched to recover the bell (tween bell system, or shallow dive), class 1
or 2 ROVs are not regarded as machines able to rescue a bell.

Heavy work class Light work class

3.3.2.2 - Tools mandatory for bell rescue

- Four or five functions manipulator:

These tools are generally used to grab objects and maintain the ROV in position when using
the 2nd manipulator or another tool.

- Seven functions manipulator:

These tools are designed to perform all the movements which could be possible by a human arm,
except the hand has 2 fingers (the thumb and the 4 remaining grouped in one), and unfortunately,
no sense of touch for the moment. They are used to perform precise tasks.

- Cable cutter:
It must be capable to cut at least the main and the guide wires of the bell. Some models are
designed to cut the umbilical with opening up to 270 mm exist (see on the side) and are
recommended. They are normally installed at the end of one arm.

- Grinder:
These tools can be used to cut any debris other than cables. The use of diamond disks is
recommended.

- Hooks and shackles:

If hooks and shackles are planned to be used, they should be designed for an ROV.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 295 of 318
3.3.3 - Surface standby diver

3.3.3.1 - Types of interventions

A surface-supplied rescue diver should be ready to intervene during the bell run. However, it is admitted that he does not
need to be fully dressed for immediate action as with surface-orientated diving operations. The reason is that the purpose
of his intervention is the recovery of the bell, which is provided with gas reserves for at least 24 hours. For this reason,
the intervention of the surface rescue diver should be organized in complement of the other means of rescue available and
in conformance to suitable practices for surface orientated diving operations:
● If the saturation system has two bells, the intervention of the surface standby diver can be limited to depths
where long no-decompression dives are possible. In this case, the rescue diver may be used to solve a technical
problem that prevents a bell from entering its moon pool, connecting and disconnecting emergency supplies and
ropes to facilitate the recovery of the bell, and similar interventions.
It is usually accepted that a scuba replacement pack is used for such operations. Of course, the diving procedures
implemented should be those in force with such a system.
Note that the deployment of the diver through a moon pool is possible and usually performed using a ladder.
However, that must be done according to good practices. Thus, the distance from the level of deployment and
the surface of the sea must be limited to 2 m maximum. For this reason, some moon pools of saturation systems
installed at more than 2 m above the water level are equipped with lateral doors allowing to launch the rescue
dive from less than 2 m above the water level (see the drawing below). Embedded ladders are in place to descent
and return to and from the water. These embedded ladders are designed not to disturb the deployment and
recovery of the bells. As for every diving operation, relevant systems must be provided to recover an
unconscious diver.

Diving bell

Shelter deck

Door
Main deck
<2m

Water level

Embedded ladder
Moon pool

Vessel bottom
If the moon pool is not equipped to allow the deployment of the rescue diver using a ladder from less than 2 m
above the surface of the sea, the deployment can be organized from the side of the vessel. In this case, a basket
is recommended even though the ship is not a dynamic positioning unit, as using a ladder may limit the
deployment of the bell to weather conditions suitable for scuba replacement diving. The basket should be
installed as close as possible to the bell, as indicated in the drawing below.

Basket as close as Moon pool

possible to the bell
Bell

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 296 of 318
 It is usually accepted that a Dynamic Positioning vessel can be oriented to a heading that protects the dive
station when the weather conditions limit the deployment of the rescue divers. Another possibility is to move
slowly to a sheltered place where the deployment of the divers will be possible. However, this sheltered place
must be identified, and the possibility of reaching it sufficiently early at a slow speed should be assessed. It can
be an offshore facility behind which the vessel can be positioned. If these procedures cannot be implemented,
the bell should only be launched when the weather conditions allow for the deployment of the surface rescue
diver.
It is also usually accepted that a chamber of the saturation system can be used, provided that this chamber is
available and is reachable within 15 minutes. If these conditions are not in place, installing an additional deck
decompression chamber will be necessary.
● Subject to a risk assessment, if the rescue of the bell is planned with an ROV that is equipped with all the tools
described previously and has the capacity to install the emergency backup umbilical safely, it can be considered
acceptable to limit the intervention of the surface rescue diver to the tasks described previously using the same
diving equipment. Note that when this solution is selected, the team must ensure that the ROV can install the
rescue umbilical properly.
● If the rescue of the bell is planned to be done by an ROV that is not equipped with the tools to install the
emergency umbilical, the bell will be supplied by its onboard gas only, and without heating, electrical supply,
and wired communications, as long as these emergency supplies are not connected. For this reason, it will be
necessary to do it by a diver as soon as possible. In this case, the depth of intervention of the diver will depend
on the means of deployment available, and the diving procedures to be in force must be those that must be
implemented when using these systems for standard interventions:
○ The dives can be organized to 75 m maximum using wet bells supplied with heliox.
○ If only baskets are present, the interventions can be scheduled to 50 m maximum.
○ Note that the means of deployment of the stand-by diver of the diver(s) rescuing the bell must provide the
same level of safety as the primary deployment system. For example, using a basket to rescue a wet bell
lowered below 50 m is not acceptable.
It is commonly accepted that the bell is freed and connected to the crane by the ROV, and the emergency
umbilical is installed by the rescue diver when the bell is above his maximum operational depth. The rules for
the deployment of the rescue diver during unfavorable weather conditions are those explained above. Note that
this procedure has the inconvenience that the emergency umbilical cannot be installed at the very beginning of
the rescue.
● It is also acceptable to use the surface rescue divers as primary means of intervention for rescuing the bell if the
diving operations are organized within their operational range. Note that this method requires sufficient divers to
answer situations where the bell has to be freed from the bottom. Depending on the events, this operation can be
very long. Also, depths below 30 m limit the duration of bottom times and are not favorable for back-to-back
diving. Another point to consider is that the weather conditions for the deployment of the bell must be those of
the surface rescue divers.

3.3.3.2 - Tools
- Cable cutter:
It must be capable to cut at least the main and the guide wires of the bell. Some models
are designed to cut the umbilical with opening up to 270 mm (see on the side) and are
recommended. They can be manually or remotely operated.

- Portable hydraulic grinder:

These tools can be used to cut any debris other than cables and the main umbilical if
necessary. They must be sufficiently light to allow for easy use. Also, the use of diamond
disks is recommended.

- Hand tools:
They consist of spanners, pliers, hammers, crowbars, etc. The spanners and pliers must be
adapted to the connectors to install. Replacement tools must be available in case of loss
during the rescue operations.

- Lift bags:
Lift bags should be ready with their means for inflation if the divers need to free the bell
from debris, dropped umbilical or cables, etc. Note that 1000 kg, 500 kg, and 100 kg units
are easy to install and deploy to the bottom.

- Crane + slings
The crane must be ready for use with the appropriate hook and spare slings.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 297 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.3.4 - Loss bell scenarios

3.3.4.1 - Scope of the lost bell procedures scenarios presented

As indicated in the previous scenarios, it is impossible to write a document that encompasses all situations and
eventualities that may arise due to unplanned and catastrophic incidents.
The purpose of the following scenarios is to offer guidelines that can be used by project teams to formulate their “project
emergency response plan” and train the diving teams accordingly prior to starting the planned diving operations.
It must be understood that the emergency procedures should be adapted to the characteristics of the project, which
include the location where it is undertaken, the material available and logistics, the team, the planned weather conditions,
the working depth, and many other elements. Because the scenarios presented here are generic, they may not be fully
adapted to the project, and some modifications may have to be discussed and implemented. Also, additional control
measures may be found by the team. Ensuring that the safety procedures conform to the best practices is the most
important responsibility of the diving superintendent.
Most small and middle-size diving companies use portable systems with only one bell installed on vessels of opportunity
as they do not have the resources to buy and maintain proper Diving Support Vessels. Also, apart from those operating in
places where a lot of saturation diving operations are undertaken at each other's proximity, they generally work in
isolated areas, far from areas where a potential rescue boat can be found. It should be considered that such conditions
represent more than 80% of the saturations operations undertaken in the world. For these reasons, the scenarios described
in this document have been adapted to these diving conditions, so a diving system with one bell only operating alone.
Also note that these scenarios highlight that using built-in twin bells saturation systems such as those described at the
beginning of this book is advantageous in terms of capacity to recover divers trapped in a lost bell and offer better
flexibility and availability.
Considering the elements discussed above, the following scenarios which can happen alone or be cumulated with others
have been considered:
- Loss of main bell wire with umbilical intact (see point 3.3.3.2).
- Loss of main bell wire and umbilical (see point 3.3.3.3).
- Loss of main bell wire , umbilical and clump weight (see point 3.3.3.4).
- Clump weight lost or damaged (see point 3.3.3.5).
- Entrapment of the bell and clump weight (see point 3.3.3.6).

- Remarks
● The DP DSV / Barge are presumed to be still functional and capable of carrying out a diving bell rescue.
● A lot of modern bells are designed to sit on their clump weight with the door open, and this option has been
taken into account in these procedures. Another option described in this document is the use of a standoff frame.
However, some bells may be designed differently. The procedure described to clear the bell from the bottom
using the bell ballast release system should be used in this case. A similar procedure should also be used if the
clump weight has been damaged or the bell is laid on the bottom with an insufficient gap to open the bottom
door.
● Considerations should be given to the wind direction and strength, currents, and sea state.
● Consideration should be given to mooring lines and any obstructions that may disturb the deployment of rescue
devices and the bell's recovery.
● Consideration should be given to whether other diving or ROV support vessels are in the area and whether they
may render assistance (for example, wet transfer). Nevertheless, when writing the emergency procedures, this
option must not be considered a primary option. Such vessels' intervention will depend on their availability and
distance from the accident site.- Close visual inspections
● In all scenarios, and of course if possible, the divers and the ROV should carry out a visual survey of the bell,
and report the status of the following:
○ The main lifting wire and the guide wires that may be damaged or cut and laid on the bell and the bottom.
○ The condition of the main umbilical and of its attachments to the bell. Similarly to lifting and guide wires,
the umbilical may be severed and laid on the bottom.
○ The condition of the secondary lifting padeye and rigging.
○ Whether the clump weight is trapped.
○ The condition of the viewports.
○ The condition of the emergency connectors.
○ The condition of all external pipe-works especially those that may have been damaged by shocks resulting
from falling objects, or the contact with the bottom or an obstruction.
○ The condition of batteries, junction boxes, and electrical wires, especially when shocks and tractions have
been exerted.
○ Any signs of gaseous escape from hull penetrators, valves, and other devices.
○ Any other abnormalities that may result from the incident.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 298 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.3.4.2 - Loss of main bell wire with umbilical intact
- Potential consequences:
● The bellman should notice the sudden movement of the bell resulting in:

○ The bell rests on its clump-weight

○ The bell may be at an angle
○ Partial flooding of bell
● The surface team can be alerted by increased tension in the umbilical and the angle of the main wire which may
not be parallel to the guide wires.
● The bell is normally supplied

- Actions to implement:

No Action divers, bellman & ROV Action surface

- The supervisor instructs the divers to return to the bell, assess the
- The bellman informs the supervisor of the situation, and report findings
situation
- Alerts the surface rescue team (standby diver)
- The bellman checks the status in the bell
- The supervisor informs the bridge and the diving superintendent of the
(uses checklist)
situation.
1 - Recovers the divers - The saturation control is to be informed along with the medic and the
DMT(s) in the chamber.
Note: If there is no standoff frame, the divers
must not position below the bell (potential - The ROV team is asked to launch, or if the machine is already in the
crush-point). water, proceed to the site to monitor the bell and divers with caution and
from a safe distance until the situation is assessed.

- The divers or/and the ROV start a visual - The diving superintendent contacts other vessels that can render assistance
2 survey of the bell and its wires and report if necessary. (This possibility should be planned in the emergency
the status to the surface response plan).

- Under Diver 1 or ROV instruction, adjust the clump weight to remove the
- Diver 1 guides the adjustment of the clump main wire as comfortably as possible.
3
weight.
Note: Be sure that the cable can be clearly seen

- The divers must disconnect wire from the - Monitor the divers or ROV, and prepare the rigging and tools which may
bell and discard it to the seabed. When the be needed.
4
parted main lift wire is laid on the bell, the Note: A secondary lifting system may be connected to assist the clump
bell can normally be recovered, weight during the ascent (as an example the crane).
- The supervisor should require a proper damage assessment of the bell,
particularly to valve fittings, penetrators, and viewports.
- Carry on a proper damage assessment, Mechanical & Electrical Technicians are to be involved for guidance to the
5 particularly to valve fittings, penetrators, supervisor and the divers.
and viewports. - Note: In case of damages the team should decide wether the bell can be
recovered or not. In the case that recovery is impossible, refer to
procedure "Loss of pressure at depth"

6 - Diver 2 returns in the bell - Ask the bellman to recover Diver 2 inside the bell (if appropriate)

7 - Diver 1 stows the bellman's umbilical. - Ask to disconnect and stow the bellman's umbilical.

8 - Diver 1 returns in the bell - Give the order to recover diver 1

9 - The bellman flushes the water from the bell. - The supervisor asks the bellman to flush the bell (or flushes it).
- The external and internal bell doors are
closed.
10 - Ask the divers to close and seal the bell.
- A seal of 1 - 3 m over the bell depth is
established.
- The divers standby in the sealed bell. - The supervisor prepares to recover the bell to the surface using the clump
- The ROV is used to watch and report the weight system. The umbilical must be recovered at the same time.
11
status of the bell and the condition of the - Send the ROV to watch and report the bell's status and ensure that the
doors. external door is closed and that the bell is sealed.

- Ask the ROV to ensure that the parted main lift wire is recovered or
- The ROV team ensures that the cable is out moved out of the way of the bell not to create any trouble during the
of the way of the bell. recovery.
12
Note: A site-specific solution for removing the lift wire and main
Note: This phase can be undertaken earlier. umbilical shall be formulated as part of the site-specific emergency
response procedure to allow unfettered access for the bell.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 299 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

No Action divers, bellman & ROV Action surface

- Lift the bell 5 metres above the seabed using the clump weight system.
- The ROV team observes the bell and reports Check the depth, and ask the ROV to monitor the operation.
13
the depth during the 1st phase of lifting.
- Watch for leaks.

- The ROV monitors the bell's lifting to the - Recover the bell in 10 metres steps and monitor it with the ROV.
14 surface, paying attention to leaks and the Note: If needed, the surface standby diver can be launched when the bell
wires' condition, and the umbilical. is in his range of intervention.

- Once at the surface, the bell is locked-on, and the divers are transferred to
15 - Recover the ROV.
the chamber in accordance with the normal procedures.

Main bell wire reported lost

Supervisor:
- Instructs the divers to return to
Superintendent:
the bell
- Ensures of a third party
- Alerts the diving superintendent
vessel in the vicinity
- Alerts the team, diver medics.
- Organises support
- Alerts the bridge
- Alerts and launches the ROV

Third
When the divers are back near the No party diving
bell Instruct them to give a 1st support vessel
status. available ?

Yes
Focus on primary option Fast transfer to the work site
(onboard divers + ROV) to be organized

Adjust the clump weight .

(D1 to guide) If a third party rescue team
arrives on site, there is a
Ask the divers to clear the bell possibility to use it.
from the cable and debris In this case, clear procedures
(The ROV can also be used)
and communications must be
established taking into
account that the intervention
When the bell is cleared from the is performed from two
cable and debris, the divers separate vessels.
perform a close visual inspection
and assess the damages.

Bell clear for No Refer to procedure “loss of

recovery ? pressure at depth”

Yes

Recover the divers and seal the bell Third

party diving Yes Wet transfer to a third party
support vessel in saturation system
vicinity ?

Recover 5 m for first monitoring

then in 10 m steps monitored by the No
ROV Note that this chart describes a diving
system equipped with only one bell

When at the surface transfer to the If a repair is not possible,

deck and lock on normally consider emergency
decompression

As previously indicated, a twin bell system provides the advantage of not depending on another vessel for a wet transfer.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 300 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.3.4.3 - Loss of main bell wire and umbilical
- Potential consequences
● The bell man should feel sudden movements of the bell resulting in:

○ The bell rests on its clump-weight

○ The bell may be at an angle
○ Partial flooding of bell
○ Loss of electrical power, normal communications & sound powered phone
○ Loss of main gas
Note: The onboard emergency panel should switch automatically to onboard gas.
- Actions to implement

No Action divers, bellman & ROV Action surface

- The supervisor secures the gas supplies to the bell from main panel.
- Establishes Through Water Communications, with the bellman, and
- The bellman confirms that the emergency confirms the well-being in the bell.
gas panel has switched to onboard gas - Ask the bellman to recover the divers ASAP
reserve.
- Informs the bridge and the diving superintendent
- The bellman switches on emergency power
1 if not automatic. - Informs the LSS/LST along with the medic and diver medics
- The bellman switches off all surface supplies - Alerts the deck team
- The bellman ensures that the through water - Alerts the rescue team (standby diver)
communication set is working (should be..), - Alerts and launch the ROV if not already in the water.
and answers to the supervisor. - The diving superintendent contacts diving vessels that are available to
render assistance if needed.
- The bellman alerts the divers (flashing if - Monitor the recovery of the divers through the ROV screen.
possible and umbilical signals).
2 - Prepare for inspection (call the technicians for assistance).
- The ROV alerts the divers (flashing) and
monitors the recovery. - Prepare the surface team for recovery.

- Once the ROV has arrived, he assesses the - Because of no communication with the divers, the supervisor should
situation: Checks if any wire /umbilical is assess the condition of the bell using the ROV.
attached or lying over the bell. Note: Because the supplies from surface are severed, depending on the
3 - If the divers are outside the bell, they should temperature of the water, the divers can quickly become hypothermic and
return into it as soon as possible. short of gas. The wise decision should be to avoid exposing them.
- When entering into the bell, the divers assess - The parts of umbilical and cable on the seabed will have to be
the condition of the external door. disconnected from the bell.
- If the ROV is not equipped with cutting tools - Ensure that the ROV is equipped with cutting tools
(as an example, ROV at depth when the
4 Note: Be sure that the external door will not come into contact with the
incident has happened), it is recovered to the
surface for this purpose. clump-weight when lifted.

- The clump weight is adjusted to clarify the - Readjust the clump weight to ensure that the bell wire and the umbilical
position of the wire and umbilical to can be easily removed.
remove.
5 - Prepare the emergency umbilical.
- The parts of cables and
- Prepare the tools to clear the bell from the wire, debris, and the umbilical.
using its manipulators and other tools, such as
the crane) - The crane may be necessary to assist, if no crane, a winch can be used.

- The ROV reassess the situation and the

6 - The diving supervisor assess the situation with the ROV pilot.
elements to discard.
- If the ROV is unable to clear the parted main lift wire and umbilical that is
- The ROV cuts the parts of the wire and the lying on the bell, the supervisor can:
umbilical to be discarded.
● Ask the divers to disconnect the main lift wire from the delta plate
- If requested, and if they can, the divers move and the main umbilical from the hull-valves, and discard them to
out of the bell to disconnect the main lift the sea-bed.
7 wire from the delta plate, and discard it to
● Cut the cables and the umbilical in several parts to clear them
the sea-bed. Then, they remove the main
more easily (divers can be use for that, but the ROV is more
umbilical and discard it to the sea-bed
appropriate for this task).
(Remember the limited reserves of gas and
the absence of heating that may make this Note: Use the divers only when absolutely necessary as they are on
not realistic). onboard gas with limited range (30 min), and that there is no hot
water supply.

- The ROV, or the divers if necessary and - When the bell is cleared from the main cable, debris and the main
possible, connect the backup umbilical. umbilical, the secondary umbilical is lowered and connected by the ROV,
8 or the divers if possible and necessary.
- Once the umbilical is connected the bellman
restores the basic functions of the bell. - Activate the function of the bell when it is confirmed connected.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 301 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

No Action divers, bellman & ROV Action surface

- When the basic functions of the bell are restored, prepare it for the final
recovery
- If it is not possible to connect the emergency umbilical, the recovery
- The divers prepare for the recovery of the should be done using onboard gas.
9
bell. Note: The emergency umbilical can be connected later on during the ascent
(Surface standby diver) or when the bell will be at the surface. This
will be depending on the speed of recovery and/or the possibility to
launch the standby diver.

- Mechanical & Electrical Technicians should be involved to help the

supervisor.
- Use the ROV to perform another inspection of the bell to have a clear idea
- A proper damage assessment should be of damages that may not been seen during the 1st assessment. Also ask the
10 carried on, particularly valves, fittings, divers to report the condition inside the bell using through water
penetrators and viewports. communications if the backup umbilical is not connected.
Note: In case of damages, the team should decide wether the bell can be
recovered or not. In the case that recovery is impossible, refer to
procedure "Loss of pressure at depth".

- The standby diver umbilical must be

11 - Ask the divers to disconnect the standby diver umbilical from the mask.
disconnected from the mask.

- If possible, Diver 1 stows the bellman's

umbilical. - If possible ask to stow the bellman's on the outside of the bell.
12 - If it is not possible to stow it outside the bell, - If it is not possible to stow the bellman umbilical outside the bell, ask the
the divers throw it out and secure it near the divers to throw it out and to secure it near the bottom door if possible.
bottom door if possible.

- Ask the bellman to flush the bell. If the function is restored it is done
13 - The bellman flushes the bell.
using the gas from the surface.

- Close external and internal bell doors

14 - Ask the divers to close and seal the bell.
- Seal the bell 1 - 3 m over the bell depth.

- The divers standby for instruction. - Prepare to lift the bell to the surface using the clump weight system. (Note
- If the bell is on onboard gas, the divers that the crane or a 2nd winch could also be used).
15 prepare the lung powered scrubbers. - Send the ROV to watch and report the status of the bell and make sure that
- The ROV team watches and report the status the external door is closed and will not come into contact with the clump-
of the bell. weight when lifted.

- Ensure that the hanging parts of the main lift wire and the umbilical are
The ROV team ensures that the cable and the recovered or moved out of the way of the bell to prevent any trouble
umbilical are out of the way of the bell during the recovery.
(Note that this phase can be undertaken Note: A site-specific solution for the removal of the remaining parts of the
earlier). main bell wire and umbilical should be formulated as part of the site-
- If the bell is on onboard gas, the bellman specific emergency response procedure to allow unfettered access for
16 the bell to mate.
monitors the CO2 and PPO2 levels, injects
O2 if necessary (O2 make up system) during Examples:
the ascent. ● If deployed over the side, the LARS can be used. The crane can
- If the basic functions of the bell are restored, also be considered for the recovery.
normal monitoring is performed. ● If the bell is deployed from a hangar through a moon-pool, a
winch can be used.

- The ROV teams monitors the bell for leaks - Lift the bell 5 metres, check its depth, and ensure it holds pressure
17
and reports its depth. - Ask the ROV to monitor the bell for leaks.
- Recover the bell by 10 metres steps.
- The ROV monitors the ascent of the bell to - Monitor the bell using the ROV.
18 the surface, paying attention to the wires, the Note: If needed the surface standby diver can be launched when the bell is
umbilical and potential leaks. in his range of intervention to connect the emergency umbilical, or
assist for the recovery.
- The ROV team recovers the machine when - Once at the surface, the bell is locked-on the system, and the divers are
19
instructed to do it. transferred in the chamber in accordance with the normal procedures.

Note that if the bell cannot be recovered, the wet transfer should be considered: In this case, the 2nd vessel is to be at the
proximity, or the only option is accelerated decompression.
This procedure shows the advantage of having two bells, as in this case, a wet transfer is always possible, and the divers
in the 2nd bell can be used to perform the ROV work. Note that a diver usually works 3 times faster than an ROV.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 302 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Main bell wire and umbilical

Supervisor:
- Establishs through water communication to the bell
Superintendent:
- Instructs the bellman to recover the divers
- Ensures a third party vessel in
- Alerts the diving superintendent
the vicinity
- Alerts the team, diver medics
- Organises support
- Alerts the bridge
- Alerts and launches the ROV

Third
The bellman alerts the divers (line party diving
signals / flash if possible)
No
support vessel
The ROV alerts and monitors the available ?
divers who return to the bell.

Yes
Adjust the clump weight .
(Use ROV preferently) Focus on primary option Fast transfer to the work site
(onboard divers + ROV) to be organised

Clear the cable and debris from

the bell . (Use ROV preferently)
Disconnect the umbilical and the
cable (divers only if necessary),
or cut them if necessary
Reminder: Onboard gas allows
the divers for 30 min intervention It is possible to use the third
only , and without hot water the party diving vessel if it is
divers can be quickly hypothermic. arrived on site.
Clear communications and
When the bell is cleared from the procedures must be established
cable and debris (Remember that the intervention
Lower and connect the emergency is from 2 separated vessels)
umbilical (if possible)

When the emergency umbilical

Has been connected (if possible),
organize a close visual inspection
and assess the damages

Bell clear for No Refer to the procedure “loss

recovery ? of pressure at depth”

Yes
Third
party diving Yes Wet transfer to third party
Prepare the divers and seal the bell
support vessel in saturation system
vicinity ?

Ensure that the main wire and the No

umbilical are out of the way of the
bell (Note: This phase can be done
earlier)
Note that this chart describe a diving
system equipped with only one bell

Recover 5 m for first monitoring

then using 10 m steps monitored
by the ROV

When at the surface transfer to the If a repair is not possible,

deck and lock on normally consider emergency
decompression

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 303 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.3.4.4 - Loss of main bell wire, umbilical and clump weight
- Potential consequences
This scenario will most likely result from a vessel loss of position or unplanned movement. It is considered the absolute
worst case.
The actual management of an occurrence of this nature will largely depend on the bell's as-found conditions on the sea
bed. For example:
● The depth of the bottom and the depth from which the bell has fallen.

● The proximity of subsea infrastructures.

● Whether the bell has fallen on a subsea structure or inside a subsea structure.

● Whether the bell is up-right and sat on the sea-bed.

● Whether the bell is laid on the side and partially flooded.

● Whether the bell is inverted and completely flooded.

● Whether the bell is intact or damaged, and in this case, the extends of the damages.

● Whether the divers are conscious.

● Whether some divers are incapacitated.

● Whether the ROV have free, unfettered access to the bell.

● Whether through water communications can be used.

Note: The onboard emergency panel should switch automatically to onboard gas.
Due to the multiple variations and possible scenarios, the below sequence is to be used as general best practice guidance
to which the project team must adapt the response based on the as found situation.
For convenience, the following scenario is based on the assumption that the divers and the bellman report well, the bell is
upright on the bottom and the divers can return into it.
- Actions to control

No Action divers, bellman & ROV Action surface

If the bellman is unharmed: If the incident is related to an unplanned movement, or loss of position, the
vessel must regain control.
- He confirms that the emergency panel has
switched to an onboard gas reserve. - Secure all the supplies from the main panel to the bell.
- He switches on the emergency power if not - Establish the through Water communication system and contact the divers
automatic. in the bell.
1 - He switches off all surface supplies - Inform the bridge and the diving superintendent
- He ensures that the through water - Inform the LSS/LST, the medic, and diver medics
communication system is working and - Alert the rescue team (standby diver) on deck
answers to the supervisor. - Alerts and launches the ROV if not already in the water.
- If possible, he flushes the bell (even The diving superintendent ensures whether other Diving Support Vessels
partially), to avoid becoming hypothermic. are available to render assistance through a wet transfer?

- If the divers are unharmed, they return to - Interrogates the transponder of the bell to locate it.
the bell. In case of injuries, they assist each Note: If the bridge and the survey team have a contact through the
other, or the standby diver is launched to Emergency Locator Beacon, this information is to be plotted on the
help their return. Nav-Screen.
2
- The ROV locates the bell wires / umbilical - If the contract using the through water communication system is
and fly to depth to confirm the bell's status. successful, ensure that the bellman is recovering the diver.
- The transponder may be used to locate the - Once the bell and the divers are located by the ROV, ensure their
bell. The approach should be prudent. condition and that they are able to return to the bell.

- Order the surface team to deploys the crane (preferred option), when
ready.
- The ROV confirms the bell orientation (in - Prepare the emergency umbilical.
this example, upright), and investigates for Note: If the bell is sitting on the bottom and the divers cannot return to it,
3 damages install the crane immediately to clear it from the seabed and allow
- When back into the bell, the divers assist the access inside it. The 2nd option is to partially release the ballast with
bellman. the weight still attached to the bell by the chains (1st step only), but
the bell must be free of debris, and it must be considered that a
mistake will be catastrophic.

- If the ROV is not equipped with a cutter, it is - If the ROV is not equipped with cutters, recover it to surface for this
recovered to the surface to install it. purpose
4 - The ROV clears the wires and the umbilical - The diving supervisor assesses the situation with the ROV pilot.
from the bell using its manipulators and - Use the divers only when necessary as onboard gas reserves offer limited
other tools. (Crane / cutters). time in the water (30 min), and there is no hot water supply.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 304 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

No Action divers, bellman & ROV Action surface

- If possible, the divers move out of the bell to - If the ROV is unable to clear the parted main lift wire and umbilical that is
disconnect the main lift wire from the delta lying on the bell, the supervisor can:
plate and discard it to the sea-bed. Then ● Ask the divers to disconnect the main lift wire from the delta plate,
disconnect the main umbilical and discard it disconnect the guidewire, disconnect the umbilical, and discard
to the sea-bed. them to the sea-bed.
5
- If required, the ROV cut the wire and the Cut the cables and the umbilical in several parts to clear them more easily
umbilical in several parts and discard them (Depending on the environmental conditions, divers can be used for that,
to the sea bed (the divers can partially do but the ROV is more appropriate for this task).
that, but think of the limited reserves of gas Note: Use the divers only when necessary, as they are on onboard gas
and no heating). with limited range (30 min), and there is no hot water supply.

- Prior to deploying the crane, ensure that there is a clear area on the main
- If possible, the divers release the Bell deck where the bell can be recovered.
Emergency pick-up sling from its storage. If
- Then, the vessel’s crane is to be made ready for deployment with:
the divers cannot do it, use the ROV.
6 ● Appropriate stinger complete with ROV hook
- The ROV may be recovered to the deck to
● Bell Emergency Umbilical
remove the cutting tool and reinstall the
● Locator Beacon & strobe Light
manipulator.
- Recover the ROV to reinstall the manipulator in place of the cutting tool.

- The ROV spots the crane and directs it to

7 - The crane is deployed over the ROV location.
the bell location.

- The Divers or the ROV recover the end of

- The supervisor installs the basic functions of the bell.
the Bell Emergency Umbilical and connect
8 (The basic functions are gas supply and hot water. Depending on the
it to the bell emergency panel on the bell if
system, there could be power supply and communication.)
accessible and open hull valves.

- The divers or the ROV attach the emergency

pick-up sling to the crane.
- Monitor the installation through the ROV CCTV.
9 - If communications are still unavailable, the
- Acknowledge information from the ROV, and confirm it with the bellman
divers return to the bell to inform the ROV
when the divers are back in the bell.
by sign that the bell is ready to be lifted,
and return in the bell.

- The ROV positions to observe the lifting of - Under the ROV observation,come-up the bell approximately 5 metres
the bell. Then, using hand-signals to the above the seabed and stop
10 ROV (if communications not available),
guide the crane, which comes up slowly to Note: The ROV must not communicate with the crane, but only with the
approximately 5 metres above the seabed. diving supervisor.

- Require a proper damage assessment of the bell, particularly the valves,

fittings, penetrators, doors, and viewports.
- Mechanical & Electrical Technicians are to be involved to help the
- A proper damage assessment is carried out, supervisor.
11 particularly to valve fittings, penetrators, - To have a clear vision, use the ROV to check outside the bell, and the
doors, and viewports. divers to report what happens inside the bell.
Note: In case of damages, the team should decide whether the bell can be
recovered or not. In the case that recovery is impossible, refer to
procedure "Loss of pressure at depth".

12 - If outside the bell, the divers returns into it. - Recover the divers in the bell if outside the bell.

13 - Disconnect the standby diver mask. - Ask to disconnect the mask of the standby diver.

- If possible, diver 1 stow the stand by diver

- If the bellman's umbilical is stowed at the external ask to stow it or throw
14 umbilical. If not possible throw it out of the
it outside the bell.
bell and secure it near the door.

15 - The bellman flushes the bell. - Ask the bellman to flush the bell.

- Close external and internal bell doors

16 - Ask the divers to close and seal the bell.
- Seal the bell 1 to 3 m over bell depth
- The divers standby for instruction.
- If the bell is on onboard gas, the divers use - Prepares to lift the bell to the surface using the crane.
17 the lung powered scrubbers. - Use the ROV to watch and report the bell's status and make sure that the
- The ROV watches and reports the status of external door is closed and that there are no leaks.
the bell and the condition of the doors

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 305 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

No Action divers, bellman & ROV Action surface

- The ROV ensures that the cables and the

umbilical are out of the way of the bell (This
phase can be undertaken earlier). - The hanging wires and the umbilical are recovered or moved out of the
- If the bell is on onboard gas, the bellman way of the bell, not to create any trouble during the recovery.
18 monitors the CO2 and PPO2 levels and Note: A site-specific solution for removing the hanging main bell wire and
inject O2 if necessary (O2 make up system) umbilical should be formulated as part of the site-specific emergency
during the ascent. response procedure to allow unfettered access for the bell to mate.
- If the basic functions of the bell are restored,
normal monitoring is performed.

- Lift the bell 5 metres. Check the depth inside and outside the bell. The
- The ROV monitors the bell and reports the ROV can be used in addition to the bell gauges.
19
depth.
- Watch for leaks.

- Recover the bell in 10 meters steps. Monitor with ROV.

- The ROV monitors the ascent of the bell to Note: If needed, the standby diver can be launched when the bell in his
20 the surface, paying attention to the wires and range of intervention.
the umbilical. If not installed on the bottom, the emergency umbilical can be
lowered and connected by the Air divers at this point.
- Depending on the weather conditions, the
splash zone can be uncomfortable for the - The weather conditions are to be considered when bringing the bell
21 ROV. If no problem was detected before, through the splash zone, and the ROV is not comfortable in such an area.
the ROV does not follow the bell in this In this case, it is preferable not to follow the bell in this zone.
zone

- The ROV can be recovered when the bell is

22 - The bell is to be landed on the designated lay-down position.
on deck.

- To transfer the divers to the saturation system, the following points (but
not limited to) should be considered:
● Cooling of the bell during the preparation phase (Sunshades
Deluge Systems) and food and water transfer to the divers.
● Procedure for cutting-back the bell main lift wire, removing the
23 damaged section, and re-terminating.
● Procedure to reconnect the bell to the system (transfer in the water
and recovery through the LARS.
● Vessel heading control to minimize pitch heave and roll.
● Communications with the bell occupants, bell dive control, and
saturation control during the TUP

- Once reconnected to the LARS, the bell is locked-on, and the divers are
24
transferred to the chamber in accordance with normal procedures.

Bell drop weight release option

In this procedure, partial weight release (1st step release) with the weights still secured to the chains' bell has been
considered possible. However, a loss of control during the procedure could lead to the full release of the weight and the bell
moving up full speed.
For recovery options based on the full release of bell weights (Drop ballast), the Project team must compile specific
procedures based on the Project Equipment / Bell type and configurations and consider all other procedures of recovering in
preference, as recommended by AODC 61.
The points to note in the planning and writing of procedures are, but not limited too:
● The specific bell drops weight release procedure.
● Specific bell main lift wire, guide wires, and the umbilical internal release systems, if the bell is fitted with.
● Removal of damaged bell main lift wire and umbilical from the bell, which could obstruct the bell's ascent.
25 ● The proximity of fixed structures and assets to the projected ascent path. ROV to survey before release.
● Tide patterns and direction.
● Vessel positioning during the operation and ensuring the ascent path is clear.
● The use of surface swimmers and small rescue craft/vessels.
● The ROV positioning during the free ascent of the bell.
● Surface lookouts to spot the bell as it breaks the surface.
● Attachment of tow/restraining line from the small craft/vessel to the bell.
● Bell divers role in the ascent.
● Re-establishment of communications/ hot water / gas.
● Characteristics of the available crane and lay down areas.
● Surveying the bell on the surface for damage, paying particular attention to the ports, penetrators, and sealing faces
of the mating flange.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 306 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Supervisor:
- Establishes through water communication
Superintendent:
- Secures the supplies from main panel
- Ensures of a third party
- Alerts the diving superintendent
vessel in the vicinity
- Alerts the team, diver medics.
- Organizes support
- Alerts the bridge
- Alerts and launches the ROV

Third
- The bellman confirms that the bell is on onboard party diving
gas/ switches on back up power/ Switches off the
No
support vessel
supplies from surface. available ?
- He makes sure that the TWC is working and
answers to the supervisor.
- If possible, he flushes the bell to avoid becoming Focus on Yes
hypothermic primary option
(onboard divers Fast transfer to the work site
+ ROV) to be organized
If the divers are unharmed, they return to the bell.
The ROV locates the bell and the divers

Clear the bell from the cables and debris. (ROV)

Disconnects the umbilical and the cable or cut
them if necessary
Reminder: Onboard gas allows the divers for 30 min
intervention only, and without hot water the divers
can quickly become hypothermic. Possibility to use the third
party diving team if arrived
on site. Communications and
When the bell is cleared from the cable and debris, clear procedures must be
lower and connect the emergency umbilical (if established (remember that
possible) the intervention is from 2
separated vessels).

When the emergency umbilical has been connected,

attach the crane to the bell. When it is completed,
Prepare the bell for recovery

With the ROV to monitor, adjust the bell 5 m

above the sea bed.
Then, perform a close visual inspection to assess
the possible damages.

Bell clear for No Refer to procedure “loss of

recovery ? pressure at depth

Yes Third
party diving Yes Wet transfer to third party
Recover the divers and seal the bell
support vessel in saturation system
vicinity ?
Ensure that the main wire and the umbilical
are out of the way of the bell (Note: This No
phase can be done earlier)
If a repair is not possible,
Recover 5 m for first monitoring then in 10 consider emergency
m steps monitored by the ROV decompression

When at the surface transfer to the deck

then ensure that the bell is supplied and
cooled, and transfer to the system Note that this chart describe a diving
system equipped with only one bell
When the bell is back on the system, lock
on and transfer the divers normally

This procedure shows the advantage of having two bells, as in this case, a wet transfer is always possible, and the divers
in the 2nd bell can be used to perform the ROV work. Note that a diver usually works 3 times faster than an ROV.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 307 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.3.4.5 - Clump weight lost or damaged
Such situations could arise from:
● Wire damaged or severed following contact with a subsea structure or the sea bed.

● Defective wire

- Potential consequences:
● The bell is rotating due to the action of the currents and the motions of the vessel.

● Clump weight lost or laid on the bottom.

Clump weights are described in point 1.1.2.2 “Anti gyration Winch Fixation
systems”. P
U
to pad eye
The clump weight of a lot of bells consist of a beam, or a frame
Stop

Down

that can be adjusted to facilitate the access into the bell. This
structure is lowered and recovered by means of a wire passing
Wheel
through 2 wheels (one each side of the beam) with one end
fastened to a pad eye on the top of the frame of the Launch And
Rescue System (LARS), and the other end to a winch on the other
side of the LARS. If this cable is severed, the clamp falls to the
bottom. As explained in point 1.1.2.2, note that some bells have 2
separated weights controlled by separated winches. This system
has the advantage of keeping a partial control of the bell rotation if
one weight is lost.
A clump weight lost should not compromise the recovery of the bell
if the cable has been cut below the bell, but there may be damages to Guide wire
the bell if the cable has been cut above, because the cable may fall
on it.
The situation could be more critical, and result in damages to the wheel
Launch And Recovery System (LARS) and the bell if the clump Clump weight
weight is trapped on the bottom or inside a structure.
- Actions to control:

No Action divers, bellman & ROV Action surface

- Check the status in the bell (use checklist) - The supervisor instructs the divers to return to the bell, assess the
situation, and report findings.
- Recover the divers
- Alerts the surface rescue team (standby diver)
- When back near the bell, the divers start
the investigation: - The supervisor informs the bridge and the diving superintendent of the
If the cable has been cut above the bell, the situation.
1
divers start a visual survey of the top of the - Saturation control to be informed along with medic and DMT(s) in the
Bell and report the bell's status. chamber.
If the cable is cut below the bell, ensure - ROV instructed to launch, or if already in the water, to proceed to the bell
whether the cable is fouled, and assess the to monitor the bell and divers with caution and from a safe distance until
possibility of recovering the clump weight. the situation is assessed.

- If the clump weight is accessible by the divers

● Make sure whether it can be recovered using its wire.
- If the clump weight can be recovered using
● If the recovery using the guidewire appears not possible, a
its wire or another means, organize for the
secondary lifting system (crane) may recover it.
2 recovery.
- If the recovery of the clump weight by the divers is not possible, organise
- If the cable is laid on the top of the bell, the recovery using the ROV later on.
clear the cable (can be cut and discarded).
- Ensure that the bell is freed from any cable, which could compromise its
recovery.

- If it is possible to recover it, the divers - Under Diver 1 instruction, recover the clump weight with its wire, and
3
guide the recovery of the clump weight. move it away to recover it after the bell's recovery.

- If possible, diver #1 and /or the ROV - If necessary and possible, under Diver 1 or/and ROV instruction, recover
4
guides the recovery of the guide wires. the parts of guide wires, which can be recovered.

- The supervisor should require a proper damage assessment of the bell,

particularly to valve fittings, penetrators, and viewports...
- A proper damage assessment is carried on, Mechanical & Electrical Technicians are to be involved for guidance to the
5 particularly to valve fittings, penetrators and supervisor and the divers.
viewports. Note: In case of damages, the team should decide whether the bell can be
recovered or not. In the case that recovery is impossible, refer to
procedure "Loss of pressure at depth".

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 308 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

No Action divers, bellman & ROV Action surface

- The divers return in the bell, and disconnect - Recover the divers (one diver stays outside the bell if the bellman
6
the bellman's mask. umbilical is stowed outside the bell.)

7 - Diver 1 stows the bellman's umbilical - If the bellman's umbilical is stowed at the external ask to stow it.

8 - Diver 1 returns into the bell - Recover diver 1

9 - Supervisor / bellman flushes the Bell - Supervisor / bellman flushes the Bell

- The bellman closes the doors.

10 - The bellman seals the bell 1 - 3 m over the - Ask the divers to close and seal the bell.
bell depth

- The divers standby for instruction.

- Prepare to lift the bell to the surface.
11 - The ROV monitors the bell and reports its
- Send the ROV to watch and report the status of the bell.
status and the condition of the doors.

- Lift the bell 5 metres. Check the depth in the bell and with ROV (the
- The ROV observes the bell and reports its depth of the ROV should be visible on the video screen).
12
depth and condition.
- Watch for leaks

- The ROV monitors the lifting of the bell to - Recover the bell in 10 metres steps, and monitor with the ROV.
13 the surface, paying attention to the wires and Note: If needed, the standby diver can be launched when the bell in his
the umbilical. range of intervention.

- Once at the surface the bell is locked-on, and the divers are transferred in
14 - Recover the ROV the chamber in accordance with the normal procedures.
Note: Tag lines will be necessary to control the bell.

3.3.4.6 - Entrapment of the bell and/or clump weight

- Such situations could arise from, but are not limited to:
● Poor or incorrect information relating to existing sites, especially the older fields where the as-built
documentation has not been updated and does not include past ad-hoc additions to the structure.
● Defective or out of calibration survey information could put the bell closer to a subsea asset than is depicted on
the Nav-Screens.
● Fishing Nets and other commercial trawling equipment.

● Previous and unreported damage to structures.

● Overboard scaffolding is present at the diving location. The potential collapse is always a threat, especially if the
vessel suffers a loss of position episode.
● Bell pushed by strong currents and waves and trapped under the hull. (This can happen with square-shaped hulls
or moonpools badly designed).
- Potential consequences:
● The bell cannot be recovered

● Bell wires tight or slack with abnormal angles

● Bell damaged, with a potential for the situations indicated before:

○ Loss of main wire

○ Loss of umbilical
○ Loss of clump weight
○ Lost bell
- Actions to control:
The actions should be organized according to one or several scenarios described before. As already indicated, providing a
precise procedure is impossible as there are thousands of possible scenarios. What is important is to establish guidelines
that can be adapted to the situation encountered.
Note: The chart next page is based on the assumption that the divers are not injured. The situation could be critical in
case of injuries or/and damages to the bell.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 309 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
Supervisor:
- Secures the supplies from main panel if damages are detected If the bell is entangled following an
- Alerts the diving superintendent uncontrolled movement of the surface
- Alerts the team, diver medics support, the master should manage to
- Alerts the bridge return gradually to the initial position
- Alerts and launches the ROV paying attention to the tension of the
- Checks the status of the communications & the bell supplies wires and the umbilical of the bell.

Contact the divers and the Yes No

Communication Establish through water
bellman and confirm their
working ? communications
well being,

Investigate the bell Contact the bellman and

entanglement (ROV or confirm the status, and ask
divers) him to recover the divers

Can If the supplies of the bell are lost,

the divers or No free it using the ROV or/and
the ROV free the standby divers in priority, or (if
bell quickly? on the work site) the divers from
a third party vessel.

Yes

Free the bell

Third
Yes No No Specific
Inspect for damages party diving
Bell freed ? procedures to be
before the recovery support vessel in
initiated
vicinity ?

No Refer to procedure “Loss of

Bell clear to
pressure at depth”
surface ? Yes

Third
Yes Yes Emergency
party diving Wet transfer to third party
support vessel in saturation system decompression to
vicinity ? be considered
Recover to surface

No
If a repair is not possible,
consider emergency
decompression

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 310 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents
3.3.5 - Wet transfer

3.3.5.1 - Considerations for wet transfer to the 2nd bell of a twin bell vessel
This procedure is in force on twin bell vessels, where the 2nd bell can be used to rescue the occupants of the 1st one.
Because the bells are very close, with a known distance and coming from the same vessel, this recovery procedure can be
easily and safely organized. Nevertheless, some considerations should be given to:
● The reason which has triggered the need for bell transfer (bell trapped, bell damaged…).

● The subsea obstructions.

● If the bell is lost, whether its position is known and the vessel can hold the position above it.

● Whether the communication is established with the bell.

● The condition of the bell.

● If the bell is without supplies, the time spent without supplies.

● Whether an emergency umbilical has been connected, or if not, whether it can be connected.

● The number and condition of the divers to rescue.

● The number of divers the 2nd bell can transfer.

● The weather conditions and underwater visibility.

3.3.5.2 - Considerations for wet transfer to another vessel

The procedure is more difficult to implement from a 2nd vessel as the vessels are separated, and additional consideration
should be given to:
● The protocol of communications between the 2 vessels.

● The supervisor in charge (should be the rescue team).

● The frequency of the through water communication of the bell.

● The distance between the vessels and whether the bell to rescue is safely reachable.

● Whether there is an anchor pattern (4 point mooring/barges).

● The access to the worksite, and the obstructions.

● Whether the vessels' positioning systems will conflict and if the vessels will be able to hold their position.

3.3.5.3 - Considerations during the transfer

The safety of the rescuers must not be jeopardized:
● The rescue diver carries a spare helmet and umbilical to the stranded bell and brings the stranded divers back
one at a time.
● If there is a long swim or a current, he should rig a swim line between the bells.

● If the stranded divers are suffering from hypothermia, they should be re-warmed gradually. Connecting them
directly to the hot water supply could lead to collapse.
● The number of divers to transfer should be considered: If the swim line is established and the lost bell supplied
by an emergency umbilical, it may be safer to organize several quick bell runs.
● A welcome must be organized in the chamber to ensure a medical check-up, and if hypothermic, of a gradual
warming of the occupants of the lost bell.

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 311 of 318
3.3.6 - Bell tapping code

This code must be printed on a rigid plastic board and secured to the top of the bell. It must also be provided to the rescue
divers and people involved in the bell rescue.

Code Situation

3 . 3 .3 Communication opening procedure (inside and outside)

1 Yes or Affirmative or Agreed

3 No or Negative or Disagreed

2.2 Repeat please

2 Stop

5 Have you got a seal?

6 Stand by to be pulled up

1.2.1.2 Get ready for through water transfer (open your hatch)

2.3.2.3 You will NOT release your ballasts

4.4 Do release your ballast in 30 minutes from now

1 . 2 .3 Do increase your pressure

3 . 3 .3 Communication closing procedure (inside and outside)

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 312 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Page left blank Intentionally

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 313 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

4) Bibliography & addresses

4.1 - Bibliography

- JP Imbert - Deep diving: The COMEX experiencee

- CCO Ltd - Implement NORMAM-15 saturation diving procedures

- ADCI - International consensus standards for commercial diving and underwater operations

- Health and Safety Executive - Diving at Work Regulations 1997: Approved Code of Practice and guidance

- French ministry of Labour: Regles relatives aux travaux hyperbare effectues en milieu subaquatique - 14 Mai 2019
Rules related to hyperbaric works performed in subaquatic surrounding - 14 May 2019

- French ministry of Labour: Travaux en milieu hyperbare - 15 Mai 1992 & 4 Aout 1995
Works in the hyperbaric surrounding - 15 May 1992 & 4 August 1995

- NORSOK U100 - Manned underwater operations - Website: www.standard.no/petroleum .

- Brazilian Navy Directorate of ports and coasts - NORMAM-15 DPC rev. 2

- DMAC 02 - In-water diver monitoring

- DMAC 04 - Oxygen content in open circuit bail-out bottles for heliox saturation diving

- DMAC 05 - Recommendation on minimum level of O2 in helium supplied offshore

- DMAC 08 - Thermal stress in relation to diving (Report of a workshop held in March 1981)

- DMAC 15 - Medical equipment to be held at the site of an offshore diving operation

- DMAC 20 - Duration of bell lockouts

- DMAC 28 - The provision of emergency medical care for divers in saturation

- DMAC 31 - Accelerated Emergency Decompression (AED) from Saturation

- DMAC - Report on tests of Zoll automatic external defibrillator function in hyperbaric heliox conditions - Helix
Well Ops (February 2014)

- DMAC - Statement on Deep Saturation Diving Conducted Using Appropriate Procedures (updated March 2019)

- IMCA D 007 - Overboard scaffolding operations and their effect on diving safety

- IMCA D 008 - Testing of through-water communications

- IMCA D 010 - Diving operations from vessels operating in dynamically positioned mode

- IMCA D 014 - IMCA international code of practice for offshore diving

- IMCA D 022 - Guidance for diving supervisors

- IMCA D 024 - DESIGN for saturation (bell) diving systems

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 314 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

- IMCA D 032 - Cross-hauling of bells - Note: Such procedures should not be used -

- IMCA D 054 - Remotely operated vehicle intervention during diving operations

- IMCA D 058 - Diver attachment to structures by means of a weak link

- IMCA D 002 - Battery packs in pressure housings

- AODC 009 - Emergency isolation of gas circuits in the event of a ruptured bell umbilical

- AODC 038 - Guidance on the use of inert gases

- AODC 047 - The effects of underwater currents on divers’ performance and safety

- AODC 055 - Protection of water intake points for diver safety

- AODC 061 - Bell ballast release systems and buoyant ascent in offshore diving operations

- UK Health and safety Executive - Diving at Work Regulations 1997 - Approved Code of Practice and guidance

- UK Health and safety Executive - The provision of breathing gas to divers in emergency situations (RR1073)

- UK Health and safety Executive - diving information sheet #12 - Cleaning of diving equipment

- National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) - diving manual -

- U.S. Navy Diving Manual

- UK Health and safety Executive - Excursion tables in saturation diving - decompression implications of current UK
practice

- DNV-GL AS: DNV-GL-RP-F107 - Risk assessment of pipeline protection

- Sina Taghizadeh Edmollaii , Pedram Edalat, and Mojtaba Dyanati - Reliability sensitivity analysis of dropped
object on submarine pipelines

- Alf O. Brubakk, John A.S. Ross, and Stephen R. Thom - Saturation Diving; Physiology and Pathophysiology

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 315 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

4.2 - Addresses

- CCO Ltd -
52/2 moo 3 tambon Tarpo 65000 Phitsanulok - Thailand http://www.ccoltd.co.th/

- DIVETECH -
1543 Chemin des Vignasses 06410 Biot, FRANCE

- Association of Diving Contractors International (ADCI) -

5206 Cypress Creek Parkway Ste. 202 - Houston, TX 77069 - Phone: (281) 893-8388
Email: [email protected] Website: https://www.adc-int.org

- International Marine Contractors Association (IMCA) -

52 Grosvenor Gardens London SW1W 0AU United Kingdom - Tel +44 (0) 20 7824 5520
Email: [email protected] Website: https://www.imca-int.com/

- NORSOK -
Standards Norway Mustads vei 1, P.O. Box 242 NO-1326 Lysaker NORWAY - Telephone: + 47 67 83 86 00
Email: [email protected] Website: www.standard.no/petroleum

- International Maritime Organization:

4, Albert Embankment London SE1 7SR United Kingdom - Tel +44 (0)20 7735 7611
Email: [email protected] Website: http://www.imo.org/en/Pages/Default.aspx

- IOGP (International Association of Oil and gas producers) -

City Tower, 40 Basinghall Street, 14th Floor, London, EC2V 5DE
Telephone: +44 (0)20 3763 9700 - Email: [email protected] - https://www.iogp.org/

- LEXMAR / JFD Singapore -

19 Loyang lane Singapore 508929 Tel: +65 6546284 Website: https://www.jfdglobal.com/

- JFD group (Lexmar, Divex, Fathom) -

Cartside Avenue Inchinnan Business Park PA4 9RW United Kingdom - Tel: +44 (0)141 812 8700
Email: [email protected] Website: https://www.jfdglobal.com/

- Fathom Systems Ltd. (JFD group) -

Badentoy Crescent, Portlethen, Aberdeen. AB12 4YD Tel: +44(0)1224 401000
Email: [email protected] Website: http://www.fathomsystems.co.uk/

- Parkburn -
Drives, Controls & Head Office 26 Whistleberry Industrial Estate Hamilton, United Kingdom ML3 0ED
Tel: +44 (0) 1698 828957
08-02 International Building 360 Orchard Road, Singapore 238869 Tel: +65 9164 6464
Contact: https://www.parkburn.com/contact/ Website: https://www.parkburn.com/

- IMO - International Maritime Organization -

4, Albert Embankment London SE1 7SR United Kingdom - Email: [email protected] - Web: https://www.imo.org

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 316 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

- Bureau Veritas (Marine & Offshore) -

92937 Paris la Défense Cedex – France Tel: + 33 (0)1 55 24 70 00
Email: [email protected] Website: http://www.veristar.com

- DNV GL (main headquarters) -

Veritasveien 1 1363 Høvik PO box 300, Norway Tel: +47 6757 9900
Website: https://www.dnvgl.com/contact/headquarters.html

- Lloyd's Register -
71 Fenchurch Street, EC3M 4BS London, United Kingdom
Website: https://www.lr.org/

- American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) -

1701 City Plaza Drive Spring, TX 77389, United States TX 77060 USA Tel: +1-281-877-6000
Email: [email protected] Website: https://ww2.eagle.org/en/

- International Organization for Standardization (ISO) -

Chemin de Blandonnet 8 CP 401 - 1214 Vernier, Geneva, Switzerland Tel: +41 22 749 0111
E-mail: [email protected] Website: https://www.iso.org/

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 317 of 318
 Hyperlink Tables of contents

Diving & ROV specialists - Saturation diving handbook / Book #3 - Page 318 of 318